Google
 

Trailing-Edge - PDP-10 Archives - tops10v704_doca - 10,7/docupd/cmnd.mem
There are 2 other files named cmnd.mem in the archive. Click here to see a list.















                                  TOPS-10
                      Operating System Commands Manual


|                        Electronically Distributed
|  
|  
|  
|            This manual contains descriptions of  the  TOPS-10
|            monitor  commands,  their formats and their usage.
|            This  manual  supercedes  the  TOPS-10   Operating
|            System Commands Manual published in October, 1988.
|            The order number for that manual, AA-0916F-TB,  is
|            obsolete.



             Operating System:             TOPS-10 Version 7.04

             Software:                       GALAXY Version 5.1










   digital equipment corporation                   maynard, massachusetts


|  TOPS-10 Software Update Tape No. 02, June 1990

   First Printing, July 1975
   Revised, August 1977
   Revised, March 1978
   Revised, August 1980
   Updated, July l982
   Updated, February 1984
   Revised, April 1986
   Revised, October 1988
|  Revised, June 1990



   The information in this document is subject to change  without  notice
   and  should  not  be  construed  as  a commitment by Digital Equipment
   Corporation.  Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no  responsibility
   for any errors that may appear in this document.

   The software described in this document is furnished under  a  license
   and  may  be  used  or  copied  in  accordance  with the terms of such
   license.

   No responsibility is assumed for the use or reliability of software on
   equipment that is not supplied by Digital Equipment Corporation or its
   affiliated companies.



|  Copyright C 1975, 1984, 1988, 1990 Digital Equipment Corporation. 

   All Rights Reserved.



   CI             DECtape     LA50             SITGO-10
   DDCMP          DECUS       LN01             TOPS-10
   DEC            DECwriter   LN03             TOPS-20
   DECmail        DELNI       MASSBUS          TOPS-20AN
   DECnet         DELUA       PDP              UNIBUS
   DECnet-VAX     HSC         PDP-11/24        UETP
   DECserver      HSC-50      PrintServer      VAX
   DECserver 100  KA10        PrintServer 40   VAX/VMS
   DECserver 200  KI          Q-bus            VT50
   DECsystem-10   KL10        ReGIS
   DECSYSTEM-20   KS10        RSX              d i g i t a l


                                      CONTENTS



   PREFACE


   CHAPTER 1       INTRODUCTION

           1.1     JOBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
           1.2     CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
           1.3     OPERATING SYSTEM MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.3.1     Interactive Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.3.2     Batch Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.4     INTERACTIVE LEVELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
           1.4.1     Monitor Level  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
           1.4.2     User Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
           1.5     CONTEXTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
           1.6     SPECIAL CHARACTERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.6.1     CTRL/C - Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.6.2     DELETE Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
           1.6.3     CTRL/W - Delete Word   . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
           1.6.4     CTRL/U - Delete Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
           1.6.5     CTRL/R - Reprint Line  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
           1.6.6     CTRL/O - Cancel Output   . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6.7     CTRL/S - Hold Output   . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6.8     CTRL/Q - Resume Output   . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
           1.6.9     CTRL/T - Job Status  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-10
           1.7     TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
           1.8     COMMAND FORMATS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-11
           1.8.1     Command Termination  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8.2     Line Continuation  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8.3     Command Arguments  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-12
           1.8.3.1     Relative Date-Time Arguments . . . . . . . .  1-13
           1.8.3.2     Absolute Date-Time Arguments . . . . . . . .  1-13
           1.8.4     Command Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-16
           1.8.4.1     Temporary Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-16
           1.8.4.2     Permanent Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-16
           1.8.5     Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-17
           1.9     FILE SPECIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-18
           1.9.1     Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-20
           1.9.1.1     Generic Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-21
           1.9.1.2     Physical Device Names  . . . . . . . . . . .  1-22
           1.9.1.3     File Structures  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-22
           1.9.1.4     Logical Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-22
           1.9.1.5     Ersatz Device Names  . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-25
           1.9.2     File Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-26
           1.9.3     Directory Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-26
           1.9.4     Protection Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-28
           1.9.5     File Daemon  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-31
           1.10    SYSTEM DEFAULTS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-31
           1.11    WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-31


                                    iii


           1.12    SEARCH LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-34
           1.13    LIBRARIES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-35
           1.14    DIRECTORY PATHS  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-35
           1.15    USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS  . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-37
           1.16    PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER . . . . . . .  1-38
           1.16.1    LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES  . . . . . .  1-38
           1.16.1.1    ESCape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-39
           1.16.1.2    Control Sequences  . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-39
           1.16.2    Font Management  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-40
           1.16.3    Loading Fonts  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-41


   CHAPTER 2       SYSTEM COMMANDS

           2.1     FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS  . . . . . . . . . . 2-1


   CHAPTER 2       SYSTEM COMMANDS

           2.0.1     Job-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
           2.0.2     Information Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
           2.0.3     Terminal-Control Commands  . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.4     Terminal-Communication Commands  . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.5     File-Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.6     Device-Handling Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
           2.0.7     Program-Preparation Commands . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.0.8     Program-Control Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
           2.0.9     Network Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
           2.0.10    MIC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
           2.1     COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
                     ACCOUNT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
                     ALLOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
                     ASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-14
                     ATTACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-16
                     BACKSPACE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-22
                     CANCEL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-23
                     CCONTINUE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-26
                     CLOSE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-30
                     COMPILE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-32
                     CONTEXT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-40
                     CONTINUE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-43
                     COPY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-45
                     CORE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-47
                     CPUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-49
                     CREF Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-60
                     CSTART Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-63
                     DAYTIME Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-66
                     DDT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-67
                     DEALLOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-71
                     DEASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-75
                     DEBUG Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-77
                     DECLARE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-86


                                     iv


                     DELETE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-89
                     DEPOSIT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-91
                     DETACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-93
                     DIRECTORY Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  2-94
                     DISMOUNT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
                     DSK Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
                     ENABLE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
                     EOF Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
                     EXAMINE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-119
                     EXECUTE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
                     FILE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-128
                     FINISH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134
                     FUDGE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136
                     GET Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
                     HALT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
                     HELP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
                     INITIA Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-147
                     JCONTINUE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156
                     KJOB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-157
                     LABEL Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161
                     LIST Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
                     LOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-165
                     LOCATE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172
                     LOGIN Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
                     MAIL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-191
                     MAKE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-192
                     MERGE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-194
                     MIC Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197
                     MOUNT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-200
                     NETWORK Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-209
                     NODE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-217
                     PASSWORD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-220
                     PJOB Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-221
                     PLOT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-225
                     POP Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-235
                     PRESERVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-237
                     PRINT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-239
                     PROTECT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251
                     PUNCH Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
                     PUSH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-254
                     R Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282
                     REASSIGN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284
                     REATTACH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-286
                     REENTER Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
                     RENAME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-290
                     RESOURCES Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
                     REWIND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293
                     RUN Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-294
                     SAVE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-297
                     SCHED Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-299
                     SEND Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-301
                     SESSION Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-304


                                     v


                     SET BLOCKSIZE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306
                     SET BREAK Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-307
                     SET CDR Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-311
                     SET CPU Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-312
                     SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-314
                     SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command . . . . . . . . . . 2-316
                     SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command  . . . . . . . . . 2-317
                     SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command . . . . . . . . 2-318
                     SET DEFER Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-321
                     SET DENSITY Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-324
                     SET DSKFUL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-325
                     SET DSKPRI Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-326
                     SET FORMAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-328
                     SET HOST Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
                     SET HPQ Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-332
                     SET PHYSICAL Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-334
                     SET RETRY Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-336
                     SET SPOOL Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-337
                     SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command . . . . . . . 2-339
                     SET TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-340
                     SET TTY or TTY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-342
                     SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command  . . . . . . . . . . 2-352
                     SET WATCH Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-354
                     SHOW ALLOCATION Command  . . . . . . . . . . . 2-358
                     SHOW QUEUES Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-362
                     SKIP Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-364
                     START Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-365
                     SUBMIT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-367
                     SYSTAT Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-380
                     TECO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-384
                     TIME Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-385
                     TPUNCH Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-387
                     TRANSLATE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-399
                     TYPE Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-400
                     UNLOAD Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-402
                     USESTAT Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-403
                     VERSION Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-405
                     WHERE Command  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-409
                     ZERO Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-411


   APPENDIX A      FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


   APPENDIX B      SWITCH.INI FILES


   APPENDIX C      COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS

           C.1     INDIRECT COMMANDS (@ CONSTRUCTION) . . . . . . . . C-2
           C.2     THE + CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
           C.3     THE = CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4


                                     vi


           C.4     THE < > CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-4
           C.5     DEFAULT COMPILER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
           C.6     COMPILER SWITCHES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
           C.7     LINK SWITCHES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  C-11


   APPENDIX D      STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES

           D.1     FILE NAME EXTENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
           D.2     RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS  . . . . . . . D-7
           D.3     ERSATZ DEVICE NAMES  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9


   APPENDIX E      CARD CODES


   APPENDIX F      TEMPORARY FILES


   APPENDIX G      SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES


   INDEX


   TABLES

           1-1     Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-20
           1-2     Generic Device Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  1-21
           1-3     Protection Codes for Field 1 . . . . . . . . . .  1-29
           1-4     Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3  . . . . . .  1-30
           2-1     Terminal Hardware Characteristics  . . . . . . . 2-342
           2-2     Fill Characters  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-346
           A-1     Functional Groups of Commands  . . . . . . . . . . A-1
           C-1     Processor Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-7
           D-1     File Name Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
           D-2     Project-Programmer Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . D-7
           D-3     Ersatz Device Names  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-9
           E-1     ASCII Card Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
           E-2     DEC-026 Card Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-4
           F-1     Temporary Files  . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1














                                  PREFACE



   The TOPS-10 Operating System Commands Manual  describes  the  commands
   available  to  the  users  of  the  TOPS-10 Operating System.  See the
   TOPS-10 Operator's Guide for a description of all  operator-privileged
   commands.

   Commands to TOPS-10 are presented in alphabetical order in  Chapter  2
   for easy reference.

   Reference material for assembly language programming can be  found  in
   the  TOPS-10  Monitor  Calls  Manual Volumes 1 and 2, the DECsystem-10
   MACRO Assembler Reference Manual, and the DEC10/20 Processor Reference
   Manual.

   Getting Started with DECsystem-10 introduces first-time users  to  the
   TOPS-10  operating  system  command  language.   You  should read this
   manual at least once  before  reading  the  TOPS-10  Operating  System
   Commands  Manual.   You  should  also be familiar with Introduction to
   DECsystem-10.


   SYNOPSIS OF TOPS-10 OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS MANUAL

   Chapter 1 describes the components of the TOPS-10 operating system and
   how to use them.

   Chapter 2 lists the functional categories of commands, lists  all  the
   commands   alphabetically,  and  describes  each  command  in  detail.
   Examples accompany the command descriptions.

   The appendixes contain additional reference material.








                                    viii


   CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL

   The following conventions are used in this manual:

   Convention     Meaning

   addr           Program or location address

   arg            An argument to a command

   c(addr)        The contents of an octal address

   core           Refers to main (processor) memory

   CTRL/x         A control character.  Control characters are  explained
                  in Section 1.6.

   date           A date in the form of dd-mm-yy.  For example,  22-11-93
                  represents November 22, 1993.

   date-time      The date and time in the standard  format.   (Refer  to
                  Section 1.8.3.)

   density        The density of a magnetic tape

   dev:           Any  logical  or physical  device  name. A colon (:)
   device-name    must  be  included  when  a device name is  part  of  a
                  file specification.  Refer to Section 1.9.1.

   [directory]    A directory  name.  This can  be either a  UFD or an
   [dir]          SFD.

   expression     A numeric expression

   file.ext       A file name and a file extension, separated by a period

   file name      A name of a file

   file-spec      A   file   specification   written   in   the   format:
                  dev:file.ext[directory].  Refer to Section 1.9.

   fs             File structure

   h              High, referring to a job's high segment

   hh:mm:ss       The time of day using a 24-hour clock (0  through  23),
                  where hh is hours, mm is minutes, and ss is seconds

   id             An identifier

   job            A job number



                                     ix


   jobname        The name of the job.

   key            A keyword to a command argument.

   l              Low, referring to a job's low segment

   letter         An alphabetic character

   lh             The left half of an octal word

   line-number    Refers to the number of the line

   list           A list of arguments

   logical-name   A logical device name, chosen by the user
   log-name
   log

   memory         The decimal number of memory words measured in K or  P.
                  1K  is  equal  to 1024 words; 1P (page) is equal to 512
                  words.

   MFD            A master file directory

   <nnn>          A protection code

   nnnn           A tape density

   n              A decimal number, such as a unit number

   ^name^         A DECtape identifier

   nodelist       A list of all the systems in a network environment

   PPN            A project-programmer number

   program        A program name

   proj,prog      A project-programmer number

   [proj,prog]    The name of a user-file directory
   [ppn]

   oo             An octal number

   rh             The right half of an octal word

   SFD            A sub-file directory

   spec           A specification of a file

   str            A file structure name


                                     x


   /switch        A command line modifier

   time           Refers to a time of day

   UFD            A user-file directory

   v              Version number

   x              A numeric or text variable

   xx             A node number in a device name

   $              The symbol printed on your terminal when you press  the
                  ESCape (ALTmode) key

   ^x             A character that is printed when you press the  CONTROL
                  key  while  you  type  a  character  key.  For example,
                  typing a CTRL/C prints ^C at your terminal.

   <DEL>          Indicates when you should press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key

   <RET>          Indicates when you should press the RETURN key

   <ESC>          Indicates when you should press  the  ESCape  (ALTmode)
                  key

   |              Vertical bars (|) in the left margin denote changes  or
                  additions  to  the  TOPS-10  Operating System since the
                  last printing of this manual

   All examples, commands, switches, values, and arguments are  shown  in
   uppercase.   This  is for the sake of distinction.  Examples are shown
   as they would appear on  a  terminal  that  does  not  have  lowercase
   ability.


   MANUALS REFERENCED

   The following manuals are referred to in the text of this manual:

   Introduction to DECsystem-10

   Getting Started with DECsystem-10

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual

   TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual

   TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual, Vols.  1 and 2

   DECsystem-10 MACRO Assembler Reference Manual



                                     xi


   DEC10/20 Processor Reference Manual

   TOPS-10 Operator's Guide

   TOPS-10 Software Installation Guide

   TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference Manual

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual

   TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual

   TOPS-10 DDT Manual

   TOPS-10 MAKLIB User's Guide

   VT52 Owner's Manual

   LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual



































                                    xii











                                 CHAPTER 1

                                INTRODUCTION



   TOPS-10 is the name of the Timesharing Operating  System  for  use  on
   DIGITAL's  KL10  and  KS10  systems.  You communicate with the TOPS-10
   operating system using the  TOPS-10  command  language.   The  TOPS-10
   operating system is also called the monitor.



   1.1  JOBS

   TOPS-10 is a timesharing system; that is, the system transfers control
   rapidly  among a number of jobs, so that all jobs appear to be running
   simultaneously.  The term job refers to the entire sequence  of  steps
   that  you start from your terminal or card deck.  You start a job from
   your terminal by using the LOGIN command, and you use the KJOB command
   to end your job.

   You can initiate a job at a central computer site  or  from  a  remote
   location.

   After you initiate a job,  you  can  initiate  a  second  job  without
   terminating  the  first.   For example, you can initiate a timesharing
   job and, using the SUBMIT command,  submit  a  second  job  for  batch
   processing.  (The SUBMIT command is discussed in Chapter 2.)

   When configuring and loading TOPS-10, the  system  administrator  sets
   the maximum number of jobs the system can process.



   1.2  CONNECTING TO THE SYSTEM

   Only  authorized  users  have  access   to   TOPS-10.    Your   system
   administrator  provides  each  authorized  user  with  a  user name, a
   project programmer number (PPN), and a password.  These  identify  all
   users  and  their  corresponding  areas  on file structures.  When you
   specify a directory area, your  project-programmer  number  identifies
   you.   A  comma  separates the project and programmer numbers, and the


                                    1-1
                                INTRODUCTION


   entire PPN is enclosed in square brackets.  For example, [27,4072].





















































                                    1-2
                                INTRODUCTION


   The project numbers range from 1 to 377777  (octal).   The  programmer
   numbers  range  from  1  to  777777  (octal).  Numbers 1 through 7 are
   reserved for DIGITAL, and numbers 400000 through 777777  are  reserved
   for special purposes.

   Your password is one to thirty-nine characters long and is  used  when
   you  log  in to the system and when you attach to another job.  (Refer
   to the LOGIN and ATTACH commands, Chapter  2.)  To  maintain  password
   secrecy,  the  monitor  does  not  echo your password on the terminal.
   When you are using a terminal with local copy, a mask is printed  when
   you type your password, making the password unreadable.



   1.3  OPERATING SYSTEM MODES

   You can run jobs  on  the  TOPS-10  operating  system  in  two  modes:
   interactive mode and batch mode.



   1.3.1  Interactive Mode

   Jobs that run in interactive mode use a terminal to access the system.
   The  language  you  use  to  run  a  job is the command language.  The
   commands you type on the terminal are received and  processed  by  the
   command language interpreter of the TOPS-10 monitor.  When your job is
   in interactive mode, you complete your work at  two  levels:   monitor
   and user level.  Section 1.4.  discusses interactive levels.



   1.3.2  Batch Mode

   Batch jobs communicate with the system in batch mode.  They are  input
   to the system from punched cards or from the terminal.  Batch jobs are
   handled by the  batch  command  interpreter.   For  information  about
   TOPS-10 batch, refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 Batch Reference Manual.



   1.4  INTERACTIVE LEVELS

   When your terminal is in interactive mode, your job is at one  of  two
   levels, monitor level or user level.









                                    1-3
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.4.1  Monitor Level

   When your job is at monitor level,  you  are  communicating  with  the
   monitor.   The command language interpreter processes each command you
   type.  The monitor prompts you  with  a  period  (.).   Every  monitor
   command  should  follow  this  prompt.   You  end a monitor command by
   pressing the RETURN key (<RET>).

   The format of each command  is  variable  because  many  commands  are
   followed  by  optional  switches,  arguments, or values.  (See Section
   1.8.)

   Section 1.6  contains  descriptions  of  the  control  characters  and
   special keys you use when typing commands.



   1.4.2  User Level

   When you type the operating system command RUN, followed by a  program
   name,  your  job moves from monitor level to user level.  To move back
   to monitor level, type CTRL/C.  If the  program  is  not  waiting  for
   terminal  input,  it may be necessary to type CTRL/C twice.  (Refer to
   Section 1.6.1.)

   Other commands also bring your job to user level.  When your job is at
   user  level,  you  are working with a program other than the operating
   system itself.  Each program has its own set of commands and  its  own
   command  interpreter.   This  manual  describes  some system programs.
   System programs usually prompt with an asterisk (*).

   At user  level,  control  characters  and  special  keys  can  have  a
   different   effect   than  they  have  at  monitor  level.   Read  the
   description of each program to determine the effects  of  the  control
   characters and special keys.

   The  following  example  shows  a  dialogue  with  the  system  in  an
   interactive job:

   Example

        Monitor level:

        .R SETSRC<RET>

        User level and program response:

        *T<RET>
        DSKC:,DSKB:,FENCE





                                    1-4
                                INTRODUCTION


        User level:

        *A DSKN:<RET>

        User level and program response:

        *T<RET>
        DSKC:,DSKB:,DSKN:,FENCE

        CTRL/C to return to monitor level:

        *^C

        Monitor prompt at monitor level:

        .



   1.5  CONTEXTS

   A core image is what a job's portion of memory contains at  any  given
   time.   The  core  image,  as  well as information about the monitor's
   state with respect to  your  job,  constitute  a  context.   When  you
   initialize  a  program,  your  context usually changes.  For instance,
   running the DIRECT program  creates  a  core  image  with  the  DIRECT
   program  in  it.  Exiting DIRECT and then running SYSTAT, for example,
   destroys what you had in memory (the DIRECT program)  and  loads  data
   pertinent to SYSTAT.

   Three commands allow you to display information  about  contexts,  and
   manipulate  them  in  various ways.  These commands are CONTEXT, PUSH,
   and POP.  CONTEXT and PUSH create additional  contexts.   POP  returns
   you  to  a superior context.  When you work with multiple contexts, at
   least one context  is  preserved  while  you  work  with  the  current
   context.

   You can work with multiple contexts by creating parallel contexts,  or
   creating  inferior  contexts.  The default maximum number of contexts,
   including current, parallel, and inferior, is  four.   The  number  of
   contexts  in  use  at any moment is shown by the CONTEXT command.  You
   can also use the CONTEXT command to  create  parallel  contexts.   You
   might  create a parallel context, run a frequently accessed program in
   it, and then exit, returning to your previous context.  Both  contexts
   now  exist  simultaneously.   When  you need to use the program in the
   created context, simply switch to that context.  You will not have  to
   wait  for  it  to  reinitialize.   The full description of the CONTEXT
   command in Chapter 2 gives an example of this procedure, including how
   to create and access a parallel context.





                                    1-5
                                INTRODUCTION


   The PUSH command allows you to create an inferior context.   When  you
   return  to  your  previous  task  in  a superior context, the inferior
   context is deleted.  You return to the superior context using the  POP
   command.    An  inferior  context  could  be  used  in  the  following
   situation:  If you were in the  process  of  completing  a  task,  and
   needed  to  see  some HELP text, you could create an inferior context,
   read the HELP text you needed, destroy the inferior context and return
   to the unchanged superior context.  The system automatically creates a
   new context for certain commands.  The  system  manager  can  set  the
   system to create a new context when any monitor command is issued.



   1.6  SPECIAL CHARACTERS

   The command language interpreter recognizes several special characters
   that cause specific functions to be performed.

   These special characters are described in the following sections.



   1.6.1  CTRL/C - Interrupt

   When you type  a  CTRL/C  (control-C),  the  monitor  interrupts  your
   current  running  program  and  returns your terminal to monitor mode.
   You must type two CTRL/Cs if your program is not requesting input from
   your terminal (that is, if your program is executing).  If you issue a
   CTRL/C while typing a command in monitor mode, this  character  causes
   the  input  line to be deleted.  If you issue two CTRL/Cs while output
   is being printed on your terminal, the output is ended.

   Example

        This example shows a program prompt.  CTRL/C brings your  job  to
        monitor level.

        *^C

        .



   1.6.2  DELETE Key

   When you press the DELETE (RUBOUT) key, the monitor deletes  the  last
   character  you  typed.   This  function  permits you to correct typing
   errors.  When you press the DELETE key n times,  the  monitor  deletes
   the  last  n  characters  that  you typed.  On hard-copy terminals the
   monitor echoes all deleted characters on your  terminal  and  encloses
   the deleted characters in backslashes (\).



                                    1-6
                                INTRODUCTION


   On video terminals the deleted characters that you typed  are  removed
   from  the screen.  However, you must inform the monitor of the kind of
   terminal you are using.  (Refer to the SET TTY command in Chapter  2.)
   After  you  press RETURN or ESCape, you cannot use the DELETE function
   on that line.

   Example

        Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, press  the  DELETE  key  3
        times, then type the correct characters.

        .SET TTY TYPE L036\630\A36<RET>

        .



   1.6.3  CTRL/W - Delete Word

   When you type CTRL/W (control-W), the monitor deletes  the  last  word
   you typed.

   A word is defined as all spaces,  tabs,  and  alphanumeric  characters
   until a nonalphanumeric character is encountered.

   On video terminals, the deleted word is erased from the screen.

   On hard-copy terminals, the deleted word is printed backwards  between
   backslashes.

   Example

        Type the characters SET TTY TYPE L036, type CTRL/W, and type  the
        correct characters.

        .SET TTY TYPE L036\630L\LA36<RET>

        .



   1.6.4  CTRL/U - Delete Line

   When you type CTRL/U (control-U), the  monitor  deletes  your  current
   input  line,  back  to the last time you pressed RETURN.  On hard-copy
   terminals, the  monitor  responds  with  a  carriage-return/line-feed,
   after  which  you can retype the line.  On video terminals, the entire
   line that you typed is  removed  from  the  screen.   After  you  have
   pressed  RETURN,  you can no longer use the line-editing features (for
   example, CTRL/U and DELETE) on that line.




                                    1-7
                                INTRODUCTION


   Example

        Type CTRL/U.

        .SETTTY ^U

        Type the correct characters.

        SET TTY LA36<RET>

        .



   1.6.5  CTRL/R - Reprint Line

   When you type CTRL/R (control-R), the  monitor  reprints  the  current
   input  line.   If  you  type a line incorrectly, then make corrections
   using the DELETE key, the monitor will print the corrected  line  when
   you  type CTRL/R.  The following is an example of this operation using
   a hard-copy terminal:

   Example

        If you type:

        SET TTQ<DEL>Y N0<DEL>O FILE<DEL>L

        The line appears as:

        .SET TTQ\Q\Y N0\0\O FILE\E\L

        If you then press CTRL/R:

        .SET TTQ\Q\Y N0\0\O FILE\E\L ^R

        The monitor prints:

        SET TTY NO FILL

   When you type CTRL/R, the monitor issues  a  carriage-return/line-feed
   before printing the corrected input line.  The cursor or printing head
   of your terminal is left at its previous location.

   If a program such as your text editor uses CTRL/R for another purpose,
   you  can disable the CTRL/R function using the SET TTY RTCOMP command.
   (See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)







                                    1-8
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.6.6  CTRL/O - Cancel Output

   When you type CTRL/O (control-O), the monitor cancels output  to  your
   terminal.   This  function  is useful when a program begins to print a
   long message that you are not interested in reading.  If  you  do  not
   want  to  wait for the monitor to finish printing the message, you can
   stop the monitor from printing the message one of  two  ways.   First,
   you  can type two CTRL/Cs, but this action also stops the execution of
   the program.  Second, you can type a single CTRL/O.

   When you type CTRL/O, the monitor continues  executing  your  program,
   but  does  not  print any output on your terminal.  The monitor begins
   printing to your terminal when one of the following conditions occurs:

        o  The executing program requests input from your terminal.

        o  The program ends and returns control to the monitor.

        o  You type CTRL/C twice, which returns control to the monitor.

   To start the output to your terminal again, type another CTRL/O.



   1.6.7  CTRL/S - Hold Output

   When you type CTRL/S (control-S), the monitor  holds  output  to  your
   terminal.   This control character works only after you have typed the
   SET TTY PAGE command.  (See Chapter  2.)  This  control  character  is
   useful if you have a display terminal, and you have to stop the output
   to read it.  To read the rest of the output, type CTRL/Q.



   1.6.8  CTRL/Q - Resume Output

   When you type CTRL/Q (control-Q), the monitor resumes output  to  your
   terminal.   CTRL/S  and CTRL/Q are useful when you are using a display
   terminal.  Used in conjunction with CTRL/S, you can stop and  continue
   output  to  your  terminal,  thus reading a file before it scrolls off
   your display screen.













                                    1-9
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.6.9  CTRL/T - Job Status

   When  you  type  CTRL/T  (control-T),  the   monitor   prints   status
   information  pertaining to your job on your terminal.  CTRL/T does not
   echo on your terminal.  There are 11 items of  information  output  to
   your terminal.  These items are:

        1.  The incremental daytime (which is the  time  since  you  last
            issued  a  CTRL/T or a USESTAT command) or the time since you
            logged in if you have  not  issued  a  CTRL/T  or  a  USESTAT
            command.  (For example, Day: :05:43.)

        2.  The incremental runtime, which is the CPU time used since you
            issued  a  CTRL/T,  USESTAT  command,  LOGIN command, or TIME
            command.  (For example, Run:0.48.)

        3.  The incremental disk reads,  which  is  the  number  of  disk
            blocks read since you issued a CTRL/T, USESTAT command, LOGIN
            command, or DSK command.  (For example, Rd:75.)

        4.  Incremental disk writes, which is the number of  disk  blocks
            written  since  you  issued  a CTRL/T, USESTAT, LOGIN, or DSK
            command.  (For example, Wr:8.)

        5.  The program name.  (For example, SOS.)

        6.  The memory size.  (For example, 12+19P.)

        7.  The current context number (for example, Ctx:1.)

        8.  The job state.  The job state  codes  are  described  in  the
            SYSTAT  command description in Chapter 2.  (For example, ^C.)
            An ampersand after the job state code indicates  the  job  is
            locked  in  core.  An asterisk indicates the job is being run
            or swapped.

        9.  The program counter, which is  the  address  of  the  current
            instruction.  (For example, PC:400275.)
|  
|      10.  The CPU that the job last ran on.  (For example, CPU0.)

       11.  The job state, which can be INPUT WAIT or OUTPUT WAIT.   This
            item  is  printed  only when you type CTRL/T from user level.
            (For example, OUTPUT WAIT FOR TTY21.)

   This information can be obtained with the USESTAT command  at  monitor
   level.   However,  by  typing  CTRL/T,  you  can  determine your job's
   progress without interrupting its execution.  When  you  type  CTRL/T,
   the  character  is  not  passed  to  your  job  as an input character.
   However, some programs activate a special interrupt feature  when  you
   type CTRL/T.  (See the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.)



                                    1-10
                                INTRODUCTION


   If a system program, such as your text editor uses CTRL/T for  another
   purpose,  you can disable the CTRL/T function using the SET TTY RTCOMP
   command.  (See Chapter 2 for a complete description of this command.)

   Example
|  
|       Day: :05:43 Run:8.51 Rd:48 Wr:37 DIRECT
|  15+33P Ctx:1 ^C PC:400275 CPU0





   1.7  TYPE-AHEAD CAPABILITY

   Type-ahead allows you to type another command without waiting for  the
   monitor  to respond to your first command.  If you want two operations
   performed, you can begin typing the request for the  second  operation
   before you receive the prompt that the monitor prints after completing
   the first operation.  If an error occurs during the  first  operation,
   the characters you typed ahead are ignored.



   1.8  COMMAND FORMATS

   The general format of each command is a line  of  ASCII  uppercase  or
   lowercase   characters   or  a  mixture  of  uppercase  and  lowercase
   characters.  You type  the  commands  after  the  monitor  prints  the
   TOPS-10  prompt  (.).   The  following  are  examples of valid TOPS-10
   commands:

        .DIRECT
        .direct
        .dirECT

   If you type spaces or tabs before a command name, the  system  ignores
   them.  For example, the following commands produce the same result:

        .DIRECT
        .     DIRECT

   The commands you type to the command language interpreter are  one  to
   six  characters  long.   If  you  type  any  character  past the sixth
   character,  the  monitor  ignores  it.   You  need  only  type  enough
   characters to uniquely identify the command.

   It is sometimes possible to abbreviate a command by typing  characters
   fewer  than  would  make  the command unique.  This is not encouraged,
   however, because uniqueness of a command may vary from monitor release
   to monitor release.  For this reason, you should use the whole command
   in a batch control file.


                                    1-11
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.8.1  Command Termination

   You terminate every command to the  command  language  interpreter  by
   pressing the RETURN key.  For example:

        .DIRECT<RET>



   1.8.2  Line Continuation

   You can continue a command line  to  some  system  programs,  such  as
   DIRECT  and  QUEUE,  by  placing  a  hyphen  (-) as the last nonblank,
   noncomment character before you press the RETURN key.  These  programs
   treat  continuation  lines  as part of the current command line.  This
   feature allows you to type indefinitely long command lines.  A line is
   terminated by a <RET> that is not preceded by a hyphen.



   1.8.3  Command Arguments

   You specify arguments to a command after the command name and separate
   them  from  the  command  name  by  a  space.  If the command language
   interpreter recognizes a command name, but  cannot  find  a  necessary
   argument, the monitor responds with the error message:

        ?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS

   Example

        The ASSIGN command requires arguments.

        .ASSIGN<RET>

        System error message:

        ?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS

        TOPS-10 prompt:

        .

   After the monitor prints the error message, your terminal is  left  in
   monitor mode, as indicated by the monitor prompt.  You can then retype
   the command.








                                    1-12
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.8.3.1  Relative  Date-Time  Arguments - Certain   commands   require
   arguments that specify a date or time.  Date and time arguments can be
   either relative or absolute.  A relative argument specifies a  certain
   length  of  time  from  the  current  date  or  time.  The format of a
   relative argument is:

        +number-of-daysD:hours:minutes:seconds

   Where:

        number-of-days  is optional.

        D               is required if you specify number of days.

        hours           is optional if you specify number  of  days  with
                        the letter D.  Otherwise, hours is required.

        minutes         is optional.

        seconds         is optional.  However, if  you  specify  seconds,
                        minutes  must  also  be  given or seconds will be
                        interpreted as minutes.

   You must type a colon to separate one field from the other.   You  can
   precede  a  relative  argument  with an optional plus (+) or minus (-)
   sign.  The sign implies either past (-) or future (+).   When  you  do
   not specify number of days, you must precede the time with a plus sign
   or a minus sign.  For example:

        -3D:4:27:21

   means 3 days, 4 hours, 27 minutes, and 21 seconds ago.  Similarly:

        +4

   means 4 hours from now.



   1.8.3.2  Absolute Date-Time Arguments - An absolute argument specifies
   a  particular date or time.  The format of an absolute argument is one
   of the following:

         o  weekday:hours:minutes:seconds

         o  date:hours:minutes:seconds

         o  keyword:hours:minutes:seconds






                                    1-13
                                INTRODUCTION


   Where:    weekday is the day of the week  or  one  of  the  following:
             YESTERDAY, TODAY, TOMORROW.

             This part of the argument is  optional.   The  weekdays  are
             abbreviated as follows:

                  SUNDAY    = SUN
                  MONDAY    = MON
                  TUESDAY   = TUES
                  WEDNESDAY = WED
                  THURSDAY  = THUR
                  FRIDAY    = FRI
                  SATURDAY  = SAT

             date is optional and has one of the following formats:

                  day-month-year (21-OCT-79)

                  month-day-year (OCT-21-79)

                  numeric month-day-year (10-21-79)

                  The month can be abbreviated.   The  abbreviations  for
                  the months are JA, F, MAR, AP, MAY, JUN, JUL, AU, S, O,
                  N, and D.

                  The year and its preceding hyphen are optional, and, if
                  given,  can  be one, two, or four digits.  For example,
                  0, 90, and 1990 will all be  interpreted  as  the  year
                  1990.

             keyword is one of the following options:

                  LOGIN (time of login)

                  NOON

                  MIDNIGHT

             hours is based on a 24-hour clock  (0  through  23)  and  is
             required if you omitted the weekday, date, or keyword, or if
             you specify minutes.

             minutes is optional unless you specify seconds.

             seconds is optional.








                                    1-14
                                INTRODUCTION


   The following example specifies Wednesday at 9:15:06 AM.

   Example

        WED:09:15:06

   Because the date is known to be past or future from either the  switch
   used  (/BEFORE and /SINCE imply past, /AFTER implies the future) or by
   a plus or minus sign, an unspecified field is filled in  so  that  the
   result  is  the next or last occurrence of the specified date.  If you
   omit the time argument, the time defaults to  00:00:00  (midnight)  if
   past,  and  23:59:59  (11  o'clock,  59  minutes, and 59 second PM) if
   future.

   Examples

        /AFTER:SAT is after 23:59:59 next Saturday

        /BEFORE:25-FEB is before last February 25th

        /SINCE:JUL-3-85 is since July 3, 1985 at midnight

































                                    1-15
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.8.4  Command Switches

   You can modify some commands by including  a  switch  in  the  command
   line.   You precede each switch with a slash (/) and terminate it with
   a nonalphanumeric  character,  usually  <RET>,  a  comma,  or  another
   switch.   You  can  abbreviate  the switch if its name remains unique.
   Abbreviation is  not  recommended  for  batch  control  files.   Valid
   switches  for  each  command  are  documented  as  part of the command
   descriptions in Chapter 2.  The following is an example of a  command,
   command argument, and command switch:

   Example

        .PRINT MYFILE.EXT/COPIES:2



   1.8.4.1  Temporary Switches - The switches for COMPILE-class  commands
   are  either  temporary  (local)  or permanent (global).  COMPILE-class
   commands are further described in  Appendix  C.   A  temporary  switch
   applies  only to the immediately preceding file.  Do not place a space
   or comma between the  file  name  and  the  switch.   In  the  command
   construction:

        .COMPILE PROG,TEST/MACRO,SUBLET

   the /MACRO switch applies only to the file named TEST.



   1.8.4.2  Permanent Switches - A permanent switch, sometimes  called  a
   sticky  switch, applies to all files following it on the command line,
   until you modify it by a subsequent switch.  You separate  the  switch
   from  the  file name by spaces, commas, or a combination of both.  For
   example, using the /MACRO switch:

   Examples

        Temporary switch that affects PROG:

        .COMPILE PROG/MACRO TEST,SUBLET

        Temporary switch that affects PROG:

        .COMPILE PROG/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET

        Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:

        .COMPILE PROG,/MACRO,TEST,SUBLET

        Permanent switch that affects TEST and SUBLET:



                                    1-16
                                INTRODUCTION


        .COMPILE PROG,/MACRO TEST,SUBLET

   The COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG command descriptions in  Chapter
   2 list the switches for these commands.



   1.8.5  Comments

   You can type a comment on the same line as a command by preceding  the
   comment  with  a  semicolon (;) or exclamation point (!).  The monitor
   and  the  batch  command  language  interpreters  do  not  attempt  to
   interpret  the  characters  after  the  semicolon.   Comment lines are
   useful when you are using a  hard-copy  terminal,  or  making  control
   files  for  batch  jobs.   The  following is an example of a line that
   contains both a command and a comment:

        .DIRECT    ;will list names of files in default area <RET>




































                                    1-17
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9  FILE SPECIFICATION

   The system stores programs and data as named  files.   When  they  are
   stored   on   DECtape   or  disk,  files  are  identified  by  a  file
   specification.   The  file  specification   includes   the   following
   identifications:

        1.  A device name or file structure name

        2.  A file name

        3.  A file name extension

        4.  An ordered list of directory names

        5.  An access protection code

   The file specification is necessary to identify a disk file.   If  you
   issue a file specification for devices other than DECtape or disk, the
   monitor ignores them.  File specifications are used to choose  a  file
   from  a  directory,  a  set  of  files  belonging  to a specific user.
   DECtapes and disks are the only directory-oriented devices.   Items  4
   and 5 in the above list do not apply to DECtapes.

   The device name can be any valid device name described in the  Section
   1.9.1.   Always type a colon following the device name.  An example of
   a device name is DSKC:.

   A file name is  one  to  six  alphanumeric  characters.   The  monitor
   ignores  all  characters  past the sixth.  File names are discussed in
   Section 1.9.2.  An example of  a  device  name  and  a  file  name  is
   DSKC:MYFILE.

   The file name extension is a period (.)  followed  by  zero  to  three
   characters.   It  is  used  to indicate the type of information in the
   file.  (Refer  to  Appendix  D  for  a  list  of  standard  file  name
   extensions.)  For the most efficient use of system resources, use only
   standard file name extensions, though other extensions can  be  valid.
   Most  programs  recognize file names and extensions consisting only of
   letters and digits.  Often the term file name refers to both the  file
   name  and the file extension.  An example of a device name, file name,
   and file extension is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT.

   The directory name identifies the disk area where the file is  stored.
   This  list  can  be  a  user  file  directory (UFD) represented by the
   owner's project-programmer number, or a user file  directory  followed
   by  one  or  more  sub-file  directories  (SFDs).   You must enclose a
   directory name in square brackets ([]).  Directory names are discussed
   in  Section  1.9.3.   An  example  of  a  device name, file name, file
   extension and directory name is DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589].




                                    1-18
                                INTRODUCTION


   The access  protection  code  of  a  file  is  a  3-digit  octal  code
   designating  the  users who can read or write the file.  The code must
   be enclosed in angle brackets (< >),  and  you  specify  it  only  for
   output  files.  For a given file, users are divided into three groups:
   owner of the file, users with the same project number  as  the  owner,
   and  all other users.  The standard protection code is <057>, allowing
   users in the owner's  project  to  read  and  execute  the  file,  and
   preventing  access  by  all other users.  The standard protection code
   may be different at your installation.  Protection codes are described
   in  Section  1.9.4.   An  example  of  a  full  file  specification is
   DSKC:MYFILE.TXT[21,589]<055>.

   The following information is necessary when you refer to a file:

         o  The file name.

         o  The device name, if the file is not on disk and not  in  your
            default search list.

         o  The directory name, if the file is not in your directory.

   The following information is optional in a file specification:

         o  The file name extension.

         o  The device name, if the file is on a file structure  in  your
            search list.

         o  The directory name, if the file is in your directory.

         o  The protection code (if an output file).

   Examples

        File name and file name extension:

        TEXT.MAC

        Physical device name and file name:

        DTA3:FILEA

        Generic device name, file name, file name extension and directory
        name:

        DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]

        A complete file specification:  device name, file name, file name
        extension, directory name, and protection code:

        DSKA:MAIN.F4[27,235]<057>



                                    1-19
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.1  Device Names

   TOPS-10 supports a number of peripheral input/output devices to handle
   data acquisition, storage, retrieval, and display.  These devices are:

        Card Punch            Card Reader          DECtape
        Disk                  Display Terminal     Graphics Display
        Hard-copy Terminal    Line Printer         Magnetic Tape
        Paper Tape Punch      Paper Tape Reader    Plotter

   The monitor allocates a device to your job when you request access  to
   the  device.   (Refer  to the ASSIGN and MOUNT commands in Chapter 2.)
   Until you request a device, it resides in the system pool of available
   resources.

   To reference a device, you must specify a device name.  In the command
   descriptions  in  this  manual,  places where you must supply a device
   name have the symbol dev:  in the command line format.  The  types  of
   device  names  are  listed  in Table 1.1 and are described in Sections
   1.9.1.1 through 1.9.1.5.


   Table 1-1:  Device Names

   ______________________________________________________________________

     Type of Name                            Meaning
   ______________________________________________________________________

     generic               These specify a generic type of device  such
                           as a disk (DSK:) or a magnetic tape (MTA:).

     physical              These specify a particular physical unit  on
                           a   specific   controller   such  as  MTA1:,
                           magnetic-tape unit number 1.

     logical               These are substitute names for devices.  You
                           assign these names with the ASSIGN command.

     ersatz                These are  names  for  ersatz  (pseudo-disk)
                           devices  normally  used to contain libraries
                           or special directories.

     system defined        These  are  names  defined  by  the  system.
     logical               Each name corresponds to a physical unit  so
                           long  as  the  unit  is  declared  to be the
                           system default for that unit.
   ______________________________________________________________________






                                    1-20
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.1.1  Generic Device Names - The most general type of  device  name
   is  the  generic  device  name.   When you specify a generic name, the
   monitor selects a free unit of the device type specified.   When  your
   computer  is  in a network environment, the monitor chooses the device
   from those devices at your location, or, if none  are  available,  the
   monitor chooses the device from the host (central) site.

   A generic name can be two or three letters long and is followed  by  a
   colon (:).  The generic names are listed in Table 1-2.

   Two-character generic names are  less  specific  than  three-character
   generic  names.   For  example,  MT: means any magnetic tape unit, but
   MTA: means any magnetic tape unit on controller A.  When  you  specify
   the generic name DSK: or DS:, the monitor uses your job search list to
   determine which disk device should be selected  for  you.   (Refer  to
   Section 1.12.)


   Table 1-2:  Generic Device Names

   ______________________________________________________________________

                                          3-Letter          2-Letter
     Device                             Device Name       Device Name
   ______________________________________________________________________

     Card punch                             CDP:              CP:
     Card reader                            CDR:              CR:
     Console terminal                       CTY:              ---
     DECtape                                DTx:              DT:
     Disk                                   DSK:              DS:
        Packs                               DPx:              DP:
                                            RPx:              RP:
        Fixed head                          FHx:              FH:
                                            FSx:              FS:
     Display                                DIS:              ---
     Line printer                           LPT:              LP:
        lowercase/uppercase                 ---               LL:
        uppercase                           ---               LU:
     Magnetic tape                          MTx:              ---
        7-track                             ---               M7:
        9-track                             ---               M9:
     Operator terminal                      OPR:              ---
     Paper-tape punch                       PTP:              PP:
     Paper-tape reader                      PTR:              PR:
     Plotter                                PLT:              ---
     Pseudo-terminal                        PTY:              ---
     System library                         SYS:              SY:
     Terminal                               TTY:              TT:
   ______________________________________________________________________




                                    1-21
                                INTRODUCTION


   When  you  specify  a  generic   name,   the   monitor   selects   the
   lowest-numbered  available  unit  of the device type specified.  There
   are two defaults when you specify a generic name:

        1.  When your program specifies DSK or DS, the system  uses  your
            job search list.

        2.  When you specify TTY: or TT:, the monitor always selects your
            terminal (assuming that these are not logical names).



   1.9.1.2  Physical Device Names - Every I/O device has a physical name.
   This  name  consists  of  the  generic  name,  a letter indicating the
   controller, and one numeric character indicating the unit number.  For
   example,  the  generic  name  MTA: indicates any magnetic tape unit on
   controller A.  However,  MTA1:  indicates  magnetic  tape  unit  1  on
   controller A.



   1.9.1.3  File Structures - The TOPS-10 operating system organizes disk
   devices   into   file   structures.    File   structures  are  logical
   arrangements of 128-word blocks on one or more  disk  units.   A  file
   structure  can  exist  on one disk unit, or it can be distributed over
   several disk units designated by a single  name.   However,  two  file
   structures cannot exist on the same unit.

   The operator or system administrator assigns  a  name  to  every  file
   structure  when  he or she defines the system's file structures.  This
   name is one to four characters long, and cannot duplicate  a  physical
   device  name,  a  unit  name, or an existing file structure name.  The
   recommended   names   for   public   file   structures   are    DSKA:,
   DSKB:,...,DSKO: in order of decreasing speed.

   File structures are illustrated and explained in detail in the TOPS-10
   Monitor Calls Manual Vol.  1.



   1.9.1.4  Logical Device Names - You can assign a  logical  name  to  a
   physical device.  The monitor will recognize the name that you assign,
   and associate the logical name with  the  physical  device.   You  can
   assign a logical name to a device using the ASSIGN command.

   The logical name that  you  assign  may  be  up  to  six  alphanumeric
   characters  and  may  optionally be ended by a colon (:).  Thereafter,
   the monitor will use the device that you associated with  the  logical
   name,  when  you  or your programs specify that logical name.  Logical
   names are cleared by the DEASSIGN command.  That is, use the  DEASSIGN
   command to disassociate logical names from devices.  Logical names are
   also cleared when you log off the system, and when you specify another
   logical name for the same device.

                                    1-22
                                INTRODUCTION


   Logical names are useful when you are writing a program that  needs  a
   device,  but you will not know until program execution what device you
   will need.  Use a logical name in the program to represent the device.
   Before  you  run  the  program use the ASSIGN command to associate the
   logical name with a physical device.

   Logical names take precedence over physical names.  Therefore, if  you
   assign the logical name DSK: to the device MTA3: (magnetic tape unit 3
   on controller A), all output to generic DSK will go  to  the  magnetic
   tape.

   Some names are recognized by the  monitor  as  special  system-defined
   logical  names that the monitor translates into physical device names.
   One example is the generic device name OPR:.  The generic name OPR: is
   the system-default logical name for the operator's terminal.

   Therefore, the terminal specified as OPR:  can  change  during  system
   operation;  but  if  you  send  a message to OPR:, the message will be
   routed to the last physical  device  declared  to  be  the  operator's
   terminal at your node.

   All devices except terminals can be  designated  as  being  restricted
   devices.   You  request  a  restricted  device from the system pool of
   available resources  by  issuing  the  MOUNT  command.   This  command
   requires operator intervention before the specified device is assigned
   to your job.  The system deassigns a restricted device from  your  job
   when you log off the system or issue the DISMOUNT, DEASSIGN, or FINISH
   command.

   Unrestricted devices  are  assigned  to  your  job  on  a  first-come,
   first-served  basis  when  you issue the MOUNT or ASSIGN command.  The
   device assignment remains in effect until you release  the  device  by
   issuing  a  DEASSIGN  command  or a FINISH command, or you log off the
   system.

   The following example illustrates the use of both physical and logical
   device names.

















                                    1-23
                                INTRODUCTION


   Example

        You request a DECtape drive with the logical name ABC:

        .ASSIGN DTA: ABC:

        The monitor gives you unrestricted device DTA0: (DECtape number 0
        on controller A).  You then mount a DECtape on drive DTA0:

        DTA0 ASSIGNED

        You request any paper-tape punch and  request  that  the  logical
        name ABC: be assigned to it.

        .ASSIGN PTP: ABC:

        The monitor prints  a  warning  message,  telling  you  that  the
        logical  name  was  previously  assigned  to another device.  The
        monitor changes the logical-name assignment, so that the  logical
        name ABC: now refers to the paper-tape punch.

        %LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE, PTP0 ASSIGNED

        You run the system program PIP.

        .R PIP

        You issue a command string to PIP asking that file  FILEA.EXT  be
        transferred  from  device  DTA0: to logical device ABC: (physical
        device PTP0:).

        *ABC:=DTA0:FILEA.EXT

        You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.

        *^C

        You request another DECtape drive and request that  logical  name
        DEF: be assigned to it.

        .ASSIGN DTA: DEF:

        The monitor prints a message telling you that all DECtape  drives
        are  in use by the specified jobs.  The monitor does not assign a
        DECtape drive or a logical name to your job.

        ?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB 13







                                    1-24
                                INTRODUCTION


        You request that DECtape unit 0 (which you already have  assigned
        to you) be assigned the logical name DEF:

        .ASSIGN DTA0: DEF:

        DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name DEF:.

        DTA0 ASSIGNED

        You deassign the paper-tape  punch,  clearing  the  logical  name
        ABC:.

        .DEASSIGN PTP:

        You run the system program PIP.

        .R PIP

        You request that the file FILEB is to be transferred from  device
        DEF: to device ABC:

        *ABC:=DEF:FILEB

        TOPS-10 prints an  error  message  indicating  that  the  logical
        device name ABC: is no longer assigned.

        ?DEVICE ABC DOES NOT EXIST

        You type a CTRL/C, returning your job to monitor mode.

        *^C

        You request drive DTA0: (DECtape drive 0) again and request  that
        the logical DEF: be changed to XYZ:

        .ASSIGN DTA0: XYZ:

        The system  disassociates  the  logical  name  DEF:  from  DTA0:.
        DECtape unit 0 takes on the logical name XYZ:.

        DTA0 ASSIGNED



   1.9.1.5  Ersatz Device Names - An ersatz device  is  a  disk-simulated
   library.  Although you specify an ersatz device like a file structure,
   an ersatz device represents a particular project-programmer number  on
   a  disk  structure.   Ersatz  device  names are three characters long.
   Appendix D contains a complete list of the ersatz device names used by
   TOPS-10.




                                    1-25
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.2  File Names

   Data and programs are stored in the system files.  Files are  used  to
   arrange  and  protect data and programs.  The essential part of a file
   specification is the file name.  You name  a  file  when  you  create,
   rename, or copy it.

   The file name  that  you  choose  must  be  one  to  six  alphanumeric
   characters  long.   It is possible to use non-alphanumeric characters,
   but some symbols have a special meaning to  the  system  (see  Section
   1.10),   and   some   programs   may  not  recognize  non-alphanumeric
   characters.

   The file name is divided into the  name  of  the  file  and  the  file
   extension.  The format is:

        FILE.EXT

   Where FILE is the name you choose to distinguish the file, and .EXT is
   a  standard or non-standard file extension.  The period (.) is used to
   separate the file name from the file extension.

   It  is  recommended  that  you  use  standard  file  extensions  where
   applicable.   The standard file name extensions are listed in Appendix
   D.  File extensions are optional.  You can  name  or  specify  a  file
   without an extension.

   File names and extensions can be changed using the RENAME command.



   1.9.3  Directory Names

   Your directory is a file that serves as an index to your other files.

   There are directories on three levels of file storage:

        The directories in a file structure are  indexed  by  the  Master
        File Directory (MFD) of that structure.

        The files in your directory area are indexed  by  your  User-File
        Directory    (UFD).     Your    UFD   is   designated   by   your
        project-programmer number enclosed in brackets.  The following is
        a valid directory name:

        [30,112]

        A Sub-File Directory (SFD), is a  directory  you  can  create  to
        arrange  the files in your UFD.  A file in your UFD points to the
        SFD.  This file has the same name as the SFD, with  an  extension
        of .SFD.  SFDs are discussed in Section 1.14.



                                    1-26
                                INTRODUCTION


   The directory name is an optional part of a file specification.





















































                                    1-27
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.4  Protection Codes

   Every file has a protection code.  The code tells who can  and  cannot
   access  the file.  The protection code consists of three octal digits.
   Each digit specifies the amount  of  protection  against  a  group  of
   users.   The  first  (leftmost)  digit  is the protection code for the
   owner of the file; the middle digit is the  protection  code  for  all
   users  having  the  same  project  number  as the file owner; the last
   (rightmost) digit is the protection code for  all  other  users.   For
   example:


           <0      5       7>
            |      |       |
            |      |       |
            |      |       Protection code for all other users.
            |      |
            |      |
            |      Protection code for all members of file owner's
            |      project.
            |
            |
            Protection code for the file owner.


   Ordinarily, the owner of a file is the user  whose  programmer  number
   matches  the User File Directory (UFD) containing the file, regardless
   of the project number.  That is, a user logged in under the  [27,4072]
   project-programmer  number  is assumed to be the owner of files in the
   User File Directory  [44,4072].   This  feature  can  be  set  by  the
   installation; therefore it may not be set at your own installation.

   The access protection codes for the Owner Field (Field 1)  are  listed
   in  Table  1-3;  the  access  protection  codes for Fields 2 and 3 are
   listed in Table 1-4.



















                                    1-28
                                INTRODUCTION


   Table 1-3:  Protection Codes for Field 1

   ______________________________________________________________________

                           Owner Protection Codes

     Code                    Accessibility by Owner
   ______________________________________________________________________

     7*, 6*    You can execute, read, or change the protection code  of
               the file.

     5*        You have  unlimited  access  to  the  file,  except  for
               renaming it.

     4*        You have unlimited access to the file.

     3         You can execute, read, or change the protection code  of
               the file.

     2         You have  unlimited  access  to  the  file,  except  for
               renaming it.

     1, 0      You have unlimited access.
   ______________________________________________________________________


     * The File Daemon is called on a protection failure on this file


























                                    1-29
                                INTRODUCTION


   Table 1-4:  Protection Codes for Fields 2 and 3

   ______________________________________________________________________

                 Project-members and Other User Protections

     Code                       Access Privileges
   ______________________________________________________________________

     7         The user cannot access the file.

     6         The user can only execute the file.

     5         The user can execute or read the file.

     4         The user can execute, read, or append to the file.

     3         The user can execute, read, append  to,  or  update  the
               file.

     2         The user can execute, read, append to, update, and write
               to the file.

     1         The user can execute, read, append to, update, write to,
               and rename the file.

     0         Unlimited access, including changing the protection code
               of the file.
   ______________________________________________________________________


   When you create a file, and you do not specify a protection code to be
   associated with the file, the system uses one of the following default
   protection codes:

         o  The  default  protection  code  that  is  defined   in   your
            SWITCH.INI file on the LOGIN line, using the /DEFPROT switch.

         o  The default protection code you previously specified with the
            SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command.

         o  The standard TOPS-10 default protection code that is  defined
            by your installation (usually <055> or <057>).











                                    1-30
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.9.5  File Daemon

   The File Daemon, a system program, may determine the protection status
   of  files  with a file protection code of 4, 5, 6, or 7 in the owner's
   protection field.  (Protection codes are discussed in Section  1.9.4.)
   When you set such a protection, a protection violation causes the File
   Daemon to access a file named ACCESS.USR.  The file  ACCESS.USR  is  a
   list of the protected files and the users who may access them.  If you
   have no such file, or if the File Daemon is not running, the user  who
   attempted  to  access  the  file receives an error message, and cannot
   access the  file.   The  File  Daemon  and  the  file  ACCESS.USR  are
   described in the FILDAE Specification in the TOPS-10 Notebook Set.



   1.10  SYSTEM DEFAULTS

   The operating system contains defaults for  many  arguments,  switches
   and  parts  of  file  specifications.   Defaults  are  the  values  or
   instructions that the system uses if you do not specify  those  values
   or instructions in the command string.

   Some system defaults are set  by  the  system  administrator  when  he
   generates  the  monitor.   Other  defaults  are  set according to your
   project-programmer number when you log in.  There  are  commands  that
   allow  you  to  set  some  defaults, which will be effective until you
   change those defaults or log off the system.

   File specification defaults are determined by the system according  to
   the  program  you are running, the search list, and the directory path
   of your job.  Search  lists  and  directory  paths  are  discussed  in
   Sections 1.12 and 1.14.



   1.11  WILDCARD CONSTRUCTIONS

   You can use wildcard  constructions  with  many  command  strings.   A
   wildcard   is   an   asterisk  used  to  specify  a  part  of  a  file
   specification, or a question mark used to replace  a  character  in  a
   file specification field.

   You use the asterisk (*) as a wildcard to designate an entire part  of
   a specification.










                                    1-31
                                INTRODUCTION


   Examples

        All files with this file name and any extension:

        file-name.*

        All files with this extension and any file name:

        *.ext  

        All files:

        *.*    

        All files  in  directories  with  this  project  number  and  any
        programmer number:

        *.*[project,*]

   You can use the question mark as a wildcard to designate  a  character
   of  a file specification.  You type a question mark for each character
   that is to be matched.  For example, PR??  matches four characters  or
   less, of which the first two are PR.

   Examples

        All files with this file name and any extension beginning with M:

        file-name.M??

        All files with this extension  and  any  file  name  up  to  five
        characters, beginning with TES:

        TES??.ext

        All files with file names of two characters or less  and  a  file
        name extension of three characters or less:

        ??.??? 

        All files in  directories  with  the  project  number  25  and  a
        programmer number 500 through 577:

        *.*,[25,5??]

   You can specify the asterisk and the question mark in the same command
   construction:

        All files with file names of two characters or less:

        ??.*



                                    1-32
                                INTRODUCTION


   The DIRECTORY and QUEUE programs recognize a number sign  (#)  in  the
   file  specification  to  indicate that SIXBIT octal code follows.  For
   example,

        .DIR #640000000000.

   gives the same directory listing as

        .DIR T.

   because 120000000000 is the 36-bit left-justified SIXBIT code for  the
   character  "T".   This function is useful for file names which contain
   special characters.  Although the  SIXBIT  code  for  an  asterisk  is
   120000000000, the command line

        .DIR #120000000000.

   would not give the same directory listing as

        .DIR *.

   because the first command would list only a file  literally  named  *.
   The  second command would interpret the * as a wildcard and would list
   all files without extensions.

   You cannot mix SIXBIT code and regular characters within the file name
   or  within the file extension.  However, you can combine a SIXBIT file
   name with a regular file extension and vice versa.

   Appendix G contains a chart of SIXBIT and ASCII character codes.

   You can  specify  a  directory  name  with  the  project  number,  the
   programmer  number,  or  both  numbers missing from the specification.
   The following examples represent directory specifications.

        [15,23]             The User-File Directory [15,23]

        [,30]               The UFD that has your project number and  the
                            specified programmer number (30)

        [36,]               The UFD that has the specified project number
                            (36) and your programmer number

        [,]                 Your UFD

        [-]                 Your  default   directory,   which   can   be
                            different  from  your  UFD.   (See the SETSRC
                            Program  description  in  the  TOPS-10   User
                            Utilities Manual.)

        [,,SUB1,SUB2]       The  sub-file  directory   SUB2   under   the
                            sub-file directory SUB1 in your UFD


                                    1-33
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.12  SEARCH LISTS

   A search list is a list of file structures listed in  the  order  that
   the  operating  system will search through them for a file.  There are
   two types:  the system search list and a job search list.

   The system search list, designated by the  ersatz  device  name  SSL:,
   contains all files pertinent to the daily operation of the system.  It
   is  the  same  for  every  job  on  the  system.   Only   the   system
   administrator  can  define  and  change  this  list.  However, you may
   display the system search list using the SETSRC program.

   Some of the types of  files  kept  in  the  system  search  list  file
   structures  include:   accounting files, help and documentation files,
   compilers, and system programs.

   The job search list, designated by the ersatz device name DSK:,  lists
   structures  that contain user files for an individual job.  The system
   administrator creates the default job search list for  each  new  user
   account.   You  can  display,  add,  remove,  and  rearrange  the file
   structures in your job search list using the SETSRC  program.   (Refer
   to  the  TOPS-10  User  Utilities  Manual  for  more information about
   SETSRC.) The MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands also modify your  job  search
   list.  (MOUNT and DISMOUNT are described in Chapter 2.)

   For example, in the following command line

        .MAKE TEST.LIS

   the system uses the system search list  to  find  the  program  (TECO)
   invoked  by the MAKE command.  The system uses your job search list to
   find your user file TEST.LIS.

   The format of the job search list is:

        fs/switch,fs/switch,...FENCE,fs/switch...

   Where:  fs       is the file structure name,

           FENCE    is a logical delimiter to separate the active  search
                    list from the passive structures.

           /switch  indicates how the file can be  accessed  (read  only,
                    for example).

   The job search list has two parts, the  active  search  list  and  the
   passive  search  list.   The  active  search  list is the list of file
   structures on the left side of the fence.  The system searches each of
   these file structures from left to right.





                                    1-34
                                INTRODUCTION


   The passive search list is to the right of the fence.  It is  composed
   of  the  file  structures that you removed from the active search list
   using the SETSRC program.  Therefore, when you first log in, you  have
   no structures in your passive search list.  The file structures in the
   passive search list are not searched by the the monitor, but are  used
   to compute disk usage when you log off the system.



   1.13  LIBRARIES

   The system libraries contain  compilers,  system  programs  and  other
   important files.  Wherever a device can be specified, an ersatz device
   may be specified instead.   An  ersatz  device  is  a  monitor-defined
   logical name for a directory specification.  There are several special
   ersatz devices defined for some libraries.  There are  three  separate
   PPNs,  [1,3],  [1,4],  and  [1,5],  where  system library files can be
   stored.  The standard version of a file or program is usually found on
   SSL:[1,4].

   The newest version of a file, sometimes in an experimental or untested
   state,  can sometimes be found in the [1,5] system library.  NEW: is a
   special ersatz device.  When the operating system looks for a file  on
   NEW: it will first look on SSL:[1,5].  If the file is not found there,
   however, it will next look on SSL:[1,4] for the same file.   Likewise,
   an  outdated  version of a file might be found on OLD:, which searches
   SSL:[1,3] before SSL:[1,4].

   The current system library for the job is  called  SYS:.   By  default
   SYS:  is  SSL:[1,4] or the standard system library.  You may, however,
   change the default definition of SYS: by specifying the /NEW switch to
   LOGIN  or  to the SETSRC program.  This changes the definition of SYS:
   to be NEW:.  In other words, the  system  looks  on  SSL:[1,5]  before
   looking  on  SSL:[1,4].  When you use the R command, the program comes
   from SYS:.

   LIB: is the job's library directory.  If you define LIB:, any file the
   system  cannot  find  on  DSK:  will  be searched for in the user-file
   directory (UFD) defined in LIB:.   LIB:  may  be  set  by  the  SETSRC
   program.



   1.14  DIRECTORY PATHS

   A directory path is an ordered list of directory names, starting  with
   a   user-file   directory,   that  uniquely  identifies  a  directory.
   Directory names are discussed in Section 1.9.3.

   The default directory path for your job can be  any  directory:   your
   job's  user-file  directory  (UFD), a sub-file directory (SFD) in your
   job's UFD, a UFD different from  your  job's  UFD,  or  an  SFD  in  a
   different UFD.

                                    1-35
                                INTRODUCTION


   You can change your default directory path using the  SETSRC  program.
   See  the  TOPS-10  User  Utilities  Manual  for more information about
   SETSRC.

   Sub-file directories allow you to organize your files, and  to  access
   them  in  sets.  Any directory acts as an index to a set of files.  An
   SFD is pointed to by a file in the UFD, or by a higher-level SFD.  You
   create  SFDs  with  the  CREDIR  program, and you can nest them in any
   structure,  to  the  level  that  is  predetermined  by   the   system
   administrator.  The maximum level to which SFDs can be nested is five.
   (See the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual for more information about  the
   CREDIR  program.)  Nested directories form a directory tree structure,
   which is illustrated in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.

   The following example shows  the  creation  and  use  of  an  SFD  and
   directory paths.

   Example

        Show a list of all the files in your UFD with  a  file  extension
        .TST.

        .DIRECT *.TST<RET>

        NUMB        TST   0   <055>   dd-mmm-yy       DSKC:   [27,5434]
        109         TST   5   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        FILL        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        PAY3        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
           TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        Run the CREDIR program.

        .R CREDIR<RET>

        CREATE DIRECTORY: [27,5434,TEST]<RET>
                CREATED DSKC:[27,5434,TEST].SFD/PROTECTION:775

        Create a sub-file directory called  TEST.   Then  exit  from  the
        CREDIR program.

        CREATE DIRECTORY: ^C

        Request a list of all your files named TEST.

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>

        TEST        FOR   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy       DSKC: [27,5434]
        TEST        SFD   1   <775>   dd-mmm-yy
           TOTAL OF 2 BLOCKS IN 2 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        The directory shows an SFD named TEST.



                                    1-36
                                INTRODUCTION


        Use the RENAME command to transfer all files with  the  extension
        .TST from your UFD to your SFD.

        .RENAME [27,5434,TEST]=*.TST<RET>
        FILES RENAMED:
        DSKC:NUMB.TST
        DSKC:109.TST      
        DSKC:FILL.TST
        DSKC:PAY3.TST

        Show that your UFD no longer lists the files with  the  extension
        .TST.

        .DIR *.TST<RET>

        %WLDNSF NO SUCH FILES AS DSKC:*.TST[27,5434]

        Show  that  the  files  have  been   transferred   to   the   SFD
        [27,5434,TEST].

        .DIR [27,5434,TEST]<RET>

        NUMB        TST   0   <055>   dd-mmm-yy     DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]
        109         TST   5   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        FILL        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        PAY3        TST   1   <055>   dd-mmm-yy
          TOTAL OF 7 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434,TEST]



   1.15  USER-DEFINABLE COMMANDS

   User-definable commands are available at both the  system  programming
   level and at the monitor command level for the timesharing user.

   As a timesharing user, you use the DECLARE command to define a command
   to  run  a  specified program for your job.  This can be done during a
   timesharing session, or you can  include  the  DECLARE  command  in  a
   SWITCH.INI  file.   Any  program  can  be  invoked with a user-defined
   command.

   For example, you can  define  COMPAR  as  a  user-defined  command  to
   execute the FILCOM program as follows:

        .DECLARE  COMPAR=SYS:FILCOM.EXE<RET>

   You can also use DECLARE to display  your  job's  command  list.   The
   commands in the following list were defined previously.

        .DECLARE/LIST<RET>

        COMPAR   LOOK   EDIT   DISKSP


                                    1-37
                                INTRODUCTION


   Use the COMPAR command.  Use CTRL/T to display the  current  state  of
   your  job,  including  the  name of the program that is running.  Note
   that, although CTRL/T  is  shown  here,  it  does  not  echo  on  your
   terminal.  CTRL/Z is used to exit FILCOM and return to the monitor.

        .COMPAR<RET>
        *<CTRL/T>

        Day: 14.83 Run: 0.14 R2.5 Wr:6 FILCOM 3+4P TI PC:401570
        Input wait for TTY70:
        ^Z
        .

   For more information  on  user-definable  commands,  see  the  DECLARE
   command.



   1.16  PROGRAMMING THE LN01 LASER PRINTER

   This section describes the use of escape and control sequences,  which
   you  use  to direct printing on the LN01 laser printer.  Font loading,
   which is one application of control sequences, and font management are
   also discussed.  For a detailed discussion of programming on the LN01,
   refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.



   1.16.1  LN01 ESCAPE AND CONTROL SEQUENCES

   You can use escape and control  sequences  to  specify  tab  stops  or
   margins,   change   fonts  within  a  file,  or  indicate  the  text's
   orientation, for instance.  ESCape and control sequences are typed  in
   as  part of a file you want to print on the LN01 laser printer.  Every
   time the printer encounters the characters that introduce an escape or
   control  sequence, it regards the next few characters as instructions,
   until it encounters a final character (described below).  However, you
   must  specify the /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch to the PRINT or QUEUE command
   in order for  the  sequences  to  be  interpreted.   Otherwise,  these
   characters will be printed as part of the file.

   For a complete description of all valid escape and control  sequences,
   please refer to the LN01 Programmer's Reference Manual.











                                    1-38
                                INTRODUCTION


                                    NOTE

           You  use  the  ESC  control  character  as  the  first
           character  of  all escape and control sequences.  When
           referred to here, it means that you actually press the
           ESC  key.   Since  the  ESC  key  is  interpreted as a
           function by most text editors, consult  the  reference
           manual  to find out how your editor can actually print
           the ESC  control  character.   The  examples  in  this
           section  use  a  dollar  sign ($) to show that the ESC
           control character has been pressed.



   1.16.1.1  ESCape  Sequences - An  escape  sequence  can   have   three
   sections:    an  introducer,  intermediate  characters,  and  a  final
   character.  You must include the escape sequence introducer, which  is
   the  ESC  control character, and the final character; the intermediate
   characters  are  optional.    Intermediate   characters   define   the
   interpretation of the sequence.  The final character indicates the end
   of a string, and is defined by the function requested in the sequence.

   The following sequence shows how to reset a printer to a known state:

        ESC control character
         |    Final character
         |      |
         |      |
         $      c

   The characters are spaced here for clarity only.   The  sequence  must
   appear  as  $c  to  actually  be  interpreted  by  the  LN01.  Case is
   significant when final characters are alphabetic.



   1.16.1.2  Control Sequences - The  format  for  control  sequences  is
   similar to that of escape sequences.  However, control sequences begin
   with an ESC control character and a left square bracket.  Also, one or
   more  parameters  are  allowed  before  the intermediate character(s).
   Parameters are separated by the use of a semicolon (;).

   Numeric parameters that designate length (such as specifying 5 inches)
   are  given  in  terms  of  points or decipoints.  A point is a unit of
   length equal to 1/72 of an inch.  A decipoint, then, is  a  length  of
   1/720  of an inch.  In these units, 5 inches equals 360 points or 3600
   decipoints.







                                    1-39
                                INTRODUCTION


   A sequence using length in points is below.  In this example, the left
   margin is set to 5 inches (360 points), and the right to 8 inches (576
   points).

        $[         3 6 0 ; 5 7 6        s
        |          |                    |
        |          |                    Final character
        |          |
        |          Numeric parameter
        |
        Control sequence characters

   In this example, a control sequence is used to  clear  all  horizontal
   tab stops.

        $[      3       g
        |       |       |
        |       |       Final character
        |       Numeric parameter
        Control sequence characters

   Remember, as with escape sequences, there should be  no  blank  spaces
   between the characters.  (They would appear in the file as "$[3g".)



   1.16.2  Font Management

   The LPTSPL program supports font management for the LN01 laser printer
   by  means  of  a font handler.  LPTSPL requires the LPFONT.INI file to
   automatically  process  fonts  by   name.    LPFONT.INI   resides   on
   SSL:[5,36,LN01].  LPFONT.INI maps the font names to the files in which
   the actual fonts are kept.  Font files must be kept in the same area.

   LPFONT.INI has the format:

        filenm = fontnm1<TAB>fontnm2<TAB>...<TAB>fontnmN

   Where:  filenm is the six character filename of the font.

           fontnm is an alphanumeric string from 1 to 30 characters long,
           representing  a  fontname.  Each fontname must be separated by
           at least one tab character, and the line must be ended with  a
           carriage return/line feed.










                                    1-40
                                INTRODUCTION


   1.16.3  Loading Fonts

   When you want to print a file using non-standard fonts, you  have  two
   options.   You  may  use  the  either  /FONT:fontnm or /PRINT:GRAPHICS
   switches to the PRINT or QUEUE commands.

   Use the /FONT:fontnm switch when you want an entire  file  printed  in
   the same font.  LPTSPL loads the font you request, and the LN01 prints
   your file in the font you specified.

   The /PRINT:GRAPHICS switch allows you to dynamically  load  fonts,  so
   that  you  can  print  a  file  in  several different fonts.  The Load
   Character Set (LCS) and Assign Character Set (ACS) sequences are  used
   to  prepare  the  fonts  for  printing.   If you are using fonts which
   reside on the ersatz device FNT: ([5,36,LN01]), you  do  not  need  to
   explicitly  specify  the LCS sequence; LPTSPL loads the character sets
   for you.  You will always  need  to  place  an  ACS  sequence  at  the
   beginning  of  your  file.   The ACS sequence assigns a font name to a
   number.  You refer to this number immediately before the text you want
   printed  in that font.  The text continues printing in that font until
   you specify a new font.  For example, if you assigned 13 to  represent
   a  Times  Bold font, and 14 to represent Times Italic, you could print
   text in those fonts using the following:

        $[13mPrint in Times Bold and $[14mnow switch to Italic

   In the above example, the ESC/square bracket combination  indicates  a
   control  sequence  is  about  to  follow,  the 13 and 14 represent the
   fonts, and the letter m is the final character.  For more  information
   on  font  programming  on  the  LN01,  refer  to the LN01 Programmer's
   Reference Manual.























                                    1-41
























































                                    2-1











                                 CHAPTER 2

                              SYSTEM COMMANDS



   Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all  system  configurations.   Also,
   you  or  your  system  administrator  can  add  and  delete  commands.
   Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on  all
   of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.



   2.1  FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS

   In Section 2.1, the  TOPS-10  commands  are  divided  into  functional
   groups.  Each section contains:

         o  A discussion of a functional group.

         o  A list of the commands that make up the functional group.

   Section 2.2 contains a detailed  description  of  each  command.   The
   commands are arranged in alphabetical order.

   Appendix A of this manual contains a table that lists the commands  by
   functional description, including a short description of each command.
   This table is included for reference, so that you can find  a  command
   by  its  function.   Please  read  the  description of each command in
   Section 2.2 before using the command.















                                    2-1
























































                                    2-1











                                 CHAPTER 2

                              SYSTEM COMMANDS



   Not all TOPS-10 commands apply to all  system  configurations.   Also,
   you  or  your  system  administrator  can  add  and  delete  commands.
   Therefore, although this chapter contains detailed information on  all
   of the TOPS-10 commands, not all of them may be available to you.



   2.0.1  Job-Control Commands

   Job-control commands control the state of your job.  You can use  them
   to  create,  detach, and terminate your job.  Also, you can change the
   accounting profile and privilege status of your job.  The job  control
   commands are:

        ATTACH     CONTEXT         DECLARE
        DETACH     DISABLE         ENABLE
        KJOB       LOGIN           PASSWORD
        POP        PUSH            REATTACH
        SESSION





   2.0.2  Information Commands

   The information commands  allow  you  to  gain  information  from  the
   monitor.  You can obtain information about your job, your program, the
   operating system, or your terminal characteristics.   The  information
   commands are:

        ACCOUNT    ALLOCATE        CONTEXT         CORE
        CPUNCH     DAYTIME         DIRECTORY       DSK
        HELP       INITIA          MOUNT           NETWORK
        NODE       PJOB            PLOT            PRINT
        PUNCH      QUEUE           RESOURCES       SCHEDULE
        SET WATCH  SHOW ALLOCATION SHOW QUEUES     SUBMIT


                                    2-1
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


        SYSTAT     TPUNCH          USESTAT         VERSION
        WHERE





   2.0.3  Terminal-Control Commands

   Terminal-control commands allow you to set the characteristics of your
   terminal,  and  to  see  the  characteristics  that  are  set for your
   terminal.  The terminal-control commands are:

        INITIA     SET TERMINAL
        SET TTY    TERMINAL
        TTY



   2.0.4  Terminal-Communication Commands

   You can use the operating system to communicate with a user at another
   terminal.  The commands that allow you to do this are:

        MAIL       PLEASE          SEND





   2.0.5  File-Handling Commands

   You can use the operating system to create, change, and  store  files.
   You  can  create  and  change  directories.   You  can output files to
   various devices.  The file-handling commands are:

        CLOSE      COPY                    CPUNCH
        DELETE     DIRECTORY               EOF
        FILE       LIST                    MAKE
        PLOT       PRESERVE                PRINT
        PROTECT    PUNCH                   QUEUE
        RENAME     SET DEFAULT PROTECTION  SUBMIT
        TECO       TPUNCH                  TYPE
        ZERO





   2.0.6  Device-Handling Commands

   You can use the operating system to control peripheral  devices.   The


                                    2-2
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


   device-handling commands are:

        ALLOCATE          ASSIGN         BACKSPACE
        CANCEL            CLOSE          CPUNCH
        DEALLOCATE        DEASSIGN       DISMOUNT
        EOF               FINISH         LABEL
        LIST              LOCATE         MOUNT
        PLOT              PRINT          PUNCH
        QUEUE             REASSIGN       REWIND 
        SET BLOCKSIZE     SET CDR        SET DEFER
        SET DENSITY       SET FORMAT     SET RETRY
        SET SPOOL         SKIP           TPUNCH
        UNLOAD





   2.0.7  Program-Preparation Commands

   The program-preparation commands help you to write a  program,  change
   it,  debug  it,  and obtain information about it.  These commands help
   you   to   run   programs   more   easily   and   effectively.     The
   program-preparation commands are:

        CLOSE        COMPILE                CREF
        DDT          DEBUG                  DEPOSIT 
        EOF          EXAMINE                FUDGE
        LOAD         MAKE                   MERGE
        SET BREAK    SET DDT BREAKPOINT     TECO





   2.0.8  Program-Control Commands

   Program-control commands help you to control your program while it  is
   running  and  after it has been run.  These commands are used to start
   and stop execution, save the core image, manipulate the core area, and
   to  facilitate  the  execution  of  your program.  The program-control
   commands are:

        CCONTINUE              CONTEXT           CONTINUE
        CORE                   CSTART            EXECUTE
        GET                    HALT (CTRL/C)     JCONTINUE
        LOAD                   MERGE             POP 
        PUSH                   R                 REENTER
        RUN                    SAVE              SSAVE
        SET BREAK              SET CPU           SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
        SET DEFAULT BUFFERS    SET DSKFUL        SET DSKPRI
        SET HPQ                SET PHYSICAL      SET TIME


                                    2-3
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


        SET VIRTUAL            START





   2.0.9  Network Commands

   Network commands help you to use a data network  system.   They  allow
   you  to use the resources on another system, and get information about
   the network configuration.  The network commands are:

        ASSIGN         LOCATE
        NETWORK        NODE
        SET HOST       WHERE





   2.0.10  MIC Commands

   MIC (Monitor Interpreted Commands) allows you to create a new  command
   by  writing  any  desired  sequence  of  monitor and MIC commands in a
   command file.  Some MIC commands are briefly described here,  and  are
   more fully described in the file MICV2.DOC.

        DO           Executes a MIC command file.
         or
        @

        BACKTO       Specifies  a  label  at  which  MIC processing is to
        GOTO         resume within the command file.

        COJOB        Creates a COJOB.

        ERROR/       Specifies  an  error  condition   character.
        NOERROR

        IF           Conditionally processes a monitor command.

        LET          Changes the values of user parameters.

        MIC          Passes a subcommand to MIC.

        OPERATOR/    Introduces a line requiring user attention.
        NOOPERATOR

        SILENCE/     Suppresses/resumes output to the terminal.
        REVIVE

        WHENEVER/    Changes  the  default  action  wherever a particular


                                    2-4
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS


        ON           event occurs.



   2.1  COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

                              ACCOUNT Command



   Function

        If the monitor is running usage  file  accounting  software,  the
        ACCOUNT  command  prints the account you are logged in under (set
        by a LOGIN or SESSION command) on your terminal.  If you  do  not
        have an account, the monitor issues only a carriage-return.

   Format

        ACCOUNT

        After you press RETURN, the monitor prints the  account  you  are
        logged in under.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  This example indicates  that  you  do  not  have  an  account
            string.

            .ACCOUNT<RET>

            .

        2.  The ACCOUNT command prints the string TS547 as  the  name  of
            your account.

            .ACCOUNT <RET>

            TS547

            .







                                    2-5
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


                             ALLOCATE Command



   Function

        The ALLOCATE command informs the system  that  you  will  need  a
        resource.  A resource is a tape or disk unit.  With ALLOCATE, you
        can reserve a resource from the system and assign a logical  name
        to the resource you will use.

        An  allocated  resource  can  contain  all   the   specifications
        necessary  when  the  resource is mounted.  The switches that you
        specify with the ALLOCATE command will be  retained  and  applied
        when you use the MOUNT command to mount the same resource.

        The  ALLOCATE  command  allocates  a  resource,  and   the   SHOW
        ALLOCATION  display  will  show such a resource as both allocated
        and mounted.  If you  use  the  ALLOCATE  command  to  explicitly
        allocate  a resource, you will be granted extended ownership over
        the  resource.   For  example,  if  a  resource  that  you   have
        explicitly  allocated  and mounted goes off-line unexpectedly (as
        when the operator dismounts it),  your  mount  request  for  that
        resource will be automatically requeued, and the resource will be
        mounted for your job when it comes on line.

   Format

        ALLOCATE resource:log-name/switch/switch...

        Where:    resource is the name of the  resource  that  is  to  be
                  allocated.   The  colon  (:)  in  the  resource name is
                  optional.  The resource name is one of the following:

                   o  A disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.

                   o  A tape volume set name and volume identifiers, such
                      as PAY-WK(PM34,PM35) where PAY-WK is the volume set
                      name, and (PM34,PM35) is a list of the  volumes  in
                      the volume set.

                   o  A tape volume identifier of  a  single-tape  volume
                      set.

                   o  The  logical  name  previously  associated  with  a
                      resource.

                   o  A physical device name.





                                    2-6
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


                  Note that a tape allocation request requires  a  volume
                  identification.   If  you do not include the volume set
                  name followed by volume identifiers,  you  must  supply
                  the /VOLID switch.

                  log-name is the logical name  you  can  assign  to  the
                  resource that you will use.  The logical name can be up
                  to 6 alphanumeric characters.  A tape volume  set  must
                  always  have  a  logical name.  If you do not specify a
                  logical name for a tape volume set, the system defaults
                  to  the first six characters of the volume set name, or
                  up to  the  first  non-alphanumeric  character  of  the
                  volume  set name.  A disk volume set does not require a
                  logical-name.

                  To allocate more than  one  volume  set,  separate  the
                  volume set identifications with commas.

                  /switches  are  always  preceded  by  a  slash.    Some
                  switches can be used for any kind of volume set; others
                  are restricted to either tape or disk volume sets only.

                                           NOTE

                      The logical name and switches that you  specify
                      in the ALLOCATE command string are saved by the
                      system, and are  applied  when  you  MOUNT  the
                      volume set.

        You can obtain a list of the resources  that  are  allocated  and
        mounted  for  your  job  by  typing ALLOCATE with no arguments or
        switches.  The output is the same as the  output  from  the  SHOW
        ALLOCATION command.

        The following is  a  list  of  the  switches  you  can  use  with
        ALLOCATE.   The  center  column lists the kind of resource(s) the
        switch applies to.

            Switch      Device                  Function

        /ACTIVE         Disk     Requests that the volume set  be  placed
                                 in  your  job's  active search list when
                                 the structure is mounted.   (See  SETSRC
                                 in  the  TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual).
                                 The structure will become  part  of  the
                                 list  that the system automatically uses
                                 to search  for  a  file.   This  is  the
                                 default.  Complement to /PASSIVE.

        /CHECK          Tape     Prints  a list  of  all  the  allocation
                        Disk     requests  for  your   job.    (Same   as
                                 ALLOCATE with no arguments or switches.)

                                    2-7
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        /CREATE         Disk     Allows  files  to  be  created  on  this
                                 structure.     This    switch   is   the
                                 complement to /NOCREATE and implies  the
                                 /ACTIVE switch.

        /DENSITY:n-BPI  Tape     Specifies    the    recording    density
                                 (bits-per-inch)  of the volume set.  The
                                 density (n)  can  be:   200,  556,  800,
                                 1600,  or 6250.  The -BPI portion of the
                                 value is optional.

        /DISK           Disk     Identifies the  volume  set  as  a  disk
                                 volume set.

        /EXCLUSIVE      Disk     Ensures that  you  will  have  exclusive
                                 access  to the resource.  No other users
                                 will be allowed to access the  resource.
                                 You must have the same project number as
                                 the owner of the volume set.

        /HELP           Tape     Prints  a  brief   description   of  the
                        Disk     command.

        /LABEL-TYPE:arg Tape     Specifies  the kind of  label processing
                                 to  be  used  and  indicates  the  label
                                 status of the tape.  The  arguments  and
                                 their meanings are:

                                 ANSI      The   label    is    formatted
                                           according to ANSI standards.

                                 BLP       The tape  may or  may not have
                                 BYPASS    labels, but it is  treated  as
                                           if  it  were  unlabeled.  Only
                                           privileged users can use  this
                                           switch.

                                 EBCDIC    The  label   is   formatted in
                                 IBM       EBCDIC.

                                 USER-EOT  The   tape   does   not   have
                                           standard labels.  However, you
                                           will be informed at the end of
                                           tape.   Volume  switching (for
                                           multivolume tape volume  sets)
                                           will    not    be    performed
                                           automatically.  Therefore, the
                                           user  program  is  responsible
                                           for mounting subsequent tapes.
                                           This  is  useful  for programs
                                           that  create  unique   labels,
                                           such as BACKUP.

                                    2-8
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


                                 UNLABELED The tape is not labeled.  When
                                 NONE      a new tape is mounted from the
                                 NOLABELS  same volume set, you will  not
                                           be notified.  The switching of
                                           tapes in the volume  set  will
                                           be  handled  automatically  by
                                           the system.  You will  not  be
                                           informed  when the end of tape
                                           is reached.

        /NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape     Specifies that a new volume set is going
                                 to be created.  The operator will choose
                                 tapes  for  your  job  from  a  pool  of
                                 available  tapes.   This  switch implies
                                 /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /NOCREATE       Disk     Prevents the creation of files  on  this
                                 volume   set,  unless  you  specify  the
                                 volume set  when  you  write  the  file.
                                 This switch is the complement to /CREATE
                                 and it implies /ACTIVE.

        /NONOTIFY       Tape     Does not inform you when the resource is
                        Disk     mounted or dismounted.

        /NOTIFY         Tape     Sets  the  system to inform you when the
                        Disk     resource is mounted or dismounted.   The
                                 system  sends a message to your terminal
                                 when any of the following occurs:

                                  o  The resource is physically mounted.

                                  o  The resource is  dismounted  by  the
                                     operator  without  a request by your
                                     job.

                                  o  Another volume in a tape volume  set
                                     is mounted.

                                  o  The  disk  structure  is  locked  or
                                     unlocked by the operator.

        /PASSIVE        Disk     Requests that the structure be placed in
                                 your  job's passive search list.  (Refer
                                 to SETSRC program.) The system will  not
                                 search for files in the structure unless
                                 you specify the structure  name  in  the
                                 file  specification.  This switch is the
                                 complement to /ACTIVE.

        /QUOTA          Disk     Removed.


                                    2-9
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        /READ-ONLY      Tape     Specifies that you will not write on the
                        Disk     volume set.  Tape volume  sets  will  be
                                 checked  as  they are mounted, to ensure
                                 that they are write-locked.  This is the
                                 default for tape volume sets.

                                 On disk volume sets,  the  monitor  will
                                 not update access dates.  If you specify
                                 both  /EXCLUSIVE  and  /READ-ONLY,   the
                                 operator may write-lock the structure.

        /REMARK:"text"  Tape     Allows  you to  send  a message  to  the
                        Disk     operator identifying the  volume  to  be
                                 mounted.   The argument (text) can be up
                                 to 50 characters  long.   Use  quotation
                                 marks  around  the  text  if it contains
                                 spaces or punctuation marks.

        /SCRATCH        Tape     Instructs  the  operator  to   mount   a
                                 scratch tape.  By implication, a scratch
                                 tape will be returned  to  the  system's
                                 pool  of  available tapes, after you are
                                 finished with it.  This  switch  implies
                                 /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /SHARABLE       Disk     Allows  other  users   to   access   the
                                 resource.  This is the default function.
                                 This  switch  is   the   complement   to
                                 /EXCLUSIVE.

        /TAPE           Tape     Specifies that the volume set is a  tape
                                 volume  set.   This  switch  is required
                                 when the volume set has the same name as
                                 a catalogued disk volume set.

        /TRACKS:n       Tape     Specifies the number of  tracks  on  the
                                 tape.  The value n can be 7 or 9.

        /VOLID:volid    Tape     Identifies the volumes in a tape  volume
                                 set.   This  switch  can be used only if
                                 the   volid-list   was   not   specified
                                 previously.    If   the  volume  set  is
                                 comprised of more than one  volume,  the
                                 volids  should  be  separated by commas,
                                 and the volid-list should be enclosed in
                                 parentheses.

        /WRITE-ENABLE   Tape     Ensures   that  you  can  write  on  the
                        Disk     volume set.  For tape, the system checks
                                 each  volume as it is mounted to be sure
                                 that it is write-enabled.  This  is  the
                                 default for disk volume sets.

                                    2-10
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


   Associated Commands

        MOUNT            Makes a device available to you.

        DISMOUNT         Removes the specified volume set from your job's
                         search  list.   Dismounts  the volume set if you
                         have exclusive access to it.

        DEALLOCATE       Removes the  specified  resources(s)  from  your
                         job's list of allocated resources.

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints  a  list  of  the  resources   that   are
                         allocated and mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of system queues.

        CANCEL           Cancels a mount or queue request.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]










                                    2-11
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated:

        .DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
        [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]




                                    2-12
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              ALLOCATE Command


        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        deallocated.  The tape set is dismounted:

        .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
           VOLUME SET             RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        ----------------      -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


        .



















                                    2-13
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ASSIGN Command


                              ASSIGN Command




   Function

        The ASSIGN command allocates an input/output device to  your  job
        until  you  log  out  or  until  you issue a REASSIGN, FINISH, or
        DEASSIGN command.  (Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.)
        When  an  assignment  is  performed,  the system prints a message
        indicating the name of the physical device assigned to your job.

        You can ASSIGN any unrestricted device to your job.

   Format

        ASSIGN node-id_device-name: logical-name:

        Where:    node-id is an identifier of the node  from  which  the
                  device  is  to  be  assigned.   This  identifier can be
                  either a node name or a node number.   The  node-id  is
                  optional.   If  you omit the node-id, the node to which
                  your terminal is connected is assumed.

                  The node-id and the device name must be separated by an
                  underscore (_).

                  device-name:  is any physical device name or previously
                  assigned  logical name.  (Device names are discussed in
                  Section 1.9.1.)

                  logical-name is a logical name that you request  to  be
                  assigned to the physical device.  Separate the physical
                  device name from the logical name with a  space.   This
                  argument   is  optional.   Subsequent  ASSIGN  commands
                  replace the old logical name with the new one.  Logical
                  names are disassociated from the devices when you issue
                  the DEASSIGN command.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your job at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.








                                    2-14
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ASSIGN Command


   Associated Messages

        If the assignment is successful, the system prints a  message  in
        the following format:

        device-name: ASSIGNED

        where device-name is the physical device name .  If you specify a
        restricted device, the monitor prints the following message:

        ?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE

        You can access restricted devices using the MOUNT  command.   The
        following  message  occurs when the device is assigned to another
        job:

        ?Already assigned to job n

        Where:    n is the number of the  job  to  which  the  device  is
                  assigned.

   Examples

        1.  Assign line-printer number 2.

            .ASSIGN LPT2:<RET>

            LPT262 ASSIGNED

            .

        2.  Assign the logical name SYS to DSKB.

            .ASSIGN DSKB: SYS:<RET>

            DSKB:  ASSIGNED
            .

        3.  Assign the logical name TAPE to DTA5.

            .ASSIGN DTA5: TAPE<RET>

            DTA5:  ASSIGNED
            .

        4.  Assign a card reader from node COMET to your job.

            .ASSIGN COMET_CDR:<RET>

            CDR701:  ASSIGNED

            .

                                    2-15
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


                              ATTACH Command



   Function

        The ATTACH command detaches your current job (if you  are  logged
        in) and connects your terminal to a detached job.

        To prevent unauthorized access  to  detached  jobs,  the  monitor
        temporarily   creates   a   new   job   when   you   specify  the
        project-programmer number  argument.   This  temporary  job  runs
        LOGIN,  which  asks  for  your  password.   If  the temporary job
        exceeds the system's maximum job capacity, you may be  unable  to
        attach  to  the  specified  job.   In  this  case, your first job
        remains detached.  You will be unable to ATTACH to any job  until
        there is room in the system.

   Formats

        ATTACH
        ATTACH job [ppn]/switch
        ATTACH job/switch
        ATTACH [ppn]/switch
        ATTACH user/switch

        Where:    job is the job-number of the job to which your terminal
                  is to be attached.

                  [ppn] is the project-programmer number of  the  desired
                  job.  You must enclose the PPN in square brackets ([]).
                  If you are trying to attach from one  job  to  another,
                  and   both   have  the  same  PPN,  you  can  omit  the
                  project-programmer number argument.

                  user is the user-name associated with the desired job.

                  /switch is one of the following options:

                  /HELP:keyword  Prints the HELP  text.   Valid  keywords
                                 are  ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.  The
                                 ARGUMENTS keyword  displays  a  list  of
                                 valid   switches   and  arguments.   The
                                 SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
                                 switches  without  detailed information.
                                 The TEXT keyword displays the full  HELP
                                 text.   TEXT  is  the  default  keyword.
                                 /HELP may be abbreviated to /H.

                  /MAILCHECK:    If  YES,  checks  for  the  existence of
                   YES or NO     new mail.


                                    2-16
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


                  /MONITOR       Leaves  your terminal  at monitor level.

                  /SETTTY:       If YES,  sets   terminal  parameters  as
                   YES or NO     specified with the /TERMINAL switch.

                  /TERMINAL:key  Defines  the  terminal  characteristics.
                                 key  is  a  keyword.   The  keywords for
                                 /TERMINAL  are   described   after   the
                                 switches.

                  /USER          Leaves your terminal at user level.

        /Terminal Keywords

        The /TERMINAL switch  takes  a  list  of  parameters  to  specify
        terminal  attributes.   You can include multiple keywords for the
        /TERMINAL  switch,  in  which  case  you  must  enclose  them  in
        parentheses and separate them with commas.  Valid keywords are:

             ALTMODE:yes-no    Do [not] convert  ASCII  175  and  176  to
                               ESCAPE (Altmode (ASCII 33)).

             BLANKS:yes-no     Do [not] print blank lines.

             CRLF:yes-no       Do [not] give a free CRLF at right margin.

             DEFER:yes-no      Do [not] set deferred echo mode.

             DISPLAY:yes-no    Terminal is [not] a display terminal.

             ECHO:yes-no       Do [not] set terminal echo.

             EIGHTBIT:yes-no   Do [not] set 8-bit mode.

             ESCAPE:chr        Set <ESCAPE> translation character to chr.

             FILL:dnum         Set filler class to dnum (0<=dnum<=3).

             FORM:yes-no       Terminal does  [not]  have  hardware  form
                               feeds.

             GAG:yes-no        Do [not]  accept  SEND  messages  at  user
                               level.

             LC:yes-no         Terminal   does   [not]   have   lowercase
                               characters.

             LENGTH:dnum       Set the terminal screen length to dnum.

             LOCALCOPY:yes-no  Do [not] set terminal to local copy.



                                    2-17
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


             NOFILL            Do not set terminal fill (same as FILL:0).

             QUOTE:yes-no      Do  [not]   enable   control-V   character
                               quoting.

             RTCOMP:yes-no     Do [not] disable special effects of R  and
                               T.

             RCVSPEED:n        Set terminal receive speed to n baud.

             SBELL:yes-no      Do [not] ring  the  bell  when  output  is
                               stopped due to exceeding STOP/SSTOP value.

             SPEED:dnum        Set receive and  transmit  speed  to  dnum
                               baud.

             STOP:dnum         Set the terminal STOP counter to dnum.

             SSTOP:dnum        Set the terminal SSTOP counter to dnum.

             TABS:yes-no       Terminal does [not] have hardware tabs.

             TAPE:yes-no       Do [not] allow  XON  to  start  paper-tape
                               reader.

             TYPE:xxx          Set terminal type to xxx.

             UNPAUSE:chr       Set the unpause character to chr.

             UC:yes-no         Terminal   does   [not]   have   uppercase
                               characters only.

             WIDTH:dnum        Set carriage width to dnum columns.

             XONXOFF:yes-no    Do [not] allow S/Q to pause output.

             XMTSPEED:dnum     Set terminal transmit speed to dnum baud.

             Switches of the form /*xxxxxx are unique to  one  character.
             The  asterisk is NOT part of the switch name.  The following
             is a list of possible arguments which  may  be  accepted  by
             some switches and keywords:

             args       A list of keywords and optional arguments.

             atxt       A possibly quoted  string  of  ASCII  characters.
                        You  must  include  quotation marks if the string
                        contains any characters other than  alphanumerics
                        or a dash.




                                    2-18
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


             chr        A single, possibly quoted character or  an  octal
                        constant.

             cnum       Core  argument:   decimal  number   followed   by
                        optional K or P.

             dnum       Decimal number followed by optional K, M, or G.

             filespec   A standard TOPS-10 file designator  of  the  form
                        dev:file.ext[path].

             onum       Octal number followed by optional K, M, or G.

             pathspec   A standard TOPS-10 path designator of the form:
                        [project#,programmer#,sfd1,sfd2,...].

             prefix     A prefix is the  last  three  characters  of  the
                        "[LGNxxx ...]" or "%LGNxxx ..." messages.

             stxt       A possibly quoted string  of  SIXBIT  characters.
                        You  must  include  quotation marks if the string
                        contains any characters other than  alphanumerics
                        or a dash.

             yes-no     Switch and keyword arguments may  either  be  NO,
                        YES,  OFF (no), ON (yes), 0 (no), or 1 (yes).  In
                        addition, you can precede the switch  or  keyword
                        name  with  NO  to  negate  its  action  (such as
                        /NOxxxxxx instead of /xxxxxx:NO).

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy the core image of either job.

        Does not require that you be logged in.

   Restrictions

        Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.

        Batch programs cannot use this command.












                                    2-19
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


   Examples

        1.  Look at jobs 1 and 5 with SYSTAT.

            .SYSTAT 1 5<RET>

            1    27,5434    DET    QUOLST  36+62     to    6 #
            #MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG
            5    27,5434    TTY31  SYSTAT  19+SPY    RN    25 $
            $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

            Output shows that job 1 is detached, and job 5 is attached to
            terminal number 31.

            You attach to job 1 from job 5.

            .ATTACH 1<RET>
            FROM JOB 5

            The  two  jobs  have  the  same  project-programmer   number;
            therefore,  neither  the  project-programmer  number  nor the
            password is required.

            Check jobs 1 and 5 again.

            .SYSTAT 1 5<RET>

            1    27,5434    TTY31  SYSTAT    19+SPY  RN   25 $
            $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY
            5    27,5434    DET    SYSTAT    24+SPY ^C    23 $
            $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

            Job 1 is now attached to TTY31, and job 5 is detached.

        2.  You log in to the system.  You  are  given  job  7;  terminal
            number 116 is attached to your job (7).

            .LOGIN 27,235<RET>

            JOB 7 R5743A SYS #40/2 TTY116
            PASSWORD:   <RET>
            hh:mm    dd-mmm-yyyy    TUE

            You attach to an existing detached job (35) with a  different
            PPN.   This automatically detaches your current job (7).  You
            enter the correct password at the prompt and  LOGIN  attaches
            your terminal to job 35.

            .ATTACH 35<RET>
            PASSWORD:<RET>
            FROM JOB 7


                                    2-20
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ATTACH Command


            You attach to job 7 again.   You  do  not  need  to  enter  a
            password because job 7 has your original PPN.

            .ATTACH 7<RET>
            FROM JOB 35

            You attach to job 35 again, but you  mis-type  the  password.
            LOGIN does not give you a second chance.

            .ATTACH 35<RET>
            PASSWORD:<RET>
            ?CAN'T ATTACH TO JOB









































                                    2-21
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             BACKSPACE Command


                             BACKSPACE Command



   Function

        The BACKSPACE command spaces a magnetic tape backward a specified
        number  of  files  or  physical  records.   This command runs the
        COMPIL program, which interprets the command before running PIP.

   Formats

        BACKSPACE MTAn:  x FILES

        This command skips backward x files.


        BACKSPACE MTAn:  x RECORDS

        This command skips backward x records.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  Backspace 7 records on the tape on MTA2.

            .BACKSPACE MTA2: 7 RECORDS<RET>

            .

        2.  Backspace 11 files on the tape on MTA3.

            .BACKSPACE MTA3: 11 FILES<RET>

            .











                                    2-22
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CANCEL Command


                              CANCEL Command



   Function

        The  CANCEL  command  deletes  the  specified  request  from  the
        specified  queue.   You  can  delete  the  request  before  it is
        started, or you can terminate  the  request  after  it  has  been
        started.

   Format

        CANCEL request-type request-id/switch

        Where:    request-type is any of the following:

                       BATCH-REQUEST
                       CARD-PUNCH-REQUEST
                       MOUNT-REQUEST
                       PAPER-TAPE-REQUEST
                       PLOTTER-REQUEST
                       PRINTER-REQUEST

                  The request-type  argument  can  be  abbreviated  to  a
                  unique set of characters.

                  request-id is a request identification.   This  can  be
                  any one of the following:

                   o  The request-id number.  The  request-id  number  is
                      assigned  to the request when it is made, and it is
                      displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command.

                   o  The job name of the request.

                   o  A wildcard construction representing the job  names
                      of several requests.  The standard wildcards (* and
                      ?) are valid, as well as the percent  sign  (%)  to
                      represent   a   single  character.   Wildcards  are
                      described in Section 1.11.  Note, however, that the
                      asterisk  (*)  wildcard  cannot  be used to specify
                      mount requests.










                                    2-23
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CANCEL Command


        There are two switches that can be used  to  specify  the  CANCEL
        command:

           Switch                            Function

        /HELP             Prints information on your terminal  about  the
                          CANCEL  command.   When you use this switch, no
                          requests are cancelled.

        /JOBNAME:name     Specifies the name of the job.  This switch  is
                          used  to  specify  the name of the job when the
                          request-id is the same as the name  of  another
                          job.

   Associated Messages

        The following  message  is  printed  if  the  request  cannot  be
        cancelled:

        NO JOBS CANCELED

        This may be the result of trying to cancel a request  over  which
        you have no authority.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        The following example illustrates the use of the  CANCEL,  MOUNT,
        and SHOW QUEUES commands.

        A mount request is made for the structure GAL0:

        .MOUNT GAL0:/NOWAIT<RET>

        The mount queue is displayed with the SHOW QUEUES command:

        .SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>

        MOUNT QUEUE:
        VOLUME  STATUS  TYPE   WRITE   REQ#  JOB#            USER
        ------ -------  ----  -------  ----  ----  -----------------------
        BLKA   WAITING  DISK  ENABLE    650    35  MARTIN,C  [30,5621]
        GAL0   WAITING  DISK  LOCKED    672    59  MARY MAROTTA  [27,5434]
        THERE ARE 2 REQUESTS IN THE QUEUE




                                    2-24
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CANCEL Command


        To cancel the mount request, the user issues the CANCEL command:

        .CANCEL MOUNT GAL0<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST FOR GAL0 CANCELED]

        Again, the mount queue is displayed:

        .SHOW QUEUES MOUNT<RET>

        MOUNT QUEUE:
        VOLUME  STATUS  TYPE   WRITE   REQ#  JOB#            USER
        ------ -------  ----  -------  ----  ----  -----------------------
        BLKA   WAITING  DISK  ENABLED   650    35  MARTIN,C  [30,5621]
        THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE

        .            





































                                    2-25
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


                             CCONTINUE Command



   Function

        The CCONTINUE command  starts  program  execution,  leaving  your
        terminal at monitor level.

   Format

        CCONTINUE

        To use:

        1.  Begin running a program.

        2.  Exit from user mode by typing two CTRL/Cs.

        3.  Type CCONTINUE to  allow  the  previously  begun  program  to
            continue  running from the point at which you interrupted it.
            Your terminal is left at monitor level.

        4.  You can now use commands that do not require core, or you can
            detach  from  your  job  and  create  a  new job to run other
            programs.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Associated Commands

        CONTINUE - Continues the operation of your program, bringing your
        terminal back to user level.

        START - Starts  the  program  from  the  beginning  or  from  the
        specified address, leaving your terminal at user level.

        CSTART - Starts the program from the specified  address  or  from
        the beginning, but leaves your terminal at monitor level.

                                      NOTE

                If  your  program  requires  terminal  I/O,   the
                CCONTINUE  command allows the program to run only
                to  that  point.   The  program  then  waits  for
                terminal I/O, before it continues executing.  Use
                the CONTINUE command to re-enter user  level  and


                                    2-26
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


                accept or input the required I/O.




















































                                    2-27
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


   Example

        This is a program that finds all the numbers  up  to  10,000  and
        writes them out to disk.

        .TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>

                N = 0
        100     N = N + 1
                IF (N .EQ. 10000) GO TO 300
                WRITE (22, 201) N
                GO TO 100
        201     FORMAT (1X, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
        300     STOP 'DONE'
                END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE  NUMBER.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN: NUMBER
        NUMBER
        LINK:   LOADING
        [LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
        ^C
        ^C

        Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.

        Continue the program, leaving your terminal at monitor level.

        .CCONTINUE<RET>

        Type CTRL/T for  job  status.   CTRL/T  does  not  echo  on  your
        terminal.

        DAY:  8.85 RUN:  2.05 RD:0 WR:0 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC:000175

        The status message RN* indicates the program NUMBER is running.

        Detach from the job to do work on another job.

        .DETACH<RET>

        FROM JOB 19

                .

                .

                .



                                    2-28
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             CCONTINUE Command


        Later, attach to your original job.

        .ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>

        PASSWORD:<RET>

        Type CONTINUE to re-enter user level.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        System message (see NOTE).

        ?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST

        Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to enter user level.

        .^C

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        Program  message  indicates  execution  is  finished.   The  file
        containing  data  from  this  program  is named FOR22.DAT, and is
        stored in your default disk area.

        DONE

        END OF EXECUTION

        CPU TIME:4.60  ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83

        EXIT

        .

                                    NOTE

           It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
           because  the  program is running.  The program must be
           interrupted so that your terminal can access it.














                                    2-29
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CLOSE Command


                               CLOSE Command



   Function

        The CLOSE command terminates any input  or  output  currently  in
        progress on the specified device.

        Although most programs close files when they finish  executing  a
        command  string, the CLOSE command is provided for a program that
        does not terminate or a program that  is  being  debugged.   This
        command  causes all files which are open for output to be closed.
        If a CLOSE is not done, the next RESET by a command (R, RUN, GET)
        or program deletes any partially written disk files.

   Format

        CLOSE dev:

        Where:    dev:  is the logical or physical name of the device  on
                  which I/O is to be terminated.  dev:  cannot refer to a
                  disk device.  This argument is optional.

                  If dev:  is omitted, I/O is terminated on all  devices,
                  except  for  the  job's  controlling  terminal, and all
                  files are CLOSEd.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Restrictions

        You cannot continue the program after using CLOSE,  but  you  can
        restart at the beginning of your program or you can access DDT.

        You cannot specify a disk device as an argument.















                                    2-30
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CLOSE Command


   Examples

        1.  Terminate input from the paper-tape reader number 2.

            .CLOSE PTR2:<RET>

            .

        2.  Terminate I/O from all devices except your terminal.

            .CLOSE<RET>

            .

        3.  Attempt to terminate I/O from DSKB:   assigned  logical  name
            DEVA.

            .ASSIGN DSKB:  DEVA<RET>
             DSKB assigned
             .
             .
             .
            .CLOSE DEVA<RET>
             ?Not legal for disk-like devices
            .




























                                    2-31
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


                              COMPILE Command



   Function

        The COMPILE  command  produces  relocatable  binary  files  (.REL
        files)  and/or  compilation listings for specified source program
        files.  The system determines which language compiler to  use  by
        the  source  file  extension  or  by  switches you specify in the
        command string.  If you do not supply any switches in the command
        string,  but you do use a standard extension, the system uses the
        following compilers:

             Source File Extension    Compiler Used

             .ALG                     ALGOL compiler
             .BLI, .B10               BLISS-10 compiler
             .CBL                     COBOL compiler
             .F4 or .FOR              FORTRAN compiler
             .FAI                     FAIL compiler
             .MAC                     MACRO assembler
             .PAL                     PAL10 compiler
             .PAS                     Pascal compiler
             .P11                     MACY11 assembler
             .SAI                     SAIL compiler
             .SIM                     SIMULA compiler
             .SNO                     SNOBOL compiler

                                    NOTE

           The compiler cannot be changed with a switch,  but  it
           can  be  specified  with a switch when the source file
           has an unrecognizable or no extension.  If the  source
           file  has  a  non-standard  extension,  and you do not
           specify the compiler in a switch, FORTRAN is  used  as
           the  default  compiler.   All standard file extensions
           are listed in Appendix D.

        Usually, the system translates the source file  if  there  is  no
        corresponding  binary (.REL) file, or if the date and time of the
        source file is later than the date and time of the  binary  file.
        If the binary file is newer than the source file, the system does
        not generate a new .REL file.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running the appropriate language compiler.

        FAIL, MACY11, SAIL, and SNOBOL are recognized as  compilers  only
        if   the   appropriate   assembly   switches   are  set  at  your
        installation.


                                    2-32
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        Each  time  you  issue  the  COMPILE,  LOAD,  EXECUTE,  or  DEBUG
        commands,  the  system remembers the command, with its arguments,
        in a temporary file on disk  or  in  TMPCOR  if  they  are  small
        enough.   When  you  issue  one  of  these  commands  without  an
        argument, it causes the system to use the argument saved  in  the
        temporary file.

        The COMPILE command accepts several command constructions:  the @
        construction  (indirect  commands),  the  +  construction,  the =
        construction, and the < > construction.  Refer to Appendix C  for
        a complete description of each of these constructions.

   Format

        COMPILE file-spec/switch,file-spec/switch,...

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas.  The standard
                  file specification consists of:  a device name, a  file
                  name  (with  or  without an extension), and a directory
                  name.  If you omit the file specification argument, the
                  system  uses  the  argument  specified  in  a  previous
                  COMPILE-class command, if possible.  (Refer to  Section
                  1.9.)

                                           NOTE

                      Note that a maximum  of  150  processor  switch
                      characters can be passed to the compiler.

        You can use the following  switches  as  temporary  or  permanent
        switches.  (Refer to Section 1.8.4.) Switches relevant to COMPILE
        follow; all switches allowed with COMPILE can be used with  LOAD,
        EXECUTE and DEBUG.

          Switch                            Function

        /ALGOL        Compiles with ALGOL.  Assumed for  files  with  the
                      .ALG extension.

        /BINARY       Generates a binary file  for  each  file  compiled.
                      The  file name of the binary file is .REL.  This is
                      the default action.

        /BLISS        Compiles the file with BLISS-10.  Assumed for files
                      with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.

        /C68          Compiles with COBOL-68.

        /C74          Compiles with COBOL-74.



                                    2-33
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /COBOL        Compiles the file with COBOL.   Assumed  for  files
                      with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE      Forces a compilation of this source  file  even  if
                      the  relocatable  binary  file  is newer.  Use this
                      switch to obtain an extra compilation (for example,
                      to obtain a listing of the compilation).  NOCOMPILE
                      is the default switch.

        /CREF         Produces a listing file on the disk for  each  file
                      compiled, for later processing by the CREF program.
                      The file extension of the  listing  file  is  .CRF.
                      The  file can then be listed with the CREF command.
                      With COBOL files, the CREF file is appended to  the
                      output  file;  additional  commands  are  needed to
                      obtain the cross-referenced file.

        /DDT          Loads the program debugger DDT with the file.

        /DEBUG:(arg, arg,...)
                      Passes the arguments  to  FORTRAN.   Refer  to  the
                      TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.

        /DLIST        Creates a listing file with the extension .LST  and
                      stores  it  in  your  disk area.  You can have this
                      file printed on the line printer by using the PRINT
                      command.

        /F66          Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and  EXTERNAL
                      statements.

        /FAIL         Assembles the file with FAIL.   Assumed  for  files
                      with the .FAI extension.

        /FORTRAN      Compiles the file with a FORTRAN compiler.  Assumed
                      for  files with either the extension of .F4 or .FOR
                      and for  all  files  with  unrecognizable  compiler
                      extensions, if FORTRAN is the standard compiler for
                      your system.  This switch is necessary if the  file
                      has a unrecognizable compiler extension and FORTRAN
                      is not the standard compiler or is not the  current
                      default.

        /FORDDT       Loads the FORDDT debugger with the program.

        /FOROTS       Obsolete
        /FORSE






                                    2-34
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /FUDGE:file   Creates a temporary file that contains the  library
                      file  name and the names of the .REL files produced
                      by the command string.  When you  issue  the  FUDGE
                      command,  PIP  reads  this  file  to  generate  the
                      library .REL file.  (See the TOPS-10 MAKLIB  User's
                      Guide for information about library files.)

                      The  argument  to  /FUDGE  is  the   library   file
                      specification.  If you omit the file extension, the
                      default is .REL.

                      This switch is permanent  (sticky).   That  is,  it
                      pertains  to  all  .REL  files  generated  by  this
                      command string.

        /GFLOAT       Indicates that double-precision numbers are  to  be
                      stored  in  G-floating  format.  This format has an
                      expanded exponent range.  This option is  available
                      on KL10 processors only.

        /K?10         Designates the machine on which  the  program  will
                      execute  after  it has been loaded.  The default is
                      the processor that is executing the command.  The ?
                      can  be  replaced  by  L  or  S.  To designate a KS
                      processor, use /KS10.

        /LIBRARY      Loads  the  program   in   library   search   mode.
                      (/LIBRARY is identical to /SEARCH.)

        /LINK         Obsolete

        /LIST         Prints the listing file on the line printer (LPT:).
                      If the line printer is spooled or available to your
                      job, the listing file is automatically printed.

        /LMAP:file    Produces a  loader  map  while  loading.   The  map
                      contains local symbols.

        /MACRO        Assembles the file with MACRO.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the extension of .MAC.

        /MACY11       Assembles the file with MACY11.  Assumed for  files
                      with the extension .P11.  MACY11 is recognized as a
                      compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
                      set.  This switch is not supported.

        /MAP:file     Produces a loader map while loading.   The  default
                      file name is MAP.MAP.





                                    2-35
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /NEW          Runs the appropriate  language  compiler  from  the
                      experimental  library area [1,5] (device NEW:).  If
                      the compiler does not exist on device NEW:,  COMPIL
                      tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

        /NOBINARY     Does not generate binary files.  This switch,  when
                      combined  with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is useful
                      when  compiling   programs   solely   to   generate
                      listings.

        /NOCOMPILE    Compiles the source file if there is no relocatable
                      file   newer  than  the  source  file.   Note  that
                      /COMPILE always compiles, /REL never compiles,  and
                      /NOCOMPILE    (the    default    switch)   compiles
                      conditionally.

        /NODEBUG      Does not pass  previously  specified  arguments  to
                      FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST       Does not  generate  listing  files.   This  is  the
                      default action.  Complement to /LIST.

        /NOOPTIMIZE   Does not optimize the object source code.  This  is
                      the default.  Complement to /OPTIMIZE.

        /NOSEARCH     Does not load the program in library  search  mode.
                      Complement to /SEARCH.

        /OPTIMIZE     Optimizes the object code of a FORTRAN program.

        /OLD          Runs the appropriate  language  compiler  from  the
                      system library [1,3] of old programs (device OLD:).
                      If the compiler does  not  exist  on  device  OLD:,
                      COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

        /PAL10        Assembles the file with PAL10.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the .PAL extension.

        /PASCAL       Compiles the file with Pascal.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the .PAS extension.

        /REL          Loads an existing .REL file rather than compiling a
                      new one.  Refer also to /COMPILE and /NOCOMPILE.

        /SAIL         Compiles the file with  SAIL.   Assumed  for  files
                      with the .SAI extension.

        /SAVE         Saves the core image to disk in an executable  file
                      after it is loaded.




                                    2-36
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        /SEARCH       Loads the program in library search mode.  (/SEARCH
                      is identical to /LIBRARY.)

        /SELF         Runs the appropriate language compiler from  device
                      DSK:   instead  of  from the system library (device
                      SYS:).  This switch is useful if you keep a private
                      copy of a compiler in your own disk area.

        /SIMULA       Compiles the file with SIMULA.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the .SIM extension.

        /SNOBOL       Compiles the file with SNOBOL.  Assumed  for  files
                      with the extension .SNO.  SNOBOL is recognized as a
                      compiler only if the appropriate assembly switch is
                      set.  This switch is not supported.

        /SSAVE        Saves the core image in a sharable executable  file
                      after the program is loaded.

        /SYS          Compiles the program with the compiler  from  SYS:.
                      This is the default.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the appropriate language compiler, destroying your  original
        core image.

   Restrictions

        You cannot use wildcard constructions with COMPILE.

        A language compiler appearing more  than  once  within  a  single
        command  string  cannot  access  more  than  one  disk area.  For
        example, the following is invalid:

        .COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW,SUBRTN.F10/SYS

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE TESPRG.F10/NEW
        .COMPILE SUBRTN.F10/SYS










                                    2-37
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


   Examples

        1.  Compile PROG (with the null extension) with FORTRAN, TEST.MAC
            with  MACRO, and MANAGE (with the null extension) with MACRO.
            A listing file is generated for MANAGE.  The files  generated
            are PROG.REL, TEST.REL, MANAGE.REL, and MANAGE.LST.

            .COMPILE PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/MACRO/LIST<RET>

            FORTRAN:  PROG
            MAIN
            MACRO:  TEST
            MANAGE
            EXIT      

            .

        2.  Compile SIGN.MAC with MACRO, TABLES (with the null extension)
            with  FORTRAN,  and  MULTI.ALG with ALGOL.  Listing files are
            generated for SIGN.MAC and MULTI.ALG.

            .COMPILE/LIST SIGN.MAC,TABLES/NOLIST,MULTI.ALG<RET>

            MACRO:  SIGN
            FORTRAN:  TABLES
            MAIN
            ALGOL:  MULTI
            EXIT

            .

        3.  Compile the files DIVIDE, SUBTRC, and ADD  with  the  FORTRAN
            compiler,  even  if current .REL files exist.  Generate files
            to be processed by CREF.  The files generated are DIVIDE.CRF,
            DIVIDE.REL, SUBTRC.CRF, SUBTRC.REL, ADD.CRF and ADD.REL.

            .COMPILE/CREF/COMPILE DIVIDE,SUBTRC,ADD<RET>

            FORTRAN:  DIVIDE
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  SUBTRC
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  ADD
            MAIN.

            .







                                    2-38
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              COMPILE Command


        4.  Compile the files  contained  in  the  command  file  LIBALL.
            Create  a  temporary  file  which  contains all the .REL file
            names and the library  file  name  (MONITR.REL).   The  FUDGE
            command  creates  the library file, MONITR.REL, with the .REL
            files in the same order as they were specified in the command
            file.

            .COMPILE/FUDGE:MONITR.REL@LIBALL<RET>

            FORTRAN:  DIVIDE
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  SUBTRC
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  ADD
            MAIN.

            .FUDGE<RET>

        5.  Compile and execute the program NUMBER.FOR.

            .COMPILE NUMB2.FOR<RET>

            FORTRAN:  NUMB2
            MAIN.

            .EXECUTE
            LINK:  LOADING
            [LNKXCT NUMB2 EXECUTION]
            DONE
            END OF EXECUTION
            CPU TIME:  0.12  ELAPSED TIME:  0.53
            EXIT

            .



















                                    2-39
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTEXT Command


                              CONTEXT Command


   Function

        The CONTEXT command displays the status of a job's  context.   It
        also  allows  you  to  create, kill, and switch between contexts.
        When issued without arguments, the command gives you  information
        about  your  current contexts, such as the name of the program in
        core for that particular context.  You can also  use  CONTEXT  to
        create parallel contexts.  Parallel contexts permit you to switch
        between programs (in separate contexts) without waiting for  them
        to  reinitialize.  You can specify switches to list the status of
        a particular context or delete a context.  (Section 1.5  contains
        a discussion of contexts.)

   Format

        CONTEXT argument/switch

        Where:   argument  is  optional.   With  no  arguments,   CONTEXT
                 displays  information  about all of your job's contexts,
                 including the program loaded in each context.

                 /switch is one of the options listed below.

        Argument, when specified, can be one of the following:

             handle       A  context  name  or  number.   This   argument
                          switches  your  job's  current  context  to the
                          specified one.  A  period  (.)  can  replace  a
                          context name for the current context only.

             name=number  Where  name  is  a   one   to   six   character
                          alphanumeric  string  to be associated with the
                          specified context number.

             =            An equal sign can be  used  to  create  a  new,
                          parallel context, without switching the current
                          context to the newly created context.

        /Switch, when specified with the handle argument, can be  one  of
        the following:

             /KILL  Deletes the specified parallel context.

             /LIST  Lists information about the specified context only.






                                    2-40
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTEXT Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Preserves your core image.

   Restrictions

        To use the CONTEXT command, you must be at monitor level, and the
        job must be halted.

   Associated Commands

        POP    Returns you to a previous superior context,  and  destroys
               the current context.

        PUSH   Creates an inferior context.

   Examples

        1.  Name context 1 (the current context, in this case) TOPLVL.

            .CONTEXT TOPLVL=1

        2.  Display the status of the current context.

            .CONTEXT
            Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
            Contexts     Superior     Prog     Idle time
            * TOPLVL 1                PATH

            Notice that the current context,  TOPLVL,  is  marked  by  an
            asterisk  (*).   For  this  particular  example,  one of four
            allotted  contexts  is  being  used,  none   of   the   1,000
            saved-pages  is  in  use,  the  context  name  is TOPLVL, the
            context number is 1, and the PATH program is running in  this
            context.














                                    2-41
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTEXT Command


        3.  Create an adjacent context, run  MAIL  under  it,  and  exit.
            Then look at the context status.

            .CONTEXT=

            .MAIL
            21 messages, 116 blocks.

            MS>quit

            .CONTEXT
            Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 4/1000
            Context     Superior     Prog     Idle time
            TOPLVL  1                PATH      19.78
            *       2                MS

            Note the differences from the previous status.  There are now
            two  contexts  in  use, and the current, unnamed context 2 is
            running MS.  Also, PATH has been idle for 19.78 seconds since
            the  last  CONTEXT  command was issued.  MS will restart very
            quickly if you type CONTINUE, because it  does  not  have  to
            re-initialize.

        4.  Finally, kill one context that is  running  MS,  and  examine
            your status.  You have to move to another context to do this,
            because you cannot kill the current context.

            .CONTEXT 1

            .CONTEXT 2/KILL

            .CONTEXT
            Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 0/1000
            Context     Superior     Prog      Idle time
            * TOPLVL   1             PATH

            Context 1 is now the current and only context.
















                                    2-42
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTINUE Command


                             CONTINUE Command



   Function

        The CONTINUE command continues your program  from  the  point  at
        which  you  interrupted it.  You interrupt program execution with
        CTRL/C.  After you use CONTINUE, your terminal  returns  to  user
        level.

   Format

        CONTINUE

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Requires core.

   Example

        This is a program that finds all the numbers up to 10,000.

        .TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>

                N = 0
        100     N = N + 1
                IF (N .EQ.  10000) GO TO 300
                WRITE (22, 201) N
                GO TO 100
        201     FORMAT (1X, I14,' IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
        300     STOP 'DONE'
                END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE  NUMBER.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN:NUMBER
        NUMBER
        LINK:LOADING
        [LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
        ^C

        ^C

        Type two CTRL/Cs to halt the program.





                                    2-43
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              CONTINUE Command


        Detach from the job to do work on another job.

        .DETACH<RET>

        FROM JOB 19

                .

                .

                .

        Later, attach to your original job.

        .ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>

        PASSWORD:<RET>

        Type CONTINUE to enter user level.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST

        System message (see NOTE).

        Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE to enter user level.

        .^C

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        DONE

        END OF EXECUTION

        CPU TIME:4.60  ELAPSED TIME:12:12.83

        EXIT

        .

        Program  message  indicates  execution  is  finished.   The  file
        containing  data  from  this  program  is named FOR22.DAT, and is
        stored in your default disk area.

                                    NOTE

           You must type CTRL/C to re-enter user  level,  because
           the   program   is   running.   The  program  must  be
           interrupted so that your terminal can access it.


                                    2-44
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                COPY Command


                               COPY Command



   Function

        The COPY command copies a file from one  device  to  another,  or
        within  a  device,  file  structure,  or  directory.  The command
        string can contain one output specification  and  any  number  of
        input specifications.

   Format

        COPY dev:file.ext[directory]<nnn>=dev:file.ext[directory],...

        Where:    The file to the left of  the  equal  sign  (=)  is  the
                  destination,  or  output  file,  and the file(s) to the
                  right of  the  equal  sign  is  the  source,  or  input
                  file(s).

                  dev:  is a physical or logical  device  name.   If  you
                  omit a device name, the system assumes DSK:.

                  file.ext is the name of the file(s) to be used in input
                  or  output.   If  you  omit  the  output file name, the
                  system  defaults  to  the  input  file  name.   If  you
                  transfer  many  input  files  to  one  output file, the
                  system  combines  the  files.   You  can  use  wildcard
                  constructions with the COPY command.

                  [directory] is the disk area in which the files are  to
                  be  read  or written.  If you type this area before the
                  file name, the system uses this area as the default for
                  all  succeeding files.  If you omit this argument, your
                  default directory is accessed.  You can transfer  files
                  to or from another directory only if you have access to
                  that directory.

                  <nnn> is the protection code to be given to the  output
                  file.   If  you  omit this argument, the system assigns
                  the system standard protection code, even if the  input
                  file   already   has  a  non-standard  protection  code
                  associated with it.  Protection codes are described  in
                  Section 1.9.4.

                  Use the equal sign  (=)  to  separate  the  destination
                  (output) side from the source (input) side.






                                    2-45
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                COPY Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Runs the PIP program.

   Example

        Find file NOTICE.TXT in SYS:

        .DIRECT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>

        NOTICE TXT 2 <155> 6-SEP-79 DSKC:[1,4]

        Search your own directory.

        .DIRECT DSKB:NOTICE<RET>

        %WLDNSF No such files as NOTICE.TXT

        Copy NOTICE from SYS: into your directory on DSKB:

        .COPY DSKB:NOTICE.TXT=SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>

        Check your directory to find NOTICE on DSKB:

        .DIR NOTICE<RET>

        NOTICE TXT 2 <055> 6-SEP-79 DSKB:[27,5434]
        .





















                                    2-46
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CORE Command


                               CORE Command



   Function

        The CORE command prints or changes  the  amount  of  core  memory
        assigned  to  your  job.  Because programs usually allocate core,
        you generally do not need this command.

        If your job is locked in core and you issue this command  with  a
        nonzero argument, the monitor prints an error message.

   Format

        CORE nx

        Where:    n is a decimal number; this argument is optional.
                  You may not assign more than one  section  of  core  to
                  your job.

                  If n is 0, the low and high segments are  removed  from
                  the virtual addressing space of your job.

                  If n is greater than 0, n represents the  total  number
                  of  blocks of core to be assigned to your job from this
                  point on.

                  If n is  less  than  the  high-segment  size  plus  the
                  minimum  low-segment size, n plus the high-segment size
                  is assumed.

                  x is either K or P.  K represents units of 1024  words.
                  P   represents   512-word   pages.    For  example,  3P
                  represents three pages or 1536 words.  If  you  do  not
                  specify x, K is assumed.

        If you omit nx, the monitor prints the amount of  core  currently
        being  used  by  your job, as well as the octal page number, page
        (accessibility) status, and the origin of the pages.   This  form
        of the CORE command does not change the core assignment.












                                    2-47
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CORE Command


        Page status can be any of the following:

         o  executable (EX)

         o  readable (RD)

         o  writable (WR)

         o  sharable (SH)

         o  locked (LK)

         o  allocated-but-zero (AZ).

        Origin  can  be  private  pages,   spy   pages,   or   the   file
        specification.

        The total pages in the space is also displayed.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not operate when your job is in run state.

   Example

        Use CORE to look at the amount and contents  of  memory  assigned
        after using MAIL.

        .CORE<RET>

        Page number     Page status     Origin
        0-74            EX RD WR        Private pages
        76-165          EX RD WR        Private pages
        620-674         EX RD SH        DSKA:MS[1,4]
        Total of 162 pages

        Virt. mem. assigned 118+45P (Current limit: 16384P Max limit: 16384P)
        Phys. mem. assigned 118+45P (Guideline: 16384P Max limit: 999P)
        Swap space left: 81502P












                                    2-48
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


                              CPUNCH Command



   Function

        The CPUNCH command places entries in the card punch queue.  Refer
        to the QUEUE command for further information and examples.

   Format

        CPUNCH dev:jobname=file-spec/switches

        Where:    dev:  is the name of the individual device on which the
                  file  is  to  be punched.  (For example, CDP2:  is card
                  punch number 2.) The device name is optional.  To punch
                  the  file  on  a  card  punch  at a different node, use
                  devSxx;, where xx is the node  number.   (For  example,
                  CDPS22:  is a card punch on node number 22.)

                  jobname is the name of the job you  are  entering  into
                  the  queue.   The  default  job name is the name of the
                  first file in the request.

                  The equal sign is required if you  specify  either  the
                  device or job name.

                  file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas, for the files
                  being processed.  A file specification is in  the  form
                  dev:file.ext[directory].  (Refer to Section 1.9.)

                  If you specify neither a job name nor  a  file-spec,  a
                  list  of  all  the jobs in the card punch queue will be
                  printed on your terminal.

                  The wildcard construction can  be  used  for  the  file
                  specifications.















                                    2-49
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


                  /switches are  listed  below.   The  switches  to  this
                  command  can  be divided into two categories, depending
                  on whether the switch can be used only once, or can  be
                  used  more  times, in a single command string.  The two
                  categories are:

                   o  Queue-Operation Switches

                      These switches can be used only once in  a  command
                      string.   They  affect  the entire request, and you
                      can place them anywhere in the command string.   If
                      you  have  used  one of these switches in a command
                      string, you cannot use it again in the same string.
                      Many  commands have a /NO construction, which takes
                      a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the  /NO
                      construction of a switch in the same command string
                      with the positive construction.

                   o  File-Control Switches

                      These switches can be used any number of  times  in
                      the  command  string.   You  can  also  use the /NO
                      construction  of  a  switch  in  the  same  command
                      string.  To achieve a temporary or permanent effect
                      by the placement of the switch,  refer  to  Section
                      1.8.4.

          Switches       Category                   Function

        /ABEFORE:        File         Queues the  file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /ACCOUNT:name    Queue        Specifies the account  to which the
                         operation    job should be charged.

        /AFTER:          Queue        Processes  the  request  after  the
         date-time       operation    specified time.

        /ALLFILES:       Queue        Accepts the request only if  all of
         YES or NO       operation    the files in the request exist.  By
                                      default, if any of the files do not
                                      exist, the others will be processed
                                      appropriately.      This     switch
                                      specifies that if any file does not
                                      exist,    no    files   should   be
                                      processed.  The value YES or NO  is
                                      optional.   If  you use YES, all of
                                      the files you specified must exist.
                                      If    NO,    existing   files   are
                                      processed, and warning messages are
                                      printed   for  files  that  do  not
                                      exist.
                                    2-50
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /ASINCE:         File         Queues the  file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is later  than  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /BEFORE:         File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates before the specified date and
                                      time.

        /CHARACTERISTIC: Queue        Specifies an output characteristic.
         arg             operation    You  can  find  a   list   of   the
                                      characteristics  arguments  defined
                                      for  your  system   in   the   file
                                      SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

        /CHECK           Queue        Prints on your terminal  a list  of
                         operation    the queue entries made by your job.

        /COPIES:n        File         Repeats the  output  the  specified
                         control      number of times  (n  must  be  less
                                      than 64).  The default is one copy.

        /CREATE          Queue        Makes a new entry  in the specified
                         operation    queue.   This   function   is   the
                                      default,  except when listing queue
                                      entries.

        /DEFERRED        Queue        Causes   deferred   output   to  be
                         operation    released to the card  punch  queue.
                                      You  must  use one of the following
                                      switches with /DEFERRED.

                                      /CREATE to  complete  the  released
                                      output requests.

                                      /KILL  to  eliminate  the  released
                                      output requests.

                                      Refer to the SET DEFER command  for
                                      more information.

        /DELETE          File         Deletes  the file  after processing
                         control      it.  Same as /DISPOSE:DELETE.











                                    2-51
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /DESTINATION:    Queue        Specifies the  node  at  which  the
         node            operation    file will be punched.  Use the node
                                      name  or node number to specify the
                                      node.   The  files  will   not   be
                                      punched  at any host other than the
                                      host  to  which  the  terminal   is
                                      connected.

        /DISPOSE:arg     File         Controls  the  disposition  of  the
                         control      file after it  is  processed.   The
                                      arguments to this switch are:

                                      DELETE deletes the file  from  your
                                      directory after processing it.

                                      PRESERVE preserves the  file  after
                                      processing it.

                                      RENAME renames the file  from  your
                                      directory  into  the spooling area.
                                      Thus,  the  file   is   effectively
                                      deleted immediately.

        /DISTRIBUTION:   Queue        Specifies  text  to  place  in  the
         "text"          operation    distribution field, on  the  banner
                                      page  of  output.  You can use this
                                      field    to     include     mailing
                                      information,  or the location where
                                      the  operator  should   leave   the
                                      listing.   The text field may be up
                                      to  39   alphanumeric   characters,
                                      including punctuation and spaces if
                                      the text  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

        /ERBINARY        File         Prints an error message if a binary
                         control      file  is  included  in  the  queue.
                                      This is the default.

        /ERNONE          Queue        Prints an error message if no files
                         operation    match the file specification.  This
                                      is the default.

        /ERPROTECTION    Queue        Prints  an  error  message  if  the
                         operation    the request involves  a  protection
                                      violation.  This is the default.

        /FAST            Queue        Prints the entries in the queue  on
                         operation    your terminal.




                                    2-52
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /FILE:arg        File         Specifies how the file format is to
                         control      interpreted.      The     following
                                      arguments  can  be  used  with this
                                      switch:

                                      ASCII interprets the file as  ASCII
                                      text.

                                      ELEVEN interprets the file as  four
                                      8-bit  bytes  in  each 36-bit word.
                                      The bits are arranged as follows:

                                           Byte 1:  bits 10-17
                                           Byte 2:  bits 2-9
                                           Byte 3:  bits 28-35
                                           Byte 4:  bits 20-27

        /FORMS:arg       Queue        Specifies  any special cards  to be
                         operation    used.  Available forms  are  listed
                                      in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

        /GENERIC         File         Sends output  to the next available
                         control      card punch.  Complement to /UNIT.

        /HEADER:         File         Makes header cards  for  the  file.
         YES or NO       control      The default is YES.

        /HELP:arg        Queue        Prints information on your terminal
                         operation    about  the  QUEUE  command.    This
                                      switch  does  not  queue any files.
                                      The  switch  can  be   used   alone
                                      (/HELP)   or   with   one   of  the
                                      following arguments:

                                      TEXT  prints  a  message  with  the
                                      format  and  switches  of the QUEUE
                                      command.  This is the same as /HELP
                                      with no arguments.

                                      SWITCHES prints a list of  all  the
                                      switches  available  with the QUEUE
                                      command.

        /JOBNAME:name    Queue        Specifies the name of the job.  The
                         operation    name can be up  to  6  alphanumeric
                                      characters.

        /KILL            Queue        Removes  the  specified  entry from
                         operation    the queue.  You  must  specify  the
                                      job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
                                      left  of  the  equal  sign  in  the
                                      command line.

                                    2-53
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /LENGTH:n:m      File         Processes   only  the  files  whose
                         control      length is between n and m blocks in
                                      length.

        /LIMIT:n         Queue        Limits  the output to the specified
                         operation    number of cards.

        /LIST:arg        Queue        Prints  information  about the jobs
                         operation    in the queue.   If  you  use  /LIST
                                      alone,  it  shows  the  jobs in the
                                      queue.  This is equivalent to using
                                      the    CPUNCH   command   with   no
                                      arguments and no  switches.   /LIST
                                      can  be  abbreviated  to  /L.   The
                                      switch can also  take  one  of  the
                                      following arguments:

                                      ALL shows all data about each queue
                                      request.

                                      FAST shows a fast list of the queue
                                      requests.

                                      JOBS shows a list of  the  jobs  in
                                      the  queue.  (Same as /LIST with no
                                      arguments.)

                                      SUMMARY shows only the summary line
                                      of the queue display.

        /MESSAGE:arg     Queue        Specifies   the information  to  be
                         operation    output if  an  error  occurs.   The
                                      arguments are:

                                      ADDRESS        Prints the  location
                                                     in  memory where the
                                                     error occurred.

                                      CONTINUATION   Prints   information
                                                     about the error.

                                      FIRST          Prints  a   one-line
                                                     error message.

                                      PREFIX         Prints    the    six
                                                     character prefix.







                                    2-54
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /MODIFY          Queue        Alters the specified  parameter  in
                         operation    the  specified  job.   This  switch
                                      requires   that   you  have  access
                                      rights  to  the  job.    You   must
                                      specify  the  job name, /REQUESTID,
                                      or /SEQUENCE,  left  of  the  equal
                                      sign  in  the  command  line.  This
                                      switch can  be  used  to  modify  a
                                      previously   submitted  request  as
                                      long as the request  has  not  been
                                      started.

        /NEW:            File         Accepts   file   specifications  of
         YES or NO       control      files that do not exist.

        /NOHEADER        File         Does not make header cards for each
                         control      file.

        /NONEW           File         Does not accept file specifications
                         control      of files that  do  not  yet  exist.
                                      This is the default.

        /NONOTIFY        Queue        Does not notify you when the job is
                         operation    finished.  This is the default.

        /NONULL          Queue        Prints  a fatal  error message on a
                         operation    null request.  This is the default.

        /NOOPTION        Queue        Suppresses  reading  the SWITCH.INI
                         operation    file.

        /NOPHYSICAL      File         Allows logical names for devices in
                         control      the command string.

        /NOSTRS          File         When  scanning  structures  for the
                         control      file,   takes   only   the    first
                                      occurrence.   This  is  the default
                                      function.

        /NOTES:"text"    Queue        Prints the text in the header card.
                         operation












                                    2-55
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /NOTIFY:         Queue        Notifies  you on your terminal when
         YES or NO       operation    your request is completed.   To  be
                                      notified,   use   /NOTIFY  with  no
                                      argument, or with YES or  1  as  an
                                      argument.         To       suppress
                                      notification,  use   /NOTIFY:0   or
                                      /NOTIFY:NO.   By  default,  you are
                                      not  notified  when  a  request  is
                                      finished.   Special  cases, such as
                                      printing of  batch  log  files  and
                                      output  of  deferred requests, will
                                      never  notify  you  when  they  are
                                      completed.

        /NULL:           Queue        Does   not   print  a  fatal  error
         YES or NO       operation    message if the specified  files  do
                                      not exist.

        /OKBINARY        File         Accepts  files   whose   extensions
                         control      indicate that they  include  binary
                                      information.   Normally, files with
                                      extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,  .REL,
                                      .EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
                                      for processing.

        /OKNONE          Queue        Does not produce a warning  message
                         operation    if  no   files   match   the   file
                                      specification.

        /OKPROTECTION    Queue        Does not print an error message  if
                         operation    a file protection violation occurs.

        /OPTION:name     Queue        Uses   the option  line  QUEUE:name
                         operation    in the SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI
                                      files are described in Appendix B.

        /PHYSICAL        File         Ignores logical device names in the
                         control      command line.

        /PRESERVE        File         Saves       the      file     after
                         control      processing   it.    This   is   the
                                      default.   This  switch is the same
                                      as /DISPOSE:PRESERVE.

        /PRIORITY:n      Queue        Assigns  the  specified priority (n
                         operation    is 1 to  63)  to  the  request.   A
                                      larger number has greater priority.






                                    2-56
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /PROTECTION:nnn  Queue        Specifies  a  protection code to be
                         operation    associated with the request.  Queue
                                      requests may have protection codes.
                                      These   are   exactly   like   file
                                      protection codes.  Refer to Section
                                      1.9.4.

        /PUNCH:arg       File         Punches  the  file in the specified
                         control      mode.  If you omit this switch, the
                                      file  is  punched  according to the
                                      data mode specified  in  the  file.
                                      The following arguments can be used
                                      with this switch:

                                      026     Punches the  files  in  026
                                              Hollerith mode.

                                      ASCII   Punches the files in  ASCII
                                              card mode.

                                      BCD     Punches the  files  in  026
                                              Hollerith  mode.   (Same as
                                              026.)

                                      BINARY  Punches  the  files  in   a
                                              checksummed   binary   card
                                              mode.

                                      IMAGE   Punches the files in  image
                                              card format.

        /REMOTE          Queue        Prints on your terminal a  list  of
                         operation    remote queues.  Must be  used  with
                                      /DESTINATION.

        /REQUESTID:n     Queue        Specifies        the        request
                         operation    identification number  of  the  job
                                      you  wish  to  modify or terminate.
                                      The request  identification  number
                                      is  assigned  when  you  queue  the
                                      request.

        /RUN:file        Queue        Executes  the specified  file after
                         operation    the request is accepted.

        /RUNCORE:n       Queue        Executes  the specified  file in nK
                         operation    of  core  after  the   request   is
                                      accepted.





                                    2-57
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


        /RUNOFFSET:n     Queue        Executes the  specified  file  with
                         operation    start offset n after the request is
                                      accepted.

        /SEQUENCE:n      Queue        Specifies  a sequence number to aid
                         operation    in  identifying  a  request  to  be
                                      modified or deleted.

        /SINCE:          File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates after the specified date  and
                                      time.

        /STRS:           Queue        Searches  for   the   file  on  all
         YES or NO       operation    structures in the search  list  and
                                      takes    every   occurrence.    The
                                      default is to take just  the  first
                                      occurrence of the file.

        /TMPFIL:file:    Queue        Creates  a temporary  file on  TMP:
         text            operation    and enters the text into the file.

        /UNIT:n          Queue        Specifies the unit  number  of  the
                         operation    device you want the output sent to.

        /USERNAME:       Queue        Specifies  the  user name field for
         "name"          operation    the banner page  of  output.   This
                                      field   can   contain   up   to  39
                                      alphanumeric  characters,  and  may
                                      include  punctuation  and spaces if
                                      the name  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

   Associated Messages

        When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system  prints  a
        message on the user's terminal.  The message is in the form:

             [CARD-PUNCH JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]

             Where:    name is the name of the job in  the  queue.   This
                       can  be  specified  by  the  user.   Otherwise, it
                       defaults to the name of  the  first  file  in  the
                       request.

                       nnn is the  number  that  represents  the  request
                       identification of the job in the queue.

                       xxx is the maximum number of cards  that  the  job
                       will use.




                                    2-58
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CPUNCH Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN if you desire a list of queue entries.

   Examples

        1.  Punch the file SYSTAT.MAC in ASCII format.

            .CPUNCH SYSTAT.MAC/PUNCH:ASCII<RET>
            [CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #75, LIMIT 33]
            .          

        2.  Punch the file SYSTAT.REL in binary format, but do not  begin
            output until after 5:00 P.M.

            .CPUNCH SYSTAT.REL/PUNCH:BINARY/AFTER:17:00<RET>
            [CARD-PUNCH JOB SYSTAT QUEUED, REQUEST #43, LIMIT 200]

            .          




























                                    2-59
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CREF Command


                               CREF Command



   Function

        The CREF command runs the CREF program.  If you have created  any
        files  to  be  processed with CREF (using the /CREF switch with a
        COMPILE, LOAD, DEBUG, or EXECUTE command),  CREF  processes  them
        and  prints  them  on  the line printer.  The file containing the
        names of these CREF files is then deleted so that subsequent CREF
        commands will not list them again.

        When the logical device name LPT:  is assigned to a device  other
        than  the  line printer, the CREF files are stored on that device
        with the same file name and the extension .LST.   (See  the  CREF
        manual in the TOPS-10 Software Notebooks for more information.)

   Format

        CREF file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a valid  file  specification.   (Refer  to
                  Section  1.9.)  When you supply a file specification in
                  the command  line,  CREF  produces  a  cross-referenced
                  listing  file  for  the  specified file.  If you do not
                  give an argument to the command, CREF uses the argument
                  saved  from a previous COMPILE-class command.  If there
                  is no stored argument, CREF prompts  with  an  asterisk
                  (*).

        You can use the following switches with the CREF command.

        Switch                  Function

        /A        Advances magtape by one file (may be repeated).

        /B        Backspaces magtape by one file (may be repeated).

        /C        Cancels SWITCH.INI switch defaulting.

        /D        Permits default switches as for SWITCH.INI.

        /H        Types this text.

        /K        Kills user-defined symbol table listing.

        /M        Suppresses user macro's, OPDEF's, symbol table.

        /O        Lists the opcodes.



                                    2-60
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CREF Command


        /P        Preserves (does not delete) input files.

        /R        Restarts listing and prompts for line number.

        /S        Suppresses  program  listing  and  lists  only   symbol
                  tables.

        /W        Rewinds tape.

        /Z        Indicates zero DECtape directory.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  Compile the files contained in the command  file  PROMAC  and
            produce CREF listing files on the disk.

            .COMPILE/CREF@PROMAC<RET>
            FORTRAN:  INPUT1
            MAIN.
            FORTRAN:  INPUT2
            MAIN.

            Process and list the cross-referenced listing files  produced
            by  the COMPILE command.  The argument is the stored argument
            that was used in the COMPILE command.

            .SET SPOOL LPT<RET>
            .CREF<RET>
            CREF:INPUT1
            CREF:INPUT2
            .














                                    2-61
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                CREF Command


        2.  Compile and load the files  contained  in  the  command  file
            CONALL.   Produce  a  loader  map with the file name NAME and
            CREF files on disk.

            .LOAD/CREF/MAP:NAME@CONALL<RET>
            MACRO:  HIGH
            MACRO:  SHARE
            EXIT

            Assign the logical name LPT to magnetic tape unit  1.   Store
            the CREF files on MTA1: to be output at a later time.

            .ASSIGN MTA1 LPT<RET>
            MTA261 ASSIGNED

            .CREF<RET>
            CREF:  HIGH
            CREF:  SHARE
            .


































                                    2-62
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CSTART Command


                              CSTART Command



   Function

        The  CSTART  command  begins  executing  the  program  from   the
        beginning,  or  from  the  address  you  specify  in the command,
        leaving your terminal at monitor level.  The  CSTART  command  is
        the  same  as  the  START  command,  except  that  it leaves your
        terminal at monitor level.

   Format

        CSTART addr

        Where:    addr is the address at which execution is to  begin  if
                  it is other than the location specified within the file
                  (.JBSA).   If  you  do  not  specify  an  address,  the
                  starting  address  comes  from .JBSA (stored in the job
                  data area).

                  To use CSTART:

                  1.  Use LOAD or GET to bring a program into memory.

                  2.  Type one or two CTRL/Cs to halt your job with  your
                      terminal at monitor level.

                  3.  Type CSTART to begin running the program  from  the
                      beginning.

                  4.  You can now  type  additional  commands  from  your
                      terminal  if  they  do not require core, or you can
                      detach your terminal from the job, using the DETACH
                      command.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Restrictions

        This command should not be used if your  program  requests  input
        from the terminal.  This command is not available to batch users.






                                    2-63
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CSTART Command


                                    NOTE

           The CSTART command allows the program to run from  the
           beginning  or  from  the  specified  address.   If the
           program requires terminal I/O, the program  will  wait
           until you access user level with the START or CONTINUE
           commands.  Then your terminal  can  accept  output  or
           provide input.

   Example

        This is a program to find all the numbers up to 10,000.

        .TYPE NUMBER.FOR<RET>
                N = 0
        100     N = N + 1
                IF(N .EQ.  10000) GO TO 300
                WRITE(22,201) N
                GO TO 100
        201     FORMAT(1X, I14, 'IS BETWEEN 1 AND 10000')
        300     STOP 'DONE'
                END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE  NUMBER.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN:NUMBER
        NUMBER
        LINK:LOADING
        [LNKXCT NUMBER EXECUTION]
        ^C
        ^C

        Type two CTRL/C's to halt the program.

        Type CSTART.

        .CSTART<RET>

        Type CTRL/T for  job  status.   CTRL/T  does  not  echo  on  your
        terminal.

        DAY: :07:20 RUN: :01:00 RD:1093 WR:21 NUMBER 4+15P RN* PC000200

        The status message RN* indicates the NUMBER program is running.








                                    2-64
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               CSTART Command


        Detach from the job to do work on another job.

        .DETACH<RET>

        FROM JOB 19

                .

                .

                .

        Later, attach to your original job.

        .ATTACH 19 [27,5434]<RET>

        PASSWORD:<RET>

        Type CONTINUE to return  to  user  level.   System  message  (see
        NOTE).

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?PLEASE TYPE ^C FIRST

        Type CTRL/C and CONTINUE, to access user level.

        .^C

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        DONE

        END OF EXECUTION

        CPU TIME:4:6.88  ELAPSED TIME:5:30.97

        EXIT

        .

        Program  message  indicates  execution  is  finished.   The  file
        containing  data  from  this  program  is named FOR22.DAT, and is
        stored in your default disk area.

                                    NOTE

           It is necessary to type CTRL/C to re-enter user level,
           because  the  program is running.  The program must be
           interrupted so that your terminal can access it.



                                    2-65
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DAYTIME Command


                              DAYTIME Command



   Function

        The DAYTIME command prints the date and the time of day,  in  the
        following format:

        wkdy dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss

        Where:    wkdy is the name of day of the week
                  dd is the day of the month
                  mmm is the name of the month
                  yy is the year
                  hh is the hour
                  mm is the minute
                  ss is the second to the nearest hundredth

   Format

        DAYTIME

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Example

        .DAYTIME<RET>
        MONDAY 29-FEB-88 16:46:42

        .
















                                    2-66
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


                                DDT Command



   Function

        The DDT command starts DDT, the dynamic system debugger.  If  DDT
        is already loaded with your core image, DDT starts at the address
        given by the right half of .JBDDT in the Job Data Area.  (The Job
        Data  Area  stores  information  pertinent  to  your  job.  It is
        described in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) If DDT is not yet
        loaded,  the  monitor  tries  to  merge  a special version of DDT
        (called VMDDT)  into  the  address  space  starting  at  location
        700000.

        If DDT is not yet loaded and the monitor cannot read in VMDDT, it
        prints  the  message:   ?NO  START ADDRESS.  The monitor will not
        read in VMDDT if your core image is execute-only.

        The DDT command copies  the  saved  program  counter  value  into
        .JBOPC  and  starts  the  program  at  an  alternate  entry point
        specified in .JBDDT (beginning address  of  DDT  as  set  by  the
        monitor).   DDT contains commands to allow you to start or resume
        at any desired address.

        If your job was executing a monitor  call  when  interrupted  (at
        monitor  level  and  not  in  TTY  input wait or SLEEP mode), the
        monitor sets a status bit (UTRP) and continues  the  job  at  the
        location  where  it  was  interrupted.   When  the  monitor  call
        processing is complete, the monitor clears the status  bit,  sets
        .JBOPC  to the address following the monitor call, and then traps
        to the DDT address found in .JBDDT.

        If your job is at monitor level and in TTY INPUT  WAIT  or  SLEEP
        mode,  the  trap to the DDT address occurs immediately and .JBOPC
        contains the address of the monitor call.  If your job is at user
        level, the trap also occurs immediately.  Therefore, it is always
        possible to continue the interrupted program  after  trapping  to
        DDT by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.

        (For additional information on the  DDT  program,  refer  to  the
        TOPS-10 DDT Manual.)

   Format

        DDT







                                    2-67
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        If .JBDDT is zero, the monitor will merge  SYS:VMDDT.EXE  at
        location 700000.

   Example

        The following example shows how the DEBUG and  DDT  commands  are
        used.   Begin  by  writing  a  simple  program  with  a  spelling
        (syntactical) error.

        .TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
           TITLE   TEST    SIMPLE PROGRAM
           SEARCH  MACTEN,UUOSYM

        HIMSG:     ASCIZ   \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        \
        TEST:      JCLF
                   RESET  
                   OUTSTR  HIMSG 
                   MONRT.  

                   END     TEST

        Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        ?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
           JCLF    0
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z

        Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
        corrected  by  using  the  SOS  editor to replace "JCLF" with the
        correct "JFCL".

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT: TEST.MAC

        *SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
        600 TEST: JFCL
        *ES<RET>

        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]




                                    2-68
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


        After correcting the file, reload the program, again using DEBUG.

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z

        The debugger successfully loaded  the  program;  no  errors  were
        detected.  The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
        .REL file.  Next, save the core image of the loaded program,  and
        begin execution.

        .SAVE TEST<RET>
        TEST SAVED

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        The program ran successfully.  However, when you try to  run  the
        program  again  with the CONTINUE command, the command fails.  No
        provision has been made for rerunning the program.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303


        Start the debugger, using the DDT command:

        .DDT<RET>
        DDT

        13303/ 0  ^
        TEST+3/ MONRT.<LF>
        PAT../ 0 JRST TEST<RET>
        ^Z

        While running DDT, alter the core image of  the  program:   since
        the  error  was  reported  at address 13303 (octal), examine that
        address.  Then type an uparrow (^)  to  see  the  previous  line,
        which  is  the  last line of program code.  Then type a line-feed
        (<LF>) to see the next line.  "PAT.." is on the next line.  Here,
        insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.

        Next, start the program:

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

                                    2-69
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DDT Command


        Then CONTINUE the program.  The execution is successful.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!


        Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT:TEST.MAC
        *P^:*<RET>
        100  TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
        200  SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
        300 
        400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        500 \
        600 TEST: JFCL   
        700  RESET
        800 OUTSTR HIMSG  
        900 MONRT.   
        1000 
        1100 END  TEST
        *I950<RET>
        950 JRST TEST  
        *ES<RET>
        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]

        Load the program, begin execution, and rerun the program:

        .LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
        LINK: LOADING
        EXIT

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .

        Execution is successful.








                                    2-70
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


                            DEALLOCATE Command



   Function

        The DEALLOCATE command removes a volume set from your job's  list
        of  allocated  resources.   DEALLOCATE  implies a DISMOUNT of the
        specified resource.  The logical  name  for  the  volume  set  is
        cleared,  and  you  will  not be able to use that logical-name to
        refer to the volume set.

   Format

        DEALLOCATE resource-name,resource-name...

        Where:    For disk volume sets, the resource-name is  the  volume
                  set-name or the structure name.

                  For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the  logical
                  name.

        DEALLOCATE has one switch:

        /HELP     Prints a short description  of  the  command.   If  you
                  specify an argument with this switch, the argument will
                  be ignored.

   Associated Commands

        ALLOCATE         Informs the system of your  future  need  for  a
                         resource.

        MOUNT            Requests ownership of a resource.

        DISMOUNT         Removes the  resource  from  your  job's  search
                         list.  Dismounts the volume set from the unit if
                         no other users are accessing the resource.

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints  a  list  of  the  resources   that   are
                         allocated and mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.


                                    2-71
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]

        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>
        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1  
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0




















                                    2-72
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

        .DISMOUNT  DSKR<RET>
        [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]

        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0





                                    2-73
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DEALLOCATE Command


        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        deallocated.  The tape set is deallocated:

        .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


        .



































                                    2-74
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEASSIGN Command


                             DEASSIGN Command



   Function

        The DEASSIGN  command  returns  one  or  more  devices  currently
        assigned  to  your job to the monitor's pool of available devices
        and clears the logical names associated with them.   If  you  are
        running  an  assembly-language  program,  and have an INITialized
        device, it is not returned to the system's pool unless  you  have
        issued a RELEASE or RESET monitor call; only the device's logical
        name is cleared.

   Format

        DEASSIGN dev:

        Where:    dev:  is either the  logical  or  the  physical  device
                  name.   This  argument  is  optional.   If  you  do not
                  specify this argument, the system deassigns all devices
                  from  your  job except your job's controlling terminal.
                  Also, the system clears any logical name that might  be
                  associated with the controlling terminal.

   Associated Messages

        If you specify a nonexistent device, the monitor prints:

        ?NO SUCH DEVICE

        and leaves all current device  assignments.   If  you  specify  a
        device  that  has  never  been  ASSIGNed to your job, the monitor
        prints:

        ?devxxn WASN'T ASSIGNED

        and leaves all current job assignments.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.







                                    2-75
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEASSIGN Command


   Example

        Assign a card reader to  your  job.   Card  reader  number  1  is
        assigned.

        .ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
        CDR261 ASSIGNED

        Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your  job.
        Show the devices that are busy.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY    LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT
        CDR261     24    AS

        Deassign the card reader.

        .DEASSIGN CDR<RET>

        Again, show the busy devices.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY    LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT

        Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices.  Therefore,  it
        is available to any user.









                                    2-76
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


                               DEBUG Command



   Function

        The DEBUG command compiles the specified source files, loads  the
        resulting  .REL  files  (if  necessary),  and prepares the loaded
        program for debugging.  A  system  debugging  program  is  loaded
        first,  followed  by your program, including local symbols.  Upon
        completion of  loading,  the  system  transfers  control  to  the
        debugging program.

        The debugging program that is used depends on the first  file  in
        the  command string.  If this file is a COBOL source file, COBDDT
        (the COBOL debugging program) is used.  If the file is a  FORTRAN
        source file, FORDDT is used.

        Generally, a program debugged with  the  DEBUG  command  requires
        more  core  to  execute  than  the same program compiled with the
        EXECUTE  command  requires.   Extra  space  is  occupied  by  the
        debugging  program  and additional debugging information, such as
        local symbols.

        Each time the system executes a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or  DEBUG
        command,  the  system  stores the command argument in a temporary
        file.  When you issue one of these  commands  without  arguments,
        the  system  uses  the  arguments  stored  in the temporary file.
        (Refer to Appendix C).  EXECUTE runs the COMPIL program before it
        runs the appropriate compiler and debugger.

   Format

        DEBUG file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas.

        The following switches can be used to modify the command string:

            Switch                         Function

        /ALGOL              Compiles the file with  ALGOL.   Assumed  for
                            files with the extension of .ALG.

        /BIN                Generates  a  binary  file  for   each   file
                            compiled.   The  file extension of the output
                            file is .REL.  This is the default action.

        /BLISS              Compiles the file with BLISS-10.  Assumed for
                            files with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.


                                    2-77
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /C68                Runs the specified COBOL version.
        /C74

        /COBOL              Compiles the file with  COBOL.   Assumed  for
                            files with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE            Forces a compilation of this file even  if  a
                            binary file exists with a newer date and time
                            than the source file.  This switch causes  an
                            extra compilation, because compilation is not
                            normally performed  if  the  binary  file  is
                            newer than the source file.

        /CREF               Produces a cross-referenced listing  file  on
                            the  disk  for  each  file compiled for later
                            processing by the  CREF  program.   The  file
                            extension  of  the  output file is .CRF.  The
                            file  can  then  be  listed  with  the   CREF
                            command.   However,  with  COBOL  files,  the
                            cross-referenced listing is  always  appended
                            to the listing file.  You must issue the CREF
                            command to obtain the listing.

        /DDT                Loads DDT and disregards the extension of the
                            first  file  in  the  command  string.   This
                            switch applies to all subsequent files.

        /DEBUG:             Passes  the  specified  arguments to FORTRAN.
         (arg, arg,...)     Refer to the TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language
                            Manual.

        /DLIST              Creates a .LST file in your disk  area.   You
                            can  list  the  file on the line printer with
                            the PRINT command.

        /F10                Obsolete
        /F40

        /F66                Applies FORTRAN-66 rules  for  DO  loops  and
                            EXTERNAL statements.

        /FOROTS             Obsolete
        /FORSE

        /FORTRAN            Compiles the file with  a  FORTRAN  compiler.
                            Assumed  for files with the extension .F4 and
                            .FOR  and  all  files   with   unrecognizable
                            compiler   extensions,   if  FORTRAN  is  the
                            standard compiler.  This switch is  necessary
                            if  the  file  has  a unrecognizable compiler
                            extension and FORTRAN  is  not  the  standard
                            compiler or is not the current default.

                                    2-78
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /FUDGE:file         Creates a disk file containing the  names  of
                            the   .REL  files  produced  by  the  command
                            string.  When the FUDGE switch is given,  PIP
                            reads  this  file  to generate a library .REL
                            file.    (Refer   to   the   FUDGE    command
                            description.)  The argument to this switch is
                            a valid file specification, as  described  in
                            Section 1.9.

        /GFLOAT             Indicates that double-precision  numbers  are
                            to  be  stored  in  G-floating  format.  This
                            format has an extended exponent range.   This
                            option is available on KL10 processors only.

        /K?10               Designates the processor  where  the  program
                            will execute after it has been loaded.  These
                            switches   are   necessary   for   FORTRAN-10
                            programs   because   the  compiler  generates
                            different  codes  for  different  processors.
                            The  default  is  the  processor  where  your
                            program is running.  The ?  can  be  replaced
                            by L or S.

        /LIBRARY            Loads the file in library search mode.   This
                            mode  causes  a  program  file  in  a special
                            library to be loaded only if one or  more  of
                            its   declared  entry  symbols  satisfies  an
                            undefined global request in the source  file.
                            The  system  libraries  are  always searched.
                            (See the LINK documentation.) /LIBRARY is the
                            same as /SEARCH.

        /LINK               Obsolete

        /LIST               Generates a disk listing file for  each  file
                            compiled.   The  file extension of the output
                            file is .LST.   These  files  can  be  listed
                            later  with  the  PRINT command.  If the line
                            printer is being spooled for  this  job,  the
                            listing files are written on device LPT:  and
                            are automatically spooled when you log out.

        /LMAP               Produces a  loader  map  during  the  loading
                            process that contains the local symbols.

        /LOADER             Obsolete

        /MACRO              Assembles the file with MACRO.   Assumed  for
                            files with the .MAC extension.




                                    2-79
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /MACY11             Assembles the file with MACY11.  Assumed  for
                            files  with  the .P11 extension.  This switch
                            is not supported.

        /MANTIS             Compiles the file with the  MANTIS  debugging
                            information.   This switch affects FORTRAN-40
                            programs only.  This switch is not supported.

        /MAP:file           Produces a loader map  during  loading.   The
                            file  name  can be specified.  If the file is
                            not specified, the default is MAP.MAP.

        /NEW                Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from
                            the experimental system library (device NEW:)
                            area [1,5].  If the compiler does  not  exist
                            on  device  NEW:,  COMPIL  tries to obtain it
                            from device SYS:.

        /NOBIN              Does not generate binary files.  Binary files
                            are  generated  unless  you give this switch.
                            This switch, when combined with the /LIST  or
                            /CREF   switch,   is  useful  when  compiling
                            programs solely for the purpose of generating
                            a listing.

        /NOCOMPILE          Complement  to  the  /COMPILE  switch,   this
                            switch  does  not  force  a  compilation on a
                            source file whose date is not  as  recent  as
                            the  date  on  the  binary file.  This switch
                            differs from the  /REL  switch,  in  that  it
                            turns off all compilation, even if the source
                            file is newer than the .REL file.  /NOCOMPILE
                            is the default action.

        /NODEBUG            Does not pass arguments that were  previously
                            specified to FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST             Does not generate listing files.  This is the
                            default action.

        /NOMANTIS           Compiles  the   file   without   the   MANTIS
                            debugging  information.   This switch affects
                            FORTRAN-40 programs only.  This switch is not
                            supported.

        /NOOPTIMIZE         Does not optimize the object source code  for
                            FORTRAN programs.






                                    2-80
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        /NOSEARCH           Loads all routines of the  file  whether  the
                            routines are referenced or not.  Because this
                            is the default action, this  switch  is  used
                            only   to   turn   off  library  search  mode
                            (/LIBRARY).   The  /NOSEARCH  default  is  to
                            search the system libraries.

        /OLD                Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from
                            the  system  library  of old programs (device
                            OLD:), which resides on disk area [1,3].   If
                            the  compiler  does not exist on device OLD:,
                            COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.

        /OPTIMIZE           Optimizes the object source code for  FORTRAN
                            programs.

        /PAL10              Assembles the file with PAL10.   Assumed  for
                            files with the .PAL extension.

        /PASCAL             Compiles the file with Pascal.   Assumed  for
                            files with the .PAS extension.

        /REL                Uses the existing .REL files  although  newer
                            source files might be present.

        /SAVE               Saves the core image of the loaded program.

        /SEARCH             Loads the files in library search mode.   The
                            action  is  identical to that of the /LIBRARY
                            switch.

        /SELF               Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from
                            device  DSK:   instead  of  from  the  system
                            library (device SYS:).  This switch is useful
                            if  you  keep a private copy of a compiler in
                            your own disk area.

        /SNOBOL             Compiles the file with SNOBOL.   Assumed  for
                            files  with  the .SNO extension.  This switch
                            is not supported.

        /SSAVE              Saves the core image of the loaded program in
                            a sharable executable file.

        /SYS                Runs the appropriate language processor  from
                            the  system  library  (device  SYS:)  area of
                            [1,4].  This is the default action.






                                    2-81
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


   Restriction

        A language processor appearing more than  once  within  a  single
        command  string  cannot  specify  more  than  one disk area.  For
        example, the following is invalid:

        .DEBUG MAIN.MAC/SELF,PART1.MAC/OLD

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE MAIN.MAC/SELF
        .COMPILE PART1.MAC/OLD
        .DEBUG /REL MAIN,PART1

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Runs  the   appropriate  processor,   LINK,   and  the  debugger,
        destroying your core image.

   Example

        The following example shows how the DEBUG and  DDT  commands  are
        used.   Begin  by  writing  a  simple  program  with  a  spelling
        (syntactical) error.

        .TYPE TEST.MAC<RET>
         TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
         SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM

        HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        \
        TEST: JCLF
         RESET  
         OUTSTR HIMSG 
         MONRT.  

         END TEST

        Use DEBUG to compile and load the program:

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        ?LNKUGS 1 UNDEFINED GLOBAL SYMBOL
         JCLF 0
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z



                                    2-82
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        Loading showed that the program contained an error, which is then
        corrected  by  using  the  SOS  editor to replace "JCLF" with the
        correct "JFCL".

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT: TEST.MAC

        *SJCLF<ESC>JFCL<ESC>.<ESC><RET>
        600 TEST: JFCL
        *ES<RET>

        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]

        After correcting the file, reload the program, again using DEBUG.

        .DEBUG TEST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: TEST
        LINK: LOADING
        [LNKDEB DDT EXECUTION]
        DDT
        ^Z

        The debugger successfully loaded  the  program;  no  errors  were
        detected.  The new TEST.REL file automatically supersedes the old
        .REL file.  Next, save the core image of the loaded program,  and
        begin execution.

        .SAVE TEST<RET>
        TEST SAVED

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        The program ran successfully.  However, when you try to  run  the
        program  again  with the CONTINUE command, the command fails.  No
        provision has been made for rerunning the program.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        ?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER PC 013303

        Start the debugger, using the DDT command:

        .DDT<RET>
        DDT

        13303/ 0  ^
        TEST+3/ MONRT.<LF>

        PAT. ./ O JRST TEST<RET>
        ^Z

                                    2-83
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        While running DDT, alter the core image of  the  program:   since
        the  error  was  reported  at address 13303 (octal), examine that
        address.  Then type an uparrow (^)  to  see  the  previous  line,
        which  is  the  last line of program code.  Then type a line-feed
        (<LF>) to see the next line.  "PAT.." is on the next line.  Here,
        insert the call "JRST TEST," then exit DDT.

        Next, START the program:

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        Then CONTINUE the program.  The execution is successful.

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!


        Finally, edit the file with the changes made to the core image:

        .SOS TEST.MAC<RET>
        EDIT:TEST.MAC
        *P^:*<RET>
        100  TITLE TEST SIMPLE PROGRAM
        200  SEARCH MACTEN,UUOSYM
        300
        400 HIMSG: ASCIZ \HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!
        500 \
        600 TEST: JFCL   
        700  RESET
        800  OUTSTR HIMSG  
        900  MONRT.   
        1000 
        1100  END   TEST
        *I950<RET>
        950  JRST TEST  
        *ES<RET>
        [DSKC:TEST.MAC]













                                    2-84
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DEBUG Command


        Load the program, begin execution, and run the program again:

        .LOAD TEST.MAC<RET>
        LINK: LOADING
        EXIT

        .START<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .CONTINUE<RET>

        HI THERE - THIS IS A SIMPLE TEST PROGRAM!

        .

        Execution is successful.




































                                    2-85
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DECLARE Command


                              DECLARE Command



   Function

        The DECLARE command defines new monitor commands to run specified
        programs  for  your  job.   You  can  invoke  any  program with a
        user-defined command.  When you define  a  command,  the  monitor
        searches  your  command table and then the monitor command table.
        Exact definitions are  given  precedence.   An  exact  definition
        occurs  if  you  type  the complete, exact command name.  Inexact
        definitions occur when a command is abbreviated.   If  there  are
        conflicts  within  the  exact  definitions,  your definitions are
        given precedence.

        To use abbreviations  when  typing  a  command,  you  can  define
        "uniqueness"  for  a  command.  The monitor will behave as if the
        command had been given an exact definition.  If conflicts  arise,
        the monitor searches its own command table without searching your
        command table.

   Format

        DECLARE name/switch=filespec

        Where:    name  is  a  command  name  of  1  to  6   alphanumeric
                  characters.

                  filespec is  the  complete  file  specification  of  an
                  executable program.  There is no default filespec.

                  /switch is one of the optional switches listed below.

        Switches allowed by this command are:

         Switch                          Function

        /AUTOPUSH      Defines a command to automatically PUSH to a  new,
                       temporary  context,  in  which  the called program
                       will run.  When  the  program  is  completed,  the
                       original  context  is  restored, and the temporary
                       context is destroyed.

                                              NOTE

                           Do not define the PATH or DECLARE programs
                           with the AUTOPUSH switch.  This is because
                           the original context is restored  and  all
                           changes  made in the temporary context are
                           destroyed when they finish running.


                                    2-86
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DECLARE Command


        /CLEAR         Clears all user-defined commands.  Do not  include
                       a command name with this switch.

        /KILL          Removes the definition of a command.   Requires  a
                       command name.

        /LIST          Lists the command names currently defined by  your
                       job.   Do  not  include  a  command name with this
                       switch.

        /UNIQUE:n      Defines the number of characters  in  the  command
                       that  must  be  typed  to  be  interpreted as your
                       definition and that  cannot  be  overridden  by  a
                       monitor  command.   The variable n can be 1, 2, 3,
                       4, ALL, NONE, or a list of these values  separated
                       by  commas and enclosed in parentheses.  /NOUNIQUE
                       is the same as /UNIQUE:NONE.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Use DECLARE to define a command, LOOK, to run the SETSRC program.

        .DECLARE LOOK=SYS:SETSRC.EXE<RET>

        Use DECLARE to display your job's command list.   Other  commands
        in the following example were defined previously.

        .DECLARE/LIST<RET>

             EDIT DSR    TAPE LOOK















                                    2-87
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DECLARE Command


        Use the new command.  Use CTRL/T to display the current state  of
        your  job,  including  the  name  of the program that is running.
        Note that, although CTRL/T is shown here, it  does  not  echo  on
        your terminal.

        .LOOK<RET>

        *<CTRL/T>

        Day:  1:02:23 Run:  0.13 Rd:32 Wr:0 SETSRC 4+OP T1 PC:002030
        Input wait for TTY52:
        <CTRL/Z>
        EXIT

        .






































                                    2-88
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DELETE Command


                              DELETE Command



   Function

        The DELETE command deletes files.  Because  of  protection  codes
        associated with files, it is not usually possible to delete files
        in another user's directory.  Once a file is deleted,  it  cannot
        be recovered.

   Format

        DELETE file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file  specifications,  separated  by  commas.  The full
                  wildcard construction (* and ?) can be used in the file
                  specification.  (Refer to Section 1.11.)

                  If you do not specify a device name or a file structure
                  name,  your job's search list is used.  You can specify
                  a  directory  name  before  the  file  names  and  that
                  directory  becomes the default for all subsequent files
                  in that command line.  If you specify a directory  name
                  after  a  file name, the directory applies only to that
                  file.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Permanently deletes the file(s).

        Destroys your core image.














                                    2-89
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DELETE Command


   Examples

        1.  Delete all files with .MAC extension.

            .DELETE *.MAC<RET>

            FILES DELETED:
            DSKB:T1.MAC
            DSKB:T2.MAC
            DSKB:T3.MAC
            14 BLOCKS FREED

            .

        2.  Delete the file TEST.FOR.

            .DELETE DSKC:TEST.FOR<RET>

            FILES DELETED:
            DSKC:TEST.FOR
            3 BLOCKS FREED

            .

        3.  Delete all files with  the  file  name  TEST  followed  by  2
            alphanumeric characters or less, and the extension .FOR.

            .DELETE TEST??.FOR<RET>

            FILES DELETED:
            DSKB:TEST1.FOR
            DSKB:TEST2.FOR
            DSKB:TEST22.FOR
            DSKB:TESTER.FOR
            23 BLOCKS FREED

            .
















                                    2-90
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEPOSIT Command


                              DEPOSIT Command



   Function

        The DEPOSIT command deposits information in your core area  (high
        or low segment).  This function is useful for debugging programs.

   Format

        D lh rh addr

        Where:    lh is the octal value to be deposited in the left  half
                  of the location.  This argument is required.

                  rh is the octal value to be deposited in the right half
                  of the location.  This argument is required.

                  addr is the address of  the  location  into  which  the
                  information  is  to  be  deposited.   This  argument is
                  optional.  If you omit the address, the system deposits
                  the  data  into  the location following the address you
                  specified in the last D command or  into  the  location
                  you  looked  at  with your last E command.  The command
                  used is the one specified most recently.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Example

        Deposit in location 141.

        .D 266000 2616 141<RET>

        Examine location 140.

        .E 140<RET>
        000140/ 265720 40011

        Because the address is  omitted,  the  deposit  made  is  in  the
        location of the last E command (that is, location 140).

        .D 47000 1<RET>



                                    2-91
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DEPOSIT Command


        Examine the location specified in the previous D command.

        .E<RET>
        000140/ 047000 000001
        .
















































                                    2-92
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               DETACH Command


                              DETACH Command



   Function

        The DETACH command disconnects the terminal from your job without
        changing  the status of your job.  Your terminal is then free, so
        that you can start a new job, attach to another detached job,  or
        cause your terminal to become a slave terminal for another job.

   Format

        DETACH

   Characteristics

        Detaches your terminal.

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Restrictions

        This command is not available to batch users.

   Example

        Show the status of your job.

        .SYSTAT .<RET>
        1   27,5434   TTY263   SYSTAT   6+7     ^C

        .

        System message shows that  your  terminal  line  number  is  263.
        Detach your terminal.

        .DETACH<RET>
        FROM JOB 24

        Show the status of your job.

        .SYSTAT .<RET>
        1   27,5434   DET   SYSTAT   6+7     ^C

        .

        System message shows your job is detached.



                                    2-93
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


                             DIRECTORY Command



   Function

        The DIRECTORY command prints a  list  of  the  file  names  in  a
        specified  directory  area.   The standard output consists of the
        following information:  file name, file name extension, length of
        the  file  in  blocks,  protection  code,  creation date, version
        number, account, structure name, and directory name.

   Format

        DIRECTORY output file-spec=input file-spec

        Where:    input file-spec is a single file  specification,  or  a
                  string  of  file  specifications separated by commas or
                  plus signs.  The devices used on  input  can  be  DSK:,
                  DTA:,  or  MTA:   If the device is a magnetic tape, the
                  tape is rewound before and after the listing  operation
                  and  analyzed to determine if it is a BACKUP tape.  The
                  default input specification is DSK:*.*, and  the  files
                  in  all  file  structures  defined by your job's search
                  list are listed.  Generally, a device name,  file  name
                  extension,  or  a directory name that precedes the file
                  name becomes the default for all  succeeding  files  in
                  the list.

                  output file-spec = This argument and the equal sign are
                  optional.  If you omit the entire output specification,
                  the default is TTY:.  If you do not specify  an  output
                  device,  the  default  device  is  DSK:.  If you do not
                  specify an output file name, and  one  is  needed,  the
                  file  name is generated from the time of day as hhmmss.
                  The default output extension is .DIR.

        The full wildcard construction (* and/or ?) can be  used  in  the
        input  file-spec.  When a wildcard designation is used, DIRECTORY
        limits its search for the file to certain directories.  When  you
        give  a  wildcard  designation  for a file name or extension, the
        program only searches the specified  directory  or  your  default
        directory.   No  additional devices, such as LIB:  or SYS:, which
        might be in your default path, are searched.  (Refer  to  Section
        1.14,  and  to  the  PATH monitor call description in the TOPS-10
        Monitor Calls Manual, for information about directory paths.)

        If you use the wildcard construction in the directory name,  only
        the   directories   implied  by  the  wildcard  construction  are
        searched.  No additional directories are searched.



                                    2-94
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        The following  switches  can  be  used  in  the  command  string.
        Generally,  any switches can be used together in the same command
        string, unless the switches  contradict  one  another.   Switches
        that  precede the file name become the default for all succeeding
        files in the same command line.

        You can abbreviate switches as long  as  the  result  is  unique.
        This  is not recommended for batch control files.  Spaces are not
        permitted within a switch.


             Switch                            Function

        /ACCESS:n           Updates the access date  of  any  file  of  n
                            blocks  or less to the current date.  Because
                            some installations delete files that have not
                            been  recently  accessed,  this switch allows
                            you to prevent such deletion by updating  the
                            files.   n is a decimal number, and refers to
                            the number of  blocks  written  in  the  file
                            unless  the  /ALLOC  switch is also used.  If
                            you omit the /ACCESS switch, the system  does
                            not  change the date.  If you specify /ACCESS
                            but you omit :n, 5 is assumed.

        /ACCOUNT            Prints the account name associated with  that
                            file.  The account you are logged in under is
                            stored in the RIB of  all  files  created  or
                            superseded.

        /ALLOCATED          Lists  the  allocated  length  of  the   file
                            instead  of  the  written length.  Space on a
                            structure is sometimes allocated in units  of
                            more   than   one   block   for   efficiency.
                            Therefore, the number of blocks allocated  to
                            a  file  can  be  greater  than the number of
                            blocks actually written.  The LOGOUT  program
                            uses   the  allocated  length  when  checking
                            quotas.  The total allocated  length  of  all
                            files is the same as the length output by the
                            QUOLST  program  under   the   USED   column.
                            Normally,  when a file is created, the system
                            allocates 30 blocks for it.  Then the  system
                            deallocates unused blocks after file creation
                            is complete.  This switch is  the  complement
                            to the /WRITTEN switch.

        /ANYDEVICE          Searches all devices.

        /AUTHOR             Prints the project-programmer number  of  the
                            author of the file.


                                    2-95
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /BEFORE:date-time   Lists  those   files   created   before   the
                            specified   date   and   time.    Default  is
                            +infinity.  Refer to Section 1.8.3.
|  
|       /BLOCKINGFACTOR:n   Sets the number of disk blocks per tape block
|                           read  from  tape.  The default value is 4 for
|                           compatability with tapes  written  by  BACKUP
|                           without   blocking-factor   capability.   The
|                           specified value must be in the range of 4  to
|                           96,  and must be a multiple of 4 disk blocks.
|                           Due to KS10 UNIBUS adapter  limitations,  the
|                           maximum blocking-factor on a KS10 is 56.

        /BLOCKS             Prints the length  of  the  file  in  blocks.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /WORDS.

        /CHECKSUM           Computes and prints an  18-bit  checksum  for
                            each  file.   This  checksum  is  computed by
                            rotating the  result  to  the  left  one  bit
                            before   adding  each  word.   Complement  to
                            /NOCHECKSUM.

        /COMPARE            Suppresses headers and  titles,  as  well  as
                            error messages in the output.  This makes the
                            output  file  suitable  for  comparison  with
                            another   file  (with  FILCOM).   Default  is
                            /NOCOMPARE.

        /DENSITY:n          Uses the specified  density  when  reading  a
                            magnetic  tape.  n is 200, 556, 800, 1600, or
                            6250  bpi.   The  default  depends  on   your
                            installation.   You  can  change  the default
                            with the SET DENSITY command.

        /DETAIL             Prints  all  available  information  about  a
                            file.  The information includes:

                            The full file specification for the file.
                            The access date.
                            The time and date of creation.
                            The access protection  code  associated  with
                              the file.
                            The data mode that the file is written in.
                            The estimated length of the file.
                            The blocks allocated for the file.
                            The data block in the directory in which  the
                              file is located.
                            The internal date and time of creation.
                            The RIB block number.

                            All numbers that are followed  by  a  decimal


                                    2-96
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


                            point  are  decimal values; all other numbers
                            are  octal.   The  project-programmer  number
                            associated  with  the file is printed only if
                            it is not the same as that of  the  user  who
                            issued the DIRECTORY command.

        /DIRECT             Provides ASCII-formatted  output.   This  the
                            default.  Complement to /NODIRECT.













































                                    2-97
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /DSKONLY            Searches all disk devices.

        /DTA                Lists the directory in old DECtape form.

        /EOTS               Stops  at  the  logical  end  of  tape   (two
                            consecutive   tape   marks)  when  reading  a
                            magnetic  tape.   This   is   the   default. 
                            Complement to /NOEOTS.

        /ERLOG              Enables  automatic  device   error   logging.
                            Complement   to   /NOERLOG.  /ERLOG   is  the
                            default.

        /FAST               Lists short form of  directory:   file  name,
                            extension,   structure  name,  and  directory
                            name.   Abbreviated  to  /F.   Complement  to
                            /NORMAL and /SLOW.

        /FILES:n            Stops after n files when reading  a  magnetic
                            tape.  If you specify /FILES but you omit :n,
                            5 is assumed.  When the  system  reaches  the
                            logical EOT, it will stop reading the tape.

        /FIND               Looks for the Find Files  for  the  directory
                            listing rather than the devices.  A Find File
                            is the binary output of a directory  listing,
                            and  is  created  with  the  /FNDBLD  switch.
                            /FIND   looks   for   the   Find   File    in
                            SYS:FNDDAT.FDF  or  .FPF.   You  can  use the
                            /FNDDAT switch to specify the  file  name  of
                            the Find File.

        /FLSDIR             Prints each file's device  and  directory  to
                            the  right  of  the  first line of output for
                            each directory.  Complement to /NOFLSDIR, the
                            default  is /FLSDIR, unless /HDSDIR or /WIDTH
                            is specified.

        /FNDBLD             Creates Find Files from the DIRECTORY output.
                            A  Find  File  is  the  binary  output from a
                            DIRECTORY listing.  Find Files are useful for
                            archiving  and  retrieving  files on magnetic
                            tape.  The file name of the Find File is that
                            specified  in the output specification of the
                            command format.  If you do  not  specify  the
                            output    file    name,    the   default   is
                            DSK:FNDDAT.FDF or .FPF.  The files can  later
                            be  accessed  with  the  /FIND  switch.   The
                            complement   to   /FDNBLD    is    /NOFDNBLD.
                            /NOFNDBLD is the default.



                                    2-98
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /FNDDAT:file        Specifies the file name of the Find Files  to
                            be  read  for  the directory listing.  A Find
                            File is the binary  output  for  a  directory
                            listing,  and  is  created  with  the /FNDBLD
                            switch.  You must use the /FIND  switch  with
                            the /FNDDAT switch.

        /HDSDIR             Prints the device and  directory  information
                            of  the  file  as  a  separate  header  line,
                            immediately preceding the  directory  listing
                            for   each   directory.    Complementary   to
                            /FLSDIR.  The default  is  /NOHDSDIR,  unless
                            /WIDTH and /NOFLSDIR are specified.

        /HELP:arg           Prints DIRECTORY help text on your  terminal.
                            /HELP   can  be  abbreviated  to  /H.   Valid
                            arguments are:  TEXT, KEYWORDS, and SWITCHES.
                            TEXT  is  the default argument; it prints the
                            entire   DIRECT.HLP   file.    The   KEYWORDS
                            argument  (K)  lists  and describes all LOGIN
                            switches  which   take   keyword   arguments.
                            SWITCHES  (S)  briefly  lists  all  DIRECTORY
                            switches without explanations.  Switches that
                            have   a   single-letter   abbreviation   are
                            prefixed with an asterisk.

        /INDIRECT           Creates the output listing file in  a  format
                            suitable  for  use  as  a  command file to be
                            input to other programs.

        /LENGTH:n:m         Processes only files whose length is  between
                            n and m blocks.

        /LIST               Queues   the   output   to    device    LPT:.
                            Abbreviated to /L.  Refer to the LIST command
                            for restrictions on this switch.

        /MARKS              Indicates each tape mark and UFD when reading
                            a magnetic tape.  Complement of /NOMARKS.

        /MVOLUME            When  reading  BACKUP  and  DUMPER   magnetic
                            tapes,  asks  the  user to mount another reel
                            when the end of tape is  encountered  in  the
                            middle   of   a   save  set.   Complement  to
                            /NOMVOLUME, the default is /NOMVOLUME.

        /NOAUTHOR           Does not print the project-programmer  number
                            of  the  author  of  the  file.   This is the
                            default.  Complement to /AUTHOR.




                                    2-99
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /NOCHECKSUM         Does not  compute  and  print  the  checksum.
                            This   is   the   default.    Complement   of
                            /CHECKSUM.

        /NOCOMPARE          Prints the normal headers, titles, and  error
                            messages.    Complement   to   /COMPARE,  the
                            default is /NOCOMPARE.

        /NODETAIL           Does not print the words in the LOOKUP block.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /DETAIL.

        /NODIRECT           Does not  print  the  normal  ASCII  listing.
                            Complement   to   /DIRECT,   the  default  is
                            /DIRECT.

        /NOEOTS             Does not stop at the logical end of tape when
                            reading   a  magnetic  tape.   Complement  to
                            /EOTS.

        /NOERLOG            Does  not  enable  automatic   device   error
                            logging.    /ERLOG   is   the  compliment  to
                            /NOERLOG, and the default.

        /NOFIND             Does not look for Find Files for the  output.
                            Complement to /FIND, the default is /NOFIND.

        /NOFLSDIR           Does  not  print  each  file's   device   and
                            directory  to the right of the first line for
                            each   directory   listed.    Complement   to
                            /FLSDIR;   the  default  is  /FLSDIR,  unless
                            /HDSDIR or /WIDTH is specified.

        /NOFNDBLD           Does not make a Find File  from  the  output.
                            Complement   to   /FNDBLD;   the  default  is
                            /NOFNDBLD.

        /NOHDSDIR           Does not print the device and directory as  a
                            header for each directory listed.  Complement
                            to /HDSDIR, the default is /NOHDSDIR,  unless
                            /WIDTH is specified.

        /NOINDIRECT         Does not format the output listing so that it
                            can   be   used   as   input  to  a  program.
                            Complement  to  /INDIRECT,  the  default   is
                            /NOINDIRECT.

        /NOMARKS            Does not indicate each tape mark and UFD when
                            reading   a   magnetic  tape.   This  is  the
                            default.  Complement to /MARKS.




                                   2-100
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /NOMVOLUME          When using BACKUP or DUMPER, does not ask the
                            user  to mount another magnetic tape when the
                            end of tape comes in the  middle  of  a  save
                            set.   Complement to /MVOLUME, the default is
                            /NOMVOLUME.

        /NOPRDEVICE         Does not print the device  name.   Complement
                            to /PRDEVICE.

        /NOPRDIRECTORY      Does not print the directory.  Complement  to
                            /PRDIRECTORY.

        /NOPRVERSION        Suppresses printing the version number of the
                            files.  The normal listing prints the version
                            number only if it is not zero.  Complement to
                            /PRVERSION.

        /NORETRY            Disables automatic error retry when reading a
                            file.   Generates  error  messages  for  soft
                            errors.  Complement to /RETRY, the default is
                            /RETRY.

        /NOREWIND           Does not rewind the  tape  before  and  after
                            reading   a  magnetic  tape.   Complement  to
                            /REWIND.

        /NORMAL             Prints the normal directory list.  This  list
                            includes  the file name, extension, length in
                            blocks written,  protection,  creation  date,
                            structure  name, nonzero version numbers, and
                            directory  name.   Complement  to  /FAST  and
                            /SLOW.  This is the default.  Use this switch
                            to  override  a  /FAST  or  /SLOW   in   your
                            SWITCH.INI file.

        /NOSORT             Does not produce a file suitable for sorting.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /SORT.

        /NOSUMMARY          Does not  use  summary  mode.   This  is  the
                            default.  Complement to /SUMMARY.

        /NOTITLE            Does not print page  headers.   This  is  the
                            default   for   output   to   the   terminal.
                            Complement to /TITLE.

        /NOUNITS            Does not list the name  of  the  actual  disk
                            unit; instead, just lists the structure name.
                            This is the default.  Complement to /UNITS.

        /OKNONE             Suppresses the  error  message  if  no  files
                            match the wildcard construction.


                                   2-101
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /OPTION:name        Reads your option file (DSK:SWITCH.INI[,]) to
                            determine  your specified switch defaults for
                            DIRECT.  The name appearing as the  value  of
                            the switch is the pointer to the line to read
                            in  the  file.   For  example,  if  the  file
                            contains the line:

                            DIRECT:ALL/DETAIL

                            then you reference this line  by  typing  the
                            command:

                            DIRECT/OPTION:ALL

                            Refer   to   Appendix   B   for    additional
                            information.

        /PARITY:ODD         Specifies the parity to be used  when reading
        /PARITY:EVEN        a magnetic tape.  The default is :ODD.

        /PHYSICAL           Ignores  logical  names.   Refer  to  Section
                            1.9.1 for a description of logical names.

        /PRDEVICE           Prints the name of the device for each file.

        /PRDIRECTORY        Prints the name of  the  directory  for  each
                            file.

        /PROTECTION:nnn     Gives the  output  file  the  protection  nnn
                            (octal).   Protection  codes are discussed in
                            Section 1.9.4.

        /PRVERSION          Prints the version of each file.  If  you  do
                            not  specify  this  switch, the default is to
                            print the version only if  it  is  not  zero.
                            The complement is /NOPRVERSION.

        /RETRY              Enables automatic error retry when reading  a
                            file.  Complement to /NORETRY, the default is
                            /RETRY.

        /REWIND             Rewinds the magnetic tape  before  and  after
                            reading it.  This is the default.  Complement
                            to /NOREWIND.

        /RUN:file-spec      Runs the specified program when this  command
                            is finished.

        /RUNOFFSET:n        Runs the program specified with /RUN with  an
                            offset  of  n.   If  you omit the switch, the
                            default is 0; if  you  omit  the  value,  the
                            default is 1.

                                   2-102
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /SINCE:date-time    Lists only  those  files  created  after  the
                            specified  date  and  time.   The  default is
                            January 1, 1964.  Refer to Section 1.8.3.

        /SLOW               Prints a full listing that includes the  file
                            name,  extension,  length  in blocks written,
                            protection, access date,  creation  time  and
                            date,  structure  name,  and  directory name.
                            Equivalent to /S.  Complement  to  /FAST  and
                            /NORMAL.  (Disk and magnetic tape only.)

        /SORT               Lists the file structure name  and  directory
                            name  for each file.  The file structure name
                            is output  for  every  file  if  you  do  not
                            specify  a file structure name in the command
                            string or if you specify generic  DSK:.   The
                            wildcard   construction   is   used   in  the
                            directory name.   TABs  are  space-filled  to
                            maintain  a  constant number of characters in
                            any given line.   Project-programmer  numbers
                            include  leading  zeros;  the date is in ANSI
                            format:  19721009 for Oct 9, 1972.  Use  this
                            switch  to prepare a file to be sorted by the
                            SORT program.  (See the COBOL documentation.)
                            Complement to /NOSORT.

        /SUMMARY            Prints only the summary line  that  indicates
                            the  total  number  of  blocks  and files.  A
                            /FAST/SUMMARY prints a /FAST listing followed
                            by the summary.

        /TITLE              Causes a heading to be output  on  each  page
                            consisting  of a label for each column, date,
                            time, and page number.   Standard  output  to
                            the    line   printer   has   this   heading.
                            Complement to /NOTITLE.

        /TMPCOR             Lists the directory in old TMPCOR format.

        /UNITS              Lists the name of the  actual  disk  unit  on
                            which  the  files  are  stored instead of the
                            file structure name.  Complement to /NOUNITS.

        /WIDTH:n            Prints several entries on a  single  line  to
                            make  the  output  appear  in  columns.   The
                            default for n is the terminal carriage width.
                            (See the SET TTY WIDTH command.)

        /WORDS              Prints  the  length  of  the  file  in  words
                            instead of blocks.  Complement to /BLOCKS.



                                   2-103
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        /WRITTEN            Prints the written length of the file  rather
                            than  the  allocated  length.   This  is  the
                            default.  Complement to /ALLOCATED.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  List all files on DSKB:.

            .DIRECT DSKB:<RET>

            FILE    DAT    220 <055> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKB: [27,5055]
            SWITCH  INI     10 <057> dd-mmm-yy
            PROG    MAC      5 <055> dd-mmm-yy

            .

        2.  List all files with extension .MAC in all file structures  in
            your job's search list.

            .DIRECT *.MAC<RET>

            PROG MAC  5 <057> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKB:[27,5055]
            FILE MAC  1 <055> dd-mmm-yy 30(201) DSKC:[27,5055]

            .

        3.  List the directory entry for the file TEST.F4  in  user  area
            [27,4072].

            .DIR TEST.F4[27,4072]<RET>

            TEST F4  6 <055> dd-mmm-yy 31(225) DSKC:[27,4072]

            .

        4.  List all files in sub-file directory WIZZER.SFD in the  [7,2]
            area on BLKT:.

            .DIR BLKT:[7,2,WIZZER]<RET>

            ATTA   TST    1 <055> dd-mmm-yy BLKT:[7,2,WIZZER]
            NEW    ALG    4 <055> dd-mmm-yy
            ALGOL  DOC   20 <055> dd-mmm-yy

            .


                                   2-104
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        5.  Show the switches to the DIRECT command.

            .DIRECT/HELP:SWITCHES<RET>

            DIRECT switches are: 

            ACCESS, ACCOUN, *ALLOC, AUTHOR, CHECKS, COMPAR, DETAIL, 
            DIRECT, DTA,    EOTS,   ERLOG,  *FAST,  FILES,  FIND,
            FLSDIR, FNDBLD, FNDDAT, HDSDIR, *INDIR, *LIST,  MARKS,
            MVOLUM, *NORMA, PRDEVI, PRDIRE, PRVERS, RETRY,  REWIND,
            SBRMSG, *SLOW,  SORT,   SUMMAR, TITLES, TMPCOR, UNITS, 
            *WIDTH, WORDS,  WRITTE

            Standard switches are: 
            ABEFOR, ALLOCA, ANYDEV, APPEND, ASCII,  ASINCE, BEFORE,
            BINARY, BLOCKS, BYTESI, BUFFER, CONTIG, DATAMO, DELETE,
            DENSIT, DSKONL, ERNONE, ERPROT, ERSUPE, ERUID,  ESTIMA, 
            EXIT,   FIXED,  FRAMES, *HELP,  IMAGE,  IOMODE, LENGTH, 
            LIB,    MACY11, MECY11, MESSAG, NEW,    NOOPTI, OKNONE, 
            OKPROT, OKSUPE, OKUID,  OPTION, PARITY, PBEFOR, PHYSIC, 
            PRINT,  PROTEC, PSINCE, QUERY,  RECSIZ, RECFOR, RUN, 
            RUNCOR, RUNOFF, SCERRO, SCWILD, SINCE,  STRS,   SUBMIT,
            SYS,    TELL,   TMPFIL, VARIAB, VERSIO

            .

        6.  Create an output listing file in a format suitable for  input
            to other programs.

            .
            .DIRECT OUT.FIL/INDIRECT=*.TXT

            Total of 10 files
            .

            .TYPE OUT.FIL
            DSKB:MAIL.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:OPRGD.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:MCO.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:RDH.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:MSRDH.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:MSDPM.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:INITIA.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:STEVS.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:SPIDER.TXT[10,5763]
            DSKB:BARRY2.TXT[10,5763]

            .





                                   2-105
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


   hl2 DISABLE Command


   Function

        The DISABLE command disables the POKE, SPY, and other  privileged
        monitor  calls that were enabled when you first logged in or when
        you used the ENABLE command.  When you log in,  your  privileges,
        if any, are enabled by default.

   Format

        DISABLE

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not change privileges associated with being [1,2] or on
        the operator's terminal.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Example

        Run FILDDT.

        .R FILDDT<RET>

        Look at monitor  memory.   Privileges  are  required  to  examine
        address 41.

        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         C

        The contents of 41 are shown, indicating your job has  privileges
        enabled.  Disable the privileges:

        .DISABLE<RET>

        Run FILDDT.

        .R FILDDT<RET>







                                   2-106
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             DIRECTORY Command


        When you attempt to examine address  41,  the  contents  are  not
        revealed.  0 is printed.

        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     0
         ^C

        Enable your privileges.

        .ENABLE<RET>

        Again, examine memory with FILDDT.  Your  job's  privileges  have
        been reinstated.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         ^C                 

        .

































                                   2-107
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


                             DISMOUNT Command



   Function

        The DISMOUNT command relinquishes ownership of a device.  It does
        not  affect  your  allocation  requests,  if  you  have  used the
        ALLOCATE command, and you can MOUNT the device again.   Once  you
        have  dismounted  a  volume set, the device is available to other
        users.  However, if the  resource  was  not  allocated  with  the
        ALLOCATE command DISMOUNT performs an implicit DEALLOCATE.

        If you used the ALLOCATE command for the resource, the DISMOUNTed
        resource  remains  in  an  allocated  state  until  you issue the
        DEALLOCATE command.  Once you have dismounted a volume set,  your
        programs can no longer reference the resource by the logical name
        except with the MOUNT and DEALLOCATE commands.

   Format

        DISMOUNT resource-name/switch,resource-name/switch,...

        Where:    For disk volume sets, the resource-name is  the  volume
                  set-name or the logical name.

                  For tape volume sets, the resource-name is the  logical
                  name.

        You can use the following switches in the command string:

         Switch                            Function

        /HELP          Prints a short description of the command.  If you
                       specify  any resource names with this switch, they
                       will be ignored.

        /NONOTIFY      Does not set the system to notify  your  job  when
                       the  dismount  is  complete.   This is the default
                       function if you have not specified /NOWAIT.

        /NOTIFY        Sets the  system  to  notify  your  job  when  the
                       dismount  is  complete.   If  you specify /NOWAIT,
                       this is the default function.

        /NOWAIT        Allows your job to return to monitor level  before
                       the dismount is complete.  This implies /NOTIFY.

        /REMOVE        Removes the specified  file  structure  from  your
                       job's search list.  If no other jobs are accessing
                       the  structure,  and  if  it  is  not   a   system


                                   2-108
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


                       structure, the operator physically dismounts it.




















































                                   2-109
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


        /WAIT          Holds your job until  the  dismount  is  complete.
                       This is the default function.

   Associated Commands

        ALLOCATE         Informs the system of your  future  need  for  a
                         resource.

        DEALLOCATE       Removes the resource from  your  job's  list  of
                         allocated  resources.   If  the resource has not
                         been dismounted, DEALLOCATE dismounts it.

        MOUNT            Requests ownership of the resource(s).

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints  a  list  of  the  resources   that   are
                         allocated and mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of  the  requests  in  the  system
                         queues.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  The  following  example  shows  the  use  of  the   ALLOCATE,
            DEALLOCATE,  MOUNT,  DISMOUNT,  and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.
            The resources are reserved for a multivolume tape volume  set
            with  the  ALLOCATE  command.   The name of the volume set is
            TAPE-SET, and it contains three volumes.  The logical name TS
            is  assigned to the tape set.  The tape is write enabled, and
            it does not have standard labels.

            .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE
            /LABEL:NONE<RET>
            [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]

            A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

            .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
            [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
            [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]






                                   2-110
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


            The job's resources are displayed using the  SHOW  ALLOCATION
            command:

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKR                 DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


            The  tape  set  is  mounted,  and  the  resources  are  again
            displayed:

            .MOUNT TS<RET>
            [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
            [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKR                 DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


            After work with the tape set and the structure  is  finished,
            the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure was not
            explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

            .DEALLOCATE DSKR<RET>
            [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]





                                   2-111
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


            The tape volume set is dismounted:

            .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
            [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]


            The job's resources are displayed:

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
            TAPE-SET             VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
            TAPE-SET             VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

            At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can
            be deallocated.  The tape set is deallocated:

            .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
            [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

            .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

            ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
                 VOLUME SET          RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
            -------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
            ---                  RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
            ---                  RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
            DSKB                 DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
            DSKC                 DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


            .













                                   2-112
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              DISMOUNT Command


        2.  In this example, you knew that the job was the only one using
            the  structure  BLKJ:  and included a /REMOVE switch, so that
            the operator would remove the disk pack from the drive.   The
            message  "BLKJ  DISMOUNTED" means that BLKJ:  is no longer in
            your search list, and that a request has been queued  to  the
            operator to remove the pack from the drive.  The message does
            not mean that  BLKJ  has  already  been  physically  removed.
            Because  this  command  implies /NOWAIT, you will not receive
            notification of the physical removal of the disk pack.

            .DISMOUNT BLKJ/REMOVE<RET>
            [BLKJ DISMOUNTED]

        3.  The following DISMOUNT/WAIT command causes the job to suspend
            further  processing  until all pending dismount requests from
            it have been  completed.   There  were  no  pending  dismount
            requests  from  this job, so the job returns to monitor level
            immediately.

            .DISMOUNT/WAIT<RET>
            NONE PENDING FOR YOUR JOB

            .






























                                   2-113
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DSK Command


                                DSK Command



   Function

        The DSK command prints  disk  usage  figures  for  all  disk  I/O
        performed  since  the  last  DSK  command,  followed by the total
        amount of disk I/O performed since the  job  was  started.   Disk
        usage is printed in the following format:

        RD,WT=i,j
        RD,WT=m,n

        Where:    i and j are the incremental number of  128-word  blocks
                  read and written since the last DSK command.

                  m and n are the total number of  128-word  blocks  read
                  and written since the job started.

                                           NOTE

                      i and j are kept modulo 4096.  If  you  enabled
                      automatic  READ  or WRITE output, using the SET
                      WATCH  command,  i  and  j  are  usually  zero,
                      because  SET WATCH resets these values.  CTRL/T
                      also resets these values.

   Format

        DSK job

        Where:    job is the number of the job for  which  you  want  the
                  disk usage.  This argument is optional.  If you include
                  the job number in the command string,  only  the  total
                  statistics (m and n above) are printed.

                  If the job-number is omitted,  the  system  prints  the
                  disk usage figures for your job.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.






                                   2-114
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                DSK Command


   Example

        Print the disk usage values for your job.

        .DSK<RET>
        RD,WT=5,10
        RD,WT=474,12

        Print the total disk usage values for job 50.

        .DSK 50<RET>

        RD,WT=474,12








































                                   2-115
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ENABLE Command


                              ENABLE Command



   Function

        If you are not a privileged user, this  command  has  no  effect.
        However,  if  you  are  a  privileged user (that is, you have the
        privilege word set in ACTDAE.SYS) you can  turn  your  privileges
        off with the DISABLE command, and you can turn your privileges on
        with  the  ENABLE   command.    Your   privileges   are   enabled
        automatically  when  you  log  in.   Privileges  allow you to use
        privileged monitor calls such as POKE and SPY.

   Format

        ENABLE

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not affect privileges associated with [1,2] or with being on
        the operator's terminal (OPR:).

   Example

        Run  FILDDT.   Look  at  memory  area.    Examine   address   41.
        Privileges are required to examine this location.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         ^C

        Disable your privileges:

        .DISABLE<RET>

        Run  FILDDT.   Examine  41.   Your   privileges   are   disabled;
        therefore, 0 is printed rather than the contents of 41.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     0
         ^C





                                   2-116
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               ENABLE Command


        Enable your privileges:

        .ENABLE<RET>

        Again, examine memory.  The contents of 41 are displayed.

        .R FILDDT<RET>
        FILE:  /M<RET>
        41/     JSR 3600
         ^C       
        .










































                                   2-117
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                EOF Command


                                EOF Command



   Function

        The EOF command writes  an  end-of-file  mark  on  the  specified
        magnetic  tape.   This  command  runs  the  COMPIL program, which
        interprets the command before running the PIP program.

   Format

        EOF MTxn:

        Where:    MTxn:  specifies the magnetic-tape unit.

                  More than one magnetic-tape unit can  be  specified  in
                  the  command  string  by  separating the specifications
                  with commas.  Refer to Section 1.9.1 for a  description
                  of device name formats.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Write end-of-file mark on magnetic tape MTA2:.

        .EOF MTA2:<RET>

        .

















                                   2-118
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXAMINE Command


                              EXAMINE Command



   Function

        The EXAMINE command displays a core location in your  area  (high
        or  low  segment).  The contents of the location are typed out in
        half-word octal mode.  This  command  is  useful  when  debugging
        programs.

   Format

        E addr

        Where:    addr is the address of  the  location  being  examined.
                  The  address  is  required  the  first time the EXAMINE
                  command is used.

                  If you omit the address, the system  will  examine  the
                  next  location.  If the previous command was a deposit,
                  the system will examine the location of the deposit.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Example

        Examine location 140.

        .E 140<RET>
        000140/ 000000 000000

        Examine the next location, 141.  You do not need to  specify  the
        address for a consecutive location.

        .E<RET>
        000141/ 000000 000000

        Deposit 1 in location 141.  You can omit the address because  the
        DEPOSIT  command  will  use  the  location  of  the  last EXAMINE
        command.

        .D 0 1<RET>




                                   2-119
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXAMINE Command


        Examine the same location, 141.  You do not need to  specify  the
        address.   The  EXAMINE command will use the location of the last
        DEPOSIT command.

        .E<RET>
        000141/ 000000 000001















































                                   2-120
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


                              EXECUTE Command



   Function

        The EXECUTE command  compiles  the  specified  source  files,  if
        necessary,  loads  the  generated REL files into core, and begins
        execution of the  program.   The  system  determines  the  proper
        language  compiler to use from the source file extensions or from
        switches you specify  in  the  command  string.   (Refer  to  the
        COMPILE  command.)   If  a  .REL file already exists with a newer
        date than that of the source file, the system  does  not  compile
        the file unless you request this explicitly with a switch.

        This command is equal to issuing the LOAD and START commands.

        Each time you issue a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or  DEBUG  command,
        the  system  remembers  the  command  with  its  arguments  in  a
        temporary file on disk or in core.  Therefore, when you issue one
        of  these  commands  without specifying any arguments, the system
        uses the arguments that it saved in the temporary  file.   (Refer
        to Appendix C.)

        The EXECUTE command accepts several command constructions:  the @
        construction  (indirect  commands),  the  +  construction,  the =
        construction, and the < > construction.  Refer to Appendix C  for
        a complete description of each of these constructions.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command  before  running  the  appropriate  language compiler for
        LINK.

   Format

        EXECUTE file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file   specifications  separated  by  commas.   A  file
                  specification consists of a device name,  a  file  name
                  with  or  without  an  extension, and a directory name.
                  (Refer to Section 1.9.)

        You can use the following switches to modify the command  string.
        These  switches  can  be  temporary  or permanent switches unless
        otherwise stated.  (Refer to Section 1.8.4.)







                                   2-121
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


          Switch                         Function

        /ALGOL         Compiles the file with ALGOL.  Assumed  for  files
                       with the extension of .ALG.

        /BINARY        Generates a binary file for  each  file  compiled.
                       The  file  name  for  the  binary file follows the
                       standard conventions for determining the  name  of
                       the  output file.  (Refer to the COMPILE command.)
                       The file name extension  is  .REL.   This  is  the
                       default action.

        /BLISS         Compiles the  file  with  BLISS-10.   Assumed  for
                       files  with  the  extension of .b10 or .bLI.  This
                       switch is not supported.

        /C68           Runs the appropriate COBOL compiler.
        /C74

        /COBOL         Compiles the file with COBOL.  Assumed  for  files
                       with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE       Forces a compilation of this file even if a binary
                       file  exists  with  a newer date and time than the
                       source file.  You can use this switch to obtain an
                       extra   compilation  (for  example,  to  obtain  a
                       listing)  because  the  system  does  not  perform
                       compilation  if  the binary file is newer than the
                       source file.

        /CREF          Produces a cross-referenced listing  file  on  the
                       disk  for each file compiled, for later processing
                       by the CREF program.  The file  extension  of  the
                       output  file is .CRF.  You can then list the files
                       using  the  CREF  command.   However,  with  COBOL
                       files,  the  system  appends  the cross-referenced
                       listing to the listing file.

        /DDT           Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.

        /DEBUG:(arg, arg,...)
                       Passes the arguments to  FORTRAN.   Refer  to  the
                       TOPS-10/TOPS-20 FORTRAN Language Manual.

        /DLIST         Produces a .LST file in your directory area.   You
                       can  output  the file to the line printer with the
                       PRINT command.

        /F40           Obsolete
        /F10



                                   2-122
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /F66           Applies FORTRAN-66 rules for DO loops and EXTERNAL
                       statements.

        /FOROTS        Obsolete
        /FORSE

        /FORTRAN       Compiles  the  file  with  a   FORTRAN   compiler.
                       Assumed  for  files  with the extension of .F4 and
                       .FOR and all files with  nonrecognizable  compiler
                       extensions  if  FORTRAN  is the standard compiler.
                       You need to specify this switch if the file has  a
                       nonrecognizable  compiler extension and FORTRAN is
                       not the standard compiler or is  not  the  current
                       default.   (For  example,  EXE/ALGOL  FIL1,  FIL2,
                       FIL3/FORTRAN).

        /FUDGE:        Creates a temporary file that contains   the names
         file-spec     of the .REL files produced by the  command  string
                       plus  the  library  file name.  When you issue the
                       FUDGE command, PIP reads this  temporary  file  to
                       generate a library .REL file.  (Refer to the FUDGE
                       command description.) The argument to this  switch
                       is:

                       dev:file.ext[proj,prog]

                       Where:  dev:  is the device on which to write  the
                               file.   If you omit the device, the system
                               assumes DSK.

                               file.ext is the name of the library  file.
                               The  file  name  is required.  If you omit
                               the extension, the system assumes .REL.

                               [proj,prog] is the directory in  which  to
                               place the file.  Your directory is assumed
                               if you do not specify a directory.

                       This switch is permanent  in  the  sense  that  it
                       pertains  to  all  .REL  files  generated  by  the
                       command string.

        /GFLOAT        Indicates that double-precision numbers are to  be
                       stored  in  G-floating format.  This format has an
                       extended exponent range.  This option is available
                       on KL-10 proessors only.







                                   2-123
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /K?10          Designates the processor where  the  program  will
                       execute once it has been loaded.  The variable (?)
                       can be L or S.  These switches are  necessary  for
                       FORTRAN-10 programs because the compiler generates
                       different code for the processors.  The default is
                       the   processor  on  the  computer  executing  the
                       command.

        /LIBRARY       Loads the files in library search mode.  This mode
                       causes a program file in a special library file to
                       be loaded only if one  or  more  of  its  declared
                       entry   symbols   satisfies  an  undefined  global
                       request in the source file.  The system  libraries
                       are   always  searched.   (See  the  TOPS-10  LINK
                       Reference Manual.)

        /LINK          Obsolete

        /LIST          Generates a listing file for each  file  compiled.
                       The  extension  of  the  output file is .LST.  The
                       system automatically spools it when you  log  out.
                       The complement of this switch is /NOLIST.

        /LMAP          Produces a loader map during the  loading  process
                       containing the local symbols.

        /LOADER        Obsolete

        /MACRO         Assembles the file with MACRO.  Assumed for  files
                       with extensions of .MAC.

        /MACY11        Assembles the file with MACY11.  Assumed for files
                       with  extensions  of  .P11.   This  switch  is not
                       supported.

        /MANTIS        Compiles   the   file   with   MANTIS    debugging
                       information.  This switch affects Fortran-40 files
                       only.  This switch is not supported.

        /MAP           Produces loader maps during the  loading  process.
                       When  this  switch is encountered, a loader map is
                       requested from  the  loader.   After  the  library
                       search of the system libraries, the map is written
                       in your  disk  area  with  either  the  file  name
                       specified  by  you (for example, /MAP:file) or the
                       default file name nnnLNK.MAP.  This switch  is  an
                       exception  to the permanent switch rule in that it
                       causes only one map to be produced even though  it
                       appears as a permanent switch.




                                   2-124
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /NEW           Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from  the
                       experimental  system  library  (device  NEW:) area
                       [1,5].  If the compiler does not exist  on  device
                       NEW:,  COMPIL tries to obtain it from device SYS:.
                       (Refer to the Restriction.)

        /NOBINARY      Does not generate binary files.  Unless you  issue
                       this  switch,  the  system generates binary files.
                       This switch, when combined with the /CREF or /LIST
                       switch, is useful when you compile programs solely
                       for the purpose of generating listings.

        /NOCOMPILE     Does not force a  compilation  on  a  source  file
                       whose  date  is  not  as recent as the date on the
                       binary file.  This switch is not the same  as  the
                       /REL  switch,  which  turns  off all compilations,
                       even if the source file is  newer  than  the  .REL
                       file.    Complement   to   the   /COMPILE  switch.
                       /NOCOMPILE is the default action.

        /NODEBUG       Does not pass previously  specified  arguments  to
                       FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST        Does not generate  listing  files.   This  is  the
                       default action.

        /NOMANTIS      Compiles  the  file   without   MANTIS   debugging
                       information.    This   switch  affects  Fortran-40
                       programs only.  This switch is not supported.

        /NOOPTIMIZE    Does not  optimize  the  object  code  of  FORTRAN
                       programs.

        /NOSEARCH      Loads  all  routines  of  the  file  whether   the
                       routines  are  referenced or not.  Because this is
                       the default action, this switch is  used  to  turn
                       off library search mode (/LIBRARY).

        /OLD           Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from  the
                       system library of old programs (device OLD:) which
                       resides on the disk area [1,3].  If  the  compiler
                       does  not  exist  on  device OLD:, COMPIL tries to
                       obtain  it  from  device  SYS:.   (Refer  to   the
                       Restriction.)

        /OPTIMIZE      Optimizes  the  object  code  of  FORTRAN   source
                       programs.

        /PAL10         Assembles the file with PAL10.  Assumed for  files
                       with the .PAL extension.



                                   2-125
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


        /PASCAL        Compiles the file with Pascal.  Assumed for  files
                       with the .PAS extension.

        /REL           Uses the existing .REL files although newer source
                       files might be present.

        /SAVE          Saves the core image of the loaded program.

        /SEARCH        Loads the  files  in  library  search  mode.   The
                       action  is  identical  to  that  of  the  /LIBRARY
                       switch.

        /SELF          Runs the appropriate language compiler from device
                       DSK:   instead  of from the system library (device
                       SYS:).  This  switch  is  useful  if  you  keep  a
                       private  copy of a compiler in your own disk area.
                       (Refer to the Restriction.)

        /SNOBOL        Compiles the file with SNOBOL.  Assumed for  files
                       with  an  extension  of  .SNO.  This switch is not
                       supported.

        /SSAVE         Saves the core image of the loaded  program  in  a
                       sharable executable file.

        /SYS           Runs the appropriate language  compiler  from  the
                       system  library (device SYS:) area [1,4].  This is
                       the default action.

   Restriction

        You cannot specify compilers from  different  structures  in  the
        same command string.  For example, the following is invalid:

        .EXECUTE PARTA.FOR/NEW,PARTB.FOR/OLD

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE PARTA.FOR/NEW<RET>
        .COMPILE PARTB.FOR/OLD<RET>
        .EXECUTE/REL PARTA,PARTB

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Runs the  appropriate  compiler  or  assembler  and  linking
        loader, destroying your original core image.

        Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.

                                   2-126
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              EXECUTE Command


   Example

        Type out a test program.

        .TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>

            TYPE 10
         10 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
            END

        Execute the program.

        .EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
        FORTRAN:  PROG
        MAIN
        LINK:  LOADING
        [LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]

        TESTING EXECUTION

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME:  0.02 ELAPSED TIME:  0.05
        EXIT
        .

        Message shows the time parameters of your job.



























                                   2-127
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


                               FILE Command



   Function

        The  FILE   command   remotely   controls   DECtape-to-disk   and
        disk-to-DECtape transfers on operator-handled DECtapes.

                                      NOTE

                The FILE command is  not  part  of  the  standard
                system.   Your site must run OMOUNT explicitly to
                make the FILE command usable.

        There are seven functions that  can  be  performed  by  the  FILE
        command.

             Format         Function

             FILE C         Check
             FILE D         Delete
             FILE F         File
             FILE L         Read
             FILE R         Retrieve
             FILE W         Wait
             FILE Z         Zero

        The C and W functions are the only requests  that  are  performed
        immediately.   Your  terminal  and job are free to proceed before
        the request is completed, except for  batch  jobs,  which  cannot
        continue until execution is complete.

   Formats

        1.  FILE C

            Checks the queue of FILE requests to determine if any of your
            requests  are  still  pending.   There  is no argument to the
            command in this format.  Pending requests for your  job  will
            be printed on your terminal.

        2.  FILE D,tape-id,file.ext,file.ext,...

            Deletes the  specified  files  from  DECtape.   This  command
            requires  tape  identification  and  a  list of file names as
            arguments.  The tape-id is a 1- to  6-character  alphanumeric
            name  that identifies the tape.  After the files are deleted,
            an automatic FILE L is performed.




                                   2-128
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        3.  FILE F,tape-id file-spec,file-spec,...

            Copies the specified files onto the specified DECtape.   This
            command  requires  a  tape  identification  and  list of file
            specifications as arguments.   The  file  specifications  can
            include    an    explicit    file    structure    name    and
            project-programmer number so that you can copy files  from  a
            disk  area  other  than your own.  You do not have to specify
            the device and project-programmer number of  subsequent  file
            specifications  if  they  do  not  change.  That is, you must
            specify the programmer number (for example,  [,104])  if  the
            file  to  be  copied has the same project number as yours and
            you must specify  the  project  number  ([41,])  if  you  are
            copying files from another project.

            The protection of the disk file is checked to see if the file
            can  be  read.   In  addition,  the protection of the DECtape
            directory file (tape-id.DIR) is checked to  see  if  you  can
            update  it.   If  there  is not enough room on the DECtape to
            copy an entire file, that portion  (if  any)  that  has  been
            written  so  far is deleted and an error message is placed in
            the directory file.  When the files  have  been  successfully
            copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.

            When the wildcard construction is used with the  FILE  F  and
            FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used.  That
            is, all files matching the construction are transferred  from
            all structures in the search list.

            In  most  cases  you  do  not  need  to  specify  which  file
            structures  the  files  are on because UMOUNT determines this
            (with LOOKUPs) and passes the information  to  OMOUNT.   With
            the  FILE  F and FILE Z functions, if a file structure is not
            specified and the specified file  exists  on  more  than  one
            structure, the first one in your search list is copied.

        4.  FILE L,tape-id

            Reads the directory of a DECtape and writes it into your disk
            area  as  an  ASCII file with the file name tape-id.DIR.  The
            file is placed on  the  first  file  structure  that  can  be
            written on in your search list, as long as that structure has
            an area that matches your project-programmer number.  Tape-id
            is  a  1-  to  6-character  alphanumeric name that is used to
            identify the tape.  You can then print the directory on  your
            terminal  with  the  TYPE command.  The format of the DECtape
            directory is similar to the directory  file  written  by  the
            DIRECTORY command.  If errors occur while the FILE command is
            being processed, the system writes error  messages  into  the
            directory file tape-id.DIR.



                                   2-129
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        5.  File R,tape-id,dev:file.ext,dev:file.ext...

            Transfers the specified files from your DECtape to the  disk.
            This  command  requires  tape-id  and a list of file names as
            arguments.  If the specified files already exist in the  disk
            area,  they  are  superseded, if their protection code allows
            it.  If the specified files do not exist, they are created on
            the  first file structure in your job's search list for which
            creation is  permitted.   After  files  are  transferred,  an
            automatic FILE L is performed.

            If  you  have  a  search  list   containing   multiple   file
            structures,  the  asterisk  construction  (when used with the
            FILE R command) can cause files to  be  created  rather  than
            superseded.   For the FILE R function, when no file structure
            is specified, the  files  are  copied  onto  the  first  file
            structure  in  your  search  list on which you are allowed to
            create files.   (Refer  to  the  description  of  the  SETSRC
            program.)  When a file structure name is typed or implied, it
            becomes the new default.

        6.  FILE W

            Waits until all of your pending requests are processed before
            allowing   your  job  to  continue.   If  there  are  pending
            requests, the message "WAITING...  TYPE 2 ^C'S  TO  EXIT"  is
            printed  on  your terminal.  Control returns to your job when
            all requests have been processed.  You can type  two  CTRL/Cs
            if you decide not to wait.

        7.  FILE Z,tape-id,dev:file.ext[ppn],dev:file.ext[ppn]...

            Deletes the files in the directory of the DECtape before  the
            files are copied and then performs the same operations as the
            FILE F command.  This command requires tape-id and can have a
            list  of  file  specification arguments.  After the files are
            copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.

            When you use the wildcard construction with the  FILE  F  and
            FILE Z commands, your job's entire search list is used.  That
            is, all files matching the construction are transferred  from
            all structures in the search list.











                                   2-130
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        The wildcard constructions can be  used,  but  generic  DSK:  can
        define  many  file  structures;  the  specific  file structure is
        chosen as follows:

             When you use the wildcard construction for the file name  or
             extension,  the first structure in your search list that you
             can access is used.

             If you do not use the wildcard  construction  and  the  file
             exists,  the  first  file  structure in the search list that
             contains the specified file is used, unless overridden by  a
             default.   (Refer  to  the  examples.)  If the file does not
             exist, the standard structure is used.

   Examples

        In the following examples, your search list is as follows:

        SORT:,DSKA:/NOCREATE,DSKB:,DSKC:

        You are user 10,3421, with UFDs on DSKA:, DSKB:, and  DSKC:,  and
        the  file  EX.1  exists  on each of these three structures.  User
        10,4072 has the file EX.2 in his area on DSKB: and on DSKC:.

        1.  This command requests that the operator mount DECtape 1, that
            the  file  EX.1 in your area be copied onto it, that the file
            EX.2[10,4072]  also  be  copied  onto  the  DECtape,  that  a
            directory  of  the  DECtape be written in your area, and that
            the operator dismount the DECtape.

            The directory is written on the first  structure  encountered
            in  the  search  list  that is both writable and on which you
            have a UFD.  In the preceding example, you do not have a  UFD
            on  the  first  structure  in  your  search list (SORT:), you
            cannot create new files  on  the  second  structure  in  your
            search  list  (DSKA:), and so the directory is written on the
            third structure in your search list (DSKB:).

            The file EX.1 on DSKA: will be copied only onto  the  DECtape
            because  the  copy  on DSKA: was encountered first.  The file
            DSKB:EX.2[10,4072] will be copied onto  the  DECtape  because
            the copy on DSKB: was encountered first.

            .FILE F,TAPE1,EX.1,EX.2[10,4072]<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
            DSKB:,DSKA0:EX.1,DSKB0:EX.2[10,4072]
            1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
            .




                                   2-131
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        2.  In this example, you specified that DSKC: be copied from both
            areas.  DSKC: was typed only once because a device given in a
            file specification remains  in  effect  for  subsequent  file
            specifications  in the same command, unless another device is
            specified.  When you omit the project number the  default  is
            your  project-programmer number.  Also the project-programmer
            number can be specified either before the file  name  (as  in
            this  example)  or  after  the file name (as in the preceding
            example).

            .FILE F,TAPE2,DSKC:EX.1,[,4072]EX.2<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2 
            DSKB:DSKC0:EX.1,DSKC0:EX.2[10,4072]
            2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
            .

            The response from the FILE C command indicates to  you  which
            of  your requests have not yet been processed.  In this case,
            both of your requests are still pending.

            .FILE C<RET>
            1. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
            DSKB:,DSKA0:EX.1,DSKB0:EX.2[10,4071]
            2. F JOB30 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE2
            DSKB:,DSKC0:EX.1,DSKC0:EX.2[10,4072]
            2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
            .

            The FILE R command uses the same algorithm as the FILE F  and
            Z  command  for  determining the device on which to write the
            directory.  The file  EX.1  is  written  on  the  first  file
            structure  in your search list.  The file EX.1 already exists
            on DSKA:, DSKB:, and DSKC:.  DSKA: is NOCREATE, so  the  file
            EX.1  is  written  onto DSKB, superseding the EX.1 already on
            DSKB:.

            .FILE R,TAPE1,EX.1<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            1. R JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE1
            DSKB:,DSKB:EX.1
            1 COMMAND IN QUEUE
            .










                                   2-132
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                FILE Command


        3.  When the wildcard  construction  is  used,  UMOUNT  uses  the
            entire search list to determine what files to copy for FILE F
            and FILE Z commands, whether or not  you  have  a  UFD  on  a
            particular  structure.  UMOUNT passes the construction, along
            with each structure in the search list, to OMOUNT.

            .FILE F,TAPE3,E?.*<RET>
            REQUEST QUEUED
            2. F JOB24 TTY11 10,3421 TAPE3 
            DSKB:,SORT:E?.*,DSKA:E?.*,DSKB:E?.*,DSKC:E?.*
            DSKC:E?.*
            2 COMMANDS IN QUEUE
            .








































                                   2-133
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FINISH Command


                              FINISH Command



   Function

        The FINISH command terminates any input or  output  currently  in
        progress  on  the  specified  device,  closes any open files, and
        deassigns the device.  This command  completely  disassociates  a
        device  from  your  job  and  prevents  you  from  continuing the
        program.  If you want to continue your program after ending  I/O,
        use the DEASSIGN command instead of the FINISH command.

   Format

        FINISH dev:

        Where:    dev: is the logical or physical name of the  device  on
                  which  I/O  is  to  be  terminated.   This  argument is
                  optional.

                  If dev: is omitted I/O is terminated  on  all  devices,
                  except your job's controlling terminal, and any logical
                  name  associated  with  the  controlling  terminal   is
                  cleared.

                  Refer to Section 1.9.1  for  a  description  of  device
                  names.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires core.

   Restrictions

        When running a program, you cannot continue your program after  a
        FINISH  if  the  device  was  initialized,  but you can start the
        program from the beginning or enter DDT.











                                   2-134
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FINISH Command


   Example

        Assign a card reader to your job.

        .ASSIGN CDR:<RET>

        Card reader number 1 is assigned.

        CDR261 ASSIGNED

        Show the devices that are busy.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY     LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT
        CDR261     29    AS

        Card reader number 1 is busy because it is assigned to your job.

        Finish using the card reader.

        .FINISH CDR<RET>

        Again, show the busy devices.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE    JOB    WHY     LOGICAL

        TTY144     18    INIT
        TTY235     18    INIT
        LPT260     18    INIT
        LPT261     18    INIT
        LPT263     18    INIT
        CDR260     18    INIT

        .

        Card reader 1 is not in the list of busy devices.  Therefore,  it
        is available to other users.




                                   2-135
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FUDGE Command


                               FUDGE Command



   Function

        The FUDGE command creates a library .REL file  from  a  temporary
        file  generated  by  a  previous COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG
        command string containing the /FUDGE switch.   (See  the  TOPS-10
        MAKLIB  User's  Guide and the TOPS-10 LINK Programmer's Reference
        Manual for descriptions of library .REL files.)

        The temporary file contains the library name and the list of .REL
        files which were entered by the previous command's /FUDGE switch.
        The FUDGE command runs PIP, which reads the list  of  .REL  files
        and  the  library  file  name  from the temporary file.  PIP then
        copies the listed .REL files into the library file  in  the  same
        order that they are listed in the temporary file.

                                    NOTE

           Unlike the COMPIL program's default action, the /FUDGE
           switch  combines files in the order that you list them
           in the command line.  The COMPIL program  sorts  files
           by  compilers.   COMPIL  sorts mixed FORTRAN and MACRO
           programs so that all  FORTRAN  programs  are  compiled
           first and MACRO programs second.

        After you use the /FUDGE switch, you must issue the FUDGE command
        before  you  issue  any other command that runs PIP (for example,
        TYPE and  COPY).   Otherwise,  the  library  information  in  the
        temporary file will be superseded by the information generated by
        the other PIP command.

   Format

        FUDGE

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program (at CCL offset).

        Destroys your core image.








                                   2-136
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               FUDGE Command


   Example

        Compile the files PROG,NUMBER, and NUMB2.

        .COMPILE/FUDGE:LIBRAR PROG.FOR,NUMBER.FOR,NUMB2.FOR<RET>

        Create a file named LIBRAR that contains the .REL files generated
        by the COMPILE command.

        .FUDGE<RET>

        A DIRECTORY command shows the files created  less  than  an  hour
        ago, among them:  LIBRAR.REL.

        .DIR/SIN:-1<RET>

        PROG      REL  1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:[27,5055]
        NUMBER    REL  1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy
        NUMB2     REL  1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy
        LIBRAR    REL  3  <055>  dd-mmm-yy

































                                   2-137
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                GET Command


                                GET Command



   Function

        The GET command loads a core image  from  a  retrievable  storage
        device but does not execute it.

        This command clears all of your core.  However,  programs  should
        not  count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
        of core that are expected to contain zeros.  (That  is,  programs
        should  be self-initializing).  This action allows programs to be
        restarted by a CTRL/C START sequence without another GET command.

   Format

        GET file-spec core/switch

        Where:    file-spec is  a  file  specification  in  the  standard
                  format.

                  core is the amount of core you want to reserve for  the
                  program.    The  core  argument  is  a  decimal  number
                  followed by an optional K or P  for  blocks  or  pages,
                  respectively.   If  you do not specify either K or P, K
                  is assumed.  If you do not specify a core argument, the
                  default  is  the  minimum amount of core needed to load
                  the program.

                  /switch is the following option:

                       /USE:n    Specifies the octal section  number  (n)
                                 in  which a core image is loaded.  Valid
                                 section numbers are 0-37, octal.   (Note
                                 that the limit is 40 octal sections.)

   Characteristics

        Destroys your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.











                                   2-138
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                GET Command


   Example

        Load a program.

        .LOAD PROG.FOR
        FORTRAN:  PROG
        MAIN.
        LINK:   LOADING
        EXIT

        Save the executable format.

        .SAVE
        PROG SAVED

        Use GET to bring the program into memory.

        .GET PROG
        JOB SETUP

        START execution of the program.

        .START

        TESTING EXECUTION

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME:  0.02 ELAPSED TIME:  0.17
        EXIT

        .






















                                   2-139
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HALT Command


                               HALT Command



   Function

        The HALT command (or CTRL/C) stops your job.

   Formats

        HALT

        (CTRL/C)

            CTRL/C echoes on your terminal as ^C.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  Request a list of your directory.

            .DIR<RET>

            PATH1.RNO  3  <055>  dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:[27,5434]
            SWITCH.INI 1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy
            CALC.^C

            ^C

            .

            Type two CTRL/Cs to halt output.

        2.  Execute a program.

            .EXECUTE PROG.FOR<RET>
            LINK:  LOADING
            [LNKXCT PROG EXECUTION]
            ^C
            ^C
            .

            Two CTRL/Cs return you to monitor level, interrupting program
            execution.




                                   2-140
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HALT Command


            Use  CCONTINUE  to  continue  execution  while  remaining  at
            monitor level.

            .CCONTINUE<RET>

            Use HALT to interrupt execution.  (See NOTE below.)

            .HALT<RET>
            .

            Use CONTINUE to re-enter  user  level  and  continue  program
            execution.

            .CONTINUE<RET>
            DONE
            END OF EXECUTION
            CPU TIME:6.12 ELAPSED TIME:45.73
            EXIT
            .

            Program successfully completes execution.

                                        NOTE

                    It  is  necessary  to  halt  execution  of  a
                    program if your terminal is to enter or leave
                    user level.  Therefore, you must issue a HALT
                    or  CTRL/C  at  monitor level, after you have
                    used the CCONTINUE or  CSTART  commands,  for
                    your terminal to enter user level.























                                   2-141
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


                               HELP Command



   Function

        The HELP command prints information about system features on your
        terminal.   You  can  select  this information from the following
        file structures:  HLP:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:, and SYS:.

   Formats

        HELP

        Prints instructions for using the variations of the HELP command.


        HELP *

        Lists the names of features for which HELP is available, all  the
        monitor  commands,  all  site-specific commands, all user-defined
        (declared) commands, all the monitor SET  commands,  the  monitor
        SET  TTY  commands,  the terminal types supported by TOPS-10, and
        the SET WATCH commands.


        HELP name

        Where:    name is the name of a feature or program for which  the
                  monitor   has   a   HELP  file.   Only  the  first  six
                  alphanumeric characters are read by the HELP program.


        HELP dev:name

        Where:    dev:  is the file structure that the file is on.

                  name is the name of the program or  feature  for  which
                  you want help.

                  If the specified feature does not have a HELP  file  on
                  the  specified  device,  or  if  you do not specify the
                  device, the  devices  are  searched  in  the  following
                  order:

                  HLP:, SYS:, NEW:, OLD:, DOC:

                  You can change the search order by  changing  your  job
                  search list.  Refer to the SETSRC command.




                                   2-142
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


        You can use the asterisk wildcard construction (*) instead of the
        feature name, for information about all the HELP available on the
        specified device.  (See examples.) You cannot  use  the  asterisk
        (*) to specify the device name.

|       Because of the 6-character limit on file names, some of the  help
|       file  names  can  be  cryptic.   The  file names for the commands
|       topics are fairly  straightforward  and,  although  truncated  to
|       6-characters, can be understood. (For example, PASSWO is the help
|       file for the PASSWORD command.)  However, help files are provided
|       for  such  general  topics as line continuation (LNCONT), command
|       switches (COMSWI), and directory  paths  (DIRPAT)  and  the  file
|       names  for  these  topics  may  be difficult to ascertain.  These
|       general topics and their help file names are listed below:
|  
|  
|       _________________________________________________________________
|  
|       Help file         Topic
|       _________________________________________________________________
|  
|       ATSIGN            Indirect Commands (@ Construction)
|       ANGLEB            The Angle-Bracket (< >) Construction
|       CHRCOD            SIXBIT/ASCII Character Codes
|       CMDARG            Command Arguments
|       COMSWI            Compiler Switches
|       COMCMD            Compile-Class Commands
|       CRDCOD            ASCII Card Codes
|       DEFCOM            The Default Compiler
|       DELKEY            The DELETE Key
|       DEVHND            Device-Handling Commands
|       DEVNAM            Device Names
|       DIRNAM            Directory Names
|       DIRPAT            Directory Paths
|       DTARGS            Date-Time Arguments
|       EQUAL             The Equal (=) Construction
|       ERSNAM            Ersatz Device Names
|       FILEXT            File Name Extensions
|       FILHND            File-Handling Commands
|       FILNAM            File Names
|       FISPEC            File Specification
|       FNCCMD            Functional Groups of Commands
|       INFCMD            Information Commands
|       JOBCTL            Job-Control Commands
|       LIBS              Libraries
|       LNCONT            Line Continuation
|       LNKSWI            LINK Switches
|       MICCTL            MIC Commands
|       NETCMD            Network Commands
|       NEWUSE            Introductory Help to TOPS-10 Commands
|       PCODES            Protection Codes


                                   2-143
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


|       PLUS              The Plus (+) Construction
|       PRGCTL            Program-Control Commands
|       PRGPRE            Program-Preparation Commands
|       RESPPN            Reserved Project-Programmer Numbers
|       SERLST            Search Lists
|       SWINI             SWITCH.INI Files
|       SWITCH            Command Switches
|       SYSDEF            System Defaults
|       TEMFIL            Temporary Files
|       TERCTL            Terminal-Control and Terminal Communication
|       UCMNDS            User-Definable Commands
|       WLDCRD            Wildcard Constructions
|  
|       _________________________________________________________________
|  
|  
|       The various SET commands have their own help files and  they  are
|       listed in the general-topic help file SET.


        Characteristics

        Does an autopush, so it preserves your core image.

        Runs the HELP program.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Example

        For information about the HELP command, type HELP.

        .HELP<RET>

        The HELP command prints information  about  the  system  on  your
        terminal.   Use  one  of the following constructions for specific
        information.

        .HELP<RET>

        Prints out this message.

        .HELP *<RET>

        Prints out the names of all subjects for  which  there  is  help.
        Use  one  of these subjects as the name in the next construction.
        HELP * also prints out the names  of  the  system  commands,  the
        names  of  site-specific  commands,  the  names  of  job-specific
        commands, the names of the SET commands, the  names  of  the  SET


                                   2-144
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


        DEFAULT commands, the names of the SET TTY commands, the names of
        the SET WATCH commands, and the supported terminal types.

        .HELP name<RET>

        Prints all the information available about  the  subject  "name".
        For example:

        .HELP DIRECT<RET>

        Prints information about the DIRECT command/program.










































                                   2-145
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                HELP Command


        .HELP lib:*<RET>

        Prints out the names of all subjects  for  which  there  is  help
        available from the specified library device.  The standard system
        library devices are:

        SYS:    NEW:    OLD:    HLP:    DOC:

        For example:

        .HELP NEW:*<RET>

        Prints a list of all the information available in NEW:.

        .HELP lib:name<RET>

        Prints information about the specified subject in  the  specified
        library.



































                                   2-146
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


                              INITIA Command



   Function

        The INITIA command sets the parameters for your  terminal.   This
        command  is  issued  automatically  at  system startup on certain
        designated terminals.  You can reissue the command at  any  time.
        This  command  also  starts  certain system programs, when issued
        from particular terminals.

        If you are logged in  and  you  run  INITIA,  INITIA  reads  your
        SWITCH.INI  file.   Refer  to  Appendix  B  for  a description of
        SWITCH.INI.

   Format

        INITIA arg arg ...

        Where:  arg can be one  of  the  following  arguments.   You  can
                precede  any  of  the following arguments with NO (except
                NORUN) to suppress a default setting.

             Argument                         Function

             ATTRIBUTES     Prints  the  terminal  attributes  for   this
                            terminal.

             CHECK:keyword  Sets  your  terminal  type  after  requesting
                            identification  from  your DEC terminal.  The
                            optional keyword is  DEFAULT,  meaning  CHECK
                            only  if  the  current  terminal  type is the
                            default type (usually TTY).

             HELP           Prints information about INITIA command.

             KSYS           Tells you when timesharing will end (if  KSYS
                            is set).

             NAME           Prints the  system  name  on  your  terminal.
                            NAME is the default argument.

             NORUN          Suppresses  the  execution  of  any   default
                            program.

             NOTICE         Prints the general operator notice.






                                   2-147
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


             SETTTY         Sets  up  your  terminal  characteristics  or
                            attributes.   The SETTTY argument is required
                            in order to set terminal characteristics from
                            SWITCH.INI  if  you  are logged in.  When you
                            are not  logged  in,  INITIA  reads  terminal
                            characteristics        from       SYS:TTY.INI
                            automatically.  SETTTY can  be  specified  on
                            the  INITIA command line or in the SWITCH.INI
                            file.

             STRUCTURES     Prints any  operator  notices  about  mounted
                            structures.

             TEXT           Prints quick operator notice.

             TTY            Prints the terminal characteristics for  this
                            terminal.


        Terminal Characteristics Arguments

        In addition to the above arguments, you  can  use  the  following
        arguments  to  INITIA  SETTTY  in your SWITCH.INI file.  They are
        effective for any job that is logged in.  Most of  the  following
        arguments  are  equivalent  to  an argument to a SET TTY command.
        Many of the arguments can be  preceded  by  NO  and  a  space  to
        disable  the  defaults.  These are included in the description of
        the function of the arguments.  (Refer to Appendix B for  details
        about using SWITCH.INI.)

        Each argument, equivalent  SET  TTY  command,  and  function,  is
        listed below.

        Argument       Equivalent Command            Function

        SETTTY         None                Must be present for the  other
                                           INITIA  terminal  arguments to
                                           be effective.

        ALTMODE        TTY ALTMODE         Converts ALTmode codes 175 and
                                           176  to  the ESCape character.
                                           NO   ALTMODE   restores    the
                                           individual identities of codes
                                           175 and 176.

        BLANKS         TTY BLANK           Controls the output  of  blank
                                           lines.   NO  BLANKS suppresses
                                           the   output   of   automatic,
                                           consecutive  carriage  returns
                                           at the end of output.



                                   2-148
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        CRLF           TTY CRLF            Controls     the     automatic
                                           carriage  return and line feed
                                           at the  end  of  the  terminal
                                           line.   NO CRLF suppresses the
                                           automatic carriage return  and
                                           line feed.

        DEBREAK        TTY DEBREAK         No longer supported.

        DEFER          TTY DEFER           Suppresses echoing to a  video
                                           terminal    until   input   is
                                           requested.   NO  DEFER  allows
                                           characters typed to the system
                                           to be echoed when the terminal
                                           is idle.

        DISPLAY        TTY DISPLAY         Notifies the system  that  you
                                           have a display terminal.  This
                                           characteristic can be used  by
                                           programs  that  control output
                                           to the terminal.

        ECHO           TTY ECHO            Controls   echoing   to    the
                                           terminal.

        ELEMENT:xxx    TTY ELEMENT xxx     No longer supported.

        FILL:x         TTY FILL x          Assigns filler class x to  the
                                           terminal.

        FORM           TTY FORM            Controls   the    output    of
                                           line-feeds  for  formfeed  and
                                           vertical tab  characters.   NO
                                           FORM  instructs  the system to
                                           output the line-feeds.

        GAG            TTY GAG             Controls  the   reception   of
                                           messages  sent  with  the SEND
                                           command.    NO   GAG    allows
                                           messages when your terminal is
                                           at user level.

        IDLEDISCONN n  None                Sets  the  maximum  number  of
                                           seconds  your  terminal can be
                                           idle   before    the    system
                                           disconnects it.

        LC             TTY LC              Informs the system  that  your
                                           terminal     has     lowercase
                                           ability.  NO  LC  changes  all
                                           lowercase     characters    to
                                           uppercase.

                                   2-149
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        LENGTH:xx      TTY LENGTH n        Sets the forms length of  your
                                           terminal.

        LOCALCOPY      TTY LOCALCOPY       Does not require the system to
                                           echo    characters    to   the
                                           terminal.

        LOCATE node    None                Changes  the  default   device
                                           list   of   the   job,  making
                                           devices   at    other    nodes
                                           available to your job.  LOCATE
                                           is   only   valid    in    the
                                           SWITCH.INI and TTY.INI files.

        RCVSPEED:xxx   TTY SPEED xxx nnn   Changes the input speed of the
                                           terminal   to  be  xxx.   This
                                           argument affects the speed  at
                                           which   the  monitor  receives
                                           characters from your terminal.

        REMOTE         TTY REMOTE          Sets   your    terminal    for
                                           accounts  with remote or local
                                           access types.  REMOTE  is  not
                                           recommended    for    use   by
                                           non-privileged  users  because
                                           it  can only be reversed by an
                                           operator [1,2].

        RTCOMP         TTY RTCOMP          Controls the use of CTRL/R and
                                           CTRL/T.   Refer to Section 1.6
                                           for  the  function  of   these
                                           control   characters.   RTCOMP
                                           turns    off    the    control
                                           characters.   NO  RTCOMP turns
                                           them on.

        SPEED:xxxx     TTY SPEED xxxx      Sets   the   speed   of   your
                                           terminal  to  xxxx baud.  This
                                           construction  sets  the  input
                                           and   output   speeds   to  be
                                           equivalent.

        SSIZE:n        TTY [S]STOP n       Sets the page length  of  your
                                           terminal.   This  controls the
                                           number  of  lines   that   are
                                           output to your terminal before
                                           an automatic stop.

        SSTOP          TTY SSTOP           Ignores CTRL/Q until output is
                                           stopped  either  automatically
                                           by the system,  or  by  CTRL/S
                                           from the user.

                                   2-150
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        STOP           TTY STOP            Stops output to  the  terminal
                                           automatically    after    page
                                           length is reached.

        SYSDPY         None                Runs   the    display-oriented
                                           SYSTAT    program    that   is
                                           appropriate   for   your   set
                                           terminal type.  SYSDPY is only
                                           valid in  the  SWITCH.INI  and
                                           TTY.INI files.

        TABS           TTY TAB             Informs the system  that  your
                                           terminal  has tabular ability.
                                           NO TABS instructs  the  system
                                           to simulate tab stops.

        TAPE           TTY TAPE            Turns on the XON (CTRL/Q)  and
                                           XOFF  (CTRL/S)  keys for paper
                                           tape reading.  NO  TAPE  gives
                                           CTRL/Q and CTRL/S their normal
                                           function.  TAPE  is  discussed
                                           in  the  TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
                                           Manual.  CTRL/S and CTRL/Q are
                                           discussed in Section 1.6.

        TERMINET       None                Sets   tab   spacing   for   a
                                           TERMINET-300.

        TYPE:xxxx      TTY TYPE xxxx       Informs the system  that  your
                                           terminal is of the type xxxx.

        UC             TTY UC              Changes  all  the   characters
                                           input  from  your  terminal to
                                           uppercase.

        WIDTH:xxx      TTY WIDTH xxx       Sets the width of the line  on
                                           your     terminal    to    xxx
                                           characters.

        XMTSPEED:xxx   TTY SPEED nnn xxx   Changes the  output  speed  of
                                           your  terminal.  This argument
                                           affects the speed at which the
                                           monitor  sends  characters  to
                                           your terminal.

        The arguments listed above are described more thoroughly  in  the
        description of the SET TTY command.






                                   2-151
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        Terminal Attributes Arguments

        The following arguments to INITIA SETTTY set up the attributes of
        your  terminal.   Like  the  preceding  terminal  characteristics
        arguments, you can use the following arguments in your SWITCH.INI
        file.

        Unlike  the  terminal  characteristics  arguments,  most  of  the
        following  terminal  attributes  arguments do not have equivalent
        SET TTY commands.  The exceptions are DISPLAY, ISO, EIGHTBIT, and
        OVERSTRIKE.

        To display your current terminal attributes,  you  must  use  the
        command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.

        To set terminal attributes, use the following command format:

             INITIA SETTTY arg arg ...

        All the following arguments can be preceded with NO and  a  space
        to disable the setting.

        Argument                              Function

        ANSLEVEL:n          Indicates the level of  conformance  to  ANSI
                            CRT programming standards.

        AVO                 Indicates that the terminal has  an  advanced
                            video option or equivalent capability.

        BLOCKMODE           Indicates that the  terminal  is  capable  of
                            performing block-mode transfers.

        COLOR               Indicates the  terminal  has  a  color  video
                            display.

        DECLEVEL:n          Indicates the level of conformance to DEC CRT
                            programming standards.

        DECTCS              Indicates the DEC technical character set.

        DISPLAY             Indicates  that  the  terminal  has  a  video
                            display;  NO  DISPLAY  indicates  a hard-copy
                            terminal.

        DRCS                Indicates dynamically  redefinable  character
                            sets.

        EIGHTBIT            Indicates that the terminal uses an eight-bit
                            ASCII character code.



                                   2-152
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        8BITARCH            Indicates the terminal is capable of using an
                            eight-bit ASCII character code.

        GUARDEDAREA         Indicates  terminal   allows   guarded   area
                            transfer.

        HSCROLL             Indicates the  terminal  supports  horizontal
                            scrolling.

        IDCHAR              Indicates character insertion and deletion.

        IDLINE              Indicates line insertion and deletion.

        INTERROGATION       Indicates that the terminal supports terminal
                            state interrogation.

        ISO                 Indicates ISO  Latin-1  supplemental  graphic
                            character    set.     NO    ISO   means   DEC
                            Multinational Character Set.

        KATAKANA            Indicates the Katakana character set.

        KEYBOARD            Indicates the terminal has a keyboard.

        LOCATOR:device      Indicates whether locator  is  present.   The
                            device can be MOUSE, TABLET or NONE.

        NRC                 Indicates  national   replacement   character
                            sets.

        OVERSTRIKE          Indicates  that   the   terminal   allows   a
                            three-character   sequence   to   create  one
                            composite output character  by  printing  one
                            character,   backspacing  and  then  printing
                            another character over the first.

        PRINTERPORT         Indicates that the  terminal  has  a  printer
                            port option.

        REGIS               Indicates that the terminal understands ReGIS
                            graphic commands.

        SELECTERASE         Indicates selective erase.

        SESSIONS            Indicates  the  terminal  supports   multiple
                            sessions.

        SIXEL               Indicates that the  terminal  is  capable  of
                            displaying SIXEL graphics.

        SREGION             Indicates scroll regions.


                                   2-153
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        STATUSLINE          Indicates that  the  terminal  has  an  extra
                            status line in its video display.

        TEKEMULATION        Indicates TEK 4010/4014 terminal emulation.

        UDKEYS              Indicates    that    the     terminal     has
                            user-definable function keys.

        USERWINDOWS         Indicates the terminal supports user windows.

        VLENGTH             Indicates variable forms length.

        VT52EMULATION       Indicates VT52 terminal emulation.

        VWIDTH              Indicates variable forms width.

        For more information about these terminal  attributes,  refer  to
        your terminal manuals.

   Characteristics

        Runs the INITIA program.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Example

        Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show the characteristics
        and attributes of a generic terminal type:

        .I TTY ATTRIB<RET>

        RL357A DEC10 Development 08:11:23 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
        Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
        Job 20   User DOTY      [27,10024]

        TYPE:TTY        MODEL:TTY       CLASS:LT33      APC:HARDWIRED
        ECHO:DEFER      WIDTH:72        LENGTH:0        NOSTOP
        FILL:1          NOLC            NOTABS          NOFORM
        CRLF            NOGAG           SBELL           NOTAPE
        BLANKS          ALTMOD          NORTCOMP        NOREMOTE
        XONXOF          NOUNPAUS        NOESCAPE        NOQUOTE
        IDLEDI:0        EDITOR          NOSLAVE
        ANSLEVEL:0      DECLEVEL:0      NOEIGHTBIT      NO8BITARCH
        NODISPLAY       NOOVERSTRIKE    NOCOLOR         NOSTATUSLINE
        NOISO           NONRC           NODRCS          NOUDKEYS
        NOAVO           NOPRINTERPORT   NOIDCHAR        NOIDLINE
        NOREGIS         NOSIXEL         NOTEKEMULATION  NOVT52EMULATION
        NOSREGION       NOHSCROLL       NOVLENGTH       NOVWIDTH
        NOUSERWINDOWS   NOBLOCKMODE     NOGUARDEDAREA   NOSELECTERASE
        NOKATAKANA      NOSESSIONS      NODECTCS        NOINTERROGATION
        NOLOCATOR       KEYBOARD

                                   2-154
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               INITIA Command


        Use the SET TTY TYPE command to set your terminal type.

        .TTY TYPE VT240<RET>

        Use the INITIA TTY ATTRIBUTES command to show your  new  terminal
        characteristics and attributes.

        .I TTY ATTRIB<RET>

        RL357A DEC10 Development 08:11:40 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
        Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162
        Job 20   User DOTY      [27,10024]

        TYPE:VT240     MODEL:VT240    CLASS:VT200    APC:HARDWIRED
        ECHO:DEFER     WIDTH:80       LENGTH:24      NOSTOP
        FILL:0         LC             TABS           NOFORM
        CRLF           NOGAG          SBELL          NOTAPE
        BLANKS         NOALTMOD       NORTCOMP       NOREMOTE
        XONXOF         NOUNPAUS       NOESCAPE       NOQUOTE
        IDLEDI:0       EDITOR         NOSLAVE
        ANSLEVEL:2     DECLEVEL:2     NOEIGHTBIT     8BITARCH
        DISPLAY        NOOVERSTRIKE   NOCOLOR        NOSTATUSLINE
        NOISO          NRC            DRCS           UDKEYS
        AVO            PRINTERPORT    IDCHAR         IDLINE
        REGIS          SIXEL          TEKEMULATION   VT52EMULATION
        SREGION        NOHSCROLL      NOVLENGTH      VWIDTH
        NOUSERWINDOWS  NOBLOCKMODE    NOGUARDEDAREA  SELECTERASE
        NOKATAKANA     NOSESSIONS     NODECTCS       NOINTERROGATION
        NOLOCATOR      KEYBOARD
























                                   2-155
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             JCONTINUE Command


                             JCONTINUE Command



   Function

        The JCONTINUE command forces the specified job to continue if the
        job was in a CTRL/C state because of a device error.

   Format

        JCONTINUE n

        Where:    n is the number of  the  job  to  be  continued.   This
                  argument is required.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Examples

        1.  Continue job 44:

            .JCONTINUE 44<RET>

            .

        2.  Continue job 12:

            .JCONT 12<RET>

            .


















                                   2-156
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


                               KJOB Command



   Function

        The KJOB command:

        1.  Stops all assigned  I/O  devices  and  returns  them  to  the
            system's pool of available devices.

        2.  Returns  all  allocated  memory  to  the  system's  pool   of
            available memory.

        3.  Returns the job-number to the pool of available job-numbers.

        4.  Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        5.  Prints run-time information for your job.

        6.  Completes all deferred spooling requests.

   Format

        KJOB/switch

        KJOB can be abbreviated to K.  KJOB accepts one or  more  of  the
        following  switches.   All  switches can be preceded with NO (for
        example, NOTEMP) to negate their functions.

          Switch                           Function

        /BATCH         Deletes  files  only  when  you   are   over   the
                       logged-out  quota, then deletes enough files to be
                       below quota.  The algorithm for determining  which
                       files  are  deleted  first  is explained in detail
                       below.

        /CLEAR         Clears your terminal's display, if it has one  and
                       if the monitor knows the terminal type.

        /DISCONNECT    Disconnects a terminal  line  when  you  log  out.
                       This  includes  hanging  up  a dataset (modem), or
                       terminating a LAT connection, for  example.   This
                       switch  may  be  abbreviated  to /D.  NODISCONNECT
                       maintains the  connection  with  a  terminal  line
                       after logging you out.






                                   2-157
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


        /HELP:key      Prints information about KJOB  on  your  terminal.
                       /HELP does not perform functions 1 through 4.  The
                       keywords for /HELP are SWITCHES  and  TEXT.   TEXT
                       prints  the help file and is the default argument.
                       SWITCHES  lists  the  KJOB  switches   and   their
                       meanings.

        /MESSAGE:key   Tells the system which messages to print  on  your
                       terminal.    NOMESSAGE  supresses  output  of  the
                       standard LOGOUT message but still prints error and
                       warning messages.  The keywords for /MESSAGE are:

                       ADDRESS        Prints out the  address  where  the
                                      message occurs.

                       CONTINUATION   Prints out  continuation  text,  if
                                      any.

                       FIRST          Prints out the first  line  of  the
                                      message.

                       PREFIX         Prints   out   the    six-character
                                      message prefix.

        /TEMP          Searches your disk area and deletes all files with
                       .TMP  extensions.   TEMP  is  a default switch for
                       KJOB.  Using the NOTEMP switch will  log  you  out
                       faster.

   KJOB/BATCH Algorithm

        The KJOB/BATCH  algorithm  categorizes  files  in  three  groups,
        according to their extensions:

         o  Expendable files have these extensions:

            TMP, TEM, SFD, BAK, Q??, MAP, CRF, LSD, LSQ, LST,  LIS,  LPT,
            PTP, PLT, CDP, Z??, FOO, LOG, BIN, DMP, FIN

         o  Important files have these extensions:

            RNO, RND, RNH, CMD, KBD, CED, MCR, SNO, FAI, FOR,  F4,   MAC,
            ALG,  AID,  BLI, B10, B11, COB, CBL, BAS, PAL, P11, SRC, IDA,
            IDX, DAT, DBS, B16, B32, B36, REQ, R16, R36, PAS, INI

         o  Unimportant files have other extensions.







                                   2-158
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


        Files are deleted in the following order until the user is  under
        quota:

        1.  Recompute disk usage and delete files that are too large.

            The number of blocks used is recalculated by doing a wildcard
            directory and adding up the total space used.  Any files that
            are larger than the logged-out quota are deleted.

        2.  Delete unprotected expendable files.

            An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
            of  the extensions listed in the expendable list.  If a match
            is found and the protection code is less  than  or  equal  to
            177, the file is deleted.

        3.  Delete unprotected unimportant files.

            Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list  and
            that  have  a  protection  code less than or equal to 177 are
            deleted.

        4.  Delete remaining expendable files.

            An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
            of  the extensions listed in the expendable list.  If a match
            is found, the file is deleted, no matter how it is protected.

        5.  Delete unprotected important files.

            An individual wildcard directory search is performed for each
            of  the  extensions listed in the important list.  If a match
            is found and the protection code is less  than  or  equal  to
            177, the file is deleted.

            Notice that the extensions toward the end  of  the  important
            list  are  considered  to be more important than those toward
            the beginning of the list.

        6.  Delete all unimportant files.

            Files with extensions that are NOT in the important list  are
            deleted no matter what their protection codes.

        7.  Delete all files.








                                   2-159
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                KJOB Command


   Characteristics

        Deassigns your terminal.

        Stops all I/O devices that are assigned to your job.

        Runs the LOGIN program.

   Example

        .K<RET>
        JOB 99 User CUSTER,L.  [27,4072]
        Logged-off TTY64 at hh:mm:ss on dd-mmm-yy
        Runtime:  0:00:05, KCS:44, Connect time:  0:31:23
        Disk reads:  1534, Writes:  88, Blocks saved:  2510

        .




































                                   2-160
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LABEL Command


                               LABEL Command



   Function

        The LABEL command writes  an  identifier  onto  a  DECtape.   The
        identifier  is  stored on the tape itself and is printed when you
        print a directory of the  tape  with  the  DIRECT  command.   You
        should  assign  a unique label to each DECtape to avoid confusing
        one tape with another.  You must use the ASSIGN command to access
        the tape before you can use LABEL.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        LABEL dev:  ^name^

        Where:    dev:  is a physical or logical name that  represents  a
                  DECtape.

                  ^ is the delimiter  of  the  DECtape  identifier.   The
                  delimiter  can  also  be  quotes.   If  the  identifier
                  consists  entirely  of  alphanumeric  characters,   the
                  delimiters can be omitted.

                  name is a 1- to 6-character name  to  be  used  as  the
                  identifier.   Any  characters  can  be  used except the
                  delimiter.

   Restriction

        You must use the ASSIGN command to access the tape before you can
        use LABEL.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.











                                   2-161
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LABEL Command


   Examples

        1.  Identify DECtape 4, which has the logical name TIME:

            .LABEL TIME ^2:00^<RET>

            .

        2.  Identify DECtape 5 as NAME:

            .LABEL DTA5: "NAME"<RET>

            .








































                                   2-162
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LIST Command


                               LIST Command



   Function

        The LIST command prints one or more files  on  the  line  printer
        (LPT:).   The  output goes either to the line printer immediately
        or to the disk to be spooled to the  line  printer  if  the  line
        printer  is  being spooled for this job.  (Refer to the QUEUE and
        PRINT commands.) If the line printer is being spooled, the  PRINT
        command  is preferred over the LIST command because it saves time
        and disk accesses.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        LIST file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file   specifications  separated  by  commas.   A  file
                  specification consists of a device name,  a  file  name
                  and  extension, and a directory name.  This argument is
                  required.  When a  directory  name  precedes  the  file
                  name, it becomes the default for all succeeding files.

                  Switches can be passed to  PIP  by  enclosing  them  in
                  parentheses  in  the  LIST command string.  When COMPIL
                  interprets the command string, it passes  the  switches
                  to PIP.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.















                                   2-163
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LIST Command


   Example

        Spool your line printer requests, print a file (FOR21.DAT) on the
        line printer, and look at the line printer queue.

        .SET SPOOL LPT:<RET>

        .LIST FOR21.DAT<RET>

        .PRI<RET>
        PRINTER QUEUE:
        JOB NAME     REQ#     LIMIT           USER
        *FOR21       61        12      MAROTTA[27,5434] ON UNIT:0

        THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (1 IN PROGRESS)

        .




































                                   2-164
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


                               LOAD Command



   Function

        The  LOAD  command  translates  the  specified  source  files  if
        necessary,  runs  the  loader, and loads the generated .REL files
        into memory.  The appropriate language compiler is determined  by
        the  source  file extension or by switches in the command string.
        (Refer to the COMPILE command.) If a  .REL  file  already  exists
        with a more recent date than that of the source file, compilation
        is not performed  (unless  you  request  it  using  the  /COMPILE
        switch).

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command  before  running  the  appropriate  language compiler and
        linking loader.

        The LOAD command generates  a  core  image  but  does  not  begin
        executing  the  program.   After  the LOAD command, you can START
        your program or SAVE the core image for future execution.

        Each time  the  COMPILE,  LOAD,  EXECUTE,  or  DEBUG  command  is
        executed,  the  system  remembers  the  arguments  and  switches.
        Therefore, if you issue one of these commands with no  arguments,
        the system uses the stored arguments.

        The LOAD command accepts several command  constructions:   the  @
        construction  (indirect  commands),  the  +  construction,  the =
        construction, and the < > construction.  (Refer to Appendix C for
        a complete description of each of these constructions.)

   Format

        LOAD file-spec,file-spec,...

        Where:    file-spec is one or more file specifications  separated
                  by  commas.   A file specification consists of a device
                  name, a file name with or without an extension,  and  a
                  directory name.  (Refer to Section 1.9.)

        The following switches modify the command string.

            Switch                           Function

        /ALGOL           Compiles the file with ALGOL.  Assumed for files
                         with the extension of .ALG.

        /BINARY          Generates a binary file for each file  compiled.
                         The  file  extension of the output file is .REL.


                                   2-165
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


                         This is the default action.




















































                                   2-166
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /BLISS           Compiles the file with  BLISS-10.   Assumed  for
                         files with the extension of .B10 and .BLI.

        /C68             Runs the specified COBOL compiler.
        /C74

        /COBOL           Compiles the file with COBOL.  Assumed for files
                         with the extension of .CBL.

        /COMPILE         Compiles the file even if a binary  file  exists
                         with a newer date and time than the source file.
                         This  switch  is  used  to   obtain   an   extra
                         compilation (for example, to obtain a listing of
                         the  compilation)  because  compilation  is  not
                         performed  if  the binary file is newer than the
                         source file.

        /CREF            Produces a cross-referenced listing file on  the
                         disk   for   each   file   compiled,  for  later
                         processing  by  the  CREF  program.   The   file
                         extension of the output file is .CRF.  The files
                         can  then  be  listed  with  the  CREF  command.
                         However,  with  COBOL files the cross-referenced
                         listing is always appended to the listing file.

        /DDT             Loads the program debugger DDT with the program.

        /DEBUG:          Passes   the  specified  arguments  to  FORTRAN.
         (arg, arg,...)  Refer to the  TOPS-10/TOPS-20  FORTRAN  Language
                         Manual.

        /DLIST           Produces a .LST  file  and  stores  it  in  your
                         directory.  You can obtain a listing of the file
                         with the PRINT command.

        /F10             Obsolete
        /F40

        /F66             Applies  FORTRAN-66  rules  for  DO  loops   and
                         EXTERNAL statements.

        /FORDDT          Loads the FORTRAN debugger with the program.

        /FORTRAN         Compiles  the  file  with  a  FORTRAN  compiler.
                         Assumed  for files with the extension of .F4 and
                         .FOR and all  files  with  nonstandard  compiler
                         extensions.   This  switch  is  necessary if the
                         file has a nonstandard  compiler  extension  and
                         FORTRAN  is  not the standard compiler or is not
                         the current default.



                                   2-167
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /FUDGE:          Creates  a disk file containing the names of the
         file-spec       .REL files produced by the command string.  When
                         you  give the FUDGE command, PIP reads this file
                         to generate a library REL file.  (Refer  to  the
                         FUDGE command description.)  The argument to the
                         switch is:

                         dev:file.ext[directory]

                         Where:       dev:  is the  device  on  which  to
                                      write  the  file.   If you omit the
                                      device name, DSK:  is assumed.

                                      file.ext is the name of the library
                                      file.   The  file name is required.
                                      If you omit the  extension,  it  is
                                      assumed to be .REL.

                                      [directory]  is  the  directory  in
                                      which  to  place  the  file.   Your
                                      default directory number is assumed
                                      if none is given.

                         This switch is permanent in that it pertains  to
                         all .REL files generated by the command string.

        /GFLOAT          Indicates that double-precision numbers  are  to
                         be stored in G-floating format.  This format has
                         an extended  exponent  range.   This  option  is
                         available on KL10 processors only.

        /K?10            Designates the machine on which the program will
                         execute  once it has been loaded.  The ?  can be
                         replaced by L or S.

        /LIBRARY         Loads the files in library  search  mode.   This
                         mode causes a program in a special library to be
                         loaded only if one or more of its declared entry
                         symbols satisfies an undefined global request in
                         the source  file.   The  default  libraries  are
                         always    searched.     (Refer   to   the   LINK
                         documentation.)

        /LINK            Obsolete

        /LIST            Generates a disk  listing  file  for  each  file
                         compiled.  The file extension of the output file
                         is .LST.  These files can be listed  later  with
                         the PRINT command.  If the line printer is being
                         spooled   for   this   job,   the   files    are
                         automatically  printed.   If  you do not specify
                         this switch, listing files are not generated.

                                   2-168
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /LMAP            Produces a loader map during the loading process
                         that contains the local symbols.

        /MACRO           Assembles the  file  with  MACRO.   Assumed  for
                         files with extension of .MAC.

        /MACY11          Assembles the file  with  MACY11.   Assumed  for
                         files with an extension of .P11.  This switch is
                         not supported.

        /MAP             Produces a loader map during loading.   After  a
                         library search of the default libraries, the map
                         is written in your disk  area  with  either  the
                         file  name  you specify (for example, /MAP:file)
                         or with the default  file  name  MAP.MAP.   This
                         switch  is  an exception to the permanent switch
                         rule, because although  it  may  be  used  as  a
                         permanent  switch,  it causes only one map to be
                         produced.

        /NEW             Runs the appropriate language compiler from  the
                         experimental  system  library (device NEW:) area
                         [1,5].  If the compiler does not exist on device
                         NEW:,  COMPIL  tries  to  obtain  it from device
                         SYS:.  (Refer to Restriction.)

        /NOBINARY        Does not generate binary  files.   This  switch,
                         when combined with the /CREF or /LIST switch, is
                         useful when compiling programs only to  generate
                         listings.

        /NOCOMPILE       Does not force a compilation of  a  source  file
                         whose  date  is not as recent as the date on the
                         binary file.  Note that this switch is  not  the
                         same  as  the  /REL  switch, which turns off all
                         compilation, even if the source  file  is  newer
                         than  the  .REL file.  /NOCOMPILE is the default
                         action.  Complement to the /COMPILE switch.

        /NODEBUG         Does not pass previously specified arguments  to
                         FORTRAN.

        /NOLIST          Does not generate listing files.   This  is  the
                         default action.

        /NOOPTIMIZE      Does not optimize the object source  code  of  a
                         FORTRAN program.






                                   2-169
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


        /NOSEARCH        Loads all  routines  of  the  file  whether  the
                         routines are referenced or not.  Because this is
                         the  default,  this  switch  turns  off  library
                         search mode (/LIBRARY).

        /OLD             Runs the appropriate language compiler from  the
                         system  library  of  old  programs (device OLD:)
                         that resides on the disk  area  [1,3].   If  the
                         compiler  does  not exist on device OLD:, COMPIL
                         tries to obtain it from device SYS:.  (Refer  to
                         Restriction.)

        /OPTIMIZE        Optimizes the object source code  of  a  FORTRAN
                         program.

        /PAL10           Assembles the  file  with  PAL10.   Assumed  for
                         files with the .PAL extension.

        /PASCAL          Compiles the  file  with  Pascal.   Assumed  for
                         files with the .PAS extension.

        /REL             Uses the existing .REL files  although  a  newer
                         source file might be present.

        /SAVE            Saves the core image of the loaded program.

        /SEARCH          Loads the files in library  search  mode.   This
                         switch is identical to the /LIBRARY switch.

        /SELF            Runs  the  appropriate  language  compiler  from
                         device  DSK:  instead of from the system library
                         (device SYS:).  This switch  is  useful  if  you
                         keep  a  private copy of a compiler in your disk
                         area  to   test   new   features.    (Refer   to
                         Restriction.)

        /SNOBOL          Compiles the  file  with  SNOBOL.   Assumed  for
                         files with an extension of .SNO.  This switch is
                         not supported.

        /SSAVE           Saves the core image of the loaded program in  a
                         sharable executable file.

        /SYS             Runs the appropriate language compiler from  the
                         system  library  (device  SYS:).   This  is  the
                         default action.







                                   2-170
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                LOAD Command


   Restrictions

        Once a language compiler has been  specified  from  a  particular
        area  (for  example, /SELF), it cannot be called from a different
        area within the same command string.  The following is illegal:

        .LOAD ITEM.CBL/SYS,ITEM02.CBL/SELF

        However, the following is valid:

        .COMPILE ITEM.CBL/SYS
        .COMPILE ITEM02.CBL/SELF
        .LOAD/REL ITEM,ITEM02

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the appropriate compiler or language compiler and LINK,
        destroying your original core image.

   Example

        The following example shows how to LOAD and SAVE a program.

        The DIRECTORY command shows all the files named TEST.

        .DIR TEST.*
        TEST FOR 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:  [27,5055]

        LOAD the program.  The monitor compiles and loads TEST.

        .LOAD TEST.FOR
        FORTRAN:TEST
        MAIN.
        LINK:  LOADING

        EXIT

        Save the loaded program.

        .SAVE TEST<RET>  
        TEST SAVED

        A directory shows that the executable format has  been  saved  in
        your directory.

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>
        TEST FOR   1 <055> dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:  [27,5055]
        TEST REL   1 <055> dd-mmm-yy
        TEST EXE 160 <055> dd-mmm-yy  6(422)
          TOTAL OF 162 BLOCKS IN 3 FILES ON DSKC:  [27,5055]
        .
                                   2-171
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOCATE Command


                              LOCATE Command


   Function

        The LOCATE command changes the default device list  of  the  job,
        making  devices at other ANF-10 nodes available to your job.  For
        example, if you want to use the devices at node  FRATZ  for  your
        job, you can issue the following command:

        .LOCATE FRATZ

        Thereafter, the default I/O devices used will be  those  on  node
        FRATZ.   Note that terminal and disk I/O are not affected by this
        command.

        The LOCATE command does not change the location of your job;  the
        job runs on the node on which the job was started.

   Format

        LOCATE node-id

        Where:    node-id is the name or number of  the  ANF-10  node  at
                  which you want I/O to be processed.

                  An argument of 0 locates your job at the node where the
                  job's  command  interpreter  is.  If you do not specify
                  the node-id, the default is your physical node/station.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Is valid only in networks or in systems with a remote station.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Associated Messages

        If the LOCATE succeeds, the system prints a message in the form:

        NODE node-name (node-num) sys-id date LOCATED

        Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is  the  number
        of the node, sys-id is the system identification, and date is the
        date the system was last reloaded.






                                   2-172
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOCATE Command


        If the node specified is not currently in communication with  the
        network, the following message is printed:

        %NODE(x)    LOCATED BUT OFF-LINE

        The job is successfully LOCATEd, but the node  is  not  presently
        accessible.

   Examples

        1.  You LOCATE the job at the node named LONDON, node number 3.

            .LOCATE LONDON<RET>
            NODE LONDON(3)  RD020A  KL10 SYS#1279 11-06-79 LOCATED
            .

        2.  You attempt to LOCATE to a node that  the  monitor  does  not
            recognize  as  part  of  the  network.   An  error message is
            printed and your location is not changed.

            .LOCATE TOKYO<RET>
            ?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE
            .     






























                                   2-173
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


                               LOGIN Command



   Function

        You use the LOGIN command to gain  access  to  the  system.   The
        LOGIN command runs the LOGIN program.  LOGIN accepts:

         o  your project-programmer number (PPN) or your user name

         o  your password

         o  optional account and remark strings

        You can obtain these from your system administrator.   LOGIN  can
        accept a path specification (directory name) in place of the PPN.

        To log in, type the  LOGIN  command,  and  press  RETURN.   LOGIN
        prompts  you with a pound sign (#).  Type your project-programmer
        number or your user name, and press RETURN.  You  can  also  type
        your  project-programmer  number  or  your  user name immediately
        after typing LOGIN, followed by a space.  After it receives  this
        information,  LOGIN  prints  another  prompt  (PASSWORD:) on your
        terminal.  Type your password, and press  RETURN.   The  password
        does not echo on your terminal.  You are finished logging in when
        the monitor prompt (a period) is returned.

        Your system may be running account validation software.  In  this
        case, LOGIN may not be complete after you type your password.  If
        your job requires an account string, LOGIN prompts you  for  your
        account  (ACCOUNT:).   Type  your  account string, and then press
        RETURN, or just press RETURN  if  the  system  administrator  has
        established a default account for your job.  If your job requires
        a remark string, LOGIN prompts for it (REMARK:).   Here  you  can
        type anything that will identify your job.  Your remark can be up
        to 39 characters.  If you do not have  a  remark,  press  RETURN.
        The  system  records spaces for your remark.  Example 3 shows the
        procedure for logging in with account validation software.

                                      NOTE

                When the account string is validated,  characters
                are  checked  according  to case.  Therefore, you
                must  type  your  account  in   the   same   case
                (uppercase or lowercase) as it is required.  This
                aspect of the system can be changed by the system
                administrator.





                                   2-174
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        You can put your account string and  remark  in  your  SWITCH.INI
        file.  See Appendix B for further information.

        To  specify  a  default  path  for  disk  I/O,  type   the   path
        specification  instead of your project-programmer number.  A path
        specification more specifically identifies your  directory  area.
        It   specifies   either  a  user-file  directory  or  a  sub-file
        directory.  Refer  to  Section  1.14  of  this  manual  for  more
        information about path specifications.

        If you have detached your terminal from a job, and begin  to  log
        in  to  another job, the LOGIN program asks if you want to attach
        to the old job or  create  a  new  job.   For  information  about
        detaching and attaching jobs, see the ATTACH and DETACH commands.
        Example 2 shows the procedure for logging in to a new  job  after
        detaching the first.

   Format

        LOGIN identification/switches

        Where:    identification       represents       either       your
                  project-programmer  number  (PPN),  path  specification
                  ([directory]), or your user name.

        You can type a path specification in place of  the  PPN  or  user
        name.   This allows you to establish a default directory path for
        the job.  The path specification is either a user-file  directory
        or  a  sub-file  directory.   Directory  paths  are  enclosed  in
        brackets (for example:  [27,5434,SFD]).

        The following switches modify the command string.  These switches
        can  be  included  in your SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI files are
        discussed in Appendix B.

        Most parameters set by these switches can be changed  by  monitor
        commands  after  you  log in.  (Refer to the SET commands and the
        SETSRC program description in the TOPS-10 User Utilities Manual.)















                                   2-175
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


             Switch                           Function

        /ACCOUNT:"string"   Specifies the account string  for  your  job.
                            If    the   account   string   contains   any
                            nonalphanumeric characters, you must  enclose
                            the  string  in quotation marks.  This switch
                            is often included in a SWITCH.INI file.

        /ASSIGN:            Assigns a  device to  your job and  a logical
        (dev1:log1,         name to the device.
        dev2:log2...)
                                 dev:  is the device name
                                 log   is the logical name

                            See Section 1.9.1 for more information  about
                            device names.

                            The logical name is  optional.   This  switch
                            can  be  used  more  than once to assign more
                            than one device.

        /ATTACH:argument    Sets the ATTACH state for  the  LOGIN  dialog
                            and  the  job  being created.  /ATTACH:ASK is
                            the  default  action.   By  default,   if   a
                            detached  job  exists with the specified PPN,
                            and the job was logged in  with  /ATTACH:ASK,
                            LOGIN  asks whether you want to attach to the
                            detached job, instead of creating a  new  job
                            with the same PPN.  The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch
                            suppresses  the   default   action   of   the
                            /ATTACH:ASK switch.  Jobs you create with the
                            IGNORE argument will be ignored by LOGIN when
                            you  do  additional logins with the same PPN.
                            LOGIN will not ask you if you want to  attach
                            to jobs set to the IGNORE argument.

|       /BATCH:             Sets  the batch  parameters.  Used by  BATCON
|       (arg:n, arg:n)      only).  Multiple keywords can be given to the
|                           /BATCH  switch;  in  that  case, they must be
|                           enclosed in parentheses  and  separated  with
|                           commas.   Arguments and their meanings are as
|                           follows:
|  
|                           Argument                  Meaning
|  
|                           INTERVENTION   Specifies  whether  the  batch
|                           NOINTERVENTION job     requires      operator
|                                          intervention to run.
|  
|                           NAME:"name"    Sets the  batch  job  name  to
|                                          "name".


                                   2-176
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


|                           SEQUENCE:n     Sets the batch sequence number
|                                          to "n".
|  
|                           STREAM:n       Sets the batch  stream  number
|                                          to "n".
|  
|                           REQUESTID:n    Sets the batch request  number
|                                          to "n".

        /CORE:nx            Informs the system of the maximum  amount  of
                            core memory that your job can use.  The value
                            for x must be either P or  K.   P  represents
                            pages  of  memory (each page is equivalent to
                            512  words);  K  represents  blocks  of  1024
                            words.   The  value  n is any decimal number.
                            Refer  to  the  CORE  command   for   further
                            information.




































                                   2-177
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /DEFAULT:           Specifies  job   characteristics.    Multiple
        (arg:n, arg:n)      keywords can be given to the /DEFAULT switch;
                            in  that  case,  they  must  be  enclosed  in
                            parentheses  and   separated   with   commas.
                            Arguments and their meanings are as follows:

                            Argument                  Meaning

                            BIGBUF:n       Sets the default BIGBUF buffer
                                           size  for  disk  to  n blocks.
                                           Refer to  SET  DEFAULT  BIGBUF
                                           command.

                            BUFFERS:n      Sets  the  default  number  of
                                           disk  buffers  to n.  Refer to
                                           SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command.

                            PROTECTION:n   Sets    the    default    file
                                           protection  for your job to n.
                                           Refer    to    SET     DEFAULT
                                           PROTECTION command.

        /DEFER              Defers queueing of spooled output  until  you
                            log out.

        /DSKFUL:arg         Sets the action to be performed if  your  job
                            exceeds  the  disk  area  allowed to it.  The
                            arguments  are  ERROR  and  PAUSE.   If   the
                            argument  is  ERROR,  an  error  condition is
                            passed to your job.  This usually  terminates
                            the  program.   If the argument is PAUSE, the
                            program  is  suspended,  and  your   job   is
                            returned  to  monitor level.  This allows you
                            to  request  operator  assistance  and   then
                            continue the job, as long as you do not issue
                            any commands that destroy  your  core  image.
                            Refer to the SET DSKFUL command.

        /DSKPRI:n           Allows privileged users to set  the  priority
                            for   their   job's   disk  operations  (data
                            transfers and head positionings).  The  value
                            can   range  from  -3  to  +3.   The  default
                            timesharing priority is 0.  Refer to the  SET
                            DSKPRI command.

        /GUIDELINE          Specifies that the numeric value cited in the
                            /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.  This is the
                            default setting for /PHYSICAL.





                                   2-178
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /HELP:keyword       Prints HELP text  on  your  terminal.   Valid
                            keywords are:  ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.
                            The ARGUMENTS keyword prints out  a  list  of
                            valid   switches   and  arguments.   SWITCHES
                            displays only a list of switches.  TEXT  will
                            print  the entire HELP text.  TEXT is assumed
                            if no keyword  is  supplied.   /HELP  may  be
                            abbreviated to /H.

        /LIB:[ppn]          Sets the library area (LIB:) to the specified
                            PPN.

        /LIMIT              Specifies that the numeric value specified in
                            the /PHYSICAL switch is a limit rather than a
                            guideline.  If  /LIMIT  is  not  issued,  the
                            system  assumes  that the numeric value given
                            for the /PHYSICAL switch is a guideline.

        /LOCATE:node        Sets the job location to the specified  octal
                            ANF   node   number.   Refer  to  the  LOCATE
                            command.

        /MAILCHECK          Checks the file DSK:MAIL.TXT to  see  if  you
                            have  mail from the MS mail system.  You must
                            have DECMAIL/MS on your  system.   /MAILCHECK
                            is the default action.

        /NAME:"name"        Associates the given   name  with  your  job.
                            This  name  will  appear on output, listings,
                            and  on  other  information  output  by   the
                            system.   Enclose the name in quotation marks
                            if it contains non-alphanumeric characters.

        /NEW                /NEW causes NEW:([1,5]) to be searched before
                            SYS:([1,4])  whenever  SYS:   is specified or
                            implied.  If the files are not on NEW:,  SYS:
                            will be searched.  (See Section 1.13 for more
                            information about NEW:.)

        /NODEFER            Does not defer queued  output  until  logout.
                            Refer  to the SET DEFER command.  This is the
                            default.

        /NOMAILCHECK        Suppresses checking the file DSK:MAIL.TXT  to
                            see if you have mail from the MS mail system.

        /NONEW              Removes the [1,5] directory (NEW:) from  your
                            SYS:   specification.   This  is  the default
                            setting.




                                   2-179
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /NOSCAN             Cancels the /SCAN switch  for  the  directory
                            path.   When  scanning  is  set,  the  system
                            searches  for  files   through   the   entire
                            directory    path.    Directory   paths   are
                            described  in  Section  1.14.   This   switch
                            disables scanning.  Thus, the system will not
                            search for files past the specified directory
                            area.    (Refer   to   the   SETSRC   program
                            description in  the  TOPS-10  User  Utilities
                            Manual.) /NOSCAN is the default switch.

        /NOSETTTY           Instructs the system not  to  change  any  of
                            your  terminal's characteristics as specified
                            in your SWITCH.INI file.  The default  action
                            is   that  LOGIN  reads  SWITCH.INI,  setting
                            terminal   characteristics    according    to
                            switches  specified in the LOGIN line.  Refer
                            to Appendix  B  for  more  information  about
                            SWITCH.INI files.

        /NOSFDCREATE        Does not create an SFD that was specified  as
                            the directory path.

        /NOSTR              Suppresses the printing of SYS:STR.TXT.

        /NOSYS              Removes  the   SYS:   structure   from   your
                            DSKspecification,  which is your job's search
                            list.  Refer to Section 1.12.

        /NOTE:file-spec     Prints the specified file after you  log  in.
                            The  file  specification must be included; it
                            may  contain  wild-cards.   This  switch   is
                            useful  for  printing  a  project notice file
                            that is kept in a  library  area.   Refer  to
                            /NOTICE.

        /NOTICE:arg         Controls printing of SYS:NOTICE.TXT  and  the
                            argument  to the /NOTE switch.  The arguments
                            for /NOTICE are:

                            ALWAYS         Always prints notices.

                            SOMETIMES      Prints notices  you  have  not
                                           yet  seen.   SOMETIMES  is the
                                           default argument.

                            NEVER          Never prints notices.

        /NOWATCH            Suppresses the printing  of  incremental  job
                            statistics.  Refer to the SET WATCH command.



                                   2-180
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /PASSWORD           Allows you to change your password during the
                            LOGIN   procedure.    Type  in  your  current
                            password at the Password: prompt.  Then  type
                            in your new password when the monitor prompts
                            you, and verify it.  Your password will  then
                            be  changed.   This  switch  is ignored under
                            batch.  The system manager may, at times, set
                            /PASSWORD  on  your account, so that when you
                            log  in,  you  will  have  to   change   your
                            password.

        /PATH:[dir]         Specifies a default path for disk I/O.  Refer
                            to Section 1.14 for further information.

        /PHYSICAL:nx        Sets the maximum physical page limit of  your
                            job.  The value n is any decimal number.  The
                            value x is either K (for 1024-word blocks) or
                            P  (for  512-word pages).  You can use either
                            /LIMIT  or  /GUIDELINE  with  the   /PHYSICAL
                            switch.  The default is /GUIDELINE.  Refer to
                            the SET PHYSICAL command.

        /QUOTA:             Recomputes the disk quota for  the  specified
         (str1,str2,...)    structures.  If  you  specify  more than  one
         ALL                structure,  you  must  separate the structure
         DSK                names with commas, and enclose  the  list  in
                            parentheses.   However,  if  you specify only
                            one  structure,  the  parentheses   are   not
                            required.   If you specify no structures, all
                            the structures in your job's search list  are
                            assumed.  Instead of (str1,str2,...), you can
                            use  ALL  or  DSK.   ALL   expands   to   all
                            structures in the system.  DSK expands to all
                            structures in your search list.

        /REMARK:"text"      Specifies a remark string for your  job.   If
                            you  include  non-alphanumeric  characters in
                            the remark, you must enclose  the  remark  in
                            quotation marks.

        /RUN:file-spec      Runs the specified program immediately  after
                            LOGIN,   unless   another  program  has  been
                            designated by the system manager.

        /SCAN               Sets the /SCAN switch for the directory path.
                            When  /SCAN is specified, scanning is enabled
                            for  the  directory  path.   Scanning  allows
                            searches  to  be  made  through  the complete
                            path.  If  scanning  is  disabled,  only  the
                            first  directory  is searched.  (Refer to the
                            SETSRC program.)


                                   2-181
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /SETTTY             Sets   your   terminal   characteristics   as
                            specified  in  the  file SWITCH.INI.  This is
                            the default function.  Refer  to  Appendix  B
                            for more information.

        /SFDCREATE          Automatically   creates   an   SFD   on   the
                            structure,  if  the  SFD was specified as the
                            directory path,  and  if  the  SFD  does  not
                            already exist.  This is the default.

        /SFDPROT:nnn        Sets the protection of all  created  SFDs  to
                            nnn.

        /SPOOL:dev or       Adds the  specified  device(s) to the current
        /SPOOL:(dev1,...)   list of  those spooled for the job.  Spooling
           or               is  the  mechanism by  which  I/O to  or from
        /SPOOL:ALL          slow-speed  devices  is  simulated  on  disk.
                            Data   temporarily  stored  on  disk  can  be
                            automatically output on the specified  device
                            when it becomes available.  These devices can
                            be spooled:  the  line  printer  (LPT:),  the
                            card  punch  (CDP:),  the card reader (CDR:),
                            the paper-tape punch (PTP:), and the  plotter
                            (PLT:).

        /STR                Causes  all  files  in  the  standard  system
                            library  [1,4]  with  name  ???STR.TXT  to be
                            printed  on  your  terminal.    Assume,   for
                            example,  that  there  is  a  file on private
                            structure "PR:" called PRLSTR.TXT[1,4]  which
                            says:   "PR:PAYROLL  DEBUG  PACK  -- NOT REAL
                            DATA".  Any user who logged in with /STR  (or
                            had  /STR  in his SWITCH.INI file) would have
                            the warning message printed on his terminal.

        /SYS                Adds  the  SYS:  structure   to   your   DSK:
                            specification.   Consequently,  if  a file is
                            not found in the directories in  your  search
                            list  or  in your library directory (if /LIB:
                            [proj,prog] has been specified),  the  system
                            directory [1,4] will then be searched for the
                            file.











                                   2-182
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        /TERMINAL:          Sets     the     terminal     characteristics
        (arg,arg,...)       specified by  the  arguments.This  switch  is
                            useful for recording terminal characteristics
                            in your SWITCH.INI file.  Refer to Appendix B
                            for  information  about  the SWITCH.INI file.
                            To specify a single argument, type  it  after
                            the colon.  To specify two or more arguments,
                            enclose them in parentheses and separate them
                            with commas.

                            The arguments to  the  /TERMINAL  switch  and
                            their   meanings   are   listed   after   the
                            description of  the  switches.   All  of  the
                            arguments  except those which take values can
                            be preceded by NO to turn off the function of
                            the argument.

        /TIME:n             Sets a central  processor  time  limit  of  n
                            seconds  for  a  job.  When the time limit is
                            reached, the system stops the job and  prints
                            a   message.    A   timesharing  job  can  be
                            continued by typing CONTINUE, but unless  the
                            time  is  reset with the SET TIME command, no
                            time limit will be in effect.   A  batch  job
                            cannot be continued.

        /UFDPROT:nnn        Sets the protection of all  created  UFDs  to
                            nnn.

        /VIRTUAL:n          Specifies the current virtual page limit,  as
                            represented  by  n.   (For  a  description of
                            CVPL,   see   the   TOPS-10   Monitor   Calls
                            Manual.)  In    /VIRTUAL:nK    and   :nP,   K
                            represents a block, and P a page;  1K  equals
                            1024  words, and 1P equals 512 words.  If you
                            type neither letter, K is assumed.  K can  be
                            specified within the range 1 to 512P.  If you
                            type /VIRTUAL:0, the value of CVPL, as set by
                            the system administrator, is used.

        /WATCH:ALL or       Duplicates the  SET  WATCH  command, printing
        /WATCH (arg,arg...) messages  automatically  according   to   the
                            argument.    See   the   SET   WATCH  command
                            description for a list of arguments and their
                            uses.








                                   2-183
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        Arguments to /TERMINAL

            Argument                           Meaning

        ALTMODE             Converts the ASCII  characters 175 and 176 to
        NOALTMODE           ALTmode (ESCape).  If you use NOALTMODE,  175
                            and  176  regain  their  original identity as
                            right brace (]) and tilde (~).   The  default
                            setting is NOALTMODE.

        BLANKS              Prints  blank  lines  during  output  to  the
        NOBLANKS            terminal.   NOBLANKS  is  often  used  on   a
                            display  terminal  to  conserve  space on the
                            screen.  The default setting is BLANKS.

        CRLF                Prints an automatic carriage-return/line-feed
        NOCRLF              at the end of each line.  The width  of  this
                            line  is  set  with WIDTH.  NOCRLF suppresses
                            the automatic carriage-return/line-feed.  The
                            default is CRLF.

        DEBREAK             No longer supported.
        NODEBREAK

        DEFER               Suppresses echoing of the characters you type
        NODEFER             until output to  the  terminal  is  finished.
                            For  example,  when  the  system  is  sending
                            output to your terminal and you type  another
                            command,  the system will echo the characters
                            as it is printing output  on  your  terminal.
                            DEFER holds the characters you type until the
                            output is finished.  NODEFER is  the  default
                            setting.    For   video   terminals,   it  is
                            recommended that you set DEFER.

        DISPLAY             Informs  the system  that  you have a display
        NODISPLAY           terminal.   Your  programs   can   use   this
                            information   when  sending  output  to  your
                            terminal.  NO DISPLAY turns off  the  DISPLAY
                            function.

        ECHO                Prints  the  characters   you  type  on  your
        NOECHO              terminal.  This puts your  terminal  in  full
                            duplex  mode.   NOECHO  puts your terminal in
                            half duplex mode.  That  is,  the  characters
                            you type are not printed on your terminal.

        FILL:n              Controls  the filler class of  the  terminal.
        NOFILL              This effects the output of filler characters.
                            NOFILL is the equivalent to FILL:0.



                                   2-184
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        FORM                Sends   eight   line-feeds   for  every  FORM
        NOFORM              character,  and  four  line-feeds  for   each
                            vertical  tab.   NOFORM  does  not  send  the
                            line-feeds.

        GAG                 Suppresses  any  messages  sent  by  the SEND
        NOGAG               command when your job is in user mode.   This
                            does  not  affect messages from the operator.
                            NOGAG allows you to receive messages  at  any
                            stage of your job.

        LC                  Allows   the   system   to   print  lowercase
        NOLC                characters  on  your  terminal  when  echoing
                            characters from your terminal.  This argument
                            is used  on  terminals  that  have  lowercase
                            ability   but   are  not  printing  lowercase
                            characters.  NOLC makes the system  translate
                            all input characters to uppercase as they are
                            transmitted.

        LENGTH:n            Sets the terminal page length to n lines.

        RCVSPEED:nnnn       Sets the speed at which  your  terminal  will
                            receive characters to n baud.

        RTCOMP              Controls  the function of CTRL/R  and CTRL/T.
        NORTCOMP            NORTCOMP   makes   the   control   characters
                            function  as  they  are  described in Section
                            1.6.  RTCOMP prevents them  from  functioning
                            this  way,  which  is useful when you plan to
                            run a program that uses CTRL/R and CTRL/T for
                            other purposes.

        SBELL               Rings   the   bell   when  output  is stopped
        NOSBELL             automatically    by    the   system.  NOSBELL
                            suppresses  the  terminal bell when output is
                            stopped automatically by the system.

        SPEED:nnnn          Sets the receiving and transmitting speed  of
                            your terminal to n baud.

        SSTOP:n             Sets the terminal  to  stop  output  after  n
                            lines,  where  n  is  page  length,  ignoring
                            intermittent <CTRL/Q>s.

        STOP:n              Sets the terminal  to  stop  output  after  n
                            lines, where n is page length.






                                   2-185
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


        TABS                Informs  the system  that  your terminal  has
        NOTABS              tab stops.  NOTABS informs  the  system  that
                            your  terminal  does not have tab stops.  The
                            system will then simulate tab stops for  your
                            terminal.

        TAPE                Informs  the system  that  your terminal  has
        NOTAPE              paper tape output.  This changes the function
                            of  CTRL/S  and  CTRL/Q  to control the paper
                            tape.  NOTAPE restores the function of CTRL/S
                            and CTRL/Q.  Refer to Section 1.6.

        TIDY                No longer supported.
        NOTIDY              

        TYPE:nnnn           Specifies the type of terminal.  This informs
                            the  system that your terminal is of the type
                            nnnn.    This   sets   some   characteristics
                            automatically.    For   a  complete  list  of
                            supported terminal types, type:

                            HELP *

                            A portion of the information  returned  is  a
                            list  of  terminal  types  supported  by  the
                            monitor.

        UC                  Tells   the  system  to  translate  all   the
        NOUC                characters  that  it   receives   from   your
                            terminal   to  upper  case.   NOUC  does  not
                            translate the characters.

        WIDTH:n             Sets the width of the terminal screen  to  n.
                            Used  in conjunction with CRLF, this controls
                            the automatic  RETURNs  that  are  output  at
                            monitor level.

        XMTSPEED:n          Sets the speed at which  your  terminal  will
                            send characters to n baud.

        XONXOF              Allows  you  to  use  CTRL/S  and  CTRL/Q  to
        NOXONXOF            control  the   output   to   your   terminal.
                            NOXONXOF  prevents  the  system from stopping
                            terminal output automatically.

   Characteristics

        Returns your terminal  to monitor  level or starts  a program  if
        specified in ACTDAE.SYS.




                                   2-186
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


   Associated Messages

        If you are already logged in when you issue  the  LOGIN  command,
        the monitor prints:

        ?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH

        If the system is running  the  maximum  number  of  jobs  it  can
        handle,  you  will not be able to log in.  When you issue a LOGIN
        command, you will receive the message:

        ?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED

        In this event, wait a few minutes, then try again.

   Examples

        1.  To gain access to the system, log in with your user  name  as
            follows:

            .LOGIN MCWILLIAMS
            JOB 42 RZ373B KL#1026/1042 TTY363

            If you do not type your  project-programmer  number  or  your
            user  name  on  the  same  line  as  the LOGIN command, LOGIN
            prompts you for that information with a number sign (#).

            .LOGIN<RET>
            JOB 29 RZ373B KL #1026/1042 TTY220
            #10,6073<RET>

            LOGIN prints  your  assigned  job  number  (job  number  29),
            followed  by  monitor  name,  version  number,  and  terminal
            number.

            PASSWORD:<RET>

            The system prompts you for  your  password.   You  type  your
            password followed by a carriage-return.  To maintain password
            security, the  monitor  does  not  echo  your  password.   On
            terminals  with  local-copy  (see  the  TOPS-10 Monitor Calls
            Manual), a mask is printed to make your password unreadable.

            [LGNLAS  Last   access   to   [10,6073]   succeeded   on
            dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
            hh:mm dd-mmm-yy MON
            .






                                   2-187
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


            If your entries are  correct,  the  system  responds  with  a
            message  indicating  when  the  last attempt to login to your
            account was, and whether it was successful time, date, day of
            the  week,  the  message  of  the day (if any), and a period,
            indicating readiness to accept another command.

        2.  The following example illustrates the process of detaching  a
            job,  logging  in  a second job, detaching the second job and
            logging in a third  job.   First,  detach  the  job  that  is
            currently running:

            .DETACH<RET>
            FROM JOB 52

            Then log in again:

            .LOGIN 27,5434<RET>
            JOB 54 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
            PASSWORD: <RET>

            OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
                JOB 52 PIP STOPPED

            DO YOU WANT TO ATTACH TO THIS JOB?  [Y] NO<RET>
            [LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52]
            [LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on
            dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
            hh:mm dd-mmm-yy       MON

            When you log in, if you have a detached job (logged  in  with
            /ATTACH:ASK),  LOGIN prompts you whether you want to log in a
            new job or attach to the existing  job.   (To  suppress  this
            function,  use the /ATTACH:IGNORE switch when you log in.) To
            log in a new job at this point, type NO and press RETURN.  If
            you  type  YES  or  just  press RETURN, your terminal will be
            attached to the existing job.

            Detaching a job is useful when you are running a program  you
            expect  to  run for a long time.  If you want to allow such a
            program  to  run,  while  you  start  another  job,  use  the
            CCONTINUE  command.  For example, start a DIRECTORY search of
            SYS:

            .DIRECT EXEVER.SYS=SYS:*.EXE/PRVERSION<RET>
            ^C
            ^C
            .CCONTINUE<RET>

            The DIRECT program continues to  search  for  files  in  SYS:
            with  the  extension  .EXE,  and  stores  them in EXEVER.SYS.
            Meanwhile, you can log in a third job.


                                   2-188
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


            To log in a third job, first detach the second:

            .DETACH<RET>
            FROM JOB 54

            Log in:

            .LOGIN 27,5434/ATTACH:IGNORE<RET>
            JOB 55 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
            PASSWORD: <RET>

            [LGNJSP OTHER JOBS SAME PPN:52,54]
            [LGNLAS Last access to [27,5434] succeeded on 
            dd-mmm-yy:hh:mm:ss]
            hh:mm dd-mmm-yy       MON

            .

            The /ATTACH:IGNORE switch  was  used  here  to  suppress  the
            question  about existing detached jobs.  To log in a new job,
            as here, press RETURN.

            When the DIRECT program is finished running (as may  be  seen
            using  SYSDPY),  you  may  want to attach back to job 54.  In
            this case, detach the current job, or log out:

            .K<RET>

            [LGTOUL OTHER USERS LOGGED-IN UNDER [27,5434], JOBS:52,54]

            JOB 55 USER MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
            LOGGED-OFF TTY64 AT hh:mm:ss ON dd-mmm-yy
            RUNTIME: 0:05:33, KCS:64, CONNECT TIME: 1:45:20
            DISK READS: 1534, WRITES: 105, BLOCKS SAVED: 2513

            Then log in again:

            .LOGIN 27,5434
            JOB 36 RZ125A KL #1022/1046 TTY213
            PASSWORD: <RET>

            OTHER JOBS DETACHED WITH SAME PPN:
                     JOB 52 PIP STOPPED
                     JOB 54 DIRECT RUNNING

            TYPE JOB NUMBER TO ATTACH OR CARRIAGE-RETURN TO LOGIN 
            NEW JOB:54<RET>
            .ATTACH 54[27,5434]
            [LGNATJ ATTACHING TO JOB 52 IN USER MODE]
                     TOTAL OF 344 FILES
            .


                                   2-189
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               LOGIN Command


            LOGIN prints a message after attaching to  the  running  job.
            This  message  informs  you that the job is in the process of
            running.  Then DIRECTORY prints a message showing  the  total
            number of files found.

















































                                   2-190
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MAIL Command


                               MAIL Command



   Function

        The MAIL command starts up a program to send, receive, and  store
        messages  to and from other users.  For complete details, see the
        TOPS-10/TOPS-20 DECmail/MS Manual.

   Format

        MAIL

   Characteristics

        Runs the MS program.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Destroys your core image.

        Places your terminal at user level.

   Example

        Start up MS, then exit.

        .MAIL<RET>

        MS>EXIT<RET>

        .




















                                   2-191
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MAKE Command


                               MAKE Command



   Function

        The MAKE command creates a new file on the disk with  TECO  (Text
        Editor  and  Corrector).   If a file already exists with the same
        name, the system prints  a  warning  message.   If  you  continue
        despite this warning, the system program supersedes the file.  If
        you type two CTRL/Cs to leave TECO, the program does not  destroy
        the   file.   (See  the  TECO  manual  in  the  TOPS-10  Software
        Notebooks.)

   Format

        MAKE dev:file.ext[directory]

        Where:    dev: is the device or file structure name on which  the
                  system  creates  the  file.  If you omit it, the system
                  assumes DSK:.

                  file.ext  is  any  legal  file  name  and   file   name
                  extension.   The  file  name is required; the file name
                  extension is optional.

                  [directory] is the directory area in which  the  system
                  creates  the  file.   If  you  omit  this argument, the
                  system assumes your default directory  area  (that  is,
                  your project-programmer number).  Note that the default
                  directory can be an SFD or a UFD.

        You can pass switches to TECO if you precede each switch  with  a
        slash in the MAKE command string.

   Characteristics

        Place your terminal at user level.

        Destroys your core image.













                                   2-192
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MAKE Command


   Example

        Create a file named TEXT3.MAI.

        .MAKE TEXT3.MAI<RET>

        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        Exit from TECO.

        Use DIRECTORY to see the file.

        .DIR TEXT3<RET>

        TEXT3  MAI   1  <055>  dd-mmm-yy  DSKC:[27,5434]

        .




































                                   2-193
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MERGE Command


                               MERGE Command



   Function

        The MERGE command combines  the  low  segment  of  an  executable
        program  in the specified file with the program that is currently
        in memory.  The MERGE command, like the  GET  command,  does  not
        start execution of the program.  MERGE is used to load page fault
        handlers and DDT.

   Format

        MERGE dev:file.ext[directory] /switch

        Where:    dev: is the logical or name of  the  device  containing
                  the  program  you want to merge into core.  The default
                  device is DSK:.

                  file.ext is the name of the file containing the program
                  you want to merge into core.  You must specify the file
                  name.  The file extension defaults to .EXE.

                  [directory] is the directory name, required only if the
                  core  image  file  is located in a disk area other than
                  yours.  The default is  the  directory  area  that  you
                  logged in to.

                  /switch is the following option:

                  /USE:n    Specifies the octal section number, (n), into
                            which  a  program  is  merged.  Valid section
                            numbers are 0-37, octal.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Changes your core image.











                                   2-194
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MERGE Command


   Example

        Type two programs.

        .TY FIRST.MAC<RET>
        FIRST:  RESET
                JRST    700000
                END     FIRST

        .TY SECOND.MAC<RET>
                 .PSECT FOO,700000
        SECOND:   OUTSTR [ASCIZ/
        EXECUTION AT 700000
        /]
                EXIT
                END

        Compile the programs.

        .COMPILE FIRST.MAC<RET>
        MACRO:   .MAIN

        EXIT

        .COMPILE SECOND.MAC<RET>
        MACRO:   .MAIN

        EXIT

        Run LINK and save the files.

        .R LINK<RET>

        *FIRST/SAVE=FIRST/GO<RET>

        EXIT

        .R LINK<RET>

        *SECOND/SAVE=SECOND/GO<RET>

        EXIT

        Use GET to bring the first program into memory.

        .GET FIRST<RET>
        JOB SETUP






                                   2-195
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MERGE Command


        Use MERGE to bring the second program into memory.

        .MERGE SECOND<RET>
        SECOND MERGED

        Start execution of the programs.

        .START<RET>

        EXECUTION AT 700000

        EXIT

        After a successful execution, examine the memory area.  Note that
        address 777 is occupied.

        .E 777<RET>
        000777/ 000000 000000   .

        Address 1000 does not exist.

        .E 1000<RET>
        ?OUT OF BOUNDS

        Address 700000 is occupied.

        .E 700000<RET>
        700000/ 051140 700002  .

        Address 701000 does not exist.

        .E 701000<RET>
        ?OUT OF BOUNDS
        .



















                                   2-196
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MIC Commands


                               MIC Commands



   Function

        MIC allows you to create a new command  by  writing  any  desired
        sequence  of  monitor-mode and user-mode commands in a disk file.
        MIC commands are discussed in  the  file  DOC:MICV2.DOC,  on  the
        system.  MIC is not a supported product.

        You may include any of the following commands in your MIC command
        file, along with any number of monitor commands.

   Commands

        BACKTO     Specifies a 1- to 6-  character  label  at  which  MIC
                   processing  is  to  resume.   Note  that labels in MIC
                   command files are terminated by ::  and must be at the
                   beginning of a line.

        ERROR/     Specifies  a character that is used to denote an error
        NOERROR    condition when displayed at the beginning of a line.

        GOTO       Specifies a 1- to 6-  character  label  at  which  MIC
                   processing  is  to  resume.   Note  that labels in MIC
                   command files are terminated by ::  and must be at the
                   beginning of a line.

        IF         Conditionally processes a monitor command.

        LET        Allows you to change the value of any user  parameters
                   in  a  MIC  file.   For  example,  LET  C= "THIS IS C"
                   substitutes the text within double quotes as the value
                   of C.

        MIC Arg    Allows you to ABORT, SUSPEND, CANCEL, RETURN, or  EXIT
                   from MIC processing.

        OPERATOR/  Specifies   one  ASCII  character  to  be  treated  as
        NOOPERATOR introducing a line that requires user attention.   For
                   example, if the operator character is output in column
                   1, MIC suspends output and  displays  [BREAK].   After
                   this,  type  the  requested  information.   Then  type
                   CTRL/P (PROCEED), which will continue  the  processing
                   of the command file.







                                   2-197
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MIC Commands


        SILENCE/   Suppresses   and   resumes  output  to  the  terminal.
        REVIVE     You can type another monitor command on the same  line
                   as the SILENCE/REVIVE command.  For example,

                        .REVIVE.DIR<RET>

                   causes terminal output to be revived  after  the  .DIR
                   command  has  been  typed.  Therefore, only the output
                   from the .DIR command will be printed on the terminal.

        WHENEVER/  Changes  the  default  action  whenever  a  particular
        ON         action  or  event  occurs.   ON   and   WHENEVER   are
                   equivalent commands.

   Example

        ;A MIC DEMO OF THE ERROR COMMAND
        ;A MACRO TO COMPARE TWO FILES AND DELETE DSK COPY IF THEY
        ;ARE THE SAME
        .
        .TYPE CHECK.MIC<RET>

        .ERROR ?
        .R FILCOM<RET>
        *TTY:/Q='A.'B<RET>
        .DELETE 'A<RET>

        .
        ;A TYPICAL CALL - CHECK IF DSK:C.MIC IS A COPY OF SYS:C.MIC
        .DIRECT/CHECK C.MIC.SYS:<RET>


        .
        .ERROR ?

        .R FILCOM<RET>

        *TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
        NO DIFFERENCES ENCOUNTERED

        *C

        .DELETE C.MIC<RET>
        FILES DELETED
        C.MIC
        01 BLOCKS FREED
        ;CREATE AN INCORRECT COPY OF C.MIC WITH PIP.
        .R PIP<RET>





                                   2-198
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                MIC Commands


        *C.MIC=TTY:
        WRONG FILE
        ^Z
        *^C
        ;AND USE C.MIC TO CHECK IT
        .DO CHECK C.MIC,SYS:<RET>


        .
        .ERROR ?
        .R FILCOM<RET>

        *TTY:/Q=C.MIC,SYS:<RET>
        FILE 1) DSK:C.MIC     CREATED: 1349  dd-mmm-yyyy
        FILE 2) SYS:C.MIC     CREATED: 1202  dd-mmm-yyyy

        ?FILES ARE DIFFERENT

        *[ABORT ON ERROR]
        ^C

        .































                                   2-199
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


                               MOUNT Command


   Function

        The MOUNT command requests ownership of a device.  Because  MOUNT
        calls  for  action  by  the operator, the command is not complete
        (the monitor prompt is not printed on your  terminal)  until  the
        operator  has mounted the device.  If more than one volume in the
        volume set must be mounted at one time, the system  ensures  that
        the  resources  will  be available.  Volumes that must be mounted
        sequentially,  such  as  tape  volume  sets,  will   be   mounted
        automatically.   Therefore,  you  use  MOUNT  only  once for each
        volume set.

        Resources are pre-allocated to a job using the ALLOCATE  command.
        This  informs  the system of your future need for a resource.  If
        you use the MOUNT command without previously using  the  ALLOCATE
        command  for  the  same resource, MOUNT allocates the resource as
        well as mounting it.  Note,  however,  that  the  implicit  MOUNT
        allocation  is  cancelled  when  you use DISMOUNT.  An explicitly
        allocated resource remains your property until you use DEALLOCATE
        to relinquish it.

        You can use MOUNT to assign a logical name to a resource.  A tape
        volume set must always have a logical name.  Therefore, if you do
        not assign a logical name when  you  allocate  or  mount  a  tape
        volume   set,   the   system  uses  the  first  six  alphanumeric
        characters, or up to the first non-alphanumeric character, as the
        default logical name.

   Format

        MOUNT resource:log-name/switch/switch...

        Where:    resource is one of the following:

                   o  Disk structure or volume set name, such as DSKB:.

                   o  Tape  volume   set   and   identifiers,   such   as
                      PAY-WK4:(PM34,PM35),  where  PAY-WK4 is the name of
                      the volume set, and (PM34,PM35) is a  list  of  the
                      names of each tape in the volume set.

                   o  A logical name that was previously associated  with
                      a resource.

                   o  A physical device name.





                                   2-200
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


                  Note that a tape mount request must  include  a  volume
                  identification.   This is accomplished by including the
                  volume identifier in the resource name, or by using the
                  /SCRATCH, /VOLID or /REELID switch in the command line.

                  log-name is the logical name you assign to  the  device
                  that  you  will  use.   The logical name can be up to 6
                  alphanumeric characters.  The logical name is optional.
                  Disk volume sets do not require a logical name, but you
                  can assign one.  Tape volume sets must have  a  logical
                  name.   If  you  do not assign a logical name to a tape
                  volume set, the default logical name  will  be  derived
                  from   the   volume  set  name,  using  the  first  six
                  characters,  or  up  to  the   first   non-alphanumeric
                  character.

        If you assigned a logical name  to  the  resource  by  using  the
        ALLOCATE command, you can mount the device by typing:

        MOUNT log-name/switch/switch...

        Any switches that you specified in a previous  ALLOCATE  command,
        using the same resource name, become effective when you MOUNT the
        resource.  However, you cannot specify any switches with MOUNT to
        change the switches you specified in the ALLOCATE command.  Also,
        you cannot specify any further switches with the  MOUNT  command,
        except  for non-status-setting switches such as /REMARK.  This is
        because defaults are assumed when the request is ALLOCATEd.

                                      NOTE

                To MOUNT more than one device at a time, separate
                the volume set identifications with a comma (,).

        You can obtain a list of all the requests in the mount  queue  by
        typing MOUNT with no arguments or switches.

        The following is a list of the switches you can use  with  MOUNT.
        Some  switches  apply  to  both  tape and disk volume sets, other
        switches apply to one or the other.  The center column  indicates
        the kind of volume set the switch applies to.












                                   2-201
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


            Switch     Device                    Function

        /ACTIVE         Disk     Requests that the volume set  be  placed
                                 in  your job's active search list.  (See
                                 the SETSRC program  description  in  the
                                 TOPS-10   User  Utilities  Manual.)  The
                                 structure will become part of  the  list
                                 that  the  system  automatically uses to
                                 search for a file.  This is the  default
                                 function.  This switch is the complement
                                 to /PASSIVE.

        /CHECK          Tape     Prints on your terminal    a list of the
                        Disk     mount requests made by your job.

        /CREATE         Disk     Allows  files  to  be  created  on   the
                                 structure.     This    switch   is   the
                                 complement   /NOCREATE.    This   switch
                                 implies the /ACTIVE switch.

        /DENSITY:n-BPI  Tape     Specifies    the    recording    density
                                 (bits-per-inch)  of the volume set.  The
                                 argument (n) can  be:   200,  556,  800,
                                 1600,  or 6250.  The -BPI portion of the
                                 value is optional.

        /DISK           Disk     Identifies the  volume  set  as  a  disk
                                 volume set.

        /EXCLUSIVE      Disk     Ensures that  you  will  have  exclusive
                                 access  to  the  volume  set.   No other
                                 users will  be  allowed  to  access  the
                                 resource.    You   must  have  the  same
                                 project  number  as  the  owner  of  the
                                 volume set.

        /HELP           Tape     Prints  a   brief  description   of  the
                        Disk     MOUNT command.















                                   2-202
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        /LABEL-TYPE:    Tape     Specifies the kind  of  label processing
         arg                     to  be  used  and  indicates  the  label
                                 status  of  the tape.  The label type is
                                 used to ensure that the correct tape has
                                 been  mounted.   The arguments and their
                                 meanings are:

                                 ANSI      The   label    is    formatted
                                           according to ANSI standards.

                                 BLP       The tape  may or may not  have
                                 BYPASS    labels, but it is  treated  as
                                           if  it  were  unlabeled.  This
                                           argument can only be  used  by
                                           privileged users.

                                 EBCDIC    The   label   is     formatted
                                 IBM       in EBCDIC

                                 NOLABELS  The  tape  does  not  have   a
                                 NONE      standard  label.  You will not
                                 UNLABELED be    informed    when     the
                                           end-of-tape is reached.

                                 USER-EOT  The   tape   does   not   have
                                           standard  labels.  However, it
                                           may have  user  labels.   When
                                           the  end-of-tape  is  reached,
                                           the user is notified.  This is
                                           useful  for  programs  such as
                                           BACKUP.

        /NEW-VOLUME-SET Tape     Specifies that a new volume set is going
                                 to be created.  The operator will choose
                                 a new  tape  or  tapes  for  you.   This
                                 switch implies /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /NOCREATE       Disk     Prevents the creation of files  on  this
                                 volume set unless you specify the volume
                                 set when  you  write  the  files.   This
                                 switch  is the complement to /CREATE and
                                 it implies /ACTIVE.

        /NONOTIFY       Tape     Does not notify you when your request is
                        Disk     finished.  This is the default function.








                                   2-203
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        /NOTIFY         Tape     Sets  the system  to inform you when the
                        Disk     resource is mounted or dismounted.   The
                                 system  sends a message to your terminal
                                 when any of the following occurs:

                                  o  The resource is physically mounted.

                                  o  The resource is  dismounted  by  the
                                     operator  without  a request by your
                                     job.

                                  o  Another volume in a tape volume  set
                                     is mounted.

                                  o  The  disk  structure  is  locked  or
                                     unlocked by the operator.

        /NOWAIT         Tape     Allows  you  to continue working  on the
                        Disk     system before the resource  is  mounted.
                                 This  switch  implies  /NOTIFY and it is
                                 the complement to /WAIT.

        /PASSIVE        Disk     Requests that the structure be placed in
                                 your  job's  passive  search list.  (See
                                 the SETSRC program.) The system will not
                                 search   for  files  on  this  structure
                                 unless you specify the structure name in
                                 the  file specification.  This switch is
                                 the complement to /ACTIVE.

        /QUOTA          Disk     Recomputes  the  usage  quota   on   the
                                 specified structure.

        /READ-ONLY      Tape     Specifies that you will not write on the
                        Disk     volume set.  Tape volume  sets  will  be
                                 checked  as  they are mounted, to ensure
                                 that they are not  write-enabled.   This
                                 is the default for tape volume sets.

                                 On disk volume sets,  the  monitor  will
                                 not update access dates.  If you specify
                                 /EXCLUSIVE and /READ-ONLY, the  operator
                                 may write-protect the volume set.

                                 This switch supersedes  /RONLY,  /WLOCK,
                                 and /WRITE:NO.







                                   2-204
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        /REMARK:"text"  Tape     Allows  you  to  send  a message  to the
                        Disk     operator identifying the  volume  to  be
                                 mounted.   The argument (text) can be up
                                 to 50 characters  long.   Use  quotation
                                 marks  if  the  text  contains spaces or
                                 punctuation.

        /SCRATCH        Tape     Instructs  the  operator  to   mount   a
                                 scratch  tape.  The operator will select
                                 a tape that is blank, with the intention
                                 of   keeping   the  tape  when  you  are
                                 finished with it.  This  switch  implies
                                 /WRITE-ENABLE.

        /SHARABLE       Disk     Allows  other  users   to   access   the
                                 resource.  This is the default function.
                                 This  switch  is   the   complement   to
                                 /EXCLUSIVE.

        /TAPE           Tape     Specifies that the volume set is a  tape
                                 volume  set.   This  switch  is required
                                 when the volume set has the same name as
                                 a cataloged disk volume set.

        /TRACKS:n       Tape     Specifies the number of  tracks  on  the
                                 tape.  The value of n can be 7 or 9.

        /USER:[ppn]     Tape     Prints  on your terminal  a list of  all
                        Disk     requests for a particular user.

        /VOLID:volid    Tape     Identifies the volumes in a tape  volume
                                 set.   This  switch  can be used only if
                                 the   volid-list   was   not   specified
                                 previously.    If   the  volume  set  is
                                 comprised of more than one  volume,  the
                                 volids  should  be  separated by commas,
                                 and the volid-list should be enclosed in
                                 parentheses.    This  switch  supersedes
                                 /REELID.

        /WAIT           Tape     Ensures  that  the  volume set  will  be
                        Disk     mounted before you continue  working  on
                                 the   system.    This   is  the  default
                                 function.  This switch is the complement
                                 to /NOWAIT.

        /WRITE-ENABLE   Tape     Ensures   that  you  can  write  on  the
                        Disk     volume  set.   For  tape,  the   monitor
                                 checks  each volume as it is mounted, to
                                 be sure that it is write-enabled.   This
                                 is  the default function for disk volume
                                 sets.

                                   2-205
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


   Associated Commands

        ALLOCATE         Informs the system of your  future  need  for  a
                         resource.

        DISMOUNT         Removes the specified volume set from  your  job
                         search  list.   If  no other users are accessing
                         the resource, and it is not a system  structure,
                         the volume set will be dismounted from the unit.

        DEALLOCATE       Removes the resource from  your  job's  list  of
                         allocated resources.

        SHOW ALLOCATION  Prints a list of  the  resources  allocated  and
                         mounted for your job.

        SHOW QUEUE       Prints a list of the jobs in the system queues.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE
        TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUESTS #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]









                                   2-206
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT  1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was not explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

        .DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
        [STRUCTURE DSKR DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]





                                   2-207
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               MOUNT Command


        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT  1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.  1    0


        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        dismounted   and  released  from  your  job.   The  tape  set  is
        deallocated:

        .DEALLOCATED TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED] 

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE      ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------ ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT     1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT     1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE     1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE     1    1


        .

















                                   2-208
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


                              NETWORK Command



   Function

        The NETWORK command prints information  about  the  nodes  in  an
        ANF-10  and/or DECnet-10 network environment.  Your terminal must
        be attached to one of the  nodes  in  the  network  to  use  this
        command.   You  can use the NETWORK command to obtain information
        about the other nodes in either type of network,  and  about  the
        device configuration of each node in the ANF-10 network.

        You can specify  the  node-name  or  node-number  in  the  ANF-10
        network, or just node-name in the DECnet-10 network, to limit the
        output to specific nodes.  You can use  switches  to  change  the
        output format.

        NETWORK reads your SWITCH.INI file and accepts indirect commands.
        The indirect command files should be formatted as follows:

        node-list/switch/switch...

        Indirect command files are discussed in Appendix C.

   Formats

        NETWORK node-list/switch

        Where:    node-list is the node-names or  node-numbers  (ANF-10),
                  or  just node-names (DECnet-10), of nodes for which you
                  want information.  If you do not specify the node-list,
                  information  is  output  for every node in the network.
                  The  node-names  or  node-numbers  (ANF-10),  or   just
                  node-names (DECnet-10) are separated by commas.

        You can use the wildcard construction in the command string.  The
        node  name, or any part of the node name, can be replaced by * or
        ?  to represent groups of  nodes.   Wildcards  are  discussed  in
        Section 1.11.

        The switches to NETWORK allow you to specify:

         o  The format of the output.

         o  The configurations that you want to examine.







                                   2-209
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


                                    NOTE

           You use switches to select a node with  or  without  a
           specific  attribute.  Use the proper switch, or prefix
           the switch with NO.  If you do not use the switch, the
           selection   of  a  node  does  not  depend  upon  that
           attribute.  If you do not specify a node, the  default
           output is /BRIEF.

           The command line takes the format specified below:

           NETWORK node-name,
           node-number,.../switch/switch...

           You can repeat node names, but not switches.

        The switches to the NETWORK command follow.

        Output Control Switches

          Switch                            Function

        /ANF10         Forces output of ANF-10 information.

        /BRIEF         Suppresses the output of a  list  of  devices  for
                       each  node.   This  is  the  default if you do not
                       specify a node-list in the command string.

        /COST          Controls the listing of the physical  link  "cost"
                       associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.

        /DECNET        Forces output of DECnet-10 information.

        /ERROR         Prints all error messages.  This is the default.

        /FAST          Prints only the name and number of the nodes.   If
                       you   also  specify  /NOBRIEF,  the  configuration
                       information is printed.

        /HEADER        Prints header information.  This  is  the  default
                       action.

        /HELP          Prints a description of the NETWORK command.

        /LAT           Prints LAT terminal server information.

        /NOANF10       Suppresses output of ANF-10 information.

        /NOBRIEF       Prints a list of the devices on each  node.   This
                       is the default if you specify a node-list.



                                   2-210
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        /NOCOST        Suppresses the listing of the physical link "cost"
                       associated with the /TOPOLOGY switch.

        /NODECNET      Suppresses output of DECnet-10 information.

        /NOERROR       Suppresses the output of error messages.

        /NOFAST        Suppresses printing the name  and  number  of  the
                       nodes.    If   you   also  specify  /NOBRIEF,  the
                       configuration information is suppressed.

        /NOHEADER      Suppresses output of header information.

        /NOLAT         Suppresses LAT terminal server information.

        /NOSILENCE     Prints all information.  This is the default.

        /NOSORT        Suppresses sorting of the nodes according to  node
                       number.

        /NOTOPOLOGY    Suppresses  printing  of  the  topology   of   the
                       network.

        /SILENCE       Prints only error messages.

        /SORT          Sorts the nodes according to node number.

        /TOPOLOGY      Prints the topology of the network as a node  name
                       and  number  followed  by  its neighbors' numbers.
                       Each neighbor has a physical link "cost" following
                       it  in  parentheses  unless  you  also include the
                       /NOCOST switch.


        ANF-10 Node Selection Switches

          Switch                            Function

        /CDP           Prints only nodes that have card-punch devices.

        /CDR           Prints only nodes that have card readers.

        /DTA           Prints only nodes that have DECtape units.

        /LPT           Prints only nodes that have line printers.

        /MCR           Prints only nodes that have  command  interpreters
                       (monitors).  MCR signifies that the node is a host
                       system.

        /MTA           Prints only nodes that have magnetic tape units.


                                   2-211
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        /NOCDP         Prints only nodes  that  do  not  have  card-punch
                       devices.

        /NOCDR         Prints only nodes that do not have card readers.

        /NODTA         Prints only nodes that do not have DECtape units.

        /NOLPT         Prints only nodes that do not have line printers.

        /NOMCR         Prints  only  nodes  that  do  not  have   command
                       interpreters.

        /NOMTA         Prints only nodes that do not have  magnetic  tape
                       units.

        /NOPLT         Prints only nodes that do not have plotters.

        /NOPTP         Prints only nodes that  do  not  have  paper  tape
                       punch units.

        /NOPTR         Prints only nodes that  do  not  have  paper  tape
                       readers.

        /NORDA         Prints only nodes that do not  have  RDX  devices.
                       RDX  devices  control  lines from high-speed input
                       (block-mode) terminals.

        /NOTSK         Prints only nodes that do not have TSK:  devices.

        /NOTTY         Prints only nodes that do not support terminals.

        /TYPE:DNxxx    Prints only nodes of  the  specified  type.   This
                       does  not  output host nodes.  However, if you use
                       /TYPE:  with no value, the host nodes are printed.

        /PLT           Prints only nodes that have plotters.

        /PTP           Prints only  nodes  that  have  paper  tape  punch
                       units.

        /PTR           Prints only nodes that have paper-tape readers.

        /RDA           Prints only nodes  that  have  RDX  devices.   RDX
                       devices   control   lines  from  high-speed  input
                       (block-mode) terminals.

        /TSK           Prints only nodes that have TSK:  devices.

        /TTY           Prints only nodes that support terminals.




                                   2-212
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        DECnet-10 Node Selection Switches

            Switch                          Function

        /LINKS         Prints only nodes  that  have  one  or  more  open
                       logical links.

        /NOLINKS       Prints only nodes that do not  have  one  or  more
                       open logical links.

        /NOUNREACHABLE Suppresses listing of all known DECnet nodes.

        /UNREACHABLE   Lists all known DECnet nodes.


        Network Topology

        The topology of a network is determined by the interconnection of
        nodes  in  a  network.   Nodes  can  be  adjacent  to  each other
        connected by a physical link.  They can also  be  connected  with
        intermediate  nodes.   These  connections, with associated costs,
        determine the routes (paths) a message takes  from  one  node  to
        another.   The  costs are arbitrary values given to each physical
        connection of  the  network.   The  cost  of  a  given  route  is
        determined  by  the  sum of the costs of the physical connections
        along that route.  In cases where multiple routes  exist  between
        nodes,  the  route  with the lowest cost is taken.  In the ANF-10
        network, this information is available when you use the /TOPOLOGY
        switch.

        In  the  DECnet  network,  the  /TOPOLOGY  switch  displays   the
        information  available  for DECnet nodes.  The first two items of
        information are the node name  and  number,  followed  by  DECnet
        routing  information  for that node.  If the node is unreachable,
        then  this  information   is   placed   in   the   output   line:
        "Unreachable."  The  remaining information columns are left blank
        to indicate that information is not available.  If  the  node  is
        reachable, then the column shows the circuit name for the initial
        routing of a message to that node.

        The following columns show cost and number of hops, analogous  to
        the  ANF-10 network topology.  The cost for DECnet is set through
        network management functions on a per physical-connection  basis.
        If  you  ever  form  a  logical  link  between  your node and the
        destination node, information is available for the count of  open
        logical  links  and  the  round-trip delay time in milli-seconds.
        Otherwise, this information is not available, and the information
        fields  are  left blank.  Example 4 shows the output from the use
        of the /TOPOLOGY switch for both  ANF-10  and  DECnet-10  network
        environments.



                                   2-213
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


   Associated Messages

        The output from the NETWORK command is in one  of  the  following
        formats.

        When you do not specify a node-list:

        For ANF-10:
          node-name (node-number) system-name system-generation-date
        For DECnet-10:
          Node list (node-name)


        When you specify a node-list:

        For ANF-10:
          node-name (node-number)  system-name system-generation-date
        device[number-of-devices] device[number-of-devices]
        device[number-of-devices]...
        For DECnet-10:
          same as when you don't specify node names.

   Characteristics

        Runs the NETWORK program.

        Does not require that you be logged in.

   Examples

        1.  The following example shows the NETWORK  command  and  output
            when  you  omit  the  node-list.   There  are 17 nodes in the
            ANF-10 network; five are shown in this  example.   There  are
            183  reachable  nodes  in the DECnet network; 14 are shown in
            this example.

            .NETWORK<RET>

            [ANF10  network:   connected  to  SPIRIT  (30),  located   at
            KL1026(26), 17 nodes]
            Node CTCH22  (22)    DN82 V23(174)        dd-mmm-yy
            Node KL1026  (26)    RC117B KL #1026/1042 dd-mmm-yy
            Node NEXT    (27)    DN87 V23(173)        dd-mmm-yy
            Node SPIRIT  (30)    DN87 V23(174)        dd-mmm-yy
            Node NOVA    (31)    DN87S V23(174)       dd-mmm-yy

            [DECnet network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
            area 7]
            ABLE    ADAM    AJAX    ALGOL   ALIEN   ALPHA   ALPINE
            BLUE    CACHE   CADVAX  CAR     CASTOR  CDR     CHAOS



                                   2-214
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


        2.  The following example shows  the  NETWORK  command  when  the
            node-list  is specified.  Node-number 33 is valid; node 76 is
            invalid.

            .NETWORK 33,76<RET>
            [ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26), 
            15 nodes]
            Node    DWARF    (33)   DN87S V23(174)  28-Sep-82
                    TSK[2] TTY[64]

            %NWKNNN Node 76 not in Network

            .

        3.  The following example shows  the  use  of  NETWORK  with  the
            /NOTSK switch.

            .NETWORK/NOTSK<RET>

            [ANF10 network: connected to NOVA(31), located at KL1026(26), 
            15 nodes]
            Node    SOFDCP  (75)    DN82 V22E/52A
            Node    WOBBLE  (143)   DN81 V22E/52A

            [DECnet network: local node KL1026, 182 reachable nodes in
            area 7]
            ABACUS  ABLE    ADAM    AJAX    ALGOL   ALIEN   ALPHA   ALPINE
            ANIMAL  ARK     BAXTER  BERGIL  BISON   BLUE    CACHE   CADVAX
            CAR     CASTOR  CDR     CHAOS

        4.  The following example shows the use of  the  NETWORK  command
            with   the  /TOPOLOGY  switch  for  both  ANF-10  and  DECnet
            networks.  The connected node (the node running your job)  is
            KL1026.   KL1026  has  a direct line to node ENCORE(32), node
            NOVA(31), node JINX(34), node DWARF(33), and  node  NEXT(27).
            Each  of  these  lines costs 10.  Therefore, they are equally
            acceptable links.  Note that node NEXT(27) has a direct  line
            to  node KL1026(26), but this line costs 62, and is therefore
            less acceptable than the line which connects node  KL1026  to
            node NEXT.













                                   2-215
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              NETWORK Command


            .NETWORK/TOPOLOGY<RET>
            [ANF10 network: local node KL1026(26), 17 nodes]

            Node    KL1026  (26)    32(10)  34(10)  33(10) 27(10)
            Node    CTCH22  (22)    76(8)   
            Node    KS4101  (76)    22(10)  27(10)
            Node    SOFDCP  (75)    71(8)   6(8)
            Node    TWINKY  (71)    75(10)  123(10)
            Node    WIZARD  (123)   71(8)   27(8)
            Node    NEXT    (27)    26(62)  123(16) 76(16)
            Node    DWARF   (33)    26(62)  
            Node    ENCORE  (32)    26(62)
            Node    JINX    (34)    26(62)
            Node    NOVA    (31)    26(62)  20(8)

            The DECnet network /TOPOLOGY switch displays cost and  number
            of hops between nodes.

            [Decnet network: local node KL1026, 183 reachable nodes in
            area 7]
            Name    Number    Line          Cost   Hops L.Links Delay
            LARRY   (7.221)   DTE-0-3       7      3
            LYRA    (7.236)   ETH-0         1      1

            .

        5.  The following example shows the use of  the  NETWORK  command
            for  a DECnet Ethernet endnode.  An Ethernet endnode does not
            know DECnet topology information,  so  the  system  prints  a
            summary line containing DECnet information.

            .NETWORK/DECNET<RET>
            [DECnet network:local node KL1026,
            running as an Ethernet endnode]



















                                   2-216
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                NODE Command


                               NODE Command



   Function

        The NODE command prints ANF-10 and DECnet  network  configuration
        information.   If  you  do  not  specify  a  node-id,  the system
        displays information about the node to  which  your  terminal  is
        connected.   If you specify a node-id, the system displays system
        configuration information for the node(s) you specified.

        To use some commands (for example, SET HOST), you must know if  a
        node  has  a  command interpreter.  The NODE command displays the
        symbol MCR as a device on each ANF-10 node  that  has  a  command
        interpreter.

   Format

        NODE node-id

        Where:    node-id is a node identifier of a node in the  network.
                  If you specify 0 as the node-id, the host to which your
                  terminal is connected is printed.  That is, the  system
                  prints  the command interpreter of your job.  If you do
                  not specify a node-id, the subject of the output is the
                  node to which your terminal is connected.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Associated Messages

        When you specify a node-id, the information for ANF-10  nodes  is
        displayed in the following format:

        node type node-name (node-num) software-id creation-date
        device[number-of-devices] device[number-of-devices]...

        Where node-name is the name of the node, node-num is  the  node's
        number,  software-id  is  the  name and version of the monitor on
        that  node,  and  creation-date  is  the  date  of  the   monitor
        generation.

        The second line of output lists each kind of device on the  node,
        and the number of devices.




                                   2-217
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                NODE Command


        Information for DECnet nodes is displayed in one of the following
        formats:

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address)  HOPS:m  COST:n  VIA  circuit
            name

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address) may be reachable via the area
            router

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address)  may  be  reachable  via  the
            designated router

         o  DECnet node-name (node-address) unreachable

        Where node-name is the name of the DECnet node,  node-address  is
        the  DECnet  area  and  node  number,  HOPS and COST refer to the
        length of the path to that node,  circuit  is  DTE-cpu-lineno  or
        ETH-0 (on a KL) or KDP-0-lineno (on a KS), and cpu and lineno are
        the numbers of the  CPU  and  line  through  which  the  node  is
        reachable.   If  the  node  is in a different DECnet area, or the
        system is running as an Ethernet endnode, you will get either the
        second   or  the  third  message.   The  node  is  classified  as
        unreachable only if it is in the same  area,  but  not  currently
        running.

   Examples

        1.  The following example shows the command interpreter to  which
            your terminal is connected.

            .NODE 0<RET>
            Local       KL1026(26)     RZ357A KL  1024/1042 mm-dd-yy
                        MCR[1] TTY[137] CDR[2] LPT[5] PTR[2] PTP[2] PLT[1]
            .

        2.  Print the information  associated  with  various  DECnet  and
            ANF-10 nodes:

            .NODE KL2116<RET>

            DECnet  KL2116(7.116) Hops:6 Cost:11 via DTE-0-3
            .

            The message indicates KL2116 is available, via DTE.









                                   2-218
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                NODE Command


            .NODE ELROND<RET>

            DECnet  ELROND(4.19) May be reachable via the area router
            .

            The message indicates ELROND may or may not be reachable, and
            is  in  a  different  area.   You  can only tell if ELROND is
            running by attempting a connection.

            .NODE NOVA<RET>

            ANF     NOVA(31) DN87S V24(226) dd-mmm-yy
            TTY[63] LPT[1] TSK[2]
            .

            The message indicates NOVA is an ANF-10 node, and  tells  you
            what devices it has.

            .NODE VLNVAX<RET>

            DECnet  VLNVAX(7.132) Hops:1 Cost:1 via ETH-0
            .

            The message indicates VLNVAX is available, via Ethernet.

        3.  Print information about a  node  named  BLAND.   The  message
            indicates the node does not exist.

            NODE BLAND<RET>

            ?Undefined Network Node






















                                   2-219
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              PASSWORD Command


                             PASSWORD Command



   Function

        The PASSWORD command allows you to change your current  password.
        Your  password  may  be  a maximum of 39 characters.  Your system
        administrator may set a minimum password length.

        It asks you to confirm the change by  typing  your  new  password
        again.   If the two (new password and verification) do not match,
        the password is unaltered.  Neither old password,  new  password,
        nor the verification echoes on the terminal.  The command prompts
        you for all input.

   Format

        PASSWORD

   Characteristics

        Leaves  your  terminal  at  monitor  level  when   all   required
        information is supplied.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        This is an example of a successful password change.

        .PASSWORD<RET>

        You will then be prompted as follows:  (Remember, what  you  type
        is not echoed on the terminal.)

        Password:  <RET>
        New password:  <RET>
        Verification:  <RET>

        .










                                   2-220
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PJOB Command


                               PJOB Command



   Function

        The PJOB command prints job information on your terminal.  If you
        do not specify a job number, the information printed is about the
        job to which you are attached.  You can specify  the  job  number
        about  which  you  need information.  The PJOB command prints the
        following information:

         o  The job number

         o  The user name

         o  The project-programmer number

         o  The terminal number

        You receive an error message if no job is attached to the default
        or  specified  job number.  If the job is currently detached, the
        letters DET and the terminal number are printed.

   Format

        PJOB job

        Where:    job is the number of the job, which  is  assigned  when
                  you  log in.  If you do not specify the job number, the
                  information printed is about the job you are  currently
                  logged in to.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Example

        Show information about your job.

        .PJOB<RET>

        JOB 42    USER MANJUSREE  [10,6000]   TTY101

        .





                                   2-221
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PJOB Command


   Function

        The PLEASE command allows you to communicate with  the  operator.
        You  can  send  a  message  to  the operator, leaving your job at
        monitor level, or you can enter a dialogue  that  allows  two-way
        communication with the operator.

   Formats

        PLEASE text<ESC>

        This format sends a message to the operator and leaves  your  job
        at monitor level.

        PLEASE<RET>

        This format enters into a dialog with the operator.  This  format
        is  also  useful  for  a message that is more than one line long.
        See Example 1.

        When you enter dialog mode, you can enter your text either of two
        ways:

         o  If  you  type  your  message  and  end   it   with   <CTRL/Z>
            (control-Z),  your  job  will  wait  for  a  reply  from  the
            operator.

         o  If you type your message and end it by pressing  ESCape,  the
            message will go to the operator and your job will be returned
            to monitor level.  You  may  press  <ESC>  without  typing  a
            message.  Your job will exit to monitor level immediately.

        The PLEASE command has two switches:

         Switch                           Function

        /HELP           Prints information on  your  terminal  about  the
                        PLEASE program.

        /NODE:id::      Specifies the node of the operator  you  wish  to
                        communicate  with.  Use the node name or the node
                        number for id.  Terminate the node identification
                        with two colons (::).










                                   2-222
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PJOB Command


   Associated Messages

             [PLSOPN OPERATOR AT node-id HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT time]

        This message is  printed  on  your  terminal  when  the  operator
        receives  a  message from your terminal.  The node-id is the node
        where the operator is.  The time is when the operator's  terminal
        received the message.

   Examples

        1.  To enter a dialog with the operator, type  PLEASE  and  press
            RETURN.

            .PLEASE<RET>
            ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR ^Z

            PLEASE responds with the instruction message.  In this  case,
            you  press  <CTRL/Z>  after the text because you want to wait
            for a response from the operator.

            DO YOU HAVE THE NEW SOS ON LINE YET?<RET>
            I CAN'T FIND IT ON SYS<CTRL/Z>
            [PLSOPN OPERATOR AT K1514(14) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:03:10]

            The  operator  responds  by  saying  that  your  request   is
            finished.   PLEASE  prompts you with the instruction message.
            You thank the operator, press <ESC>, and your job returns  to
            monitor level.

            THE NEWEST VERSION OF SOS IS IN NEW
            ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR ^Z
            THANKS<ESC>
            .

        2.  In this example, you send a one-line message to the operator,
            and you wait for a reply.

            .PLEASE WHAT TIME IS SYSTEM SHUTDOWN?<RET>
            [PLOPSN OPERATOR AT KI514(14) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:00:03]

            THE SYSTEM WILL GO DOWN AT 6 PM
            ENTER TEXT, TERMINATE WITH ESCAPE OR ^Z
            THANK YOU<ESC>

            .

            The message from the operator said that the system would shut
            down at 6:00.  You end the dialog by pressing <ESC>.




                                   2-223
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PJOB Command


        3.  This example shows the use  of  PLEASE  to  send  a  one-line
            message to the operator at node 26.

            .PLEASE/NODE:26::ANSWER MY MOUNT REQUEST FOR DSKR:<ESC>
            [PLSOPN OPERATOR AT KL1026(26) HAS BEEN NOTIFIED AT 14:30:35]

            .














































                                   2-224
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


                               PLOT Command



   Function

        The PLOT command places entries in the plotter output queue.  See
        the QUEUE command for further information and examples.

   Format

        PLOT dev:jobname=file-spec

        Where:    dev is the name of the specific device  on  which  your
                  files  should  be  plotted.   (For  example,  PLT2:  is
                  plotter number 2.) You can have your files plotted on a
                  device  connected  to  another node by using the format
                  PLTSxx:  where xx is the node  number.   (For  example,
                  PLTS31  is  a  plotter  on node 31.) The device name is
                  optional.

                  jobname is the name of the job being entered  into  the
                  queue.   The  job name is optional.  The default is the
                  name of the first file in the request.

                  The equal sign is required if you  specify  either  the
                  device name, the job name, or both.

                  file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file  specifications,  separated  by  commas.   A  file
                  specification is in the form dev:file.ext[directory].

        If you specify neither a job name nor a file  specification,  the
        system  prints  a  list  of the jobs in the plotter queue on your
        terminal.

        The switches to this command can be divided into two  categories,
        depending  on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
        used more times, in a single command string.  The two  categories
        are:

         o  Queue-Operation Switches

            These switches can be used only once in the  command  string.
            They  affect  the  entire  request,  and  you  can place them
            anywhere in the command string.  If  you  have  used  one  of
            these  switches  in a command string, you cannot use it again
            in the same string.  Many switches have a  /NO  construction,
            which  has a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the /NO
            construction of a switch in the same command string with  the
            positive construction.


                                   2-225
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


         o  File-Control Switches

            These switches can be used any number of times in the command
            string.  You can also use the /NO construction of a switch in
            the same command string with the positive  construction.   To
            achieve  a  temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
            the switch, see Section 1.8.4.

           Switch        Category                   Function

        /ABEFORE:        File         Queues the file only  if the access
         date-time       control      date is before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /ACCOUNT:        Queue        Specifies  the account to which the
        "string"         operation    job  should  be  charged.   If  the
                                      account    string    contains   any
                                      nonalphanumeric   characters,   you
                                      must    enclose   the   string   in
                                      quotation marks.

        /AFTER:          Queue        Processes  the  request  after  the
         date-time       operation    specified date and time.

        /ALLFILES:       Queue        Accepts  a request  only  if all of
         YES or NO       operation    the files in the request exist.  By
                                      default, if any of the files do not
                                      exist, the others will be processed
                                      appropriately.      This     switch
                                      specifies that if any file does not
                                      exist,    no    files   should   be
                                      processed.  The value of YES or  NO
                                      is  optional.   If you specify YES,
                                      all the files  you  specified  must
                                      exist  or none of the files will be
                                      plotted.

        /ASINCE:         File         Queues  only the  files  that  have
         date-time       control      been accessed since  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /BEFORE:         File         Queues  only the  files  that  were
         date-time       control      created before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /CHARACTERISTIC: Queue        Specifies an output characteristic.
         arg             operation    You  can  find  a   list   of   the
                                      characteristics  arguments  defined
                                      for  your  system   in   the   file
                                      SYS:CHARTY.DAT.



                                   2-226
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


        /CHECK           Queue        Prints on your terminal  a list  of
                         operation    the queue entries made by your job.

        /COPIES:n        File         Repeats the  output  the  specified
                         control      number of times  (n  must  be  less
                                      than  64).   The  default is 1 (one
                                      copy).

        /CREATE          Queue        Makes  a new entry  in the  plotter
                         operation    queue.  This switch is the default,
                                      except  when  you are listing queue
                                      entries.

        /DEFERRED        Queue        Causes   deferred   output   to  be
                         operation    released to the  queue.   You  must
                                      use  one  of the following switches
                                      with /DEFERRED:

                                      /CREATE  completes   all   released
                                      output requests.

                                      /KILL   eliminates   the   released
                                      output requests.

                                      See the SET DEFER command for  more
                                      information and examples.

        /DELETE          File         Deletes the  file after  processing
                         control      it.    This   is   the   same    as
                                      /DISPOSE:DELETE.

        /DESTINATION:    Queue        Specifies   the   node   that  will
         node            operation    process  the  output.    Use   this
                                      switch  to  specify  that  the file
                                      should be plotted on a plotter that
                                      is connected to the specified node.
                                      Use  the  node  name  or  the  node
                                      number  to  specify the node.  If a
                                      request is made to a node that does
                                      not exist, the request will wait in
                                      the queue indefinitely.

        /DISPOSE:arg     File         Controls  the  disposition  of  the
                         control      file  after  it  is  queued.    The
                                      arguments to this switch are:

                                      DELETE deletes the file  from  your
                                      directory after plotting it.

                                      PRESERVE preserves the  file  after
                                      plotting  it.   This is the default
                                      function.

                                   2-227
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


                                      RENAME renames the  file  into  the
                                      queuing area, deleting it from your
                                      directory immediately.

        /DISTRIBUTION:   Queue        Specifies  text  to  place  in  the
         "text"          operation    distribution field, on  the  banner
                                      page  of  output.  You can use this
                                      field    to     include     mailing
                                      information,  or the location where
                                      the  operator  should   leave   the
                                      listing.   The text field may be up
                                      to  39   alphanumeric   characters,
                                      including punctuation and spaces if
                                      the text  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

        /ERBINARY        File         Prints an error message if a binary
                         control      file is included  in  the  request.
                                      This is the default function.

        /ERNONE          Queue        Prints an error message if no files
                         operation    match the file specification.  This
                                      is the default function.

        /ERPROTECTION    Queue        Prints   an   error    message   if
                         operation    processing   the   request    would
                                      require  a  violation of protection
                                      codes.    This   is   the   default
                                      function.

        /FAST            Queue        Prints the entries in  the queue on
                         operation    your terminal using a fast format.

        /FORMS:arg       Queue        Specifies  any special paper  to be
                         operation    used.  Available forms  are  listed
                                      in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

        /GENERIC         File         Sends   output   to     the   first
                         control      available  plotter.   This  is  the
                                      default  function.   This switch is
                                      the complement to /UNIT.

        /HEADER:         File         Makes header units before each file
         YES or NO       control      if you specify YES.  Does not  make
                                      headers  if  you specify NO.  1 may
                                      be used for YES; 0 may be used  for
                                      NO.   /HEADER:NO  is  the  same  as
                                      /NOHEADER.  /HEADER is the  default
                                      function.




                                   2-228
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


        /HELP:arg        Queue        Prints information on your terminal
                         operation    about  the  QUEUE  command.    This
                                      switch  does  not  queue any files.
                                      This switch can be  used  alone  or
                                      with    one    of   the   following
                                      arguments:

                                      TEXT prints  a  message  about  the
                                      format  and  switches  to the QUEUE
                                      command.  This is the same as /HELP
                                      with no arguments.

                                      SWITCHES prints a list of  all  the
                                      switches  available  with the QUEUE
                                      command.

        /JOBNAME:name    Queue        Specifies the name of the job.  The
                         operation    job  name  can   be   up   to   six
                                      alphanumeric characters.

        /KILL            Queue        Removes  the specified  entry  from
                         operation    the queue.  You  must  specify  the
                                      job name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE,
                                      to the left of the equal sign.

        /LENGTH:n:m      File         Processes only  files whose  length
                         control      is between n and m blocks.

        /LIMIT:n         Queue        Limits  the output to the specified
                         operation    number of minutes.

        /LIST:arg        Queue        Prints a  list of  the jobs  in the
                         operation    queue.  If you use /LIST alone,  it
                                      shows  the jobs in the queue.  This
                                      is equivalent to  using  the  QUEUE
                                      command  with  no  arguments and no
                                      switches.  /LIST can be abbreviated
                                      to  /L.   The  switch can also take
                                      one of the following arguments:

                                      ALL shows all data about each queue
                                      request.

                                      FAST shows a fast list of the queue
                                      requests.   (This  is  the  same as
                                      /FAST.)

                                      JOBS shows a list of  the  jobs  in
                                      the  queue.   (This  is the same as
                                      /LIST with no arguments.)



                                   2-229
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


                                      SUMMARY shows only the summary line
                                      of the queue display.

        /MESSAGE:        Queue        Specifies the amount of information
         arg             operation    to be printed when an error  occurs
                                      from  the request.  You can specify
                                      one  or  more  of   the   following
                                      arguments:

                                      ADDRESS  prints  the  location   in
                                      memory where the error occurred.

                                      CONTINUATION   prints   information
                                      about the error.

                                      FIRST  prints  the  one-line  error
                                      message.

                                      PREFIX prints a six-character error
                                      prefix.

        /MODIFY          Queue        Alters the specified  parameter  in
                         operation    the  specified  job.   This  switch
                                      requires   that   you  have  access
                                      rights  to  the  job.    You   must
                                      specify  a  job name, /REQUESTID or
                                      /SEQUENCE, to the left of the equal
                                      sign in the command line.

        /NEW:            File         Accepts  the  request even  if  the
         YES or NO       control      file does not yet exist.

        /NOHEADER        File         Suppresses  header  units  for each
                         control      file.   /HEADER  is   the   default
                                      function.

        /NONEW           File         Does not accept file specifications
                         control      of files that do not  exist.   This
                                      is the default function.

        /NONOTIFY        Queue        Suppresses notification of your job
                         operation    when  your  request  is   finished.
                                      This  is the default function.  See
                                      /NOTIFY.

        /NONULL          Queue        Prints  a fatal error  message on a
                         operation    null request.  This is the  default
                                      function.

        /NOOPTION        Queue        Suppresses    the    option    file
                         operation    SWITCH.INI.


                                   2-230
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


        /NOPHYSICAL      File         Recognizes  logical  names  in  the
                         control      command  string.    This   is   the
                                      default function.

        /NOSTRS          File         When searching structures for file,
                         control      uses  only  the  first  occurrence.
                                      This is the default function.

        /NOTES:text      Queue        Plots   the  text   in  the  header
                         operation    columns.  The text can be up to  12
                                      characters, and it must be enclosed
                                      in  quotes  if  it   contains   any
                                      nonalphanumeric characters, such as
                                      spaces.

        /NOTIFY:arg      Queue        Notifies  you on your terminal when
                         operation    your request is completed.   To  be
                                      notified,   use   /NOTIFY  with  no
                                      argument, or with YES or  1  as  an
                                      argument.         To       suppress
                                      notification,    use     /NOTIFY:0,
                                      /NOTIFY:NO,   or   /NONOTIFY.    By
                                      default, you are not notified  when
                                      a  request is finished.  In special
                                      cases, such as output  of  deferred
                                      requests,   you   will   never   be
                                      notified.

        /NULL:           Queue        Does   not   print  a  fatal  error
         YES or NO       operation    message if the specified  files  do
                                      not exist.  /NULL:NO is the same as
                                      /NONULL.

        /OKBINARY        File         Accepts   files   whose  extensions
                         control      indicate that they  include  binary
                                      information.   Normally, files with
                                      extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,  .REL,
                                      .EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
                                      for processing.

        /OKNONE          Queue        Does not produce  an error  message
                         operation    if  no   files   match   the   file
                                      specification.

        /OKPROTECTION    Queue        Does  not  produce an error message
                         operation    if  a  file  protection   code   is
                                      violated.

        /OPTION:option   Queue        Uses  the option  line QUEUE:option
                         operation    in the SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI
                                      files are discussed in Appendix B.


                                   2-231
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


        /PHYSICAL        File         Does not recognize logical names in
                         control      the command line.

        /PLOT:arg        File         Plots  the file  in  the  specified
                         control      mode.  If you omit /PLOT, the  file
                                      is  plotted  according  to the data
                                      mode specified in  the  file.   The
                                      argument  can  be  any  one  of the
                                      following:

                                      ASCII plots the file in ASCII mode.

                                      BINARY plots  the  file  in  binary
                                      mode.

                                      IMAGE plots the file in image mode.
                                      This is the default function.

        /PRESERVE        File         Saves  the   file  after   plotting
                         control      it.    This   is   the   same    as
                                      /DISPOSE:PRESERVE  and  it  is  the
                                      default function.

        /PRIORITY:n      Queue        Gives the specified priority number
                         operation    (n is 1 to 63) to the  request.   A
                                      larger number has greater priority.

        /PROTECTION:     Queue        Specifies a protection code for the
         nnn             operation    queue request.  Queue requests  are
                                      protected  in  the  same  way  that
                                      files are protected.   See  Section
                                      1.9.4.

        /REMOTE          Queue        Prints on your terminal a  list  of
                         operation    remote queues.  Must be  used  with
                                      /DESTINATION.

        /REQUESTID:n     Queue        Specifies        the        request
                         operation    identification number of a  request
                                      you  wish  to  modify or terminate.
                                      The request  identification  number
                                      is  assigned  when  the  request is
                                      queued.

        /RUN:file        Queue        Executes  the  specified file after
                         operation    the request is made.

        /RUNCORE:n       Queue        Executes the file specified /RUN in
                         operation    nK of core  after  the  request  is
                                      made.



                                   2-232
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


        /RUNOFFSET:n     Queue        Executes the file specified in /RUN
                         operation    offset n after the request is made.

        /SEQUENCE:n      Queue        Specifies  a sequence number to aid
                         operation    in  identifying  a  request  to  be
                                      modified or deleted.

        /SINCE:          File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates after the specified date  and
                                      time.

        /STRS:           File         Searches   for   the   file  on all
         YES or NO       control      structures in the search  list  and
                                      takes    every   occurrence.    The
                                      default is to take just  the  first
                                      occurrence of the file.

        /TMPFIL:         Queue        Creates  a temporary  file TMP:file
         file:text       operation    and  enters  the  text   into   the
                                      temporary file.

        /UNIT:n          Queue        Specifies  the unit  number  of the
                         operation    device that  you  want  the  output
                                      sent to.

        /USERNAME:       Queue        Specifies the user  name  field for
         "name"          operation    the banner page  of  output.   This
                                      field   can   contain   up   to  39
                                      alphanumeric  characters,  and  may
                                      include  punctuation  and spaces if
                                      the name  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

   Associated Messages

        When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system  prints  a
        message on the user's terminal.  The message is in the form:

        [PLOTTER JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]

        Where:    name is the name of the job in the queue.  This can  be
                  specified  by  the  user  in  the  PLOT command string.
                  Otherwise, it defaults to the name of the first file in
                  the request.

                  nnn  is  the  number  that   represents   the   request
                  identification of the job in the queue.

                  xxx is the maximum number of minutes that the job  will
                  use.



                                   2-233
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PLOT Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal in monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN  when you desire a list of the queue
        entries.

        Runs the QUEUE program.

   Example

        Plot all files with the extension .PLT.  The operator is asked to
        put PLAIN paper on the plotter.

        .PLOT *.PLT/FORMS:PLAIN<RET>
        [PLOTTER JOB MLB QUEUED, REQUEST #172, LIMIT 30]

        .

































                                   2-234
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                POP Command


                                POP Command



   Function

        The POP command returns your job to a superior job  context.   It
        reverses  the  action  of a PUSH command, destroying the inferior
        context and restoring the superior one as  the  current  context.
        (Section 1.5 contains a discussion of contexts.)

   Format

        POP

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Destroys the core image of the inferior context and  returns  you
        to the preserved context.

   Associated Commands

        CONTEXT   Allows you to display and manipulate contexts.

        PUSH      Creates an inferior context.

   Example

        The following CONTEXT  command  shows  that  three  of  the  four
        available  contexts  are  in  use at this time, as well as 121 of
        1,000 available saved-pages.  Use the POP command, and then issue
        another  CONTEXT  command,  and  you  can see that one context is
        freed, some pages are freed, and the current  context  (indicated
        by  an asterisk (*)) changes from context 3 (BOTLVL) to context 2
        (LVLTWO).  Context 3 no longer exists.














                                   2-235
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                POP Command


        .CONTEXT
        Contexts used/quota = 3/4, pages used/quota = 121/1000

        Context      Superior     Prog    Idle time
          TOPLVL   1                MS       :01:36
          LVLTWO   2   TOPLVL   1   PATH     12.46
        * BOTLVL   3   LVLTWO   2

        .POP

        .CONTEXT
        Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 100/1000

        Contexts     Superior     Prog    Idle time
          TOPLVL   1                MS       :01:49
        * LVLTWO   2   TOPLVL   1   PATH





































                                   2-236
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              PRESERVE Command


                             PRESERVE Command



   Function

        The PRESERVE command changes the protection  code  in  the  owner
        field  of  the  specified  file  to  1.  If the system default is
        <055>, PRESERVE changes the code to <155>.  If the system default
        is  <057>,  PRESERVE changes the code to <157>.  Protection codes
        are described in Section 1.9.4.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

                                      NOTE

                The actions performed by the PRESERVE command are
                meaningful only to the KJOB and LOGIN CUSPs.


   Format

        PRESERVE file.ext,file.ext,...

        Where:    file.ext is the file name and extension of the file  or
                  files to be PRESERVED.

                  You can use the full wildcard construction  for  either
                  the file name or the extension, or both.

   Associated Command

        PROTECT - Allows you to specify the protection code for each file
                  or all files.  The function of PRESERVE is identical to
                  the function of PROTECT.

   Restrictions

        The PRESERVE command has no effect on sub-file directories  (that
        is, files with the extension .SFD).

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.






                                   2-237
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              PRESERVE Command


   Example

        A DIRECTORY shows that TEST.REL is protected with <055>:

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>

        TEST    FOR     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy    DSKC:   [27,5434]
        TEST    SFD     1  <755>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    REL     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    MAC     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy
          TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        Use PRESERVE to change the protection code of TEST.REL.

        .PRESERVE TEST.REL<RET>
        FILES RENAMED:
        DSKC:TEST.REL

        Show that the protection of TEST.REL is now <155>:

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>

        TEST    FOR     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy    DSKC:   [27,5434]
        TEST    SFD     1  <775>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    REL     1  <155>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    MAC     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy
          TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]


























                                   2-238
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


                               PRINT Command



   Function

        The PRINT command queues files to be printed on the line printer.
        See the QUEUE command for further information and examples.

   Format

        PRINT dev:jobname=file-spec

        Where:    dev:  is the device name of the specific  line  printer
                  on  which  your files are to be printed.  (For example,
                  LPT2:  is line printer number 2.) You can specify  that
                  your  files  be printed on a printer on another node by
                  using the format LPTSxx, where xx is the  node  number.
                  (For  example,  LPTS31  is  a  printer on node 31.) The
                  device name is optional.

                  jobname is the name of the job being entered  into  the
                  queue.   The  job name is optional.  The default is the
                  name of the first file in the request.

                  The equal sign is required if you specify  the  device,
                  job name, or both.

                  file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file  specifications separated by commas, for the files
                  being processed.  A file specification is in  the  form
                  dev:file.ext[directory].

        If you specify neither the job name nor the input  specification,
        the system prints a list of all the jobs in the lineprinter queue
        on your terminal.

        You can use the asterisk  wildcard  construction  for  the  input
        specification.  Switches that aid in constructing the queue entry
        can appear as part of the input specifications.













                                   2-239
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        The switches to this command can be divided into two  categories,
        depending  on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
        used more times, in a single command string.  The two  categories
        are:

        o  Queue-Operation Switches

             These switches can be used only once in the command  string.
             They  affect  the  entire  request,  and  you can place them
             anywhere in the command string.  If you  have  used  one  of
             these  switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
             in the same string.  Many switches have a /NO  construction,
             which has a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the /NO
             construction of a switch in the same command string with the
             positive construction.

        o  File-Control Switches

             These switches can be  used  any  number  of  times  in  the
             command  string.  You can also use the /NO construction of a
             switch  in  the  same  command  string  with  the   positive
             construction.  To achieve a temporary or permanent effect by
             the placement of the switch, see Section 1.8.4.

           Switch        Category                  Function

        /ABEFORE:        File         Queues the  file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /ACCOUNT:        Queue        Specifies  the account to which the
         "string"        operation    job  should  be  charged.   If  the
                                      account    string    contains   any
                                      nonalphanumeric   characters,   you
                                      must    enclose   the   string   in
                                      quotation marks.

        /AFTER:          Queue        Processes  the  request  after  the
         date-time       operation    specified date and time.

        /ALLFILES:       Queue        Accepts  a request  only  if all of
         YES or NO       operation    the files in the request exist.  By
                                      default, if any of the files do not
                                      exist, the others will be processed
                                      appropriately.      This     switch
                                      specifies that if any file does not
                                      exist,    no    files   should   be
                                      processed.  The value of YES or  NO
                                      is  optional.   If you specify YES,
                                      all of  the  specified  files  must
                                      exist.


                                   2-240
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /ASINCE:         File         Queues  only  the  files  that have
         date-time       control      been accessed since  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /BEFORE:         File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates before the specified date and
                                      time.

        /BEGIN:n         File         Starts the output on the  specified
                         control      page.

        /CHARACTERISTIC: Queue        Specifies an output characteristic.
         arg             operation    You  can  find  a   list   of   the
                                      characteristics  arguments  defined
                                      for  your  system   in   the   file
                                      SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

        /CHECK           Queue        Prints on your terminal  a list  of
                         operation    the queue entries made by your job.

        /COPIES:n        File         Repeats the  output  the  specified
                         control      number of times  (n  must  be  less
                                      than 64).

        /CREATE          Queue        Makes  a new  entry  in the  queue.
                         operation    This is the default except when you
                                      are listing queue entries.

        /DEFERRED        Queue        Causes  all deferred  output  to be
                         operation    released to the system queues.  You
                                      must   use  one  of  the  following
                                      switches with /DEFERRED:

                                      /CREATE  completes   all   released
                                      output requests.

                                      /KILL   eliminates   the   released
                                      output requests.

                                      See the SET DEFER command for  more
                                      information and examples.

        /DELETE          File         Deletes  the  file  after  printing
                         control      it.    This   is   the   same    as
                                      /DISPOSE:DELETE








                                   2-241
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /DESTINATION:    Queue        Specifies   the   node   that  will
         node            operation    process  the  request.   Use   this
                                      switch  to  specify  that the files
                                      are to be printed on a line printer
                                      connected  to  the  specified node.
                                      Use the node name or node number to
                                      specify the node.

        /DISPOSE:arg     File         Controls  the  disposition  of  the
                         control      file  after  it  is  queued.    The
                                      arguments to this switch are:

                                      DELETE deletes the file  from  your
                                      directory after printing it.

                                      PRESERVE preserves the  file  after
                                      printing  it.   This is the default
                                      function.

                                      RENAME renames the  file  into  the
                                      queuing area, deleting it from your
                                      directory immediately.

        /DISTRIBUTION:   Queue        Specifies  text  to  place  in  the
         "text"          operation    distribution field, on  the  banner
                                      page  of  output listings.  You can
                                      use this field to  include  mailing
                                      information,  or the location where
                                      the  operator  should   leave   the
                                      listing.   The text field may be up
                                      to  39   alphanumeric   characters,
                                      including punctuation and spaces if
                                      the text  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

        /ERBINARY        File         Prints an error message if a binary
                         control      file  is  included  in  the  queue.
                                      This is the default function.

        /ERNONE          Queue        Prints an error message if no files
                         operation    match the file specification.  This
                                      is the default function.

        /ERPROTECTION    Queue        Prints   an   error    message   if
                         operation    processing   the   request    would
                                      require   a   violation   of   file
                                      protection  code.   This   is   the
                                      default function.

        /FAST            Queue        Prints the entries in the  queue on
                         operation    your terminal in a fast format.


                                   2-242
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /FILE:           File         Specifies the way the file is to be
         arg             control      interpreted.      The     following
                                      arguments  can  be  used  with this
                                      switch:

                                      ASCII interprets the file as  ASCII
                                      text.

                                      COBOL interprets the file as  COBOL
                                      SIXBIT text.

                                      FORTRAN interprets the  file  as  a
                                      Fortran  data  file.   This  is the
                                      default   for   files   with    the
                                      extension .DAT.

        /FONT:           Queue        Prints  the  file  using  the  font
         fontname        operation    designated in fontname.   Fontnames
                                      vary     from    installation    to
                                      installation.   See   your   system
                                      administrator  for  a list of valid
                                      font    names.     (Section    1.16
                                      describes how to print a file using
                                      multiple fonts.)

        /FORMS:name      Queue        Prints the file on the named forms.
                         operation    The argument to the switch  can  be
                                      up  to six alphanumeric characters.
                                      Available  forms  are   listed   in
                                      SYS:FORMST.DAT.

        /GENERIC         Queue        Sends output to  the next available
                         operation    line printer.  This switch  is  the
                                      complement to /UNIT.

        /HEADER:         File         Prints   block   headers   at   the
         YES or NO       control      beginning of the file.  This is the
                                      default function.

        /HELP:           Queue        Prints information on your terminal
         arg             operation    about  the  QUEUE  command.    This
                                      switch  does  not  queue any files.
                                      This  switch  can  be  used   alone
                                      (/HELP)   or   with   one   of  the
                                      following arguments:

                                      TEXT  prints  a  message  with  the
                                      format  and  switches  to the QUEUE
                                      command.  This is the same as /HELP
                                      with no arguments.



                                   2-243
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


                                      SWITCHES  prints a list of all  the
                                      switches  available  with the QUEUE
                                      command.

        /JOBNAME:        Queue        Specifies the name of the job.  The
         name            operation    job  name  can   be   up   to   six
                                      alphanumeric characters.

        /KILL            Queue        Removes  the specified  entry  from
                         operation    the queue.  You  must  include  the
                                      job  name, /REQUESTID, or /SEQUENCE
                                      to the left of the  equal  sign  in
                                      the   command   line.    (See   the
                                      examples.)

        /LENGTH:n:m      File         Prints     only  files whose length
                         control      is between n and m blocks.

        /LIMIT:n         Queue        Limits  the output to the specified
                         operation    number of pages.

        /LIST:arg        Queue        Prints  information  about the jobs
                         operation    in the queue.   If  you  use  /LIST
                                      alone,  it  shows  the  jobs in the
                                      queue.  This is equivalent to using
                                      the PRINT command with no arguments
                                      and no switches.  /LIST and  /LIST:
                                      can  be  abbreviated to /L and /L:.
                                      The switch can also take one of the
                                      following arguments:

                                      ALL shows all data about each queue
                                      request.

                                      FAST shows a fast list of the queue
                                      requests.

                                      JOBS shows a list of  the  jobs  in
                                      the  queue.   (This  is the same as
                                      /LIST with no arguments.)

                                      SUMMARY shows only the summary line
                                      of the queue display.

        /LOWERCASE       Queue        Forces  the output to be printed on
                         operation    a  line  printer   with   lowercase
                                      ability.






                                   2-244
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /MESSAGE:arg     Queue        Specifies the amount of information
                         operation    to be printed when an error  occurs
                                      from  the request.  You can specify
                                      one  or  more  of   the   following
                                      arguments:

                                      ADDRESS  prints  the  location   in
                                      memory where the error occurred.

                                      CONTINUATION   prints   information
                                      about the error.

                                      FIRST  prints  the  one-line  error
                                      message.

                                      PREFIX  prints  the   six-character
                                      error prefix.

        /MODIFY          Queue        Alters the specified  parameter  in
                         operation    the  specified  job.   This  switch
                                      requires   that   you  have  access
                                      rights  to  the  job.    You   must
                                      include  the  job name, /REQUESTID,
                                      or /SEQUENCE, to the  left  of  the
                                      equal  sign  in  the  command line.
                                      (See the examples.) You can  modify
                                      a  request  as  long as the request
                                      has not been started.

        /NEW:            File         Accepts  the  request even  if  the
         YES or NO       control      file does not yet exist.

        /NOHEADER        Queue        Suppresses the block headers at the
                         operation    beginning of the file.

        /NONEW           File         Does not accept file specifications
                         control      of files that do not  exist.   This
                                      is the default function.

        /NONOTIFY        Queue        Suppresses  notification  when your
                         operation    request is finished.  See /NOTIFY.

        /NONULL          Queue        Prints  a fatal  error  message  if
                         operation    none of the specified files  exist.
                                      This is a default function.

        /NOOPTION        Queue        Suppresses    the    option    file
                         operation    SWITCH.INI.





                                   2-245
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /NOPHYSICAL      File         Recognizes   logical     names  for
                         control      devices  in  the  command   string.
                                      This is a default function.

        /NOSTRS          File         When searching for the  file on all
                         control      structures, takes  only  the  first
                                      occurrence.   This  is  the default
                                      function.

        /NOTES:"text"    Queue        Prints the specified  text  on  the
                         operation    header pages of  the  output.   The
                                      text  can  be 12 characters, and if
                                      it  contains  any   nonalphanumeric
                                      characters,  it must be enclosed in
                                      quotation marks.

        /NOTIFY:         Queue        Notifies you on your terminal  when
         YES or NO       operation    your request is completed.   To  be
                                      notified,   use   /NOTIFY  with  no
                                      argument, or with YES or  1  as  an
                                      argument.         To       suppress
                                      notification,    use     /NOTIFY:0,
                                      /NOTIFY:NO,   or   /NONOTIFY.    By
                                      default, you are not notified  when
                                      a  request is finished.  In special
                                      cases, such as the printing of  log
                                      files  and  the  output of deferred
                                      requests,   you   will   never   be
                                      notified.

        /NULL:           Queue        Does   not   print  a  fatal  error
         YES or NO       operation    message if the specified  files  do
                                      not exist.  /NULL:NO is the same as
                                      /NONULL.

        /OKBINARY        Queue        Accepts   files  whose   extensions
                         Operation    indicate that they  include  binary
                                      information.   Normally  files with
                                      extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,  .REL,
                                      .EXE,   and   .HGH   will   not  be
                                      accepted.

        /OKNONE          Queue        Does not produce  a warning message
                         operation    if  no   files   match   the   file
                                      specification.

        /OKPROTECTION    Queue        Does not  produce  an error message
                         operation    if  a  file  protection   code   is
                                      violated.




                                   2-246
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /OPTION:option   Queue        Uses  the option  line QUEUE:option
                         operation    in the SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI
                                      files are discussed in Appendix B.

        /PHYSICAL        File         Does not  recognize  logical  names
                         control      in the command line.

        /PRESERVE        File         Saves   the  file   after  printing
                         control      it.  This switch  is  the  same  as
                                      DISPOSE:PRESERVE.    This   is  the
                                      default function.

        /PRINT:arg       File         Prints  the file with the specified
                         control      characteristics.     The    default
                                      printing   mode   is   ASCII.   The
                                      argument can  be  any  one  of  the
                                      following:

                                      ARROW prints  the  file  literally,
                                      denoting  each control character by
                                      a ^ and the character,  except  for
                                      the  following  which  are  printed
                                      literally:     carriage     return,
                                      linefeed,  horizontal tab, vertical
                                      tab, and formfeed.

                                      ASCII  prints  the  file  with   no
                                      changes.

                                      GRAPHICS  causes  the  LN01   laser
                                      printer    to    recognize   escape
                                      sequences.      These      embedded
                                      sequences allow font changes within
                                      the file.  Unless you specify  this
                                      switch,  escape  sequences  will be
                                      ignored and printed as part of  the
                                      file.   (See  Section  1.16  for  a
                                      discussion    of    LN01     escape
                                      sequences.)

                                      OCTAL  prints  the   octal   values
                                      instead  of  the  characters in the
                                      file.

                                      SUPPRESS   converts   all   control
                                      characters to line feeds except for
                                      ASCII code characters CR and DC3.

        /PRIORITY:n      Queue        Gives the specified priority number
                         operation    (n is 1 to 63) to the  request.   A
                                      larger number has greater priority.


                                   2-247
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /PROTECTION:     Queue        Specifies a protection code for the
         nnn             operation    queue request.  Queue requests  are
                                      protected  in  the  same  way  that
                                      files are protected.   See  Section
                                      1.9.4.

        /QUEUE:queue     Queue        Specifies  the remote VAX queue  to
                         operation    receive   the   output   from   the
                                      request.

        /REMOTE          Queue        Prints on your terminal a  list  of
                         operation    remote queues.  Must be  used  with
                                      /DESTINATION.

        /REPORT:code     File         Processes  COBOL  report  files  by
                         control      printing every  line  in  the  file
                                      that   begins  with  the  specified
                                      code.

        /REQUESTID:n     Queue        Specifies        the        request
                         operation    identification number  of  the  job
                                      you  wish  to  modify  or terminate
                                      (/KILL).         The        request
                                      identification  number  is assigned
                                      by the system when the  request  is
                                      made.   Place  this  switch  to the
                                      left  of  the  equal  sign  in  the
                                      command line.  (See the examples.)

        /RUN:file        Queue        Executes  the  specified file after
                         operation    the request is accepted.

        /RUNCORE:n       Queue        Executes the file specified in /RUN
                         operation    in nK of core after the request  is
                                      accepted.

        /RUNOFFSET:n     Queue        Executes the file specified in /RUN
                         operation    with offset n after the request  is
                                      accepted.

        /SEQUENCE:n      Queue        Specifies a sequence  number to aid
                         operation    in  identifying  a  request  to  be
                                      modified  or  deleted.  This switch
                                      must be used to  the  left  of  the
                                      equal  sign  in  the  command line.
                                      (See the examples.)







                                   2-248
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


        /SINCE:          File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates after the specified date  and
                                      time.

        /SPACING:        File         Prints the files with the specified
         arg             control      spacing  parameters.   The  default
                                      function  is  to  make  no  spacing
                                      changes to the file, which  is  the
                                      same  as  /SPACING:SINGLE.  You can
                                      use the  following  arguments  with
                                      this switch:

                                      SINGLE  prints  the  file  with  no
                                      spacing changes.

                                      DOUBLE prints a blank line  between
                                      every line of the file.

                                      TRIPLE  prints  two   blank   lines
                                      between every line of the file.

        /STRS:           File         Searches   for  the   file  on  all
         YES or NO       control      structures in the search  list  and
                                      takes    every   occurrence.    The
                                      default is to take just  the  first
                                      occurrence of the file.

        /TMPFIL:         Queue        Creates  a temporary  file TMP:file
         file:text       operation    and enters the text into the file.

        /UNIT:n          Queue        Specifies  a decimal  unit   number
                         operation    or SIXBIT name of  the  device  you
                                      want the output sent to.

        /UPPERCASE       Queue        Forces  the output to be printed on
                         operation    an  uppercase-only  line   printer.
                                      This  switch  is  the complement to
                                      /LOWERCASE.

        /USERNAME:       Queue        Specifies  the  user  name  for the
         "name"          operation    banner  page  of  output  listings.
                                      This  field  can  contain  up to 39
                                      alphanumeric  characters,  and  may
                                      include  punctuation  and spaces if
                                      the name  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.







                                   2-249
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PRINT Command


   Associated Messages

        When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system  prints  a
        message on the user's terminal.  The message is in the form:

        [PRINTER JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]

        Where:    name is the name of the job in the queue.  This can  be
                  specified  by  the user.  Otherwise, it defaults to the
                  name of the first file in the request.

                  nnn  is  the  number  that   represents   the   request
                  identification of the job in the queue.

                  xxx is the maximum number of pages that  the  job  will
                  use.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal in monitor mode.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN if you want only a list  of  jobs  in  the
        queue to be printed on your terminal.

   Examples

        1.  Print the file SYS:NOTICE.TXT.

            .PRINT SYS:NOTICE.TXT<RET>
            [PRINTER JOB NOTICE QUEUED, REQUEST #109, LIMIT 50]
            .

        2.  Print the file SYS:NOTICE.TXT after 5:00 P.M.

            .PRINT SYS:NOTICE.TXT /AFTER:17:00<RET>
            [PRINTER JOB NOTICE QUEUED, REQUEST #109, LIMIT 50]
            .

        3.  Change the job with request identifcation number 109 to print
            after 4:30 P.M.

            .PRINT /REQUESTID:109= /MODIFY /AFTER:16:30<RET>

        4.  Cancel the job with sequence number 22.

            .PRINT /SEQUENCE:22= /KILL<RET>





                                   2-250
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              PROTECT Command


                              PROTECT Command



   Function

        The  PROTECT  command  changes  the   access   protection   codes
        associated  with  the specified files or directories.  The change
        is made by renaming the file.

        You specify the access protection of  a  file  with  three  octal
        digits.   Each  digit represents a particular class of user.  The
        first  digit  represents  the  owner  of  the  file,  the  second
        represents  users  with the same project number as the owner, and
        the third represents all other users.  See Section  1.9.4  for  a
        description of protection codes.

        The standard protection is either <057> or <055>.   However,  the
        system  default  can be changed by individual installations.  The
        owner of a file can  alter  the  protection  code  of  that  file
        regardless of the existing protection code.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        PROTECT file-spec<nnn>,file-spec<nnn>,...

        Where:    file-spec is a file specification.  File specifications
                  are described in Section 1.9.

                  <nnn> is an octal code.

                  You can specify the protection  code  before  the  file
                  name, in which case it applies for all following files.
                  You can use the full wildcard construction for the file
                  specification.

                  If you have the required privileges, you can change the
                  protection of files not in your directory by specifying
                  the  desired  directory  name.   If  you  specify   the
                  directory  name before the file name, it applies to all
                  succeeding files specified in the command line.

   Associated Commands

        PRESERVE  Changes the protection codes of the specified files  to
                  <1nn>.




                                   2-251
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              PROTECT Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        DIRECTORY shows that TEST.REL has the protection <155>:

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>

        TEST    FOR     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy    DSKC:   [27,5434]
        TEST    SFD     1  <775>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    REL     1  <155>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    MAC     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy
          TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        Use PROTECT to change the protection code of TEST.REL to <555>:

        .PROTECT TEST.REL<555><RET>
        FILES RENAMED:
        DSKC:TEST.REL

        Show the new protection of TEST.REL with DIRECTORY.

        .DIR TEST.*<RET>

        TEST    FOR     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy    DSKC:   [27,5434]
        TEST    SFD     1  <775>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    REL     1  <555>   dd-mmm-yy
        TEST    MAC     1  <055>   dd-mmm-yy

          TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 4 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]



















                                   2-252
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               PUNCH Command


                               PUNCH Command



   Function

        The PUNCH command is defined by the system  administrator  to  be
        equivalent  to  either  the TPUNCH or CPUNCH command.  TOPS-10 is
        shipped with PUNCH defined as TPUNCH, but this may be changed  at
        your site.

        See  the  TPUNCH  and  CPUNCH  command  descriptions   for   more
        information.








































                                   2-253
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


                               PUSH Command



   Function

        The PUSH command creates an inferior  context;  the  new  context
        becomes your current one.  The core image of the superior context
        is preserved.  (See Section 1.5 for a discussion of contexts.)

   Format

        PUSH

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Preserves your core image.

   Associated Commands

        CONTEXT   Allows you to display and manipulate contexts.

        POP       Allows you to return to a superior context.

   Example

        Run a program, for example, MS.  Then exit and  issue  a  CONTEXT
        command to see the status of your current context.

        .CONTEXT

        Contexts used/quota = 1/4, pages used/quota = 4/1000
        Context      Superior   Prog   Idle time
        *        1              MS

        Now issue a PUSH command, and try another CONTEXT command to  see
        the new status of your contexts.

        .PUSH

        .CONTEXT
        Contexts used/quota = 2/4, pages used/quota = 6/1000
        Context      Superior   Prog   Idle Time
                 1              MS      19.78
        *        2         1

        There are now two contexts in use.  The current, unnamed  context


                                   2-254
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        2  is not running a program.  MS, which is running in the unnamed
        superior context, has been idle for 19.78 seconds since the  last
        CONTEXT command was issued.


















































                                   2-255
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


   Function

        The QUEUE command makes entries in any of several system  queues,
        or  in  the  case  of the Event Queue, displays information only.
        The system queues are:

         o  Event Queue - Contains  information  about  scheduled  system
            events.  This information may include such things as the time
            the system will go down (KSYS) and when certain files will be
            closed.  This queue is a display queue only.

         o  Input  Queue  -  Contains  the  batch  jobs  that  have  been
            submitted to the system.

         o  Mount Queue - Contains  the  requests  for  resources  to  be
            mounted.  These are:  tape, disk, and DECtape mount requests.

         o  Output Queues:

             -  Card Punch Queue - Contains the requests that  have  been
                made for files to be punched on cards.

             -  Paper Tape Punch Queue - Contains the requests that  have
                been made for files to be punched on paper tape.

             -  Plotter Queue - Contains the requests that have been made
                for files to be plotted.

             -  Printer Queue - Contains the requests that have been made
                for files to be printed on a line printer.

        When queueing a request, you can specify  an  individual  device.
        If  you  do not specify a device, the first available appropriate
        device is used.

        All requests are placed in a  queue  (a  list  of  the  requests,
        arranged  according  to priority).  The requests are processed in
        this order.  Priority is established by the limit that is set  on
        each  request  (see  /LIMIT and /TIME below) and according to the
        specified priority number (see  /PRIORITY  below).   In  general,
        requests  with smaller limits and higher priorities are processed
        first.

        The QUEUE command also creates  lists  of  the  requests  in  the
        queues.  This list can be printed on the terminal or entered into
        a file.  The list includes the mount queue as well as  input  and
        output queues.






                                   2-256
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        The QUEUE command is  duplicated  by  the  CPUNCH,  PLOT,  PRINT,
        PUNCH,  SUBMIT,  and  TPUNCH  commands.   Each  of these commands
        performs a function with a specific system queue.

   Formats

        1.  To process a batch job, use the following format:

            QUEUE INP:jobname=control-file,log-file

            Where:    jobname is the name of the job.  This name must  be
                      one  to  six alphanumeric characters.  The job name
                      is optional.  If you do not specify the  job  name,
                      the default is the name of the log file.

                      The equal sign is required.

                      control-file is the file specification of the batch
                      control  file.   The file name is required.  If you
                      do not specify the file extension, the  default  is
                      .CTL.

                      log-file is the file specification  that  you  want
                      assigned  to  the log file, which contains a record
                      of the processing of the batch job.  The  log  file
                      specification  is  optional.   If you omit the file
                      name, the default is the name of the control  file.
                      If  you  omit  the  file  extension, the default is
                      .LOG.

        2.  To make an entry  in  one  of  the  output  queues,  use  the
            following format:

            QUEUE dev:jobname=file-spec,file-spec

            Where:    dev:  is the name of the device on which the output
                      is  to  be  processed.   The  device  name may be a
                      generic  device  name,  in  which  case  the  first
                      available  device  is used, or it may be a specific
                      device name.  (For  example,  LPT:   is  the  first
                      available  line  printer.   LPT2:   is line printer
                      number 2.) To use a device on another node, use the
                      format devSxx:, where dev is a generic device name,
                      and xx is a node number.  (For example, LPTS34:  is
                      a line printer on node 34.) If you do not specify a
                      device name, the  default  is  LPT:.   The  generic
                      device names are:

                           LPT:  for line printer requests.
                           CDP:  for card punch requests.



                                   2-257
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


                           PLT:  for plotter requests.
                           PTP:  for paper tape punch requests

                      jobname is the name of the job.  The  job  name  is
                      one  to  six alphanumeric characters.  The job name
                      is optional.  If you omit the job name, the name of
                      the  first  file  in the request is used as the job
                      name.  However, if the first file  does  not  exist
                      (see /NEW), the name of the second file is used.

                      file-spec is the file specification of the file  to
                      be  processed.   The  file  name  and extension are
                      required.

        3.  To obtain a file containing a list of all the entries in  all
            the queues, use the following format:

            QUEUE file-spec=/LIST

            Where:    file-spec is the file specification of  the  output
                      file.   If you omit the file extension, the default
                      is .LSQ.

        4.  To display the entries in any or all system  queues  on  your
            terminal, use the following format:

            QUEUE dev:

            Where:    dev is any of the system queue names.  These are:

                           INP:  for the batch input queue.
                           CDP:  for the card punch queue.
                           PLT:  for the plotter queue.
                           LPT:  for the line printer queue.
                           PTP:  for the paper tape punch queue.

                      The device name is optional.  If you do not specify
                      the  device name, all the entries in all the system
                      queues are printed on  your  terminal.   This  list
                      includes the mount queue.













                                   2-258
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


   Switches

        The switches for the QUEUE, CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT,  PUNCH,  SUBMIT,
        and TPUNCH commands can be placed anywhere in the command line.

        The switches can be divided into  two  categories,  depending  on
        whether  the  switch  can  be used only once, or can be used more
        times, in the command line.  The two categories are:

        o  Queue-Operation Switches

             These switches can be used only once in the command  string.
             They  affect  the  entire  request,  and  you can place them
             anywhere in the command string.  If you  have  used  one  of
             these  switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
             in the same string.  Many switches have a /NO  construction,
             which  takes  a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the
             /NO construction of  one  of  these  switches  in  the  same
             command string with the positive construction of the switch.

        o  File-Control Switches

             These switches can be  used  any  number  of  times  in  the
             command  string.  You can use the /NO construction of one of
             these switches in the same command string with the  positive
             construction  of  the  switch.  For information about how to
             achieve a temporary or permanent effect by the placement  of
             the switch, see Section 1.8.4.

        In the following table of  switches,  the  switches  are  defined
        according  to  the queues that they affect.  The following labels
        signify the queue(s) that each switch affects.  The switches  are
        defined as follows:

             ALL     - Switches that affect both the  batch  input  queue
                       and the output queues.

             INPUT   - Switches that affect only the batch input queue.

             OUTPUT  - Switches  that  affect  only  the  output  queues.
                       OUTPUT  is  followed  by  (queue) in cases where a
                       switch is useful for that specific output queue.

             LIST    - Switches that affect the listing of  the  jobs  in
                       the   queue.   Listings  can  be  printed  on  the
                       terminal, or they can be  written  into  files  on
                       disk  or  tape.   LIST is followed by (queue) when
                       the listing function is useful for that queue.





                                   2-259
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


           Switch       Category    Queues                Meaning

        /ABEFORE:       File       ALL          Queues  the file  only if
         date-time      control                 the access date is before
                                                the  specified  date  and
                                                time.

        /ACCOUNT:       Queue      ALL          Specifies  the account to
         "string"       operation               which the job  should  be
                                                charged.   If the account
                                                string    contains    any
                                                nonalphanumeric
                                                characters,   you    must
                                                enclose   the  string  in
                                                quotation marks.

        /AFTER:         Queue      ALL          Processes   the   request
         date-time      operation               after the specified  date
                                                and time.

        /ALLFILES:      Queue      OUTPUT       Accepts a request only if
         YES or NO      operation               all of the files  in  the
                                                request     exist.     By
                                                default, if  any  of  the
                                                files  do  not exist, the
                                                others will be  processed
                                                appropriately.       This
                                                switch specifies that  if
                                                any  file does not exist,
                                                no   files   should    be
                                                processed.   The value of
                                                YES or  NO  is  optional.
                                                If  you  use  YES, all of
                                                the specified files  must
                                                exist.   If  NO, existing
                                                files are  processed  and
                                                warning    messages   are
                                                printed for files that do
                                                not exist.

        /ASINCE:        File       ALL          Queues  only  the   files
         date-time      control                 that have  been  accessed
                                                since  the specified date
                                                and time.









                                   2-260
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /ASSISTANCE:    Queue      INPUT        Specifies whether the job
         YES or NO      operation               needs or  does  not  need
                                                operator    intervention.
                                                Arguments are  YES  or  1
                                                and  NO  or  0.   If  you
                                                specify  NO,   and   then
                                                request  assistance, your
                                                job     is     cancelled.
                                                Assistance is any request
                                                that  the  operator  must
                                                answer  before  the batch
                                                job     can     continue,
                                                including    PLEASE   and
                                                MOUNT requests.

        /BATLOG:arg     Queue      INPUT        Controls  the way the log
                        operation               file is output  to  disk.
                                                Arguments are:

                                                APPEND  appends  the  log
                                                file  to an existing file
                                                of the same  name.   This
                                                is the default function.

                                                SUPERSEDE  replaces   any
                                                file  of  the  same  name
                                                with the new log file.

                                                SPOOL spools the log file
                                                for   output.   Does  not
                                                store the  file  in  your
                                                directory.

        /BATOPT:        Queue      INPUT        Specifies a LOGIN  option
         option-name    operation               line to  read  for  LOGIN
                                                switches  to apply to the
                                                batch  job.   The  option
                                                name   that  you  specify
                                                with the  /BATOPT  switch
                                                must  match a line in the
                                                SWITCH.INI   file    that
                                                appears as:

                                                LOGIN:option-name/switches

        /BEFORE:        File       ALL          Queues  only   the  files
         date-time      control                 with    creation    dates
                                                before the specified date
                                                and time.




                                   2-261
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /BEGIN:n        File       OUTPUT (LPT) Starts the output  on the
                        control    INPUT        nth page for line printer
                                                requests  or  on  the nth
                                                line of the control  file
                                                for  batch requests.  The
                                                default   is   to   begin
                                                output on the first unit.

        /CARDS:n        Queue      INPUT        Uses  n  as  the  maximum
                        operation               number of cards that  can
                                                be  punched by your batch
                                                job (up to 10,000).

        /CHARAC:arg     Queue      OUTPUT       Specifies an output char-
                        operation               acteristic.  The argument
                                                can    be   up   to   six
                                                alphanumeric  characters.
                                                Characteristics arguments
                                                defined for  your  system
                                                are  listed  in  the file
                                                SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

        /CHECK          Queue      LIST         Prints on your terminal a
                        operation               list of the queue entries
                                                made by your job.

        /COPIES:n       File       OUTPUT       Repeats  the  output  the
                        control                 specified number of times
                                                (n must be less than 64).

        /CORE:n         Queue      INPUT        Uses  n (in decimal K) as
                        operation               the  maximum  amount   of
                                                memory  that your job can
                                                use.

        /CREATE         Queue      ALL          Makes  a new entry in the
                        operation               queue.   This  switch  is
                                                the  default  except when
                                                you  are  listing   queue
                                                entries.













                                   2-262
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /DEFERRED       Queue      OUTPUT       Causes    all    deferred
                        operation               output to be released  to
                                                the  system  queues.  You
                                                must  use  one   of   the
                                                following  switches  with
                                                /DEFERRED:

                                                /CREATE   completes   all
                                                released output requests.

                                                /KILL   eliminates    the
                                                released output requests.

                                                See the SET DEFER command
                                                description    for   more
                                                information and examples.

        /DELETE         File       ALL          Deletes  the  file  after
                        control                 processing it.  (This  is
                                                the        same        as
                                                /DISPOSE:DELETE.)

        /DENSITY:n      Queue      LIST         Specifies  the density of
                        operation               magnetic    tape     when
                                                writing   listing   files
                                                directly  on  tape.   The
                                                values  for  n are:  200,
                                                800,  1600,   6250,   and
                                                INSTALLATION (to take the
                                                installation default).

        /DEPENDENCY:n   Queue      INPUT        Specifies   the   initial
                        operation               value of  the  dependency
                                                count  in  decimal.  When
                                                used with  /MODIFY,  this
                                                switch     changes    the
                                                dependency    count    of
                                                another  job.   If n is a
                                                signed number (+  or  -),
                                                that  number  is added to
                                                or  subtracted  from  the
                                                dependent   job's  count.
                                                If  n  is  not  a  signed
                                                number,   the   dependent
                                                job's count is changed to
                                                n.







                                   2-263
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /DESTINATION:   Queue      ALL          Specifies   the  node  to
         node           operation               which all output is to be
                                                sent.   When used with an
                                                output request, the  file
                                                will   be   output  on  a
                                                device  attached  to  the
                                                specified   node.    When
                                                used   with   an    input
                                                request,    any    output
                                                generated by the  request
                                                (including  the log file,
                                                if it is to  be  printed)
                                                is  sent to the specified
                                                node.  The  node  can  be
                                                specified  by  either the
                                                node  name  or  the  node
                                                number.   If a request is
                                                made to a node that  does
                                                not  exist,  the  request
                                                will wait  in  the  queue
                                                indefinitely.

        /DISPOSE:       File       ALL          Controls  the disposition
         arg            control                 of the file after  it  is
                                                queued.  The arguments to
                                                this switch are:

                                                DELETE deletes  the  file
                                                from your directory after
                                                processing it.

                                                PRESERVE  preserves   the
                                                file after processing it.
                                                This   is   the   default
                                                function.

                                                RENAME renames  the  file
                                                from  your  area into the
                                                spooling  area,  deleting
                                                it    from    your   area
                                                immediately.












                                   2-264
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /DISTRIBUTION:  Queue      ALL          Specifies text  to  place
         "text"         operation               in    the    distribution
                                                field, on the banner page
                                                of output listings.   For
                                                batch input requests, the
                                                distribution   text    is
                                                printed   on  the  banner
                                                page  of  the  log   file
                                                listing.    You  can  use
                                                this  field  to   include
                                                mailing  information,  or
                                                the  location  where  the
                                                operator should leave the
                                                listing.  The text  field
                                                may    be    up   to   39
                                                alphanumeric  characters,
                                                including punctuation and
                                                spaces  if  the  text  is
                                                placed    in    quotation
                                                marks.

        /ERBINARY       File       ALL          Prints  an  error message
                        control                 if  a  binary   file   is
                                                included  in the request.
                                                This   is   the   default
                                                function.

        /ERNONE         Queue      ALL          Prints  an  error message
                        operation               if  no  files  match  the
                                                file specification.  This
                                                is the default function.

        /ERPROTECTION   Queue      ALL          Prints  an  error message
                        operation               if processing the request
                                                involves  a  violation of
                                                file protection.  This is
                                                the default function.

        /ERSUPERSEDE    Queue      LIST         Prints  an error  message
                        operation               if a listing file by  the
                                                same name already exists.
                                                Without this switch,  the
                                                old   listing   file   is
                                                automatically  superseded
                                                by the new listing file.

        /ESTIMATE:x     Queue      LIST         Specifies   an  estimated
                        operation               number of blocks for  the
                                                listing file.




                                   2-265
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /FAST           Queue      LIST         Prints the entries in the
                        operation               queue on your terminal in
                                                a  fast  format.  Same as
                                                /LIST:FAST.

        /FEET:n         Queue      INPUT        Uses  n  as  the  maximum
                        operation               number of feet  of  paper
                                                tape  that your batch job
                                                can punch.

        /FILE:arg       File       OUTPUT       Specifies  how  the  file
                        control                 format    is    to     be
                                                interpreted.          The
                                                following  arguments  can
                                                be used with this switch:

                                                ASCII interprets the file
                                                as ASCII text.

                                                COBOL interprets the file
                                                as COBOL SIXBIT text.

                                                ELEVEN   interprets   the
                                                file  as four 8-bit bytes
                                                in each 36-bit word.  The
                                                bits   are   arranged  as
                                                follows:

                                                Byte 1:  bits 10-17
                                                Byte 2:  bits 2-9
                                                Byte 3:  bits 28-35
                                                Byte 4:  bits 20-27

                                                FORTRAN  interprets   the
                                                file  as  a  FORTRAN data
                                                file.    This   is    the
                                                default  for  files  with
                                                the extension .DAT.

        /FONT:name      Queue      OUTPUT       Specifies  that  the file
                        operation               should     be     printed
                                                entirely   in   the  font
                                                designated in  name.   As
                                                fontnames    vary    from
                                                installation           to
                                                installation,   see  your
                                                system administrator  for
                                                a     list    of    valid
                                                fontnames.




                                   2-266
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /FORMS:arg      Queue      OUTPUT       Processes   the output on
                        operation               the  specified  type   of
                                                form.   The  argument  to
                                                the switch can be  up  to
                                                six          alphanumeric
                                                characters.     Available
                                                forms   are   listed   in
                                                SYS:FORMST.DAT.

        /GENERIC        Queue      OUTPUT       Sends output to any  unit
                        operation               of the type specified  or
                                                implied.   For  instance,
                                                if    no    device     is
                                                specified, output goes to
                                                the next  available  line
                                                printer.   This switch is
                                                the complement to /UNIT.

        /HEADER:        Queue      OUTPUT       Prints    block   headers
         YES or NO      operation               between  copies  of   the
                                                file.     This   is   the
                                                default function.

        /HELP:          Queue                   Prints   information   on
         arg            operation               your terminal  about  the
                                                QUEUE    command.    This
                                                switch does not queue any
                                                files.   This  switch can
                                                be used alone or with one
                                                of      the     following
                                                arguments:

                                                TEXT  prints  a   message
                                                about   the   format  and
                                                switches  of  the   QUEUE
                                                command.    This  is  the
                                                same  as  /HELP  with  no
                                                arguments.

                                                SWITCHES prints a list of
                                                all      the     switches
                                                available with the  QUEUE
                                                command.

        /JOBNAME:name   Queue      ALL          Specifies the name of the
                        operation               job.  The job name can be
                                                up  to  six  alphanumeric
                                                characters.





                                   2-267
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /KILL           Queue      ALL          Removes   the   specified
                        operation               entry from the  specified
                                                queue.   You must include
                                                the job name,  /SEQUENCE,
                                                or /REQUESTID to the left
                                                of the equal sign in  the
                                                command  line.   See  the
                                                examples.

        /LENGTH:n:m     File       ALL          Processes    only   files
                        control                 whose length is between n
                                                and m blocks.

        /LIMIT:n        Queue      OUTPUT       Limits  the output to the
                        operation               specified    number    of
                                                pages,  cards,  feet,  or
                                                minutes.

        /LIST:          Queue      LIST         Prints  information about
         arg            operation               the jobs  in  the  queue.
                                                If  you  use /LIST alone,
                                                it shows the jobs in  the
                                                queue.       This      is
                                                equivalent to  using  the
                                                QUEUE   command  with  no
                                                arguments  or   switches.
                                                /LIST  can be abbreviated
                                                to /L.   The  switch  can
                                                also   take  one  of  the
                                                following arguments:

                                                ALL shows all data  about
                                                each queue request.

                                                FAST shows a fast list of
                                                the queue requests.

                                                JOBS shows a list of  the
                                                jobs in the queue.  (This
                                                is the same as /LIST with
                                                no arguments.)

                                                SUMMARY  shows  only  the
                                                summary line of the queue
                                                display.

        /LOWERCASE      Queue      OUTPUT (LPT) Forces  the  output to be
                        operation               printed on a line printer
                                                with lowercase ability.




                                   2-268
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /MESSAGE:       Queue      ALL          Specifies  the amount  of
         arg            operation               information to be printed
                                                when an error occurs from
                                                the  request.   You   can
                                                specify  one  or  more of
                                                the following arguments:

                                                ADDRESS    prints     the
                                                location  in memory where
                                                the error occurred.

                                                CONTINUATION       prints
                                                information   about   the
                                                error.

                                                FIRST prints the one-line
                                                error message.

                                                PREFIX      prints      a
                                                six-character       error
                                                prefix.

        /METERS:n       Queue      INPUT        Uses  n  as  the  maximum
                        operation               number of meters of paper
                                                tape  that can be punched
                                                by the batch job.

        /MODIFY         Queue      ALL          Alters   the    specified
                        operation               parameter     in      the
                                                specified    job.    This
                                                switch requires that  you
                                                have access rights to the
                                                job.   You  must  include
                                                the job name, /REQUESTID,
                                                or /SEQUENCE, to the left
                                                of  the equal sign in the
                                                command line.   (See  the
                                                examples.)   This  switch
                                                can be used to  modify  a
                                                previously      submitted
                                                request as  long  as  the
                                                request   has   not  been
                                                started.

        /NEW:           File       ALL          Accepts the request  even
         YES or NO      control                 if the file does not  yet
                                                exist.

        /NOHEADER       Queue      OUTPUT       Suppresses    the   block
                        operation               headers at the  beginning
                                                of the file.


                                   2-269
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /NONEW          File       ALL          Does   not   accept  file
                        control                 specifications  of  files
                                                that  do not exist.  This
                                                is the default function.

        /NONOTIFY       Queue      ALL          Does not notify you  when
                        operation               when  your   request   is
                                                finished.   This  is  the
                                                default  function.    See
                                                /NOTIFY.

        /NONULL         Queue      OUTPUT       Prints a fatal message on
                        operation               a null request.  This  is
                                                the default function.

        /NOOPTION       Queue      ALL          Does   not   use      the
                        operation               parameters  specified  in
                                                the SWITCH.INI file.

        /NOPHYSICAL     File       ALL          Recognized logical  names
                        control                 for   devices   in    the
                                                command  string.  This is
                                                the default function.

        /NORESTART      Queue      INPUT        Prevents  your  job  from
                        operation               being restarted  when  it
                                                was stopped because of an
                                                error.

        /NOSTRS         File       OUTPUT       When searching structures
                        control                 for the  specified  file,
                                                uses  only the first file
                                                found.    This   is   the
                                                default function.

        /NOTES:"text"   Queue      OUTPUT       Includes  the text in the
                        operation               header units  of  output.
                                                you     should    include
                                                quotation  marks  if  the
                                                text  contains  spaces or
                                                punctuation.












                                   2-270
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /NOTIFY:arg     Queue      ALL          Tells the system  whether
                        operation               to send a message to your
                                                terminal     when    your
                                                request is completed.  By
                                                default,   you   are  not
                                                notified when  a  request
                                                is   finished.    To   be
                                                notified,   use   /NOTIFY
                                                with no argument, or with
                                                YES or 1 as an  argument.
                                                To suppress notification,
                                                use            /NOTIFY:0,
                                                /NOTIFY:NO, or /NONOTIFY.
                                                In special cases, such as
                                                the printing of log files
                                                and   the    output    of
                                                deferred   requests,  you
                                                will never be notified.

        /NULL:          Queue      OUTPUT       Does  not  print  a fatal
         YES or NO      operation               error  message   if   the
                                                files  you  specified  do
                                                not exist.   /NULL:NO  is
                                                the same as /NONULL.

        /OKBINARY       File       ALL          Accepts    files    whose
                        control                 extensions indicate  that
                                                they    include    binary
                                                information.     Normally
                                                files   with   extensions
                                                .SAV, .SHR,  .LOW,  .REL,
                                                .EXE and .HGH will not be
                                                accepted.

        /OKNONE         Queue      ALL          Does    not   produce   a
                        operation               warning message  if  none
                                                of  the  specified  files
                                                exist.

        /OKPROTECTION   Queue      ALL          Does  not   generate   an
                        operation               error message if  a  file
                                                protection     code    is
                                                violated.

        /OKSUPERSEDE    Queue      LIST         Does  not   generate   an
                        operation               error if the listing file
                                                already  exists.  This is
                                                the default function.





                                   2-271
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /OPTION:option  Queue      ALL          Uses   the   line  QUEUE:
                        operation               option in the  SWITCH.INI
                                                file.   SWITCH.INI  files
                                                are discussed in Appendix
                                                B.

        /OUTPUT:arg     Queue      INPUT        Determines whether or not
                        operation               the  log  file  will   be
                                                printed.   The  arguments
                                                are   LOG,   NOLOG,   and
                                                ERROR.

                                                LOG prints the log file.

                                                NOLOG suppresses printing
                                                of the log file.

                                                ERROR prints the log file
                                                only if an error occurs.

        /PAGES:n        Queue      INPUT        Uses  n  as  the  maximum
                        operation               number of pages of output
                                                that your job can print.

        /PARITY:        Queue      LIST         Uses     the    specified
         ODD or EVEN    operation               parity, when writing  the
                                                listing   file   directly
                                                onto magnetic tape.   The
                                                default is ODD.

        /PATH:[dir]     Queue      INPUT        Specifies  the  directory
                        operation               to  be  accessed  by  the
                                                job.   The  directory can
                                                be UFD or an SFD.

        /PHYSICAL       File       ALL          Does     not    recognize
                        control                 logical names for devices
                                                in the command line.















                                   2-272
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /PLOT:arg       File       OUTPUT (PLT) Plots  the  file  in  the
                        control                 specified mode.   If  you
                                                omit  /PLOT,  the file is
                                                plotted according to  the
                                                data  mode  specified  in
                                                the file.   The  argument
                                                can  be  any  one  of the
                                                following:

                                                ASCII plots the  file  in
                                                ASCII mode.

                                                BINARY plots the file  in
                                                binary mode.

                                                IMAGE plots the  file  in
                                                image mode.

        /PRESERVE       File       ALL          Saves   the   file  after
                        control                 processing it.  (This  is
                                                the        same        as
                                                /DISPOSE:PRESERVE).  This
                                                is the default function.

        /PRINT:arg      File       OUTPUT (LPT) Prints   the  file  using
                        control                 the argument to determine
                                                the  printing  mode.  The
                                                default printing mode  is
                                                ASCII.   The argument can
                                                be   any   one   of   the
                                                following:

                                                ARROW    converts     all
                                                control characters except
                                                011-015  and  020-024  to
                                                up-arrow format.

                                                ASCII  prints  the   file
                                                with no changes.  This is
                                                the default.













                                   2-273
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


                                                GRAPHICS causes the  LN01
                                                laser      printer     to
                                                recognize          escape
                                                sequences.          These
                                                embedded sequences  allow
                                                font   changes  within  a
                                                file.  Unless this switch
                                                is    specified,   escape
                                                sequences are ignored and
                                                printed  as  part  of the
                                                file.  (See Section  1.16
                                                for  a discussion of LN01
                                                escape sequences.)

                                                OCTAL  prints  the  octal
                                                values   instead  of  the
                                                characters in the file.

                                                SUPPRESS   converts   all
                                                control   characters   to
                                                line  feeds  except   for
                                                ASCII  code characters CR
                                                and DC3.

        /PRIORITY:n     Queue      ALL          Assigns  the    specified
                        operation               priority (n is 1  to  63)
                                                to the request.  A larger
                                                number    has     greater
                                                priority.

        /PROCESSING:    Queue      INPUT        Specifies the  node  that
         node           operation               will  process  the   job.
                                                You must specify the node
                                                by the node name or  node
                                                number.   Batch  jobs can
                                                be submitted only to  IBM
                                                host  nodes.   Jobs  that
                                                are  submitted  to  nodes
                                                other than IBM host nodes
                                                will wait  in  the  queue
                                                indefinitely.












                                   2-274
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /PROTECTION:    Queue      LIST         Specifies   a  protection
         nnn            operation               code  for   the   listing
                                                file.

                                   OUTPUT       Specifies  a   protection
                                   INPUT        for  the  queue  request.
                                                Queue     requests    are
                                                protected in the same way
                                                that files are protected.
                                                See Section 1.9.4.

        /PUNCH:arg      File       OUTPUT (CDP) Punches  the files in the
                        control                 specified mode.   If  you
                                                omit   this  switch,  the
                                                files     are     punched
                                                according   to  the  data
                                                mode  specified  in   the
                                                file.     The   following
                                                arguments  can  be   used
                                                with this switch:

                                                026 punches the files  in
                                                026 Hollerith code.

                                                ASCII punches  the  files
                                                in ASCII card code.

                                                BCD punches the files  in
                                                026 Hollerith code.

                                                BINARY punches the  files
                                                in   checksummed   binary
                                                card code.

                                                IMAGE punches  the  files
                                                in image card format.

        /QUEUE:queue    Queue      OUTPUT       Specifies  the remote VAX
                        operation               queue  to   receive   the
                                                output from the request.

        /READER         Queue      INPUT        Causes   a  disk-resident
                        operation               card job to be read as if
                                                it  were on punched cards
                                                and  had  been  submitted
                                                through the card reader.

        /REMOTE         Queue      ALL          Prints on your terminal a
                        operation               list  of  remote  queues.
                                                Must    be    used   with
                                                /DESTINATION.


                                   2-275
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /REPORT:code    File       OUTPUT (LPT) Prints  COBOL  reports by
                        control                 printing  every  line  in
                                                the  file  that  has  the
                                                specified  code  at   the
                                                beginning of the line.

        /REQUESTID:n    Queue      ALL          Specifies   the   request
                        operation               identification number  of
                                                a  job you wish to modify
                                                (/MODIFY)  or   terminate
                                                (/KILL).    The   request
                                                identification number  is
                                                assigned  by  the  system
                                                when   you   queue    the
                                                request.    This   switch
                                                must be used to the  left
                                                of  the equal sign in the
                                                command line.   (See  the
                                                examples.)

        /RESTARTABLE:   Queue      INPUT        Specifies whether the job
         YES or NO      operation               should be restarted after
                                                the  system  has  crashed
                                                and    been     restored.
                                                Arguments are:  YES or 1,
                                                and NO or 0.  The default
                                                is NO.

        /RUN:file       Queue      ALL          Executes   the  specified
                        operation               file after the request is
                                                queued.

        /RUNCORE:nx     Queue      ALL          Executes   the    program
                        operation               specified in /RUN  in  nK
                                                of core after the request
                                                is accepted.   The  value
                                                can  also be expressed in
                                                terms of nP (pages).

        /RUNOFFSET:n    Queue      ALL          Executes     the     file
                        operation               specified  in  /RUN  with
                                                offset    n   after   the
                                                request is queued.

        /SEQUENCE:n     Queue      ALL          Specifies    the sequence
                        operation               number of a request to be
                                                modified    or   deleted.
                                                This switch must be  used
                                                to  the left of the equal
                                                sign in the command line.



                                   2-276
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /SINCE:         File       ALL          Queues  only   the  files
         date-time      control                 with creation dates after
                                                the  specified  date  and
                                                time.

        /SITGO          Queue      INPUT        Specifies  that the batch
                        operation               job be processed  by  the
                                                SITGO processor.

        /SPACING:arg    File       OUTPUT (LPT) Prints the files with the
                        control                 specified         spacing
                                                parameters.   The default
                                                function is  to  make  no
                                                spacing  changes  to  the
                                                file, this is the same as
                                                /SPACING:SINGLE.  You can
                                                use     the     following
                                                arguments    with    this
                                                switch:

                                                SINGLE  prints  the  file
                                                with no spacing changes.

                                                DOUBLE  prints  a   blank
                                                line  between  every line
                                                of the file.

                                                TRIPLE  prints two  blank
                                                lines  between every line
                                                of the file.

        /STREAM:n       Queue      LIST (INP)   Prints a list of the jobs
                        operation               that   are   running   or
                                                destined  to  run  in the
                                                specified batch stream.

        /STRS:          File       OUTPUT       Searches  for the file on
         YES or NO      control                 all  structures  in   the
                                                search   list  and  takes
                                                every  occurrence.    The
                                                default  is  to take just
                                                the first  occurrence  of
                                                the file.

        /TAG:xxx        File       INPUT        Starts  at the  statement
                        control                 labeled   xxx   in    the
                                                control file.  Equivalent
                                                to  GOTO   xxx   at   the
                                                beginning  of the control
                                                file.



                                   2-277
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /TAPE:arg       File       OUTPUT (PTP) Punches paper tape in the
                        control                 specified code.   If  you
                                                do  not  use this switch,
                                                the   tape   is   punched
                                                according   to  the  data
                                                mode  specified  in   the
                                                file.   You  can  use any
                                                one  of   the   following
                                                arguments    with    this
                                                switch:

                                                ASCII punches the tape in
                                                ASCII code.

                                                BINARY punches  the  tape
                                                in binary code.

                                                IBINARY punches the  tape
                                                in image binary code.

                                                IMAGE punches the tape in
                                                image mode.

        /TIME:          Queue      INPUT        Specifies  the  CPU  time
         hh:mm:ss       operation               limit for the  job.   The
                                                form  /TIME:n can be used
                                                to specify a limit  of  n
                                                seconds.

        /TMPFIL:        Queue      ALL          Creates  a temporary file
         file:"text"    operation               TMP:file.TMP  and  enters
                                                the text into the file.

        /TPLOT:n        Queue      INPUT        Uses  n  minutes  as  the
                        operation               maximum     amount     of
                                                plotting time allowed for
                                                your job.

        /UNIQUE:        Queue      INPUT        Specifies  whether   more
         YES or NO      operation               than one  batch  job  can
                                                run  from your PPN at one
                                                time.  If  the  value  is
                                                YES  (or 1), only one job
                                                will run at a time.   Any
                                                other   batch  jobs  will
                                                wait until  the  previous
                                                job  is finished.  If the
                                                value is NO (or  0),  any
                                                number  of batch jobs can
                                                run at the same time.



                                   2-278
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        /UNIT:n         Queue      OUTPUT       Specifies the unit number
                        operation               or  SIXBIT  name  of  the
                                                device  that you want the
                                                output sent to.

        /UPPERCASE      Queue      OUTPUT (LPT) Forces  the  output to be
                        operation               printed       on       an
                                                uppercase-only       line
                                                printer.  This switch  is
                                                the     complement     to
                                                /LOWERCASE.

        /USERNAME:      Queue      ALL          Specifies the  user  name
         "name"         operation               field for the banner page
                                                of  output listings.  For
                                                batch input requests, the
                                                user  name  is printed on
                                                the banner page  for  the
                                                log  file  listing.  This
                                                field can contain  up  to
                                                39           alphanumeric
                                                characters,    and    may
                                                include  punctuation  and
                                                spaces  if  the  name  is
                                                placed    in    quotation
                                                marks.  To avoid conflict
                                                with    the    MOUNT/USER
                                                switch,  do  not  shorten
                                                this  switch to less than
                                                /USERN.

        /VERSION:n      Queue      LIST         Specifies    a    version
                        operation               number    in     standard
                                                DECsystem-10  format  for
                                                listing files.

   Associated Messages

        When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system  prints  a
        message on the user's terminal.  The message is in the form:

        [device JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]

        Where:    device is the name of one of  the  output  devices,  or
                  BATCH.

                  name is the name of the job in the queue.  This can  be
                  specified  by  the user.  Otherwise, it defaults to the
                  name of the first file in the request.  In the case  of
                  batch requests, the name of the log file is used as the
                  job name.


                                   2-279
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


                  nnn  is  the  number  that   represents   the   request
                  identification of the job in the queue.

                  xxx is the maximum number of pages that  the  job  will
                  use.

        When the entry has been made to the batch  queue,  the  LIMIT  is
        changed  to RUN TIME.  In this case, the time limit of the job is
        displayed.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal in monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN  if  you  desire  only  a  list  of  queue
        entries.

   Examples

        1.  Enter file FILEA.LST and FILEB.LST in the line printer  queue
            under the job name of FILEA.

            .QUEUE FILEA,FILEB<RET>
            [PRINTER JOB FILEA QUEUED, REQUEST #4, LIMIT 20]

            .

        2.  Enter file TEST.CTL in the batch input queue under  job  name
            TEST and log file with name TEST.LOG.

            .QUEUE INP:=TEST<RET>
            [BATCH JOB TEST QUEUED, REQUEST #33, LIMIT 00:05:00]

            .

        3.  Submit the control file TEST.CTL to the batch input queue for
            processing after 5:00 P.M.:

            .QUEUE INP:  =TEST /AFTER:17:00
            [BATCH JOB TEST QUEUED, REQUEST  231, LIMIT 0:05:00]

        4.  Modify the processing time of job TEST, identifying  the  job
            by its request number:

            .QUEUE INP:  /REQUESTID:231= /AFTER:16:30 /MODIFY
            [1 JOB MODIFIED]





                                   2-280
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                PUSH Command


        5.  Cancel the batch job TEST:

            .QUEUE INP:  TEST= /KILL
            [1 JOB CANCELED]

            .

        6.  Display a list of all the entries in all the queues:
            .QUEUE<RET>

            Event Queue:
            Type       Req#       Expiration            Description
            --------  ------- ------------------  ----------------------
            *BILCLS      9   dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm:ss  Prime time rates end
            USGFIL       6   dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm:ss  Usage file closure
            OPRFIL       7   dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm:ss  ORION log file closure
            BILCLS       8   dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm:ss  Discount rates end
            There are 4 events in the queue (1 in progress)

            Batch Queue:
            Job Name   Req#   Run Time    Core             User
            --------  -----   --------   -----   ------------------------
            MCOFIL      12  00:05:00     512   SPIDER [30,5653]
            /After: dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm
            SJH         10  00:04:00     512   SPIDER [30,5653]
            /After: dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm
            CHKUSR      22  00:05:00     512   LEO    [10,6056]
            /After: dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm
            MAIL        24  00:15:00     512   NED    [30,5674]
            /After: dd-mmm-yy  hh:mm
            There are 4 jobs in the queue (none in progress);
            00:29:00 runtime

            Printer Queue:
            Job Name   Req#   Limit             User
            --------  -----  -------  -----------------------
            * LLINKS   588    1798    DAVENPORT [10,6026]   On Unit:0
            /Dest:JUNIPR
            Started at 16:31:09
            RSX20F     221     924    M.J.MAROTTA [27,5434]  /Lower
            There is 2 jobs in the queue (1 in progress); 2722 pages












                                   2-281
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                 R Command


                                 R Command



   Function

        The R command loads a core image from the  system  device  (SYS:)
        and starts it at the location specified within the file (.JBSA in
        the Job Data Area.  See the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls  Manual.)  This
        command  is  the same as RUN SYS:file.ext.  The R command is used
        to run a system program that does not have  an  operating  system
        command to run it.

        This command clears all user core.  However, programs should  not
        count  on  this action and should explicitly clear those areas of
        core that are expected to contain zeros (that is, programs should
        be   self-initializing).   This  action  allows  programs  to  be
        restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence without another R command.

   Format

        R file.EXE[directory] core/switch

        Where:    file.EXE is the file name of a file stored on the  SYS:
                  file structure.

                                           NOTE

                      Old-style SAVE files (.SAV, .HGH, .SHR) can  be
                      run  by the R command.  However, .EXE files are
                      recommended over SAVE files.

                  [directory]  is  a  directory  specification.    If   a
                  directory  specification  is  present  in  the  command
                  string,  it  overrides  the   assumed   SYS:    device.
                  Directory paths are described in Section 1.14.

                  core is the amount of core needed to run  the  program.
                  If  you do not specify core, the default is the minimum
                  amount of core needed to load the program into memory.

                  If  you  do  not  specify  an  argument,  the   program
                  currently in memory is run.










                                   2-282
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                 R Command


                  /switch is one of the following options:

                  /START:n,,addr   Specifies the octal section number (n)
                                   and  address  (addr) at which the core
                                   image starts.  Valid  section  numbers
                                   are 0-37, octal.

                  /USE:n           Specifies the octal section number (n)
                                   in which the core image runs.

   Characteristics

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Run the SYS:SETSRC.EXE program

        .R SETSRC<RET>

        SETSRC prompt.

        *^C

        Use CTRL/C to exit.

        .


























                                   2-283
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              REASSIGN Command


                             REASSIGN Command



   Function

        The REASSIGN command passes a device assignment from one  job  to
        another  job.   Both  restricted  and unrestricted devices can be
        reassigned.  When you specify a  DECtape  in  this  command,  the
        system clears the copy of the directory currently in memory.  The
        next time you refer to the directory, a new  copy  is  read  from
        tape  into  memory.   However,  the  logical  name  that has been
        assigned is not reassigned unless you reassign the device to your
        own job.

   Format

        REASSIGN dev:job

        Where:    dev:  is the physical or logical name of the device  to
                  be reassigned.  This argument is required.  See Section
                  1.9.1 for a description of device names.

                  job is the number of the job to which the device is  to
                  be  reassigned.   If no job is specified, the device is
                  reassigned to your job.  This is useful when  you  want
                  to  force  the next DECtape directory reference to come
                  from the tape instead of core.

        You can reassign a device using the logical name only if your job
        and the job to which the device is to be reassigned have the same
        project-programmer  number,  or  you  have  operator   privileges
        (logged in under [1,2] or logged in as OPR).

   Associated Messages

        If the job number you specify is out of the range  of  legal  job
        numbers, the monitor prints:

        ?NOT A JOB

        If no arguments are included in the REASSIGN command, the monitor
        prints:

        ?NOT ENOUGH ARGS

        If the device specified is not assigned to your job, the  monitor
        prints:

        ?CAN'T BE REASSIGNED



                                   2-284
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              REASSIGN Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Will not function during device I/O.

   Restrictions

        Your job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned.

        Disk and spooled devices cannot be reassigned.

   Example

        Assign a device to a job.

        .ASSIGN CDR:<RET>
        CDR261 ASSIGNED

        A SYSTAT of your PPN shows you are running two jobs.

        .SYS [,]<RET>

        13      31      SYSTAT  19+SPY  RN      12$
        19      DET     SETSRC  30+4    ^C SW
        $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE  JOB     WHY     LOGICAL
        CDR261  13      AS

        The card reader is assigned to job 13.

        Reassign the device to job 19.

        .REASSIGN CDR:19<RET>

        SYSTAT shows that the reassignment was successful.

        .SYS [,]<RET>

        13      31      SYSTAT  24+SPY  RN      12$
        19      DET     SETSRC  30+4    ^C SW   1
        $ MEANS EXECUTE ONLY

        BUSY DEVICES:
        DEVICE  JOB     WHY     LOGICAL
        CDR261  19      AS

        .



                                   2-285
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              REATTACH Command


                             REATTACH Command



   Function

        The REATTACH command transfers your  job  from  one  terminal  to
        another.   Unlike the ATTACH command, REATTACH does not require a
        password or that the terminal be of  the  same  type  that  LOGIN
        recognizes to allow access to the system.

   Formats

        REATTACH
        REATTACH terminal-name/switch
        REATTACH line-number/switch

        Where:    terminal-name is a device name of the form TTYnnn[:].

                  line-number is the nnn portion of the terminal-name.

                  /switch is optional.  The only switch for REATTACH is:

                  /HELP:keyword  Prints the HELP  file.   Valid  keywords
                                 are  ARGUMENTS, SWITCHES, and TEXT.  The
                                 ARGUMENTS keyword  displays  a  list  of
                                 valid   switches   and  arguments.   The
                                 SWITCHES keyword displays only a list of
                                 switches  without  detailed information.
                                 The TEXT keyword displays the full  HELP
                                 text.   TEXT  is  the  default  keyword.
                                 /HELP may be abbreviated to /H.

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy the core image of either job.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Restrictions

        Remote users cannot attach to jobs with a project number of 1.

        Batch programs cannot use this command.









                                   2-286
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              REATTACH Command


   Example

        Enter the command REATTACH.

        .REATTACH TTY56<RET> .

        If you do not enter the terminal-name or line-number, the  system
        will prompt you.













































                                   2-287
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              REENTER Command


                              REENTER Command



   Function

        The REENTER command restarts a  program  at  an  alternate  entry
        point.   You  must  write  the  alternate  entry  point into your
        program.   The  REENTER   command   is   used   for   a   partial
        reinitialization of the program.

        The REENTER command copies the saved program counter  (PC)  value
        into  .JBOPC  and  starts the program at an alternate entry point
        specified in .JBREN (you must set it  or  have  it  set  in  your
        program).   All  Job  Data  Area  locations  are described in the
        TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.

        If the job was executing a monitor call when it  was  interrupted
        (that  is,  at  monitor  level but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP
        mode), the monitor continues the job until the  monitor  call  is
        completed  and  then  traps to the REENTER address in .JBREN.  If
        the job is in TTY input wait or  SLEEP  mode,  the  trap  to  the
        REENTER  address  occurs  immediately  and  .JBOPC  contains  the
        address of the monitor call.

        If the job  is  at  user  level,  the  trap  occurs  immediately.
        Therefore,  it  is  always  possible  to continue the interrupted
        program after trapping by executing a JRSTF @.JBOPC.

   Format

        REENTER

   Associated Commands

        The START command is used  for  complete  reinitialization  of  a
        program.

        The CONTINUE command is  used  when  you  want  to  continue  the
        program without reinitialization.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.









                                   2-288
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              REENTER Command


   Example

        Run the SYSTAT program for job 35:

        .SYS 35<RET>

        35   20,641   TTY45   SOS   12+24     T1  7#
        #MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG

        Reenter the program:

        .REENTER<RET>

        35   20,641   TTY45   SOS   12+24     T1  0  2#
        TOTAL KCS USED = 2 AVERAGE KCS=2
        #MEANS NON-SYSTEM HI-SEG

        .



































                                   2-289
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               RENAME Command


                              RENAME Command



   Function

        The RENAME command changes one or more  attributes  of  the  file
        specification of files on disk or DECtape.  See Section 1.9 for a
        description of file specifications.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        RENAME file-spec=file-spec,file-spec=file-spec,...

        Where:    the new file-spec is placed first, to the left  of  the
                  equal sign (=).

                  the old file-spec is placed at the right of  the  equal
                  sign (=).

        Device and file-structure names cannot be different for  old  and
        new  file-specs.   If  you  specify  the  device  name in the new
        file-spec, that device is the default for the old file-spec.  You
        can  use  RENAME  to  change  the  protection  code  of a file by
        specifying the protection codes in the file-specs.

        The directory name remains effective throughout the command line,
        but  you  can  specify  a  different directory name to change the
        directory of a file.  RENAME accepts wildcard constructions.

        If the new file name is specified without an extension, the  file
        will not have an extension.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Requires LOGIN.










                                   2-290
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               RENAME Command


   Example

        Show the file named PROG.

        .DIR PROG.*<RET>

        PROG    EXE     68      <055>   dd-mmm-yy     DSKC:[27,5434]

        Rename PROG to be PRGRM.

        .RENAME PRGRM.EXE=PROG.EXE<RET>
        FILES RENAMED:
        DSKC:PROG.EXE

        Show the file named PRGRM.

        .DIR PRGRM.*<RET>

        PRGRM   EXE     68      <055>   dd-mmm-yy     DSKC:[27,5434]

        .
































                                   2-291
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             RESOURCES Command


                             RESOURCES Command



   Function

        The RESOURCES command prints the names of all  available  devices
        (except terminals and pseudo-terminals), all file structures, all
        physical units not in file structures, and all running CPUs.

   Format

        RESOURCES

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Example

        .RESOURCES<RET>

        BLKX,RENG,DSKA,BLKB,DSKP,AP10,DSKC,BLKK,DSKR,DSKZ,LOKI,DSKT,
        SLAT,SIXT,DSKB,BLKY,RPA2,RPA4,RPB3,RPB6,RPP2,RPP3,RPG1,LPT261,
        DTA0,1,2,3,MTA0,1,2,4,5,MTE1,MTF0,1,2,MTC0,MTD0,1,CPU0,1

        .


























                                   2-292
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               REWIND Command


                              REWIND Command



   Function

        The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape or a DECtape.

   Format

        REWIND dev:

        Where:    dev:  is a magnetic tape (MTxn) or a DECtape (DTxn).

                  See Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Runs the PIP program.

   Examples

        1.  Rewind DECtape unit 4:

            .REWIND DTA4:<RET>

            .

        2.  Rewind magnetic tape unit 1:

            .REWIND MTA1:<RET>

            .
















                                   2-293
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                RUN Command


                                RUN Command



   Function

        The RUN command starts execution of a program.  It loads  a  core
        image from a retrievable storage device and starts the program at
        the location specified within the file (.JBSA).

        RUN looks for programs stored in files with the  extension  .EXE.
        Use SAVE or SSAVE to create the executable file.

        The RUN command clears all your core.  However,  programs  should
        not  count on this action and should explicitly clear those areas
        of core that are expected to contain zeros (that is, the programs
        should   be  self-initializing).   This  allows  programs  to  be
        restarted by a CTRL/C, START sequence  without  having  to  issue
        another RUN command.

   Format

        RUN dev:file.EXE[directory] core/switch

        Where:    dev: is the logical or  physical  name  of  the  device
                  containing  the core image.  The default device name is
                  DSK:.

                  file.EXE is the name of  the  file  that  contains  the
                  program you want to run.

                                           NOTE

                      Old-style SAVE files (.SAV, .HGH., .SHR) can be
                      run  with  the  RUN command.  However, the .EXE
                      format is recommended over the .SAV format.

                  [directory] is the directory name,  which  is  required
                  only  if  the core image file is located in a disk area
                  other than yours.   If  a  directory  specification  is
                  issued  in  the  command string and the device is SYS:,
                  the specified directory overrides  the  assumed  device
                  (SYS:).

                  core is the amount of core memory  if  this  amount  is
                  different  from  either the minimum core needed to load
                  the program, or the core argument of the  SAVE  command
                  that saved the file.





                                   2-294
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                RUN Command


                  If core is greater than the minimum  low  segment  size
                  and  is  less  than the sum of the high segment and the
                  minimum low segment size, then the core  assignment  is
                  the low segment size.

                  If core is greater than the  sum  of  the  minimum  low
                  segment  and  the  high  segment  size,  then  the core
                  assignment is  the  size  of  both  the  low  and  high
                  segments.

                  Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024  words
                  or 512 words (a page) by following the number with K or
                  P, respectively.  For example, 2P represents 2 pages or
                  1024 words.  If K or P is not specified, K (1024 words)
                  is assumed.

                  /switch is one of the following options:

                  /START:n,,addr  Specifies the octal section number  (n)
                                  and  address  (addr)  at which the core
                                  image starts.   Valid  section  numbers
                                  are 0-37, octal.

                  /USE:n          Specifies the octal section number  (n)
                                  in which a core image executes.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

   Example

        Type a test program.

        .TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
              TYPE 69
         69   FORMAT ('TESTING EXECUTION')
              END

        Load the program.

        .LOAD PROG<RET>
        LINK:  LOADING
        [LNKCXT PROG EXECUTION]

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME:  0.02  ELAPSED TIME:  0.12
        EXIT





                                   2-295
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                RUN Command


        Save the program, creating an executable file.

        .SAVE<RET>
        PROG SAVED

        Run the program.

        .RUN PROG<RET>

        TESTING EXECUTION

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME:  0.02  ELAPSED TIME:  0.07
        EXIT

        .





































                                   2-296
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                SAVE Command


                               SAVE Command

   Function

        The SAVE and SSAVE commands create executable  image  files  from
        programs   that   are   loaded  in  core  memory.   SAVE  creates
        non-sharable  files  with  the  extension  .EXE.   SSAVE  creates
        sharable files with the extension .EXE.

        After you use SAVE or SSAVE to create an .EXE file, you  can  run
        the program with the RUN command.

   Format

        SAVE dev:file.EXE[directory] core/switch

        Where:    dev:  is the device on which the core image file is  to
                  be  written.   The  default  device  name is DSK:.  The
                  colon following the device name is required if a device
                  is specified.

                  file is the name to be assigned to the core image file.
                  The default file name is your job's current name as set
                  by your last R, RUN, or GET command; the  last  command
                  that  ran  a program (for example, DIRECT); or the last
                  SETNAM monitor call.

                  .EXE is the default file extension.  This  argument  is
                  optional.

                  [directory] is the location on the disk area where  the
                  core image file is to be written.

                  core is the amount of core in which the program  is  to
                  be  run.   This  value is stored in JOBDAT as the job's
                  core area, (.JBCOR) and is used by subsequent  RUN  and
                  GET commands.  This argument is optional.

                  You can specify core arguments in units of  1024  words
                  or 512 words (a page) by following the number with K or
                  P respectively.  For example, 2P represents 2 pages  or
                  1024  words.   If  you  do  not specify K or P, K (1024
                  words) is assumed.

                  If core is omitted, only the number of blocks  required
                  by the core image area (as explained in the RUN command
                  description) is assumed.






                                   2-297
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                SAVE Command


                  /switch is the following option:

                  /START:n,,addr  Allows  you  to  save  a  multi-section
                                  program  with  a  starting  address  in
                                  section n, address addr.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not operate while I/O is in progress.

        Requires memory.

        Can save multiple high segments.  (SSAVE cannot.)

   Example

        Load a program.

        .LOAD PROG<RET>
        FORTRAN:  PROG
        MAIN.
        LINK:  LOADING
        EXIT

        Save the file with SAVE.

        .SAVE PROG<RET>
        PROG SAVED

        Use DIRECTORY to see the new .EXE file.

        .DIR PROG<RET>

        PROG        FOR     1 <055>    dd-mmm-yy    DSKC:  [27,5434]
        PROG        REL     1 <055>    dd-mmm-yy
        PROG        EXE    68 <055>    dd-mmm-yy
          TOTAL OF 131 BLOCKS IN 5 FILES ON DSKC: [27,5434]

        Run the program.

        .RUN PROG<RET>

        THIS IS PROGRAM OUTPUT

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME: 0.02  ELAPSED TIME: 0.07
        EXIT

        .


                                   2-298
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SCHED Command


                               SCHED Command



   Function

        The SCHED command prints the schedule bits set by  the  operator.
        You  can  obtain  this information before you log in to determine
        the use of the system (for example, regular timesharing or  batch
        jobs only).  The schedule bits are as follows:

             Bits                     Meaning

             0000    Regular timesharing.

             0001    No further LOGINS allowed except from CTY.

             0002    No further LOGINS from  remote  terminals,
                     and no answering of data sets.

             0004    Batch jobs only.

             0010    No remote terminals.

             0100    Device mounts can be done without operator
                     intervention.

             0200    Unspooling allowed.

             0400    No operator coverage.

             1000    No automatic downline loading of nodes.

   Format

        SCHED

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require that you be logged in.











                                   2-299
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SCHED Command


   Examples

        1.  Regular timesharing.

            .SCHED<RET>
            000000

            .

        2.  No operator coverage.

            .SCHED<RET>
            000400

            .

        3.  No LOGINs allowed from local or  remote  terminals  and  data
            sets are not answered.

            .SCHED<RET>
            000002

            .

        4.  Regular timesharing, but no operator coverage.  Device mounts
            can be accomplished without operator intervention.

            .SCHED<RET>
            000500

            .






















                                   2-300
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                SEND Command


                               SEND Command



   Function

        The SEND command provides one-way interterminal communication.  A
        single  line  of  information  is transmitted from the initiating
        terminal to the terminal specified in the  SEND  command  string.
        The  recipient  of  the SEND receives the terminal line number of
        the sender as well as the message.

        A busy test is made on a single-destination  message  before  the
        message  is sent, unless the sender or receiver of the message is
        OPR or a job logged in as [1,2].  The receiver of the message  is
        considered  busy if the terminal is not at monitor command level.
        If the receiving  terminal  is  busy,  the  sender  receives  the
        message  BUSY  and  the  information  is  not sent.  However, the
        receiving terminal always receives the message if it has the  TTY
        NO GAG bit set (see the SET TTY NO GAG command).

        If the receiving  terminal  is  hardwired  and  turned  off,  the
        information appears to have been sent because the software cannot
        detect an OFF condition on  hardwired  terminals.   Terminals  in
        IMAGE and Packed Image Mode (PIM) mode do not receive messages.

   Formats

        SEND TTYn:  text

        SEND JOB n text

        Where:    TTYn:  is any physical terminal  name,  including  CTY:
                  (console  terminal) and OPR:.  If you specify OPR:, the
                  system sends the message to the operator's terminal  at
                  the node to which your terminal is connected.

                  n is the job-number to which the message is to be sent.

                  text is the message to be transmitted.

        The message is printed on the receiving terminal in the following
        format:

        ;;TTYn: - text

        Where:    n is the sender's terminal number.

                  text is the message.

                  A bell  sounds  on  the  receiving  terminal  when  the


                                   2-301
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                SEND Command


                  message is printed.




















































                                   2-302
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                SEND Command


        You can specify an operator on a particular node by entering  the
        terminal identifier in the form:

        OPRxx:

        Where:    xx is the number of the operator's node.

                  See Example 4 below.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Restrictions

        The SEND command is not available to batch jobs.

   Examples

        1.  Send a message to TTY62:

            .SEND TTY62:  YOU HAVE THE SYSTEM STAND-ALONE<RET>

            .

        2.  Ask your operator to write-enable a DECtape drive:

            .SEND OPR:  PLEASE WRITE-ENABLE DTA3:<RET>

            .

        3.  Send a message to job 69:

            .SEND JOB 69 THE TAPE IS WRITE ENABLED<RET>

            .


        4.  Send a message to the operator on node 17:

            .SEND OPR17:  LPT171 UPPER CASE ONLY?<RET>

            .








                                   2-303
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SESSION Command


                              SESSION Command



   Function

        The SESSION command allows you to change the account  and  remark
        strings  of your job.  If your system is not running with account
        validation, the SESSION command has no effect.  If your system is
        running  with account validation, you can use the SESSION command
        to change the billing profile of your job.

        For example, you may have several  projects,  each  of  which  is
        charged  to  a  separate  account.   Therefore,  several  account
        strings are valid for your PPN.  The SESSION command  allows  you
        to change the account string for your job without logging out and
        logging in again.  Thus, all subsequent charges will be  made  to
        the new account.

        If account validation is enabled, the string you type must  match
        one  of the accounts assigned to your PPN.  The string must match
        in case (lower  or  uppercase),  although  this  feature  can  be
        changed by the system administrator.

   Formats

        SESSION<RET>
        ACCOUNT:string<RET>
        REMARK:text

        This format prompts you for the required information.  If  either
        string is not required, you are not prompted for it.

        Where:    string is the account string for the account  to  which
                  you want any subsequent charges to be made.

                  text is the remark string.  You can type anything  here
                  to identify your work.  The remark string is limited to
                  39 characters.














                                   2-304
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SESSION Command


        SESSION/switches

            This format allows you to specify one or both strings in  the
            command line.  The valid switches are:

            /ACCOUNT:"string"    Specifies the  account  string  for  the
                                 account  to which all subsequent charges
                                 should be made.  The account string must
                                 be  enclosed  in  quotation  marks if it
                                 contains any nonalphanumeric characters.
                                 The account string is case sensitive.

            /HELP                Prints the HELP text, listing  available
                                 switches and how to use them.

            /REMARK:"text"       Specifies   the   remark   string    for
                                 subsequent   charges.    You   can  type
                                 anything for the string ("text")  up  to
                                 39  characters.   The remark string must
                                 be enclosed in  quotation  marks  if  it
                                 contains any nonalphanumeric characters.

   Characteristics

        Leaves  your  terminal  at  monitor  level  when   all   required
        information is supplied.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  The following example shows the procedure  for  changing  the
            account  string to DATA-AQ.  In this case, the account string
            is required for  the  job,  but  the  remark  string  is  not
            required.

            .SESSION<RET>
            ACCOUNT:DATA-AQ<RET>

            .

        2.  The following example shows the procedure for supplying  both
            the account and remark strings in the command line:

            .SESSION/ACCOUNT:"DATA-AQ"/REMARK:"SALES RESEARCH"<RET>

            .






                                   2-305
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET BLOCKSIZE Command


                           SET BLOCKSIZE Command



   Function

        The SET BLOCKSIZE command sets a default blocksize (in words) for
        the specified magnetic tape.

   Format

        SET BLOCKSIZE dev:nnnn

        Where:    dev:  is either the physical device  name,  written  in
                  the  format  MTxn:,  or  the  logical  name  previously
                  associated  with  the  device.   The  device  must   be
                  assigned to your job.  This argument is necessary.  See
                  Section 1.9.1 for information about device names.

                  nnnn is a decimal number between 3 and 4094 designating
                  the  block  size for this magnetic tape.  No additional
                  checking is done for  the  legality  of  the  specified
                  number  in  addition  to the check for the maximum 4094
                  and a minimum of 3.  This argument is required.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Example

        Assign the logical name WEEK2 to magnetic tape unit 4.

        .ASSIGN MTA4:WEEK2<RET>
        MTA4 ASSIGNED

        Set the block size of magnetic tape unit 4 to 2000.

        .SET BLOCKSIZE WEEK2: 2000<RET>

        .












                                   2-306
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET BREAK Command


                             SET BREAK Command



   Function

        The SET BREAK command is used during the debugging process  on  a
        KL10 processor only.  It is useful when the program that is being
        debugged:

         o  Will not fail when DDT has been loaded.

         o  Destroys DDT when DDT is loaded.

         o  Destroys  the  contents  of   a   memory   location   at   an
            unpredictable point during program execution.

        It is possible to break when the specified location is read from,
        written  into,  and/or  fetched.  It is also possible to break on
        monitor references to items  in  your  address  space.   This  is
        useful  when  the  monitor  stores or retrieves arguments to/from
        unexpected locations in your address space because  of  erroneous
        monitor call argument lists.

        If you are breaking on a WRITE  condition,  the  WRITE  condition
        causing  the  break  will not have been executed.  Therefore, the
        instruction located at PC and all  operands  should  be  examined
        before continuing program execution.

   Formats

        SET BREAK

        SET BREAK AT addr ON condition AFTER x,...

        SET BREAK AT n,,addr ON condition AFTER x,...

        SET BREAK NO condition

        SET BREAK NONE

        Where:    AT, ON, and AFTER are optional portions of the  command
                  line.

                  addr  is  an  octal  number  in  the  range   0-777777,
                  representing  a  user  virtual address.  The address is
                  not necessary.

                  condition is one or more reasons for allowing the break
                  to   occur.   The  condition  is  not  necessary.   The
                  condition arguments are listed below.


                                   2-307
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET BREAK Command


                  x is the number of times the sequence should run before
                  the  break  occurs.  The variable is any decimal number
                  from 1 to 511.

                  n is a section number ranging  from  0-37  octal.   The
                  commas separating n and addr are optional.

        Multiple conditions can be specified within  one  command;  these
        conditions  are  separated  from  one  another  by  commas.   The
        possible conditions that can be specified are:

        READ      Breaks if the contents of addr are read by the program.
                  This   condition   causes   a   break  to  occur  on  a
                  read-modify-write as well as on a read.

        WRITE     Breaks if the location specified  by  addr  is  written
                  into.

        EXECUTE   Breaks if an instruction is fetched from  the  location
                  specified in the command string.

        ALL       Breaks if the location specified in the command  string
                  is  read  from (READ), written into (WRITE), or fetched
                  from (EXECUTE).

        MUUO      Breaks on monitor  references  as  qualified  by  READ,
                  WRITE, and/or EXECUTE.

        If all three break  conditions  are  to  be  specified,  you  can
        include  the  word ALL in the command line, replacing the command
        argument string:  WRITE,READ,EXECUTE.  When you  want  breaks  on
        monitor  references  for  all  three  break  conditions,  you can
        include one of the following  command  argument  strings  in  the
        command line:  either MUUO,ALL or MUUO,READ,WRITE,EXECUTE.

        If you use SET BREAK with no conditions, the previously specified
        conditions are used.  If there was no previous SET BREAK command,
        ALL is  assumed.   When  issuing  a  SET  BREAK  command  without
        specifying  any  address,  the conditions included in the command
        line are ORed with existing break conditions and  the  previously
        specified  address  is  used.   If  there  are  no existing break
        conditions, 0 is the default address.

        In summary, break addresses remain in effect until  changed;  and
        break conditions remain in effect until removed.

        If you want to remove a break  condition,  the  condition  to  be
        removed can be specified in the following command:

        SET BREAK NO condition



                                   2-308
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET BREAK Command


        If all existing break conditions are to be removed, the following
        command line can be issued:

        SET BREAK NONE

        This command will remove all existent break conditions, but  will
        not remove a previously specified address.  An example of setting
        a default break location is:

        SET BREAK 1000 ON READ,WRITE,EXECUTE
        SET BREAK NO READ
        SET BREAK NONE
        SET BREAK EXECUTE ;1000 IS DEFAULT BREAK LOCATION

        When a break occurs, one of the messages:

        %ADDRESS BREAK AT USER PC xxxxxx

        %ADDRESS BREAK AT EXEC xxxxxx UUO AT USER xxxxxx

        will be printed, and your terminal will be left at monitor level.
        The  second message is produced when MUUO was included in the SET
        BREAK command line.  If you type:

        .CONTINUE

        the program will  continue  execution  at  the  instruction  that
        caused the break.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Can be used on KL10 processors only.

        Does not destroy your job's core image.

   Examples

        1.  Break if the contents of 1000 are  read  or  written  by  the
            program.

            .SET BREAK AT 1000 ON READ,WRITE<RET>

            .

        2.  Break  if  the  instruction  is  fetched  from  the   default
            location, in this case 1000.

            .SET BREAK EXECUTE<RET>
            .


                                   2-309
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET BREAK Command


        3.  Remove existing break conditions.

            .SET BREAK NONE<RET>

            .

        4.  Break at any EXECUTE or WRITE monitor references.

            .SET BREAK 1000 MUUO,EXECUTE,WRITE<RET>

            .










































                                   2-310
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET CDR Command


                              SET CDR Command



   Function

        The SET CDR command sets the file name of the  next  file  to  be
        read  by  the  card  reader.   The card file must be in your UFD.
        This command is usually unnecessary, but allows you to change the
        order  of  jobs  being  spooled.   The batch controller uses this
        command to read card decks.

   Format

        SET CDR file-name

        Where:    file-name  must  be  one  to  three   characters;   the
                  extension is assumed to be .CDR.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Create a file for output.

        .TYPE FOO.CDR<RET>

        THIS IS THE OUTPUT

        It may be necessary to spool the card reader.

        .SET SPOOL CDR<RET>

        The file FOO will be the next to be read by the card reader.

        .SET CDR FOO<RET>

        Type the output from the card reader on your terminal.

        .TYPE CDR:<RET>

        THIS IS THE OUTPUT

        .



                                   2-311
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET CPU Command


                              SET CPU Command



   Function

        The SET  CPU  command  allows  privileged  users  to  change  the
        processors  where  jobs can run.  It is used in a multiprocessing
        system to specify whether the programs that run under the job can
        be  processed  on  the  primary CPU, the secondary CPU, or either
        CPU.  The job remains with the specified CPU until:

         o  another SET CPU command with  a  different  specification  is
            given,

         o  a KJOB command is issued,

         o  a privileged user's program overrides the SET CPU command  by
            issuing the SETUUO with a different specification.

        If the SETUUO overrides the command, the specification  given  in
        the  monitor call remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT monitor
        call  or  another  SETUUO  with  a  different  specification   is
        executed.   When  an  EXIT or RESET monitor call is executed, the
        job reverts to the  specification  given  in  the  last  SET  CPU
        command.   When  you log in, the CPU specification is usually set
        to ALL.  The schedulers for each CPU compete for  jobs  with  the
        ALL  specification  so  that  the  load  is  dynamically balanced
        between CPUs.  Therefore, this command is  generally  not  needed
        but is provided in case you want to change the CPU specification.

   Formats

        SET CPU CPxn

             Adds the specified  CPU to your job's CPU specification.

        SET CPU NO CPxn

             Removes the specified CPU from your job's CPU specification.

        SET CPU ALL

             Adds all of the CPUs  to your job's  CPU specification.









                                   2-312
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET CPU Command


        SET CPU ONLY CPxn

             Changes the CPU specification so that it includes  only  the
             specified CPU.

        Where:    x is:

                       U designating a logical name,

                       L  designating a KL10 processor,

                  n  is  a  decimal  number  from  0  to  the  number  of
                  processors in the system.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your job's core image.

   Restrictions

        The privileges required for using this command are determined  by
        bit 5 (JP.CCC) of the privilege word, .GTPRV.

   Examples

        1.  Your job can run only on CPU1.

            .SET CPU ONLY CPU1<RET>

            .

        2.  Your job can run on CPU1.

            .SET CPU CPU1<RET>

            .















                                   2-313
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                         SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command


                        SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command



   Function

        The  SET  DDT  BREAKPOINT  command  enables  the  DDT  breakpoint
        facility.   If the breakpoint facility is on and if DDT is loaded
        with the program,  you  can  type  CTRL/D  to  interrupt  program
        execution  and use DDT to examine the state of the program.  When
        the facility is turned off, CTRL/D is passed to the program.

   Format

        SET DDT BREAKPOINT argument

        Where:  the word BREAKPOINT may be omitted.

                argument may be ON, OFF, or omitted.  If the argument  is
                omitted,  SET  DDT  reports the breakpoint status without
                changing it.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at user level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Restriction

        Note that CTRL/D is meaningful only to DDT and  VMDDT.   It  will
        not  have this effect on programs loaded with a compiler-specific
        debugger like FORDDT.




















                                   2-314
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                         SET DDT BREAKPOINT Command


   Example

        Enable the DDT breakpoint facility.

        .SET DDT ON<RET>
        [Control-D breakpoint facility is turned on]

        Debug a MACRO program that increments and prints a  number,  once
        per  second.   Use the DDT command $G to start program execution.
        Then type CTRL/D to stop the  program  and  examine  the  current
        location  with  DDT.   Then  type  $P to continue execution.  Use
        CTRL/Z to exit to monitor level.  Note that CTRL/D is shown here,
        although it does not echo on your terminal.

        .DEBUG BPT.MAC<RET>
        MACRO: BPT
        LINK:  Loading
        [LNKDEB DDT execution]
        DDT
        $G


        This program will increment a count, once per second.

        1
        2
        3
        4
        5
        6
        7
        8
        9
        10
        <CTRL/D>
        $0B>>LOOP#+12/  JRST LOOP#  $P
        11
        12
        13
        14
        <CTRL/D>
        $0B>LOOP#+1/   SLEEP  1,  ^Z

        .









                                   2-315
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                         SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command


                        SET DEFAULT BIGBUF Command



   Function

        The SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command sets the disk buffer size for  the
        job.   Disk  I/O  can  be  improved by increasing the disk buffer
        size, but buffers increase the size of the job.

        With the SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command, each added block  gives  you
        200  octal words of disk buffer.  For example, SET DEFAULT BIGBUF
        5 sets the buffer size to  5  blocks  (1200  octal  words).   SET
        DEFAULT  BIGBUF  0  defaults  the  buffer size to one block.  The
        maximum value for SET DEFAULT BIGBUF is 31.  When big buffers are
        in  use,  TOPS-10  defaults to a value of four blocks (1000 octal
        words).

        Because the SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command sets the buffer  size  for
        the job, the buffer size will remain the same until the user logs
        out, or changes it by using the command again.

                                      NOTE

                In order to use big buffers, the program that  is
                doing  disk  I/O  must  be written to utilize the
                buffer size.   Otherwise,  this  command  has  no
                effect on your job except to increase job size.

   Format

        SET DEFAULT BIGBUF n

        Where:    n is 0 through 31 decimal.  This  value  indicates  the
                  number of blocks (200 octal words) per buffer.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Example

        Set the disk buffer size to 5 blocks.

        .SET DEFAULT BIGBUF 5<RET>

        .


                                   2-316
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                        SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command


                        SET DEFAULT BUFFERS Command



   Function

        The SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command changes the number of buffers  in
        your  memory  area.  The default number of buffers for disk is 6;
        for all other devices, the default number is 2.  Use this command
        to  increase  or  decrease the number of memory buffers that your
        program will use.

        A larger number of buffers will usually allow your program to run
        faster.  A smaller number of buffers will allow you to run larger
        programs.

                                      NOTE

                If you increase the number  of  buffers,  it  may
                interfere  with the operation of overlay programs
                and other large programs.

   Format

        SET DEFAULT BUFFERS n

        Where:    n is the number of disk buffers you want  your  program
                  to use.  The argument is a decimal number between 0 and
                  511.  When n is 0, the number of buffers is set to  the
                  system  default,  which  is  6  for disk, and 2 for all
                  other devices.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Example

        Set the number of buffers to 4.

        .SET DEFAULT BUFFERS 4<RET>

        .






                                   2-317
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                       SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command


                      SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command



   Function

        The SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command sets a default protection code
        for files you create during the job.  Any value you set with this
        command overrides the system's standard  protection  code.   Your
        system  administrator sets the system's standard protection code,
        which is usually <055> or <057>.  The default protection code set
        by using this command will be in effect for any of your programs.

   Formats

        SET DEFAULT PROTECTION <nnn>

        SET DEFAULT PROTECTION ON

        SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF

        Where:    <nnn>  is  the  value  that  you  can  specify  as  the
                  protection code for any files you might create.

                  ON tells the system to  use  the  protection  code  you
                  specified  previously,  even  though you may have since
                  used the SET DEFAULT PROTECTION OFF command.

                  OFF tells the  system  to  use  the  system's  standard
                  protection code when you create files, even if you have
                  issued a SET DEFAULT PROTECTION <nnn> command.

   Associated Commands

        PRESERVE - This command can be used to assign a  protection  code
                   of <157> or <155> to any or all of existing files.

        PROTECT  - This command can be used to assign any protection code
                   to any or all of existing files.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.










                                   2-318
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                       SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command


   Example

        Create a file with TECO.

        .MAKE PROTEC.TST<RET>
        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        Use DIRECTORY to see the protection of the file.

        .DIR PROTEC.TST<RET>

        PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:  [27,5434]

        Change the default protection code.

        .SET DEFAULT PROTECT <175><RET>

        Create another file with TECO.

        .MAKE PROTEC.TS1<RET>
        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        DIRECTORY shows both files.

        .DIR PROTEC<RET>

        PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:  [27,5434]
        PROTEC TS1 0 <175> dd-mmm-yy

        Note the old protection and the new protection.

        Turn the specified protection off.

        .SET DEFAULT PROTECT OFF<RET>

        Create a third file.

        .MAKE PROTEC.TS2<RET>
        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        A DIRECTORY shows the 3 files.

        .DIR PROTEC<RET>

        PROTEC TST 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:  [27,5434]
        PROTEC TS1 0 <175> dd-mmm-yy
        PROTEC TS2 0 <055> dd-mmm-yy

        Note the protection codes.




                                   2-319
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                       SET DEFAULT PROTECTION Command


        Turn the protection code on.

        .SET DEFAULT PROTECT ON<RET>

        Create a fourth file.

        .MAKE PROTECT.TS3<RET>
        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        DIRECTORY shows the 4 files.

        .DIR PROTEC<RET>

        PROTEC TST <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:  [27,5434]
        PROTEC TS1 <175> dd-mmm-yy
        PROTEC TS2 <055> dd-mmm-yy
        PROTEC TS3 <175> dd-mmm-yy

        .

        Note the protection codes.
































                                   2-320
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET DEFER Command


                             SET DEFER Command



   Function

        The SET DEFER command causes all output requests (except disk and
        tape  output)  generated  by  programs  run  by  your  job  to be
        deferred.  These requests will be processed  when  you  log  out.
        Any  files  that  are  generated  implicitly  by a system program
        (DIRECT, CREF) and automatically output to the line printer, card
        punch,  plotter,  or paper tape punch will be held by QUEUE until
        you log out.  When you log out,  the  files  are  output  to  the
        appropriate devices, or spooled for output, if spooling is set.

        Deferred queuing can also be set by logging in  with  the  /DEFER
        switch.  This function is the default for batch jobs.

        To prevent all future  requests  from  being  deferred,  use  SET
        NODEFER.

        To queue any deferred requests that are being held for your  job,
        use the appropriate queue command (CPUNCH, PLOT, PRINT, QUEUE, or
        TPUNCH) followed by two switches:   /DEFERRED  and  /CREATE.   To
        delete  the  deferred  requests without output, use /DEFERRED and
        /KILL.  /DEFERRED releases any requests that are being  held  for
        your  job,  and processes them according to the other switch that
        you specify.

   Format

        SET DEFER

        Causes all following output requests from  programs  to  be  held
        until you log out.

        SET NODEFER

        Causes all following output requests to be  handled  immediately.
        This is the default function for timesharing jobs.

   Characteristics

        Does not destroy your job's core image.









                                   2-321
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET DEFER Command


   Example

        The following example  illustrates  the  use  of  the  SET  DEFER
        command.

        Set output requests to be deferred  (held)  until  you  log  out.
        Also,  if  the  appropriate  devices  for  your  job  are not yet
        spooled, use the SET SPOOL command to spool them.  (See  the  SET
        SPOOL command.)

        .SET DEFER<RET>

        .SET SPOOL ALL<RET>

        Compile a FORTRAN program,  using  the  /CREF  switch  to  obtain
        cross-referenced  listing files that can be processed by the CREF
        program.

        .COMPILE NUMBER.FOR/CREF<RET>

        FORTRAN:  NUMBER
        MAIN.

        When compilation is complete, use the CREF command to  run  CREF.
        When  deferred  spooling  is  not  set,  the CREF listing is sent
        directly to the line printer.

        .CREF<RET>

        CREF:  NUMBER

        After CREF is finished, check your entries in  the  line  printer
        queue.   The files produced by CREF are deferred, so there are no
        entries in the queue from your job.

        .PRINT/CHECK<RET>
        [THE QUEUES ARE EMPTY]

        Use the PRINT/DEFERRED/CREATE command to print the CREF listings.
        The files are released and then spooled.

        .PRINT/DEFERRED/CREATE<RET>
        [PRINTER JOB NUMBER QUEUED, REQUEST #448, LIMIT 6]










                                   2-322
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET DEFER Command


        Check the printer queue again.  The CREF listings are queued.

        .PRINT/CHECK<RET>

        PRINTER QUEUE:
        JOB NAME   REQ#   LIMIT            USER
        --------   ----   -----   ------------------------
         NUMBER     448       6   MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
        THERE IS 1 JOB IN THE QUEUE (NONE IN PROGRESS)

        Using SET NODEFER, stop having requests deferred.

        .SET NODEFER<RET>

        Using the DIRECTORY command, obtain a file that contains  a  list
        of  the files in the directory.  Using the .LST extension ensures
        that the file will be deleted from your  directory  after  it  is
        printed.

        .DIRECT FILES.LST=/L<RET>
           TOTAL OF 42 FILES

        Check the printer queue.  Your job now has two  printer  requests
        in the queue.

        .PRINT/CHECK<RET>

        PRINTER QUEUE:
        JOB NAME   REQ#   LIMIT            USER
        --------   ----   -----   ---------------------------
         NUMBER     448       6   MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
         FILES      449       6   MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
        THERE ARE 2 JOBS IN THE QUEUE (NONE IN PROGRESS)

        .


















                                   2-323
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                            SET DENSITY Command


                            SET DENSITY Command



   Function

        The SET DENSITY command sets a default  density  (bits/inch)  for
        the  specified  magnetic tape.  You must have the device assigned
        to your job to use SET DENSITY.

   Format

        SET DENSITY dev:density

        Where:    dev:  is the physical or logical name of  the  magnetic
                  tape  device  for  which the density is to be set.  See
                  Section 1.9.1 for a description of device names.

                  density is one of the following:

                        200 bits/inch (8.1 rows/mm)
                        556 bits/inch (22.5 rows/mm)
                        800 bits/inch (32.2 rows/mm)
                       1600 bits/inch (65.3 rows/mm)
                       6250 bits/inch (255.5 rows/mm)

        Both arguments are required.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Associated Messages

        If the density argument is not compatible with the list above, an
        error message is printed:

        ?ILLEGAL DENSITY FOR DRIVE

   Example

        Set the density of magnetic-tape unit 5 to 556.

        .SET DENSITY MTA5:556<RET>

        .







                                   2-324
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET DSKFUL Command


                            SET DSKFUL Command



   Function

        The SET DSKFUL command controls the treatment of your job when it
        is  attempting  output  and  there  is  either  not  enough space
        available on the file structure being referenced  or  your  quota
        for that structure is exceeded.

   Formats

        SET DSKFUL ERROR

             Stops output  and  an  error  condition  is  passed  to  the
             program.   Most  programs  respond to the error condition by
             issuing an error message and returning your job  to  monitor
             level without any opportunity for you to continue.


        SET DSKFUL PAUSE

             Stops output and suspends  execution  of  the  program.   An
             error message is printed on your terminal and control of the
             job is returned to the monitor.  Generally, you  should  use
             the  SEND  command  at this point to request assistance from
             the operator.

             Execution of the program can be resumed  with  the  CONTINUE
             command  as long as you do not issue a command that destroys
             the core image of the  interrupted  program.   However,  the
             program will again be stopped if the problem of insufficient
             disk space or insufficient quota has not been  corrected  in
             the interim.

        The default setting is ERROR unless you specify  otherwise  as  a
        switch to LOGIN.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Example

        .SET DSKFUL PAUSE<RET>

        .





                                   2-325
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET DSKPRI Command


                            SET DSKPRI Command



   Function

        The SET  DSKPRI  command  allows  privileged  users  to  set  the
        priority for their job's disk operations (data transfers and head
        positionings).  The standard priority is  0,  and  the  range  of
        permissible values is -3 to +3.  This means that a priority lower
        than the standard can be specified as well as one higher than the
        standard.   The  priority  specified  applies  to  all  disk  I/O
        channels currently open or subsequently opened whose priority has
        not  been  explicitly  set  with a DISK.  monitor call.  (See the
        TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.) The priority specified in the  SET
        DSKPRI  command  remains  in  effect  until  one of the following
        occurs:

         o  Another  SET  DSKPRI  command  is  given  with  a   different
            priority.

         o  A KJOB command is issued.

         o  Your program overrides the SET DSKPRI command  by  issuing  a
            DISK. monitor call with a different priority.

   Format

        SET DSKPRI n

        Where:    n is a decimal number from  -3  to  +3  indicating  the
                  priority   to   be  associated  with  your  job's  disk
                  operations.  When n is 0, the priority  is  the  normal
                  timesharing priority.

   Characteristics

        The SET DSKPRI command:

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Restrictions

        The privileges required for using this command are determined  by
        bits  1  and  2  of  the  privilege word, .GTPRV.  These two bits
        specify an octal number from 0-3.  You are  always  allowed  a  0
        priority.






                                   2-326
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET DSKPRI Command


   Example

        Set your priority to 2.

        .SET DSKPRI 2<RET>

        .














































                                   2-327
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET FORMAT Command


                            SET FORMAT Command



   Function

        The SET FORMAT command sets the mode of a tape.

   Format

        SET FORMAT MTxn:mode

        Where:  MTxn:  is the physical or logical name  of  the  magnetic
                tape device for which the mode is to be set.  See Section
                1.9.1 for a description of device names.

                mode is one of the following:

                     ANSI (for ANSI-ASCII)
                     BYTE
                     DUMP (for COREDUMP)
                     INDUST (for industry compatible)
                     SIXBIT
                     SYSTEM (for system default)

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy core image.

   Example

        Set the format of MTA1 to ANSI mode.

        .ASSIGN MTA1<RET>
        MTA1 assigned
        .SET FORMAT MTA1:ANSI<RET>
        .












                                   2-328
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET HOST Command


                             SET HOST Command



   Function

        The SET HOST command connects you to another host computer on the
        same DECnet or ANF-10 network.

        Using the SET HOST command, you can remain at  one  terminal  and
        switch  the  terminal  connection  from one system to a different
        system.

        For ANF-10 networks, the node you specify must be a network  node
        where  you  can run LOGIN or an equivalent program.  The SET HOST
        command cannot be used to connect to a node that does not have  a
        command  interpreter.   Use  the  NETWORK  command  with the /MCR
        switch to determine the nodes in the network  that  have  command
        interpreters.   MCR is a name that is used by the NETWORK program
        to signify a command interpreter.

        Once a terminal has been connected to a particular ANF-10  system
        through  SET  HOST,  it  remains  connected  to that system until
        another SET HOST command  is  issued  from  that  terminal.   For
        example:   you  log  in  to a system, issue a SET HOST command to
        KS4101 (another host system), do your work, and then log off  the
        system.   Then, when another user uses your terminal, he too will
        be running on the KS4101 host system until he issues another  SET
        HOST command or until the system is reloaded.

        On DECnet, when you SET HOST to another system and then log  off,
        you  do not remain connected, as you would with ANF-10, but would
        drop back to your original system.

   Format

        SET HOST node-id

        Where:    node-id is an identifier of the node to which you  want
                  to connect.  It can be a node-name or a node-number.













                                   2-329
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET HOST Command


   Characteristics

        1.  If you SET HOST to ANF-10 nodes, the SET HOST command:

             o  Does not require LOGIN.  However, if you are  logged  in,
                your  job  is detached when your terminal is connected to
                another system.

             o  Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

             o  Does not destroy your core image.

        2.  If you SET HOST to DECnet nodes, the SET HOST command:

             o  Requires LOGIN

             o  Places your terminal at user level.

             o  Destroys your core image.

             o  Runs CTHNRT.


   Restriction

        You cannot SET HOST from the TOPS-10 system through DECnet if you
        used SET HOST to get to the TOPS-10 system over a DECnet link.

   Associated Messages

        If the specified node does not have a command  interpreter,  your
        job  remains  at  your  current  node  and  the system prints the
        following message:

        ?NODE DOES NOT SUPPORT REMOTE TERMINALS

        If the node you specified is  not  a  recognizable  node  in  the
        network,  your  job  remains  at your current node and the system
        prints the following message.  This message would  occur  if  the
        specified  node  was not on line, the link between the systems is
        down, or you misspelled the node name.

        ?UNDEFINED NETWORK NODE

        If you omit the node-id argument, the system prints the following
        error message:

        ?NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS





                                   2-330
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET HOST Command


   Examples

        1.  You attempt to SET HOST to an ANF-10  node,  identifying  the
            node by number:

            .SET HOST 26 <RET>

            [BC173B KL #1026/1042] hh:mm:ss TTY72 system 1026/1042
            Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 0

            Please LOGIN or ATTACH

            .

        2.  You attempt to SET HOST to an ANF-10  node,  identifying  the
            node by name:

            .SET HOST TWINKY<RET>

            [Twinky KL702/21A] dd-mmm-yy hh:mm:ss TTY111 System 2197
            Connected to Host TWINKY(77) via node KL1026(26) Line # 55

            Please LOGIN or ATTACH

            .

        3.  You SET HOST to a DECnet node, log in,  and  log  out  again.
            Notice  that after logging out you are returned automatically
            to your original node.

            .SET HOST QARRY<RET>

            [Connected to VMS system QARRY::, using CTERM protocol]
            [Type ^\,<RET> to return]

            Username: FRANCINI<RET>
            Password: <RET>

                   This is MicroVMS Version V_._ on node QARRY

                Last interactive login on Thursday, DD-MMM-YYYY 18:04
                Last non-interactive login on Wednesday, DD-MMM-YYYY 18:29
            $ 
            $ LOGOUT<RET>
              FRANCINI     logged out at DD-MMM-YYYY 15:31:07.28
            [Connection closed by remote:  User unbind request]
            .






                                   2-331
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET HPQ Command


                              SET HPQ Command



   Function

        The SET HPQ command allows privileged users to place  their  jobs
        in   a   high-priority   run  queue.   When  your  job  is  in  a
        high-priority run queue, you can obtain a faster response than in
        the  normal timesharing queues.  The job remains in the specified
        high-priority queue until one of the following occurs:

         o  You issue another SET  HPQ  command  specifying  a  different
            high-priority queue.

         o  You log out.

         o  Your program overrides the SET HPQ command by issuing an  HPQ
            monitor call with a different value.

        If an HPQ monitor call overrides the command, the level specified
        in  the  monitor  call  remains  in  effect until a RESET or EXIT
        monitor call or another HPQ monitor call with a  different  value
        is executed.  When an EXIT or RESET monitor call is executed, the
        job is returned to the high-priority queue specified in the  last
        SET HPQ command.

   Format

        SET HPQ n

        Where:    n is a decimal number  from  0  to  15  indicating  the
                  high-priority  queue  to  be entered.  When n is 0, the
                  queue is the normal timesharing queue.   Queue  numbers
                  from  1  to 15 are high-priority queues.  The number of
                  high-priority queues is an installation  parameter  and
                  can be less than 15.

   Associated Messages

        If you are not privileged, the  system  responds  with  an  error
        message:

        ?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH









                                   2-332
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET HPQ Command


   Characteristics

        Does not destroy your core image.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Requires LOGIN.

   Restrictions

        The privileges required for using this command are determined  by
        bits  6 through 9 of the privilege word, .GTPRV.  These four bits
        specify  an  octal  number  from  0-17,  which  is  the   highest
        high-priority queue you can attain.

   Example

        You try to set your run queue to 4.

        .SET HPQ 4<RET>

        ?NO PRIVS TO SET PRIORITY THAT HIGH

        Your job is placed in high-priority queue number 2.

        .SET HPQ 2<RET>

        .

























                                   2-333
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                            SET PHYSICAL Command


                           SET PHYSICAL Command



   Function

        The SET PHYSICAL command sets the maximum current  physical  page
        limit (CPPL) that your job can use, if the word LIMIT is included
        in the command line.  (CPPL is described in the  TOPS-10  Monitor
        Calls Manual.)

        By including the word GUIDELINE in  the  command  line,  the  SET
        PHYSICAL  command  is  used  to  establish  a  guideline  for the
        page-fault handler.  The page-fault handler  will  then  use  the
        specified  figure  as  a  guideline in determining when a program
        will go virtual.

   Format

        SET PHYSICAL LIMIT  nP or nK
                     GUIDELINE  nP or nK

        Where:    LIMIT or GUIDELINE can be used  in  the  command  line.
                  The default is GUIDELINE.

                  K can be specified within the range 1 to 256K; P can be
                  specified within the range 1 to 512P.

                  If the command SET PHYSICAL LIMIT is  given  with  a  0
                  argument, the job will never go virtual.

                                           NOTE

                      The monitor regards a limit as  a  set  maximum
                      number.  When the monitor reaches the specified
                      limit, it begins  virtual  handling.   However,
                      the  GUIDELINE  argument  allows the monitor to
                      use discretion in determining the page size.

   Characteristics

        Requires LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.







                                   2-334
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                            SET PHYSICAL Command


   Examples

        1.  Check your core memory assignment:

            .CORE<RET>
            VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
            PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: 512P MAX LIMIT: 510P)
            SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3669P

            Change the physical guideline to 100 pages:

            .SET PHYSICAL 100P<RET>

            Show core assignment:

            .CORE<RET>
            VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
            PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: 100P MAX LIMIT:510P)
            SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3671P

        2.  Show core memory assignment:

            .CORE<RET>
            VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
            PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (GUIDELINE: 512P MAX LIMIT: 510P)
            SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3484P

            Set your physical limit to 100 pages:

            .SET PHYSICAL LIMIT 100P<RET>

            Show your memory assignment:

            .CORE<RET>
            VIRT. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 512P MAX LIMIT: 512P)
            PHYS. MEM. ASSIGNED 2P (CURRENT LIMIT: 100P MAX LIMIT: 510P)
            SWAP SPACE LEFT: 3484P
















                                   2-335
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET RETRY Command


                             SET RETRY Command



   Function

        The SET RETRY command controls the  function  of  the  DX10  tape
        drive  controller.   When  retry  is set, the controller recovers
        from soft errors, and it reports both soft  and  hard  errors  in
        SYS:ERROR.SYS.   When  retry  is  off,  the  controller  does not
        recover from soft errors and all  errors  are  reported  as  hard
        errors in ERROR.SYS.

   Format

        SET RETRY MTxn:  ON

             This format of the  SET  RETRY  command  sets  the  recovery
             function.  This is the default function of the controller.

        SET RETRY MTxn:  OFF

             This format of the command turns off the recovery function.

        Where:    MTxn:  is the individual device name  of  the  magnetic
                  tape drive.  If you have assigned a logical name to the
                  drive, you may substitute  the  logical  name  for  the
                  device name.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your job at monitor level.

        Does not affect your job's core image.

   Example

        The following example shows how the recovery function is set:

        .SET RETRY MTA5:  ON<RET>

        .











                                   2-336
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET SPOOL Command


                             SET SPOOL Command



   Function

        The SET SPOOL command adds devices to or deletes devices from the
        current  list of devices being spooled for your job.  Spooling is
        the mechanism by which I/O  to  or  from  slow-speed  devices  is
        simulated on disk.  Devices capable of being spooled are the line
        printer, the card punch, the card reader, the paper  tape  punch,
        and the plotter.

   Formats

        SET SPOOL dev1:,dev2:,...,devn:

             Adds the specified devices to your job's spool list.


        SET SPOOL ALL

             Places all spooling devices into the spool list.


        SET SPOOL NONE

             Clears the entire spool list.


        SET SPOOL NO dev1,dev2,...,devn

             Removes the specified devices from your job's spool list.

        Where:    dev1:,dev2:,...,devn:  are the physical device names of
                  one  or more devices to be added to or deleted from the
                  current spool list.  These names can be taken from  the
                  following  list:   CDP:,  CDR:,  LPT:, PLT:, PTP:.  See
                  Section 1.9.1 for device name formats.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.










                                   2-337
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET SPOOL Command


   Restrictions

        To remove devices from your list of  spooled  devices,  your  job
        must have one of the following:

         o  The privilege bit set in .GTPRV.

         o  Bit 28 (200 octal) set in the STATUS word by the operator SET
            SCHED command.

         o  Logged in under [1,2].

   Examples

        1.  Add the card punch to your list of spooled devices.

            .SET SPOOL CDP:<RET>

            .

        2.  Delete the line printer from your list of spooled devices.

            .SET SPOOL NO LPT:<RET>

            .

        3.  Clear your list of spooled devices.

            .SET SPOOL NONE<RET>

            .






















                                   2-338
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                      SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command


                     SET TERMINAL or TERMINAL Command



   Function

        The SET TERMINAL command (or TERMINAL command) is  equivalent  to
        the  SET  TTY  command.   See the SET TTY command description for
        more information.












































                                   2-339
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET TIME Command


                             SET TIME Command



   Function

        The SET TIME command sets a CPU time limit for  your  job.   When
        your  job reaches the time limit, the job stops, and a message is
        printed on your terminal.  You can continue your  job  by  typing
        CONTINUE, but no time limit is in effect unless it is reset.

   Format

        SET TIME n

        Where:    n is the number of seconds of CPU time that the job  is
                  limited to.  An argument of 0 turns the time limit off.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Restrictions

        The SET TIME command is illegal in a batch job.  A batch job  has
        its  time  limit  set  by the /TIME switch in the QUEUE or SUBMIT
        command string or on the $JOB card.

   Example

        Create a program with an infinite loop.

        .MAKE LOOP.FOR<RET>

        *I10    CONTINUE<RET>
                GO TO 10<RET>
                END<RET>

        <ESC><ESC>
        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        Compile and load the program.

        .LOAD LOOP<RET>
        FORTRAN: LOOP
        MAIN.
        LINK:    LOADING

        EXIT




                                   2-340
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              SET TIME Command


        Set the time limit to 5 seconds.

        .SET TIME 5<RET>

        Clear the incremental run time, so that the SET TIME command  can
        be checked.

        .TIME<RET>
        11.08
        11.28
        KILO-CORE-SEC=95

        Start the program.

        .START<RET>
        ?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED<RET>

        As expected, the time limit was exceeded.

        .TIME<RET>
        5.00
        16.08
        KILO-CORE-SEC=134

        .




























                                   2-341
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


                          SET TTY or TTY Command



   Function

        The SET TTY command (or TTY command) declares properties  of  the
        terminal on which the command is typed.  The word TERMINAL can be
        used instead of the word TTY in the SET TTY command.

   Defaults

        The system has a terminal default for any terminal that  has  not
        been  declared  to  be  of  a  particular  type.  This default is
        generic TTY.  Before you  specify  the  characteristics  of  your
        terminal, the TTY defaults are in effect.  The exceptions to this
        are terminal input and output speeds.

        To discover the characteristics that the system has  assigned  to
        your  terminal,  use the INITIA TTY command.  This is illustrated
        in the example.

        If you use the SET TTY TYPE command, the system assumes  defaults
        according to the terminal type you declared.  These defaults, and
        the defaults for TTY, are listed in Table 2-1.


   Table 2-1:  Terminal Hardware Characteristics

   ______________________________________________________________________

       T       L       T       F        W       D       F     L      A
       Y       O       A       O        I       I       I     E      L
       P       W       B       R        D       S       L     N      T
       E       E       S       M        T       P       L     G      M
               R                        H       L             T      O
               C                                A             H      D
               A                                Y                    E
               S
               E
   ______________________________________________________________________

     GIGI      Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     LA30      N       N       N        72      N       1     N/A    N
     LA34      Y       Y       N       132      N       0     N/A    N
     LA36      Y       N       N       132      N       0     N/A    N

     LA38      Y       Y       N       132      N       0     N/A    N
     LA120     N       Y       Y       132      N       0     N/A    N
     LA180     N       Y       Y       132      N       0     N/A    N
     LN01S     Y       Y       Y        80      N       0     66     N


                                   2-342
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


     LN03      Y       Y       Y        80      N       0     66     N
     LT33      N       N       N        72      N       1     N/A    Y
     LT35      N       Y       Y        72      N       1     N/A    Y
     TTY       N       N       N        72      N       1     N/A    Y

     TTY33     N       N       N        72      N       1     N/A    Y
     TTY35     N       Y       Y        72      N       1     N/A    Y
     VK100     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT05      N       Y       N        72      Y       2     20     N

     VT06      N       N       N        72      Y       1     25     N
     VT50      Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     12     N
     VT52      Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT61      Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N

     VT100     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT101     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT102     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT103     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N

     VT125     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT131     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT180     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT185     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N

     VT200     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT220     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT240     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT300     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N

     VT320     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT330     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
     VT340     Y       Y       N        80      Y       0     24     N
   ______________________________________________________________________


                                   NOTE

           The  page  length  is  set  by  default  for   video
           terminals  only.   Therefore,  the notation N/A (not
           applicable) appears in the table  under  LENGTH  for
           hard-copy terminals.











                                   2-343
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


   Formats

        SET TTY arg

             Sets a characteristic for your terminal.

        SET TTY NO arg

             Deletes a characteristic for your terminal.

        Where:    arg is the characteristic that can  be  set  by  this
                  command.  The arguments to SET TTY are listed below.

                  NO  turns  off  the  bits  set  by  the  argument  it
                  accompanies.   For example, SET TTY LC sets lowercase
                  capability.   SET  TTY  NO  LC  turns  off  lowercase
                  ability.

                  The word SET is an optional portion  of  the  command
                  line.

          Argument                          Function

        ALTMODE             Converts the ALTmode codes of 175  and  176
                            to the ASCII standard ESCape character 033.
                            NO   ALTMODE   restores   the    individual
                            identities   of   the   codes   175  (right
                            brace: }) and 176 (tilde: ~).

        BLANKS              Controls the output  of  blank  lines.   NO
                            BLANKS suppresses the output of consecutive
                            RETURNS.   This  is  useful   for   display
                            terminals,  because NO BLANKS will conserve
                            space on the screen, allowing  more  output
                            to be displayed at one time.

        COPY                Controls the output of the ESCape character
                            to  a  VT5x terminal.  See the VT52 Owner's
                            Manual.

        CRLF                Controls the automatic carriage return  and
                            line  feed  at  the  end of the line.  Used
                            with the  WIDTH  argument,  CRLF  gives  an
                            automatic  carriage return/line feed at the
                            edge of the terminal screen.  NO CRLF  will
                            cause  lines wider than the set WIDTH to be
                            truncated.   The  default  setting   varies
                            according to the terminal type.





                                   2-344
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


        DEBREAK             No longer supported.

        DEFER               Suppresses  echoing  to  a  video  terminal
                            until  output  to the terminal is finished.
                            This  is  used  when  you  type  characters
                            before  the output is finished.  DEFER hold
                            the characters until the  program  requests
                            input; NO DEFER allows them to be echoed on
                            your terminal as soon as normal  output  is
                            complete.

        DISPLAY             Notifies the system that the  terminal  you
                            are  using is a display terminal.  Programs
                            use this information to control  output  to
                            the terminal.

        ECHO                Controls echoing on the terminal.  NO  ECHO
                            suppresses  echoing  of  all characters you
                            type.

        EIGHTBIT            Enables the terminal to accept and generate
                            eight  bit characters.  A terminal set with
                            the  EIGHTBIT  switch  will  be   able   to
                            communicate  with a program that uses seven
                            bit characters.

        ELEMENT nnn         No longer supported.

        FILL n              Assigns filler class  n  to  the  terminal.
                            Some  terminals  require one or more filler
                            characters to  be  sent  following  certain
                            control  characters  such as line feed (LF)
                            and horizontal tab (HT).   With  the  DN87S
                            front-end, there will be a short time lapse
                            before each character is sent.

                            Table 2-2 illustrates the number of fillers
                            sent  for  each character and filler class.
                            The    filler     characters     are     CR
                            (carriage-return),   and   DEL  (DELETE  or
                            RUBOUT) for all other characters.

                            No fillers  are  supplied  for  image  mode
                            output.   The  default is determined by the
                            declared terminal type.








                                   2-345
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


   Table 2-2:  Fill Characters

   ______________________________________________________________________

        Character      Octal     Number of Fillers for Filler Class
          Name                   0        1        2         3
   ______________________________________________________________________

       BS              010       0        2        6         6
       HT              011       0     1 OR 2      0     1 OR 2 (1)
       LF              012       0        2        6         6
       VT              013       0        2        6         6
       FF              014       0       12       21        21
     CR on output      015       0        1        3         3 (2)
     automatic CR (3)            0        2        4         4
     CRLF on output    015-012   0        3        9         9 (4)
       XON             021       1        1        1         1
       TAPE            022       1        1        1         1
       XOFF            023       1        1        1         1
       NTAP            024       1        1        1         1
   ______________________________________________________________________


   (1)  1 if 0-3 spaces to tab stop; 2 if 4-7 spaces to tab stop.
   (2)  Output only; no fillers on input.
   (3)  See the SET TTY CRLF command description.
   (4)  Sum of the fillers output for a CR and LF.


          Argument                          Function

        FORM                Controls the output  of  line-feeds  for  the
                            formfeed  and  vertical  tab  characters.  NO
                            FORM  instructs  the  system  to  output  the
                            line-feeds.   FORM  is a declaration that the
                            terminal has the capability of generating the
                            line-feeds.  The default is determined by the
                            declared terminal type.

        GAG                 Controls the reception of messages that  were
                            sent  with  the  SEND command.  GAG instructs
                            the system to prevent messages from  reaching
                            the  terminal  when the job is at user level.
                            NO GAG allows messages to reach the  terminal
                            at any time.  The default setting is GAG.

        HOLD                Controls the use of the SCROLL  key  on  VT5x
                            terminals.   See  the VT52 Owner's Manual for
                            instructions on the use of this key.




                                   2-346
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


        IGNORE              Sets  input  speed  to  0,  making   terminal
                            useless.

        ISO                 Controls     compatibility      with      ISO
                            (International     Standards    Organization)
                            Latin-1 supplemental graphic  character  set.
                            NO ISO means DEC Multinational Character Set.
                            To display the current setting, you must  use
                            the command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.

        LC                  Controls the translation of lowercase letters
                            to   uppercase  letters.   NO LC  allows  all
                            characters to be translated to  uppercase  by
                            the monitor.

                            Frequently,  it  is  convenient  to  have   a
                            terminal  with  both  uppercase and lowercase
                            simulate the behavior of one  with  uppercase
                            only.   TTY  NO  LC  causes  the  monitor  to
                            perform this simulation.  The echo sent  back
                            by the monitor always matches the case of the
                            characters after translation.  By looking  at
                            the   output,   you   can  determine  whether
                            translation was  performed  by  the  monitor.
                            The  default  condition  is determined by the
                            declared terminal type.

        LENGTH n            Defines the number of lines of your  terminal
                            page.   To stop output on your terminal after
                            a page of length n, use the arguments STOP or
                            PAGE.

                            SBELL, SSTOP,  STOP,  XONXOF  will  use  this
                            value as the page length.

        LOCALCOPY           Controls echoing to the terminal.  Local-copy
                            terminals (terminals that automatically print
                            each character as you type it) do not require
                            that   the  system  echo  characters  to  the
                            terminal.   NO LOCALCOPY   is   the   default
                            setting.   Use  LOCALCOPY  for  a  local-copy
                            terminal.

        OVERSTRIKE          Indicates    the    terminal     allows     a
                            three-character   sequence   to   create  one
                            composite output character  by  printing  one
                            character,  backspacing,  and  then  printing
                            another character over the first.  To display
                            the  current  setting  of this attribute, you
                            must use the command INITIA ATTRIBUTES.



                                   2-347
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


        PAGE n              Defines the number of lines on your  terminal
                            page,   enables  recognition  of  CTRL/Q  and
                            CTRL/S (XON/XOFF; see Section 1.6.) and stops
                            output  to your terminal after n lines.  That
                            is, TTY PAGE n is the same as  TTY  LENGTH  n
                            XONXOF  STOP.   The  default  value  of  n is
                            determined by  the  declared  terminal  type.
                            TTY  PAGE and TTY PAGE 0 have the same effect
                            as TTY XONXOF.

                            This argument is useful for display terminals
                            because it prevents output from scrolling off
                            the screen.  When output is  stopped  by  the
                            system  after  n  lines,  the  terminal  bell
                            rings.  Use CTRL/Q to continue output to your
                            terminal.

        QUOTE               Causes a  ^V  (control-V)  and  character  to
                            behave  as  a  single  super-quote character.
                            They will not echo separately, and  a  single
                            delete  erases  them  both.   NO QUOTE is the
                            default argument.

        REMOTE              Clears the "local" access characteristic  for
                            your  job.  REMOTE is not recommended for use
                            by non-privileged users  because  the  action
                            can  be  reversed  only by an operator [1,2].
                            The monitor does not allow CTY:   to  be  set
                            REMOTE.  NO REMOTE sets your terminal so that
                            you can log into  an  account  that  requires
                            local  access.   For  specific information on
                            account characteristics, including local  and
                            remote  access  types, see the description of
                            REACT in the  TOPS-10  Software  Installation
                            Guide.

        RTCOMPATIBILITY     Disables  the  CTRL/R  and  CTRL/T  features.
                            (See  Section 1.6 for a description of CTRL/R
                            and  CTRL/T.)  NO  RTCOMPATIBILITY   is   the
                            default argument.

        SBELL               Sets the  terminal  to  ring  the  bell  when
                            output  is automatically stopped (this is the
                            default action).   NO  SBELL  suppresses  the
                            bell.








                                   2-348
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


        SLAVE               Specifies that the terminal  becomes  slaved,
                            so  that  no  commands  can  be  typed on the
                            terminal.  This is useful for terminals  that
                            are ASSIGNed by another job.  This command is
                            not recommended  for  use  by  non-privileged
                            users  because  the  actions  can be reversed
                            only by an operator [1,2], using NO SLAVE.

        SPEED m n           Sets the terminal transmitting speed to m and
                            the  receiving  speed  to n.  To set the same
                            transmitting and receiving speed, use  the  m
                            argument alone.  You must adjust the speed of
                            your terminal to match m and n using switches
                            on your terminal.

                            NO SPEED is an invalid argument.

                                                NOTE

                                Certain  hardware  configurations  do
                                not allow transmit and receive speeds
                                to be different (also  called  "split
                                speed").

        SSTOP n             Ignores CTRL/Q until output is stopped either
                            automatically  by  the  system,  or by CTRL/S
                            from user.  The page length n is optional.

        STOP n              Stops output to  the  terminal  automatically
                            after   n   lines.   The  page  length  n  is
                            optional.  When you  type  CTRL/Q,  the  page
                            length counter is reset to 0.

        TAB                 Specifies that this terminal has hardware TAB
                            stops  every  eight  columns.  The default is
                            set according to the declared terminal  type.
                            When  you  use  NO TAB, the monitor simulates
                            tabs by sending the necessary number of SPACE
                            characters.

        TAPE                Causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to  stop  and  start
                            the paper tape reader on a Teletype.  See the
                            TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.  NO  TAPE,  the
                            default, causes CTRL/S and CTRL/Q to stop and
                            resume  output  from  the   system   to   the
                            terminal.  See Sections 1.6.7 and 1.6.8.

        TIDY                No longer supported.





                                   2-349
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


        TYPE nnnn           Sets terminal characteristics defined by  the
                            declared terminal type (nnnn).

                            For a list of the terminal  types  recognized
                            by the system, type:

                            HELP *

                            The output from HELP *  includes  a  list  of
                            supported terminal types.

                            TTY is a generic terminal and is the  default
                            for  terminals  whose  types  have  not  been
                            declared.  The characteristics set for  these
                            types are described in Table 2-2.

                            The characteristics that are set by declaring
                            the terminal type are:

                            LOWERCASE
                            TABS
                            FORM
                            WIDTH
                            DISPLAY
                            FILL
                            PAGE
                            ALTMODE

                            TYPE  is  not  a  necessary  portion  of  the
                            command  string.   For  example,  you can set
                            your terminal type to that  of  an  LA120  by
                            typing SET TTY LA120.

        UC                  Equivalent to SET TTY NO LC.  Translates  all
                            lowercase  letters  to  uppercase.   NO UC is
                            equivalent to SET TTY LC.

        WIDTH n             Sets the terminal width (the  length  of  the
                            line) to n characters.  This command combined
                            with the SET TTY CRLF command enables you  to
                            specify  the  widest possible margin for your
                            terminal.  The default setting is  determined
                            by the declared terminal type.

        XONXOF              Allows you to use CTRL/S  (XOFF)  and  CTRL/Q
                            (XON) to stop and resume system output to the
                            terminal.  This is the  default.   NO  XONXOF
                            prevents  the  system from recognizing CTRL/S
                            and CTRL/Q.




                                   2-350
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                           SET TTY or TTY Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN.

   Restrictions

        The SET TTY (or TTY) command is not available to batch jobs.

   Associated Commands

        INITIA     displays the TTY parameters

   Example

        Tell the system that your terminal is a VT340.

        .SET TTY VT340 <RET>

        Issue the INITIA TTY  command.   The  system  responds  with  the
        terminal characteristics of a VT340 terminal.

        .I TTY <RET>

        RL353A DEC10 Development 16:02:49 TTY162 system 1026/1042/1322
        Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 162

        TYPE:VT340  MODEL:VT340      CLASS:VT300      APC:HARDWIRED
        ECHO        WIDTH:80         LENGTH:24        NOSTOP
        FILL:0      LC               TABS             NOFORM
        CRLF        NOGAG            SBELL            DISPLA
        NOTAPE      BLANKS           NOALTMOD         NORTCOMP
        NOREMOTE    XONXOF           NOUNPAUS         NOESCAPE
        NOEIGHTB    NOQUOTE          IDLEDI:0         EDITOR
        NOSLAVE

        .















                                   2-351
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                         SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command


                         SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command



   Function

        The SET VIRTUAL LIMIT command sets the current virtual page limit
        (CVPL).  CVPL is described in the TOPS-10 Monitor Calls Manual.

   Format

        SET VIRTUAL LIMIT nK
                          nP

        Where:    K can be specified within the range 1 to 256K; P can be
                  specified within the range 1 to 512p.

                  1K equals 1024 words and 1P equals a page of 512 words.
                  If K and P are omitted, K is assumed.

                  If you use 0 for the argument, the  value  of  CVPL  is
                  assumed.   CVPL  is set by the system administrator and
                  is the default virtual page limit.

                  LIMIT is an optional portion of the command line.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Example

        Set your page limit to 32 pages.

        .SET VIRTUAL LIMIT 32P<RET>

        Run the SORT program:

        .R SORT<RET>

        *TEAM.RNO=TEAM.RNO/RECORD:80/KEY:1:80
        /COLLATE:FILE:COLLATE.RNO<RET>

        System message says that you set your page limit too low.

        ?SRTNEC NOT ENOUGH CORE FOR SORT/MERGE

        *^C





                                   2-352
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                         SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command


        Reset page limit.

        .SET VIRTUAL LIMIT 132P<RET>

        .R SORT<RET>

        *TEAM.RNO=TEAM.RNO/RECORD:80/KEY:1:80
        /COLLATE:FILE:COLLATE.RNO<RET>

        Program ran successfully in the 132 pages that you specified.

        [SRTXPN EXPANDING TO 130P]
        SORTED 14 RECORDS
        34 KEY COMPARISONS,
        2.43 PER RECORD
        16 RECORD LEAVES IN MEMORY
        0 RUNS
        0:00:00 CPU TIME, 16.71 MS PER RECORD
        0:00:00 ELAPSED TIME
        *^C

        .































                                   2-353
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET WATCH Command


                             SET WATCH Command



   Function

        The SET WATCH command provides a means with which to measure  the
        performance  status  of  your  program.   This  command tells the
        system to print (or suppress) job statistics.

   Formats

        SET WATCH arg,arg,...

             Prints the specified  WATCH  statistics.   You  specify  the
             statistics using the arguments.


        SET WATCH ALL

             Prints all the WATCH statistics.


        SET WATCH NONE

             Stops printing all WATCH statistics.


        SET WATCH NO arg,arg,...

             Stops printing the specified WATCH statistics.

        Where:    arg can be one of the following arguments:

                  DAY        WRITE
                  VERSION    MTA
                  READ       CONTEXTS
                  RUN        FILES
                  WAIT

        The  following  arguments  enable  printing  whenever  a  monitor
        command passes the job from monitor level to user level.

        DAY       Prints the time of day, as [hh:mm:ss]

        VERSION   Prints the version of the program  in  standard  format
                  (see the VERSION command).  The version is printed when
                  your job issues a GET or RUN command; a SETNAM, GETSEG,
                  or SEGOP. monitor call; or if a DAEMON wait occurs.

        The following arguments print a message whenever the terminal  is


                                   2-354
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET WATCH Command


        returned  to  monitor level through the CTRL/C, EXIT, HALT, ERROR
        IN JOBn, or DEVICE xxx OPR zz ACTION REQUESTED messages.

        READ      Prints the  incremental  number  of  disk  blocks  read
                  modulo 4096.

        RUN       Prints the incremental runtime.

        WAIT      Prints the wait time.  (That is, the time elapsed since
                  you started or continued your program.)

        WRITE     Prints the incremental number of  disk  blocks  written
                  modulo 4096.

        When an UNLOAD command, the  unload  function  of  a  UUO,  or  a
        DEASSIGN command is executed,

        MTA      Prints magnetic tape statistics in the form:

        [MTxn:reelid READ (C/H/S) = a/b/c WRITE (C/H/S) = d/e/f]

        Where:    x represents the tape controller

                  n represents the drive unit number

                  reelid is the reel identification

                  a is the number of characters read

                  b is the number of hard-read errors

                  c is the number of soft-read errors

                  d is the number of characters written

                  e is the number of hard-write errors

                  f is the number of soft-write errors

                  When a, b, and c are 0, the information  pertaining  to
                  READ will not be printed.

                  When d, e, and f are 0, the information  pertaining  to
                  WRITE will not be printed.









                                   2-355
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET WATCH Command


        When any files are accessed,

        FILES    Prints a message for each file  accessed.   The  message
                 takes the form:
|  
|                [Fxn: dev:file.ext[ppn,sfd,...] PC:nnnnnn, error z]

        Where:    F (where it appears) signifies a FILOP

                  x = L for Lookup
                      E for Enter
                      R for Rename

                  n   is the channel number

                  z   is the error if the LOOKUP, ENTER, or RENAME  fail.
                      Error  codes  can  be  found in the TOPS-10 Monitor
                      Calls Manual.

        Note that, in the case of  execute-only  jobs,  this  message  is
        suppressed.

        Whenever the current context changes, (by the use of the CONTEXT,
        PUSH, or POP commands),

        CONTEXTS   Prints information about  the  current  context.   The
                   message is in the form:

        [CONTEXT contextname (n) prog]

        Where:    contextname is the name (if any) of the current context

                  N is the current context number

                  prog is the name of  the  program  (if  any)  that  the
                  current context has stored in core.

        Any combination of the arguments can be specified in  any  order.
        Statistics are not printed for commands that do not run programs,
        such as ASSIGN or PJOB.  When you log in,  your  job  is  set  to
        WATCH  the  statistics for which you notified the system manager.
        The information on what statistics to WATCH is kept in  ACCT.SYS.
        The default is MTA.

   Associated Messages

        If you type SET WATCH with  no  arguments,  or  with  an  invalid
        argument, the following error message occurs:

        ?ARGS ARE: CONTEXTS,DAY,RUN,WAIT,READ,WRITE,VERSION,MTA,
        FILES,ALL,NONE


                                   2-356
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                             SET WATCH Command


                                      NOTE

                Enabling  WATCH   output   interacts   with   the
                incremental  data  printed  by  the  TIME and DSK
                commands.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

   Example

        List the arguments:

        .SET WATCH<RET>
        ?ARGS ARE: CONTEXTS,DAY,RUN,WAIT,READ,WRITE,VERSION,MTA,
        FILES,ALL,NONE

        Set the statistics for time, run time, wait time, version number:

        .SET WATCH DAY<RET>

        .SET WATCH RUN<RET>

        .SET WATCH WAIT<RET>

        .SET WATCH VERSION<RET>

        Run a program:

        .RUN LOOP<RET>
        [hh:mm:ss]
        ?LOOP.SAV NOT FOUND
        [0.06  0.91   ]

        .R PIP<RET>
        [hh:mm:ss]

        [S:PIP  33B(260) + ]
        *C
        [0.08 6.08   ]

        .R TECO<RET>
        [hh:mm:ss]

        [S: TECO 230(162) + ]
        *C
        [2.05 6.10   ]

        .



                                   2-357
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                          SHOW ALLOCATION Command


                          SHOW ALLOCATION Command



   Function

        The SHOW ALLOCATION command prints information on  your  terminal
        about  the  resources  that  are  allocated  to  your  job.  SHOW
        ALLOCATION prints the names of the  tape  and  disk  volumes  and
        volume  sets that are allocated and mounted for your job, and the
        drives on which they are mounted.

        The information is printed on  your  terminal  in  the  following
        form:

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB x user-name [ppn]

            VOLUME SET            RESOURCES           TYPE     ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------  ---  ---
        name                  volume             description   no.  no.

        Where:

             x is the number of your job.

             user-name is your user name.

             [ppn] is your project-programmer number.

             name is the name of the volume  set,  if  it  applies.   For
             example,  if  the  resource  is a drive, "---" is printed in
             this column.

             volume is the name  of  the  volume  that  is  allocated  or
             mounted for your job.  If the resource is a tape volume set,
             the name shows the volume that is currently  mounted.   Disk
             structure  names,  disk  drives,  and  tape  drives are also
             shown.

             description is the description of the type of volume.   This
             identifies  whether the resource is a structure, disk drive,
             magtape drive, or magtape volume.  The description is useful
             when resources have identical names.

             no.  is the number of disk packs, drives, or tapes that  are
             allocated  to your job and that are mounted for your job for
             each resource.

   Format

        SHOW ALLOCATION


                                   2-358
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                          SHOW ALLOCATION Command


   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Requires LOGIN.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        The following example shows the use of the ALLOCATE,  DEALLOCATE,
        MOUNT, DISMOUNT, and SHOW ALLOCATION commands.  The resources are
        reserved for a multivolume tape  volume  set  with  the  ALLOCATE
        command.  The name of the volume set is TAPE-SET, and it contains
        three volumes.  The logical name TS is assigned to the tape  set.
        The tape is write enabled, and it does not have standard labels.

        .ALLOCATE TAPE-SET(VOL1,VOL2,VOL3):TS/WRITE-ENABLE/LABEL:NONE<RET>
        [ALLOCATE REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #672]

        A file structure named DSKR: is mounted for the job:

        .MOUNT DSKR:<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST DSKR QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [STRUCTURE DSKR MOUNTED]

        The job's resources are shown using the SHOW ALLOCATION command:

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE       ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------  ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT   1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT      2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT      1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE      1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE      1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE      1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0













                                   2-359
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                          SHOW ALLOCATION Command


        The tape set is mounted, and the resources are again displayed:

        .MOUNT TS<RET>
        [MOUNT REQUEST TS QUEUED, REQUEST #673]
        [MAGTAPE TS MOUNTED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE       ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------  ---  ---
        ---                   9TK 800/1600       MAGTAPE UNIT   1    1
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT      2    2
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT      1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE      1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE      1    1
        DSKR                  DSKR               STRUCTURE      1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0

        After work  is  finished  by  accessing  the  tape  set  and  the
        structure,  the  structure  is dismounted.  Because the structure
        was no explicitly allocated, it is automatically deallocated.

        .DISMOUNT DSKR<RET>
        [VOLUME SET DSKR HAS BEEN DISMOUNTED]

        The tape volume set is dismounted:

        .DISMOUNT TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS DISMOUNTED]

        The job's resources are displayed:

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE       ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------  ---  ---
        ---                   9 TK 800/1600      MAGTAPE UNIT   1    0
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT      1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT      1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE      1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE      1    1
        TAPE-SET              VOL1               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL2               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0
        TAPE-SET              VOL3               MAGTAPE VOL.   1    0





                                   2-360
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                          SHOW ALLOCATION Command


        At this point, the tape set can again be mounted, or  it  can  be
        deallocated.  The tape set is deallocated:

        .DEALLOCATE TS<RET>
        [VOLUME SET TS HAS BEEN DEALLOCATED]

        .SHOW ALLOCATION<RET>

        ALLOCATION FOR JOB 59 MARY MAROTTA [27,5434]
             VOLUME SET           RESOURCES         TYPE       ALL  OWN
        --------------------- -----------------  ------------  ---  ---
        ---                   RP06               DISK UNIT      1    1
        ---                   RP20               DISK UNIT      1    1
        DSKB                  DSKB               STRUCTURE      1    1
        DSKC                  DSKC               STRUCTURE      1    1






































                                   2-361
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                            SHOW QUEUES Command


                            SHOW QUEUES Command



   Function

        The SHOW QUEUES command displays a list of  the  entries  in  the
        system  queues  on  your  terminal.   You  can specify the system
        queues that you want displayed, or you can see all of the  system
        queues.   SHOW  QUEUES  lists the mount queue, batch queue, event
        queue, and output queues.

   Format

        SHOW QUEUES argument/switches

        Where:

             argument specifies the queue or queues to be displayed.  The
             argument  is  optional.   If you do not specify an argument,
             all of the system queues are displayed.

             The following arguments are valid:

                  ALL-REQUESTS        Shows queue requests in all  system
                                      queues.    This   is   the  default
                                      function.

                  BATCH-REQUESTS      Shows batch requests.

                  CARD-PUNCH-REQUESTS Shows card punch requests.

                  EVENTS-REQUESTS     Shows scheduled system events.

                  MOUNT-REQUESTS      Shows mount requests.

                  OUTPUT-REQUESTS     Shows  requests   in   all   output
                                      queues.

                  PAPER-TAPE-REQUESTS Shows paper tape punch requests.

                  PLOTTER-REQUESTS    Shows plotter requests.

                  PRINTER-REQUESTS    Shows line printer requests.

             /switches is one or more of  the  following  switches.   The
             switches  define  the  amount of information to be displayed
             about  each  queue  request  and  which  queue  requests  to
             display.   By  default,  SHOW  QUEUE displays all the system
             queues for all jobs.



                                   2-362
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                            SHOW QUEUES Command


          Switch                            Function

        /ALL                Displays a list of all  the  queue  requests.
                            This  is  the default function.  When showing
                            the mount requests, /ALL prints a list of all
                            the structures that are mounted and, for each
                            structure, a list of every job that  has  the
                            structure in its search list.

        /BRIEF              Displays a short description of each request.

        /FULL               Displays all available information about each
                            request.

        /HELP               Prints information about SHOW ALLOCATION  and
                            SHOW  QUEUES.   To  use  this  switch,  type:
                            SHOW/HELP.

        /USER:[ppn]         Displays the queue requests for the specified
                            user.   The project-programmer number must be
                            typed in brackets.

   Associated Messages

        [THE QUEUES ARE EMPTY]

        This message occurs when there are no queue requests  that  match
        the specification.

   Characteristics

        Runs the QUEUE program.

        Destroys your core image.

        Leaves your job at monitor level.

   Example

        1.  The following example illustrates the output  from  the  SHOW
            QUEUES command, used with the MOUNT-REQUESTS argument:

            .SHOW QUEUES MOUNT-REQUESTS<RET>

            MOUNT QUEUE:
            VOLUME  STATUS  TYPE  WRITE  REQ#   JOB#        USER
            ------  ------  ----  -----  ----   ----    ------------
            MTB2    WAITING TAPE  LOCKED  614     52    MAROTTA [27,5434]
              VOLUME-SET: MTB2
              LABEL-TYPE: BYPASS, TRACKS: 9, DENSITY: 1600 BPI
            THERE IS 1 REQUEST IN THE QUEUE


                                   2-363
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                SKIP Command


                               SKIP Command



   Function

        The SKIP command moves a magnetic tape forward a specified number
        of files or records or to the logical end of tape.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running the PIP program.

   Formats

        SKIP MTxn: x FILES

             Advances forward x files.

        SKIP MTxn: x RECORDS

             Advances forward x records.

        SKIP MTxn: EOT

             Advances forward to the logical end of tape.

        Where:    MTxn:  is the physical device name of the magnetic tape
                  unit.  Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.

                  x is  a  decimal  number  representing  the  number  of
                  records or files to skip over.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Example

        Space the tape MTA2: forward 2 files:

        .SKIP MTA2: 2 FILES<RET>

        .








                                   2-364
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               START Command


                               START Command



   Function

        The START command begins execution of a program that  you  loaded
        previously  with  either  the  LOAD  or  GET command, or that you
        interrupted while running (for example, with a CTRL/C).

        You  can  optionally  specify  an  explicit  start  address.   If
        omitted,  the  address  supplied in the file (.JBSA) is used.  If
        you specify an address argument  and  the  job  was  executing  a
        monitor  call  when interrupted (that is, it was at monitor level
        but not in TTY input wait or SLEEP mode), the  monitor  continues
        the  job  at  the  location  at  which  it  was  interrupted  and
        eventually traps to the specified START address.

        If you try to  START  an  execute-only  program  at  a  specified
        address,  you  receive  an error message.  If the high segment of
        this program is sharable, execution of the START command turns on
        the user-mode write protect bit.

   Format

        START addr

        Where:    addr is the octal address  where  execution  starts  if
                  other  than  the  location  specified  within  the file
                  (.JBSA).  This argument is optional.   If  you  do  not
                  specify  this  argument,  the address comes from .JBSA.
                  You can specify a starting address of 0.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Does not function during device I/O.

        Requires memory.

   Example

        Type a program.

        .TYPE PROG.FOR<RET>
             TYPE 69
        69 FORMAT (' TESTING EXECUTION')
             END




                                   2-365
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               START Command


        Load the program.

        .LOAD PROG<RET>
        FORTRAN:PROG
        MAIN.
        LINK:LOADING
        EXIT

        SAVE the program.

        .SAVE PROG<RET>
        PROG SAVED

        START the program.

        .START<RET>

        TESTING EXECUTION

        END OF EXECUTION
        CPU TIME: 0.01  ELAPSED TIME: 0.03
        EXIT

        .





























                                   2-366
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


                              SUBMIT Command



   Function

        The SUBMIT command places entries into the input  queue  for  the
        batch  system.   See  the  QUEUE  command description for further
        information and examples.

        See  the  TOPS-10/TOPS-20  Batch  Reference   Manual   for   more
        information about batch jobs.

   Format

        SUBMIT jobname=control-file-spec,log-file-spec

        Where:    jobname is the name of the job to be entered  into  the
                  queue.   The  jobname is optional.  If you omit it, the
                  default job name is the name of the log file.

                  The equal sign is required only if you specify the  job
                  name.

                  control-file-spec is the name of the input file.   This
                  file contains all monitor-level and user-level commands
                  for processing by the batch  controller  (BATCON).   If
                  you  do not include a device in the file specification,
                  and if the monitor does not find the  control  file  in
                  your  job  search  list, the monitor will search ersatz
                  device CTL for the control file.

                  log-file-spec is the name  of  the  output  file.   The
                  batch   controller   uses   this  file  to  record  its
                  processing of the job.

        Only the two files mentioned above can be specified in a  request
        to  the  batch  input  queue.   The  name  of the control file is
        required; the log file name is optional and, if omitted, is taken
        from  the  control file.  If the job name is omitted, it defaults
        to the name of the log file, if  present,  or  the  name  of  the
        control  file  if  no  log file is specified.  If an extension is
        omitted, the following are assumed:

        .CTL for the control file
        .LOG for the log file

        If you type SUBMIT with no arguments or switches, a list  of  the
        jobs in the batch queue will be printed on your terminal.




                                   2-367
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        The switches to this command can be divided into two  categories,
        depending  on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
        used more times, in a single command string.  The two  categories
        are:

         o  Queue-Operation Switches

            These switches can be used only once in the  command  string.
            They  affect  the  entire  request,  and  you  can place them
            anywhere in the command string.  If  you  have  used  one  of
            these  switches  in a command string, you cannot use it again
            in the same string.  Many switches have a  /NO  construction,
            which  has a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the /NO
            construction of a switch in the same command string with  the
            positive construction.

         o  File-Control Switches

            These switches can be used any number of times in the command
            string.  You can also use the /NO construction of a switch in
            the same command string with the positive  construction.   To
            achieve  a  temporary or permanent effect by the placement of
            the switch, see Section 1.8.4.

           Switch        Category                   Function

        /ABEFORE:        File         Queues  the file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /ACCOUNT:        Queue        Specifies  the account to which the
         "string"        operation    job  should  be  charged.   If  the
                                      account         contains        any
                                      nonalphanumeric   characters,   you
                                      must    enclose   the   string   in
                                      quotation marks.

        /AFTER:          Queue        Processes  the  request  after  the
         date-time       operation    specified date and time.

        /ALLFILES:       Queue        Accepts the request only if all  of
         YES or NO       operation    the files  in  the  request  exist.
                                      That  is,  if any specified file is
                                      not   present,   no    files    are
                                      processed.   /ALLFILES  is the same
                                      as /ALLFILES:YES.  By  default  (or
                                      /ALLFILES:NO),  if all of the files
                                      do not exist,  the  existing  files
                                      are still processed.




                                   2-368
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /ASINCE:         File         Queues  only  the  files  that have
         date-time       control      been accessed since  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /ASSISTANCE:     Queue        Specifies  whether  the  job  needs
         YES or NO       operation    or   does   not    need    operator
                                      intervention.  Arguments are YES or
                                      1 and NO or 0.  If you  specify  NO
                                      and  then  request assistance, your
                                      job is  cancelled.   Assistance  is
                                      any  action  the operator must take
                                      before  the   job   can   continue,
                                      including    PLEASE    and    MOUNT
                                      requests.

        /BATLOG:arg      Queue        Controls the output of the log file
                         operation    on disk.  Arguments are:

                                      APPEND Appends the log file to  any
                                      existing file of the same name.

                                      SUPERSEDE  Replaces  any   existing
                                      file  of the same name with the new
                                      file.

                                      SPOOL  Spools  the  log  file   for
                                      output  to  the  printer instead of
                                      writing   the   file   into    your
                                      directory.   This  prevents a large
                                      log file from using  up  your  disk
                                      quota.      Will    not    override
                                      /OUTPUT:NOLOG.

        /BATOPT:         Queue        Specifies  a LOGIN  option  line to
         option-name     operation    read for LOGIN switches to apply to
                                      the  batch  job.   The  option name
                                      that you specify with  the  /BATOPT
                                      switch  must  match  a  line in the
                                      SWITCH.INI file that appears as:

                                      LOGIN:option-name/switches

        /BEFORE:         File         Queues   the  file  only if  it was
         date-time       control      created before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /BEGIN:n         File         Starts  the  output on the nth line
                         control      of the control file.





                                   2-369
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /CARDS:n         Queue        Uses  n  as the  maximum  number of
                         operation    cards that can be  punched  by  the
                                      batch  job  (up to 10,000).  If you
                                      omit the switch, no cards  will  be
                                      punched.

        /CHECK           Queue        Prints on your terminal  a list  of
                         operation    the batch  queue  entries  made  by
                                      your job.

        /CORE:n          Queue        Uses   n   (in decimal K)   as  the
                         operation    maximum amount of memory that  your
                                      job can use.

        /CREATE          Queue        Makes  a new  entry  in  the  batch
                         operation    input queue.  This is  the  default
                                      function   except   when   you  are
                                      listing queue entries.

        /DELETE          File         Deletes  the  control  file   after
                         control      processing it.  (This is  the  same
                                      as /DISPOSE:DELETE.)

        /DEPENDENCY:n    Queue        Specifies  the initial value of the
                         operation    dependency count in decimal.   When
                                      used   with  /MODIFY,  this  switch
                                      changes the dependency count  of  a
                                      previously  submitted job.  If n is
                                      a signed  number  (+  or  -),  that
                                      number  is  added  to or subtracted
                                      from the dependent job's count.  If
                                      n  is  not  a  signed  number,  the
                                      dependent job's count is changed to
                                      n.

        /DESTINATION:    Queue        Specifies   the   node   that  will
         node            operation    process output requests  from  this
                                      batch  job,  including the printing
                                      of the log file.  Use the node name
                                      or  the  node number to specify the
                                      node.  If you specify another  host
                                      or  a node that does not exist, the
                                      job  will   wait   in   the   queue
                                      indefinitely.









                                   2-370
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /DISPOSE:        File         Controls  the  disposition  of  the
         arg             control      control file after it is processed.
                                      The arguments to this switch are:

                                      DELETE deletes the file  from  your
                                      directory after spooling it.

                                      PRESERVE preserves the  file  after
                                      processing it.  This is the default
                                      function.

                                      RENAME is no longer supported.

        /DISTRIBUTION:   Queue        Specifies  text  to  place  in  the
         "text"          operation    distribution field, on  the  banner
                                      page of output listings.  For batch
                                      input  requests,  the  distribution
                                      text  is printed on the banner page
                                      of the log file listing.   You  can
                                      use  this  field to include mailing
                                      information, or the location  where
                                      the   operator   should  leave  the
                                      listing.  The text field may be  up
                                      to   39   alphanumeric  characters,
                                      including punctuation and spaces if
                                      the  text  is  placed  in quotation
                                      marks.

        /ERBINARY        File         Prints an error message if a binary
                         control      file is included  in  the  request.
                                      This is the default function.

        /ERNONE          Queue        Prints an error message if no files
                         operation    match the file specification.  This
                                      is the default function.

        /ERPROTECTION    Queue        Prints    an   error   message   if
                         operation    processing   the   request    would
                                      require   a   violation   of   file
                                      protection.  This  is  the  default
                                      function.

        /FAST            Queue        Prints a list of the entries in the
                         operation    batch queue in  a  fast  format  on
                                      your terminal.

        /FEET:n          Queue        Uses  n as  the  maximum  number of
                         operation    feet of paper tape that  the  batch
                                      job  can  punch.   If the switch is
                                      omitted, no paper tape is punched.



                                   2-371
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /HELP:           Queue        Prints information on your terminal
         arg             operation    about  the  QUEUE  command.    This
                                      switch  does  not  queue any files.
                                      /HELP can be used alone or with one
                                      of the following arguments:

                                      TEXT prints  a  message  about  the
                                      format  and  switches  to the QUEUE
                                      command.  This is the same as /HELP
                                      with no arguments.

                                      SWITCHES prints a list of  all  the
                                      switches  available  with the QUEUE
                                      command.

        /JOBNAME:name    Queue        Specifies the name of the job.  The
                         operation    job  name  can   be   up   to   six
                                      alphanumeric characters.

        /KILL            Queue        Removes  the specified  entry  from
                         operation    the queue.  You must give  the  job
                                      name,  /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID, to
                                      the left of the equal sign  in  the
                                      command line.  See the examples.

        /LENGTH:n:m      File         Processes  only  files whose length
                         control      is between n and m blocks.

        /LIST:arg        Queue        Prints  information  about the jobs
                         operation    in the queue.   If  you  use  /LIST
                                      alone,  it  shows  the  jobs in the
                                      queue.  This is equivalent to using
                                      the QUEUE command with no arguments
                                      and  no  switches.   /LIST  can  be
                                      abbreviated  to /L.  The switch can
                                      also  take  one  of  the  following
                                      arguments:

                                      ALL shows all data about each queue
                                      request.

                                      FAST shows a fast list of the queue
                                      requests.   (This  is  the  same as
                                      /FAST.)

                                      JOBS shows a list of  the  jobs  in
                                      the  queue.   (This  is the same as
                                      /LIST with no arguments.)

                                      SUMMARY shows only the summary line
                                      of the queue display.


                                   2-372
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /MESSAGE:arg     Queue        Specifies the amount of information
                         operation    to be printed when an error  occurs
                                      from  the request.  You can specify
                                      one  or  more  of   the   following
                                      arguments:

                                      ADDRESS  prints  the  location   in
                                      memory where the error occurred.

                                      CONTINUATION   prints   information
                                      about the error.

                                      FIRST  prints  the  one-line  error
                                      message.

                                      PREFIX prints a six-character error
                                      prefix.

        /METERS:n        Queue        Uses  n  as  the  maximum number of
                         operation    meters of paper tape  that  can  be
                                      punched by the job.

        /MODIFY          Queue        Alters  the specified parameter  in
                         operation    the  specified  job.   This  switch
                                      requires   that   you  have  access
                                      rights to the job.  You must give a
                                      job name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID,
                                      to the left of the  equal  sign  in
                                      the  command line.  This switch can
                                      be  used  to  modify  a  previously
                                      submitted  request  as  long as the
                                      request has not been started.   See
                                      the examples.

        /NEW:            File         Accepts  the  request even  if  the
         YES or NO       control      file does not yet exist.  Does  not
                                      search for control file on CTL:

        /NONEW           File         Does  not    accept    the     file
                         control      specification of a file  that  does
                                      not  exist.   This  is  the default
                                      function.

        /NONOTIFY        Queue        Does  not set the system to  notify
                         operation    you when a  request  is  completed.
                                      See /NOTIFY.

        /NOOPTION        Queue        Ignores    the   SWITCH.INI   file.
                         operation    SWITCH.INI files are  described  in
                                      Appendix B.



                                   2-373
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /NOPHYSICAL      File         Searches    for     the   file   by
                         control      recognizing  any   logical   names.
                                      This is the default function.

        /NORESTART       Queue        Prevents   the   job   from   being
                         operation    restarted if it was stopped because
                                      of  a  system  crash.   This is the
                                      default function.

        /NOTIFY:         Queue        Sets the system to notify you  when
         YES or NO       operation    your request is completed.   To  be
                                      notified,   use   /NOTIFY  with  no
                                      argument, or with YES or  1  as  an
                                      argument.         To       suppress
                                      notification,  use   /NOTIFY:0   or
                                      /NOTIFY:NO.   By  default,  you are
                                      not  notified  when  a  request  is
                                      finished.

        /OKBINARY        File         Accepts   files   whose  extensions
                         control      indicate that they  include  binary
                                      information.   Normally, files with
                                      extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,  .REL,
                                      .EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
                                      for processing.

        /OKNONE          Queue        Does not produce a warning  message
                         operation    if  no   files   match   the   file
                                      specification.

        /OKPROTECTION    Queue        Does  not  output  an error message
                         operation    when a protection code is violated.

        /OPTION:option   Queue        Uses  the option  line QUEUE:option
                         operation    in the SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI
                                      files are discussed in Appendix B.

        /OUTPUT:arg      Queue        Determines  whether or not  the log
                         operation    file will be printed.  This  switch
                                      has  three  arguments  only  one of
                                      which can be specified at  a  time.
                                      The  arguments  are LOG, NOLOG, and
                                      ERROR.

                                      LOG prints the log file.

                                      NOLOG suppresses  printing  of  the
                                      log file.

                                      ERROR prints the log file  only  if
                                      an error occurs.


                                   2-374
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /PAGES:n         Queue        Uses  n  as the  maximum  number of
                         operation    pages of output that your  job  can
                                      print.

        /PATH:[dir]      Queue        Specifies   the   directory  to  be
                         operation    accessed.

        /PHYSICAL        File         Does  not recognize  logical  names
                         control      for devices in the command line.

        /PRESERVE        File         Saves  the   control   file   after
                         control      processing it.  This is the default
                                      and    it    is    the    same   as
                                      /DISPOSE:PRESERVE.

        /PRIORITY:n      Queue        Gives  the specified priority (n is
                         operation    1 to 63) to the request.  A  larger
                                      number has greater priority.

        /PROCESSING:node Queue        Specifies   the  node  that  is  to
                         operation    process the  batch  job.   Use  the
                                      node name or node number to specify
                                      the  node.   Batch  jobs   can   be
                                      submitted  to  IBM host nodes only.
                                      Jobs submitted to nodes other  than
                                      IBM  host  nodes  will  wait in the
                                      queue indefinitely.

        /PROTECTION:     Queue        Specifies a protection code for the
         nnn             operation    queue request.  Queue requests  are
                                      protected  in  the  same  way  that
                                      files are protected.   See  Section
                                      1.9.4.

        /READER          Queue        Causes a disk-resident card  job to
                         operation    be read as if it  were  punched  on
                                      cards   and   had   been  submitted
                                      through the card reader.

        /REMOTE          Queue        Prints on your terminal a  list  of
                         operation    remote queues.  Must be  used  with
                                      /DESTINATION.











                                   2-375
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /REQUESTID:n     Queue        Specifies        the        request
                         operation    identification number  of  the  job
                                      you  wish  to  modify  or terminate
                                      (/KILL).         The        request
                                      identification  number  is assigned
                                      when the request is  queued.   This
                                      switch  is  used to the left of the
                                      equal sign  in  the  command  line.
                                      See the examples.

        /RESTARTABLE:    Queue        Specifies whether the job should be
         YES or NO       operation    restarted  after  the  system   has
                                      crashed    and    been    restored.
                                      Arguments are:  YES (or 1)  and  NO
                                      (or  0).   The  default function is
                                      NO.

        /RUN:file        Queue        Executes   the  specified   program
                         operation    (file)  after   your   request   is
                                      accepted.

        /RUNCORE:nx      Queue        Executes the  program  specified in
                         operation    /RUN  in  nK  of  core  after   the
                                      request is accepted.  The value can
                                      also be expressed in  terms  of  nP
                                      (pages).

        /RUNOFFSET:n     Queue        Executes  the program specified  in
                         operation    /RUN  with  offset  n   after   the
                                      request is accepted.

        /SEQUENCE:n      Queue        Specifies a sequence number to help
                         operation    identify a request to  be  modified
                                      or  deleted.   This  switch must be
                                      used to the left of the equal  sign
                                      in the command line.

        /SINCE:          File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates after the specified date  and
                                      time.

        /SITGO           Queue        Processes  the batch  job using the
                         operation    SITGO compiler.

        /STREAM:n        Queue        Prints a  list of the jobs that are
                         operation    running or destined to run  in  the
                                      specified batch stream.






                                   2-376
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        /TAG:xxx         File         Starts at the statement labeled xxx
                         control      in the control file.  Equivalent to
                                      GOTO  xxx  at  the beginning of the
                                      control file.

        /TIME:hh-mm-ss   Queue        Specifies  the  CPU  time limit for
                         operation    the job.  The form /TIME:n  can  be
                                      used   to  specify  a  limit  of  n
                                      seconds.

        /TMPFIL:         Queue        Creates a temporary file   TMP:file
         file:text       operation    and enters the text into this file.

        /TPLOT:n         Queue        Uses  n  minutes   as  the  maximum
                         operation    amount of plotting time allowed for
                                      your  job.  If you omit the switch,
                                      no plotter time is allowed.

        /UNIQUE:         Queue        Specifies  whether  more  than  one
         YES or NO       operation    batch job can run from your PPN  at
                                      one  time.  If the value is YES (or
                                      1), only one  job  will  run  at  a
                                      time.   Any  other  batch jobs will
                                      wait  until  the  previous  job  is
                                      finished.   If  the value is NO (or
                                      0), any number of  batch  jobs  can
                                      run at the same time.

        /USERNAME:       Queue        Specifies  the user  name field for
         "name"          operation    the banner page of output listings.
                                      For  batch input requests, the user
                                      name is printed on the banner  page
                                      for  the  log  file  listing.  This
                                      field  can   contain   up   to   39
                                      alphanumeric  characters,  and  may
                                      include punctuation and  spaces  if
                                      the  name  is  placed  in quotation
                                      marks.

   Associated Messages

        When you make an entry into the batch queue,  the  system  prints
        the following message on your terminal:

        [BATCH JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, RUN TIME:time]








                                   2-377
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        Where:    name is the name of the job in the queue.  This can  be
                  specified  by the user.  Otherwise, the name of the log
                  file is used.

                  nnn  is  the  number  that   represents   the   request
                  identification of the job in the queue.

                  time is the amount of time allowed for the batch job to
                  run.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your job at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require that you be logged in if you only want the  list
        of batch queue entries.

   Examples

        1.  Create a control file.

            .SOS CUE.CTL<RET>

            INPUT:  CUE.CTL
            00100 PRINT SYS:  NOTICE.TXT<RET>
            00200 <ESC>
            E<RET>

            [DKSC:  CUE.CTL]

            Submit the control file.

            .SUBMIT CUE.CTL<RET>

            [BATCH JOB CUE QUEUED, REQUEST #132, LIMIT 0:05:00]

            Use DIRECTORY to see new .LOG file.

            .DIR CUE<RET>

            CUE CTL 1 <055> dd-mmm-yy DSKC:  [27,5434]
            CUE LOG 3 <055> dd-mmm-yy
            TOTAL OF 4 BLOCKS IN 2 FILES ON DSKC:  [27,5434]

            .






                                   2-378
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SUBMIT Command


        2.  Submit the control  file  CUE.CTL  to  the  batch  queue  for
            processing at 5:00 p.m.:

            .SUBMIT CUE /AFTER:17:00<RET>
            [BATCH JOB CUE QUEUED, REQUEST  79, LIMIT 0:05:00]

            Change the processing time to 4:30 p.m., identifying the  job
            by its request identification number:

            .SUBMIT /REQUESTID:79= /MODIFY /AFTER:16:30<RET>
            [1 JOB MODIFIED]

            Cancel the batch job CUE altogether:

            .SUBMIT CUE= /KILL<RET>
            [1 JOB CANCELED]

            .



































                                   2-379
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SYSTAT Command


                              SYSTAT Command



   Function

        The SYSTAT command prints status information about the system.

        To write the information on the disk as  a  file  with  the  name
        SYSTAT.TXT, assign device DSK: with logical name SYSTAT.

        SYSTAT prints the status of the system:   system  name,  time  of
        day,  date,  system  uptime, CPU uptime on an SMP system, percent
        null time (idle plus lost time), number of jobs in use.

        SYSTAT prints the status  of  each  job  logged-in:   job-number;
        project-programmer number ([OPR] is the operator's job, [SELF] is
        your job), terminal line number (CTY is console terminal, DET  is
        detached,  Pn  is  PTY  number);  program name being run; program
        size; job and  swapped  state  (see  the  TOPS-10  Monitor  Calls
        Manual), and runtime since the job logged in.

        SYSTAT prints the status of high segments being used:  name (PRIV
        is nonsharable, OBS is superseded); device or file structure name
        from which the segment came; the directory name; the size (SW  is
        swapped  out, SWF is swapped out and fragmented, F is in core and
        fragmented on disk, SPY signifies using the  SPY  monitor  call);
        the number of users in core or on the disk.

        SYSTAT prints the amount of  swapping  space  used,  the  virtual
        memory  used,  swapping  ratio,  active  swapping  ratio, virtual
        memory saved by sharing, and average job size.

        SYSTAT prints status of busy devices:  device  name,  job-number,
        how  device  is  assigned  (AS is ASSIGN command, INIT is INIT or
        OPEN monitor call, AS+INIT is both ways).

        SYSTAT prints system file structures:  free blocks, mount  count,
        single-access structures, and private structures.

        SYSTAT  prints  non-network  dataset  control:   number  of   the
        terminal, status of the terminal.











                                   2-380
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SYSTAT Command


   Format

        SYSTAT arg

        Where:    arg is one or more single letters (in any  order)  used
                  to  specify  any  subset  of  the  SYSTAT  output.  The
                  argument is optional.  The following is a list  of  the
                  arguments:

         Argument                 Function

             B      Prints busy device status.
             C      Prints continuous SYSTAT.
             D      Prints dormant segment status.
             E      Prints non-disk error report.
             F      Prints file structure status.
             G      Prints other system status.
             H      Prints help text listing the arguments.
             J      Prints job status.
             L      Lists the SYSTAT output on LPT.
             N      Prints non-job status (that is, all information
                    except J).
             P      Prints disk performance.
             S      Prints short job status.
             T      Prints dataset status.
             U      Includes user names in output.
             V      Prints paged output for display terminals.
             X      Reads the file DSK:CRASH.EXE if found, otherwise
                    reads specified 
                    crashed monitor written in .EXE format. 

        Meanings of job state codes:

             AU     Disk alter UFD wait.
             ^C     Job stopped.
             CA     Core allocation wait (to be locked).
             CB     Disk core block scan wait.
             CW     Command wait.
             ^D     DAEMON wait.
             D1     DECtape control wait.
             D2     2nd DECtape control wait.
             DA     Disk storage allocation (SAT block) wait.
             DC     Data control wait.
             DI     Disk I/O wait.
             DS     Disk I/O wait satisfied.
             EQ     ENQ/DEQ resource wait
             EV     Exec virtual memory wait.
             EW     Event wait.
             HB     Hibernate state.
             IO     I/O wait.
             JD     DAEMON wait.


                                   2-381
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SYSTAT Command


             MM     Memory management resource wait.
             NA     Nap (short sleep).
             NU     Null state.
             OW     Operator wait.
             PI     Paging I/O wait.
             PS     Paging I/O wait satisfied.
             RN     In a run queue.
             SL     Sleep wait.
             ST     Stop (^C) state.
             SW     Swapped out.
             SWF    Swapped out and fragmented on disk.
             TI     TTY I/O wait (input).
             TO     TTY output.
             TS     TTY I/O wait satisfied.
             ^W     Command wait.
             WS     I/O wait satisfied.

        You can obtain output for individual jobs by  specifying  one  of
        the following after the command:

             A number n that causes information to be listed only for the
             specified job (that is, job n).  A period causes information
             for your job to be printed.

             A project-programmer number  specified  in  square  brackets
             causes  information  to  be  printed  only for jobs with the
             specified project-programmer  number.   The  project  and/or
             programmer number can be specified with an asterisk.

             A number preceded by a number sign (#n)  causes  information
             to  be  printed  only  for  jobs from the indicated terminal
             (that is, TTYn).  In addition, a  C  following  the  command
             indicates CTY, Pnn indicates PTYnn, Tnn indicates TTYnn, and
             a period indicates the terminal on which the SYSTAT  command
             is issued.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN.










                                   2-382
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               SYSTAT Command


   Example

        If you wanted to use the ASSIGN command to assign LPT 260 to your
        job, you could use the B argument to SYSTAT to see if the printer
        is busy.

        .SYSTAT B<RET>

        Busy devices:
        Device  Job     Why     Logical

        TTY52    1      init
        TTY2    21      init
        DET60    1      init
        MPX1    21      init
        LPT260  14      init
        TSK26   26      init
        TSK26   26      init
        TSK26   26      init
        TSK26   18      init

        SYSTAT B lists LPT260 as a busy  device,  therefore,  you  cannot
        assign it to your job.






























                                   2-383
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                TECO Command


                               TECO Command



   Function

        The TECO command opens a file for editing using  TECO.   See  the
        TECO manual in the TOPS-10 Software Notebooks.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running TECO.

   Format

        TECO dev:file.ext[directory]

        Where:    dev:  is the device or file structure  name  containing
                  the existing file.  If omitted, DSK:  is assumed.

                  file.ext is the file name and the file  name  extension
                  of the existing file.  If omitted, the arguments of the
                  last MAKE or TECO command are used.

                  [directory] is the directory name  where  the  file  is
                  stored.  If omitted, your default directory is assumed.

        You can pass switches to TECO by  preceding  the  switch  with  a
        slash  in  the  TECO  command string.  When COMPIL interprets the
        command string, it passes the switches to TECO.

   Characteristics

        Places your terminal at user level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Associated Commands

        MAKE - Creates a file with TECO.

   Example

        Edit a file named WONDER.ALG.

        .TECO WONDER.ALG<RET>
        [5K CORE]
        *EX<ESC><ESC>

        .




                                   2-384
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                TIME Command


                               TIME Command



   Function

        The TIME command prints the total run time since  the  last  time
        you  issued the TIME command, followed by the total run time used
        by the job since it was initialized (logged-in), followed by  the
        integrated    product   of   running   time   and   memory   size
        (KILO-CORE-SEC=).  Time is printed in the following format:

        hh:mm:ss.hh

        Where:    hh is hours
                  mm is minutes
                  ss.hh is seconds to nearest hundredth.

        Interrupt level and job scheduling times are charged to whichever
        user   was   running   the  system  job  when  the  interrupt  or
        rescheduling occurred.

                                      NOTE

                If automatic run time is  enabled  with  the  SET
                WATCH  RUN  command,  the incremental run time is
                usually 0.

   Format

        TIME job

        Where:    job is the job-number of the job whose time is desired.
                  If  job  is  omitted,  the job to which the terminal is
                  attached is assumed.  In this case, the monitor  prints
                  the  incremental run time (run time since the last TIME
                  command) as well as the total run time  since  the  job
                  was initialized.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not require LOGIN when requesting time  for  another  user's
        job.

        Does not destroy core image.






                                   2-385
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                TIME Command


   Example

        The command is given for the first time after LOGIN.   Therefore,
        the incremental time equals the total time since LOGIN.

        .TIME<RET>
        21.36
        21.36
        KILO-CORE-SEC=175

        Show that the time is reset:

        .TI<RET>
        0.00
        21.36
        KILO-CORE-SEC=175

        Run the DIRECT program:

        .DIR/F<RET>

        WONDER.REL      DSKC:  [27,4072]
        WONDER.QOR
        PROG2.QLG
        PROG2.REL
        NEW.
        ADD1.BAS
        OLD.BAS
        FACT.BAS
        NAME.BAS
        WONDER.ALG
        WONDER.FOR
        TEST.ALG
        PROGL.FOR
        TESTER.
        016DAE.TMP
        002DAE.TMP
        LOOP.F4
        LOOP.REL
        FILEC.DAE      DSKB:

        The  DIRECT  command  took  .70  seconds  of  run  time  and  183
        kilo-core-seconds.

        .TI<RET>
        0.70
        22.06
        KILO-CORE-SEC=183

        .



                                   2-386
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


                              TPUNCH Command



   Function

        The TPUNCH command places  entries  into  the  paper  tape  punch
        output  queue.   See  the  QUEUE  command description for further
        information and examples.

   Format

        TPUNCH dev:jobname=file-spec

        Where:    dev:  is the name of the specific tape punch  on  which
                  your  files  should  be processed.  (For example, PTP2:
                  is tape punch  number  2.)  You  can  have  your  files
                  processed  on another node by using the format PTPSxx:,
                  where xx is the node number.  (For example, PTPS25:  is
                  a punch on node 25.) The device name is optional.

                  jobname is the name of the job to be entered  into  the
                  queue.   The  default  is the name of the first file in
                  the request.

                  The equal sign is required if you specify the job name,
                  the device name, or both.

                  file-spec is a single file specification or a string of
                  file specifications, separated by commas, for the files
                  to be processed.  A file specification is in  the  form
                  dev:file.ext[directory].

        If you do not enter a job name or  an  input  specification,  the
        system prints a list of the jobs in the paper tape punch queue on
        your terminal.

        The switches to this command can be divided into two  categories,
        depending  on whether the switch can be used only once, or can be
        used more times, in a single command string.  The two  categories
        are:

        o  Queue-Operation Switches

             These switches can be used only once in the command  string.
             They  affect  the  entire  request,  and  you can place them
             anywhere in the command string.  If you  have  used  one  of
             these  switches in a command string, you cannot use it again
             in the same string.  Many commands have a /NO  construction,
             which  takes  a negative effect.  Be sure you do not use the
             /NO construction of a switch in the same command string.


                                   2-387
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        o  File-Control Switches

             These switches can be  used  any  number  of  times  in  the
             command  string.  You can also use the /NO construction of a
             switch in the same command string.  To achieve  a  temporary
             or  permanent  effect  by  the  placement of the switch, see
             Section 1.8.4.

           Switch        Category                Function

        /ABEFORE:        File         Queues  the file only if the access
         date-time       control      date is before the  specified  date
                                      and time.

        /ACCOUNT:        Queue        Specifies the account to which  the
        "string"         operation    job  should  be  charged.   If  the
                                      account    string    contains   any
                                      nonalphanumeric   characters,   you
                                      must    enclose   the   string   in
                                      quotation marks.

        /AFTER:          Queue        Processes  the  request  after  the
         date-time       operation    specified  date  and   time.    See
                                      Section  1.8.3 for a description of
                                      date-time arguments.

        /ALLFILES:       Queue        Accepts the request only if all  of
         YES or NO       operation    the files in the request exist.  By
                                      default, if any of the files do not
                                      exist, the others will be processed
                                      appropriately.      This     switch
                                      specifies that if any file  is  not
                                      present,   no   files   should   be
                                      processed.  The value of YES or  NO
                                      is  optional.   If you specify YES,
                                      all of the files you specified must
                                      exist, or none of the files will be
                                      punched.

        /ASINCE:         File         Queues  only  the  files that  have
         date-time       control      been accessed since  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /BEFORE:         File         Queues only the files with creation
         date-time       control      dates before the specified date and
                                      time.   See  Section  1.8.3  for  a
                                      description of date-time arguments.






                                   2-388
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /CHARACTERISTIC: Queue        Specifies an output characteristic.
         arg             operation    You  can  find  a   list   of   the
                                      characteristics  arguments  defined
                                      for  your  system   in   the   file
                                      SYS:CHARTY.DAT.

        /CHECK           Queue        Prints on your terminal  a list  of
                         operation    the queue entries made by your job.

        /COPIES:n        File         Repeats the  output  the  specified
                         control      number of times  (n  must  be  less
                                      than 64).  The default is one copy.
                                      If you need more  than  63  copies,
                                      make two or more entries.

        /CREATE          Queue        Makes a new entry in the tape punch
                         operation    queue.  This switch is the  default
                                      function,   except   when  you  are
                                      listing the entries in the queue.

        /DEFERRED        Queue        Causes   deferred   output   to  be
                         operation    released to the  paper  tape  punch
                                      queue.   You  must  use  one of the
                                      following switches with /DEFERRED:

                                      /CREATE  completes   all   released
                                      output requests.

                                      /KILL   eliminates   the   released
                                      output requests.

                                      See   the   SET    DEFER    command
                                      description  for  more  information
                                      and examples.

        /DELETE          File         Deletes the  file  after  spooling.
                         control      (This    is     the     same     as
                                      /DISPOSE:DELETE.)

        /DESTINATION:    Queue        Specifies   the   node   that  will
         node            operation    process  the  request.   Use   this
                                      switch  to  specify  that the paper
                                      tape  punch  be  connected  to  the
                                      specified  node.  Use the node name
                                      or node number to specify the node.
                                      Files  cannot  be punched at a host
                                      other than the host node  to  which
                                      your terminal is connected.  If the
                                      request is made to punch  files  at
                                      another  host,  or  at  a node that
                                      does not exist,  the  request  will


                                   2-389
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


                                      wait in the queue indefinitely.




















































                                   2-390
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /DISPOSE:arg     File         Controls  the  disposition  of  the
                         control      file  after  it  is  queued.    The
                                      arguments to this switch are:

                                      DELETE deletes the file  from  your
                                      directory after punching it.

                                      PRESERVE keeps  the  file  in  your
                                      area  after  punching  it.  This is
                                      the default function.

                                      RENAME renames the  file  into  the
                                      spooling  area.   This  deletes the
                                      file  from  your   directory   area
                                      immediately.

        /DISTRIBUTION:   Queue        Specifies  text  to  place  in  the
         "text"          operation    distribution field, on  the  banner
                                      page  of  output.  You can use this
                                      field    to     include     mailing
                                      information,  or the location where
                                      the  operator  should   leave   the
                                      listing.   The text field may be up
                                      to  39   alphanumeric   characters,
                                      including punctuation and spaces if
                                      the text  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

        /ERBINARY        File         Prints an error message if a binary
                         control      file is included  in  the  request.
                                      This is the default function.

        /ERNONE          Queue        Prints an error message if no files
                         operation    match  the  wildcard  construction.
                                      This is the default function.

        /ERPROTECTION    Queue        Prints   an   error    message   if
                         operation    processing the request  requires  a
                                      violation of file protection.  This
                                      is the default function.

        /FAST            Queue        Prints a list of the entries in the
                         operation    paper tape punch queue  in  a  fast
                                      format.    This   is  the  same  as
                                      /LIST:FAST.








                                   2-391
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /FILE:arg        File         Specifies how the file format is to
                         control      be  interpreted.    The   following
                                      arguments  can  be  used  with this
                                      switch:

                                      ASCII interprets the file as  ASCII
                                      text.

                                      ELEVEN interprets the file as  four
                                      8-bit  bytes  in  each 36-bit word.
                                      The bits are arranged as follows:

                                      Byte 1:  bits 10-17
                                      Byte 2:  bits 2-9
                                      Byte 3:  bits 28-35
                                      Byte 4:  bits 20-27

        /FORMS:arg       Queue        Processes the file on the specified
                         operation    kind of paper tape.  The default is
                                      NORMAL.  Available forms are listed
                                      in SYS:FORMST.DAT.

        /GENERIC         Queue        Sends output to the next  available
                         operation    paper  tape  punch.   This  is  the
                                      default  function.   This switch is
                                      the complement to /UNIT.

        /HEADER:         File         Makes header units before each file
         YES or NO       control      if  you  type  /HEADER  or  if  you
                                      specify YES.  Does not make headers
                                      between files if you specify NO.  1
                                      may  be used for YES; 0 may be used
                                      for NO.  /HEADER:NO is the same  as
                                      /NOHEADER.   /HEADER is the default
                                      function.

        /HELP:arg        Queue        Prints information on your terminal
                         operation    about  the  QUEUE  command.    This
                                      switch  does  not  queue any files.
                                      This switch can be  used  alone  or
                                      with    one    of   the   following
                                      arguments:

                                      TEXT  prints  a  message  with  the
                                      format  and  switches  to the QUEUE
                                      command.  This is the same as /HELP
                                      with no arguments.

                                      SWITCHES prints a list of  all  the
                                      switches  available  with the QUEUE
                                      command.


                                   2-392
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /JOBNAME:name    Queue        Specifies the name of the job.  The
                         operation    job  name  can   be   up   to   six
                                      alphanumeric characters.

        /KILL            Queue        Removes  the specified  entry  from
                         operation    the queue.  You  must  give  a  job
                                      name,  /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID, to
                                      the left of the equal sign  in  the
                                      command line.

        /LENGTH:n:m      File         Processes  only  files whose length
                         control      is between n and m blocks.

        /LIMIT:n         Queue        Limits  the output to the specified
                         operation    number of feet.

        /LIST:arg        Queue        Prints  information  about the jobs
                         operation    in the queue.   If  you  use  /LIST
                                      alone,  it  shows  the  jobs in the
                                      queue.  This is equivalent to using
                                      the QUEUE command with no arguments
                                      and  no  switches.   /LIST  can  be
                                      abbreviated to /L .  The switch can
                                      take   one   of    the    following
                                      arguments:

                                      ALL shows all data about each queue
                                      request.

                                      FAST shows a fast list of the queue
                                      requests.   (This  is  the  same as
                                      /FAST.)

                                      JOBS shows a list of  the  jobs  in
                                      the  queue.   (This  is the same as
                                      /LIST with no arguments.)

                                      SUMMARY shows only the summary line
                                      of the queue display.

        /MESSAGE:        Queue        Specifies the amount of information
         arg             operation    to be printed when an error  occurs
                                      from  the request.  You can specify
                                      one  or  more  of   the   following
                                      arguments:

                                      ADDRESS  prints  the  location   in
                                      memory where the error occurred.

                                      CONTINUATION   prints   information
                                      about the error.


                                   2-393
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


                                      FIRST  prints  the  one-line  error
                                      message.

                                      PREFIX prints a six-character error
                                      prefix to the error message.

        /MODIFY          Queue        Alters the specified  parameter  in
                         operation    the  specified  job.   This  switch
                                      requires   that   you  have  access
                                      rights to the job.  You must give a
                                      job name, /SEQUENCE, or /REQUESTID,
                                      to the left of the  equal  sign  in
                                      the  command line.  This switch can
                                      be  used  to  modify  a  previously
                                      submitted  request  as  long as the
                                      request has not been started.

        /NEW:YES or NO   File         Accepts  the  request  even  if the
                         control      file does not yet exist.

        /NOHEADER        File         Suppresses   header  units   before
                         control      file.   /HEADER  is   the   default
                                      function.

        /NONEW           File         Forces   the  system   to   use  an
                         control      existing file.  This is the default
                                      function.

        /NONOTIFY        Queue        Does not set the system to   notify
                         operation    you when the request  is  finished.
                                      See /NOTIFY.

        /NONULL          Queue        Prints an error  message if none of
                         operation    the files  in  the  request  exist.
                                      This is the default function.

        /NOOPTION        Queue        Suppresses   the  SWITCH.INI  file.
                         operation    SWITCH.INI files are  described  in
                                      Appendix B.

        /NOPHYSICAL      File         Recognizes   logical   names    for
                         control      devices  in  the  command   string.
                                      This is the default function.

        /NOSTRS          File         Does  not scan  each  structure for
                         control      files of the same  name.   This  is
                                      the default function.






                                   2-394
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /NOTES:"text"    Queue        Punches the  text  in  the   header
                         operation    units.  The text can be  up  to  12
                                      characters, and it must be enclosed
                                      in  quotes  if  it   contains   any
                                      nonalphanumeric characters, such as
                                      spaces.

        /NOTIFY:         Queue        Notifies  you on your terminal when
         YES or NO       operation    request  is   completed.    To   be
                                      notified,   use   /NOTIFY  with  no
                                      argument, or with YES or  1  as  an
                                      argument.         To       suppress
                                      notification,    use     /NOTIFY:0,
                                      /NOTIFY:NO,   or   /NONOTIFY.    By
                                      default, you are not notified  when
                                      a  request is finished.  In special
                                      cases,  such  as  the   output   of
                                      deferred  requests,  you will never
                                      be notified.

        /NULL:YES or NO  Queue        Does   not   print  a  fatal  error
                         operation    message if the specified file  does
                                      not exist.

        /OKBINARY        File         Accepts   files   whose  extensions
                         control      indicate that they  include  binary
                                      information.   Normally, files with
                                      extensions .SAV, .SHR, .LOW,  .REL,
                                      .EXE, and .HGH will not be accepted
                                      for processing.

        /OKNONE          Queue        Does not print a warning message if
                         operation    no   files   match   the   wildcard
                                      construction.

        /OKPROTECTION    Queue        Does not print error messages  when
                         operation    a protection error occurs.

        /OPTION:option   Queue        Uses  the option  line QUEUE:option
                         operation    in the SWITCH.INI file.  SWITCH.INI
                                      files are discussed in Appendix B.

        /PHYSICAL        File         Does  not recognize  logical  names
                         control      for devices in the command line.

        /PRESERVE        File         Saves  the   control   file   after
                         control      processing it.  This is the default
                                      and    it    is    the    same   as
                                      /DISPOSE:PRESERVE.




                                   2-395
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /PRIORITY:n      Queue        Gives the specified priority number
                         operation    (n is 1 to 63) to the  request.   A
                                      larger number has greater priority.

        /PROTECTION:     Queue        Specifies a protection code for the
         nnn             operation    queue request.  Queue requests  are
                                      protected  in  the  same  way  that
                                      files are protected.   See  Section
                                      1.9.4.

        /REMOTE          Queue        Prints on your terminal a  list  of
                         operation    remote queues.  Must be  used  with
                                      /DESTINATION.

        /REQUESTID:n     Queue        Specifies        the        request
                         operation    identification number  of  the  job
                                      you wish to modify or terminate.

        /RUN:file        Queue        Executes  the  specified file after
                         operation    the job is done.

        /RUNCORE:n       Queue        Executes the file specified in /RUN
                         operation    in nK of  core  after  the  job  is
                                      done.

        /RUNOFFSET:n     Queue        Executes the file specified in /RUN
                         operation    with offset  n  after  the  job  is
                                      done.

        /SEQUENCE:n      Queue        Specifies a sequence number to help
                         operation    identify a request to  be  modified
                                      or deleted.

        /SINCE:          File         Queues   only   the  files  with  a
         date-time       control      creation date after  the  specified
                                      date and time.

        /STRS:YES or NO  File         Searches   for  the   file  on  all
                         control      structures in the search  list  and
                                      takes    every   occurrence.    The
                                      default is to take just  the  first
                                      occurrence of the file.











                                   2-396
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


        /TAPE:arg        File         Punches paper tape in the specified
                         control      mode.   If  you  do  not  use  this
                                      switch,   the   tape   is   punched
                                      according   to   the   data    mode
                                      specified in the file.  You can use
                                      any one of the following  arguments
                                      with this switch:

                                      ASCII punches  the  tape  in  ASCII
                                      mode.

                                      BINARY punches the tape  in  binary
                                      mode.

                                      IBINARY punches the tape  in  image
                                      binary mode.

                                      IMAGE punches  the  tape  in  image
                                      mode.

        /TMPFIL:         Queue        Creates a temporary  file  TMP:file
         file:text       operation    and enters the text into the file.

        /UNIT:n          General      Specifies the unit  number  of  the
                                      device to which you want the output
                                      sent.

        /USERNAME:       Queue        Specifies the  user  name  field of
         "name"          operation    the banner page  of  output.   This
                                      field   can   contain   up   to  39
                                      alphanumeric  characters,  and  may
                                      include  punctuation  and spaces if
                                      the name  is  placed  in  quotation
                                      marks.

   Associated Messages

        When a new entry is made in a system queue, the system  prints  a
        message on the user's terminal.  The message is in the form:

        [PAPERTAPE JOB name QUEUED, REQUEST #nnn, LIMIT xxx]

        Where:    name is the name of the job in the queue.  This can  be
                  specified  by  the user.  Otherwise, it defaults to the
                  name of the first file in the request.

                  nnn  is  the  number  that   represents   the   request
                  identification of the job in the queue.

                  xxx is the maximum number of feet  that  the  job  will
                  use.


                                   2-397
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               TPUNCH Command


   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal in monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

        Does not require LOGIN if a list of queue entries is desired.

   Example

        Punch 3 copies, in binary mode, of the file DSK:SENDMP.REL.

        .TPUNCH SENDMP.REL/TAPE:BINARY/COPIES:3<RET>

        [PAPERTAPE JOB SENDMP QUEUED, REQUEST #131, LIMIT 10]

        .




































                                   2-398
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
|                            TRANSLATE Command


|                            TRANSLATE Command
|  
|  
|  
|  Function
|  
|       The TRANSLATE command translates PPNs to usernames and  usernames
|       to  PPNs.   You  can  use  the  TRANSLATE  command any time after
|       logging in.
|  
|  Format
|  
|       TRANSLATE [p,pn],username...
|  
|  Examples
|  
|       .TRANSLATE<RET>
|       #DPM<RET>
|  
|             10,56      DPM
|       #^Z
|       .
|  
|       .TRANSLATE [10,56],SPIDER,BOB<RET>
|  
|             10,56      DPM
|  
|             10,115     SPIDER
|  
|             10,10013   BOB
|  
|        A total of 3 translations and one error
|       .




















                                   2-399
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                TYPE Command


                               TYPE Command



   Function

        The TYPE command prints the contents of the specified file(s)  on
        your terminal.  If more than one file is requested in the command
        string, the files  are  printed  one  after  another  without  an
        indication of the beginning and ending of a file.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running PIP.

   Format

        TYPE file-spec

        Where:    file-spec is one or more file specifications  separated
                  by  commas.  The file name (including any extension) is
                  required.  File specification is discussed  in  Section
                  1.9.

        If you omit the device name, the default is DSK:.   If  you  omit
        the  directory,  the  default  is the directory you are currently
        logged in to.

        The full wildcard construction can be used for the file name  and
        the extension.

        Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in
        the  TYPE  command  string.   When  COMPIL interprets the command
        string, it passes the switches on to PIP.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.














                                   2-400
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                TYPE Command


   Example

        .TYPE WONDER.ALG<RET>
        BEGIN   INTEGER S, C, B, A;
        !THIS PROGRAM WILL ADD THREE NUMBERS AND;
        !PRINT THE RESULT;
                WRITE ("[2 C] WHAT ARE THE NUMBERS TO ADD [1 C] ");
                READ (S);
                READ (C);
                READ (B);
                A:=C+S+B;
                WRITE ("[2 C] THE SUM OF ");
                PRINT (S,3,3);
                WRITE (" AND ");
                PRINT (C,3,3);
                WRITE ("AND ");
                PRINT (B,3,3);
                WRITE (" IS: ");
                PRINT (A,3,3);
                WRITE (" [2 C] ");
        END

        .






























                                   2-401
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               UNLOAD Command


                              UNLOAD Command



   Function

        The UNLOAD command rewinds and unloads a  tape,  either  magnetic
        tape   or   DECtape.   When  magnetic  tape  is  unloaded,  WATCH
        statistics  are  printed  on  the  operator's  terminal.    These
        statistics  also  print on your terminal by default.  To turn off
        the printing, use the SET WATCH NO MTA command.

   Format

        UNLOAD dev:

        Where:    dev:  is a magnetic tape (MTxn) or a DECtape (DTxn).
                  Device names are discussed in Section 1.9.1.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Runs the PIP program.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  Unload DECtape unit 7.

            .UNLOAD DTA7:<RET>

            .

        2.  Unload magnetic tape unit 3.

            .UNLOAD MTA3:<RET>

            .













                                   2-402
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              USESTAT Command


                              USESTAT Command



   Function

        The USESTAT command (CTRL/T)  returns  status  information  about
        your  job.   If  your  job is currently doing I/O to a file, then
        CTRL/T will disclose that status, unless the job is execute-only.
        The information printed includes:

         o  incremental daytime in seconds

         o  incremental run time in seconds

         o  incremental disk reads

         o  incremental disk writes

         o  program name

         o  core size

         o  job state

         o  current context

         o  program counter (PC)

        See Section 1.6.9 for a description  of  the  status  information
        returned as a result of the USESTAT command (or CTRL/T).

        The results  obtained  from  the  USESTAT  command  can  also  be
        obtained  by typing CTRL/T.  CTRL/T can be typed at user level as
        well as at monitor level.

   Formats

        CTRL/T

        USESTAT












                                   2-403
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              USESTAT Command


   Characteristics

        CTRL/T:

             Leaves your terminal at the same level from which you issued
             CTRL/T.

             Does not echo on your terminal.

             Does not interrupt program execution.

             Does not disclose file information for execute-only jobs.

        The USESTAT Command:

             Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

             Does not interrupt program execution.

             Does not disclose file information for execute-only jobs.

   Examples

        1.  Use CTRL/T for a job that is  not  execute-only.   Note  that
            although  it  is  shown  here,  CTRL/T  does not echo on your
            terminal.

            .R PIP<RET>
            *COP FILES.ALL=*.*<RET>
            <CTRL/T>
|           Day:13.53 Run:  0.03 Rd:2 Wr:1 PIP 4+10P Ctx:1  RN  PC:403171
|           CPU0
            Input wait for DSKBO:SWITCH.BAK[10,5763] block 1

        2.  Use USESTAT for an execute-only job:

            .USESTAT<RET>
|           Day:  29.60 Run:  0.61 Rd:3506 Wr:1 DIR 15+44P Ctx:1 ^C
|           PC:423003 CPU0

            .












                                   2-404
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              VERSION Command


                              VERSION Command



   Function

        The VERSION command prints on your terminal the version number of
        the  program in your core area (that is, the last program you ran
        implicitly or  explicitly).   One  use  of  this  command  is  to
        determine  the  program  that  printed  an  error message on your
        terminal.  If your terminal is still at user level  (that  is,  a
        character other than a period was printed) after the message, you
        can type the following:

        ^C        (two CTRL/Cs if the program is not waiting for input)
        .VERSION

        The monitor returns with the name of the program  in  core  (that
        is, the one presumed to have printed the message) and the version
        number of that program.  After receiving the information, you can
        type  CONTINUE  to  return  your  terminal  to user mode.  If the
        message was a fatal message (that is, a period was printed  after
        the message), you do not have to type CTRL/C because the terminal
        is already at monitor level.  In  most  cases,  you  cannot  type
        CONTINUE after a fatal error message.

        The version number is obtained from .JBVER and .JBHVR in the  job
        data  area  and is printed in standard format.  Similar output is
        automatically generated by the SET WATCH VERSION  command.   (See
        the  SET  WATCH  command  description.) The output from these two
        commands is in one of the following forms:

             [low + high]        The low and high segments are different.

             [low]               There is only a low segment.

             [low +]             The low and high segments are the same.

             [+]                 A GETSEG monitor call has been performed
                                 to  a  high segment that matches the low
                                 segment.

             [+ high]            A GETSEG monitor call has been done to a
                                 high segment that does not match the low
                                 segment.

             [+ high + high]     A SEGOP. monitor call has been  done  to
                                 bring  a  high segment into core without
                                 destroying the existing high segment.

             [blank]             The high segment has been released.


                                   2-405
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              VERSION Command


             [+ FROM file-spec]  The file has been read into memory.

             [+ high NOT SHARABLE FROM file-spec]
                                 The  file  read  into  memory   is   not
                                 sharable.

        With  the  VERSION  command,  the  low  and  high  segments   are
        represented in the format:

        name version

        With the SET WATCH VERSION command, the low and high segments are
        represented in one of three formats:

             name version      The program is not from SYS:.

             :name version     The output  is  the  result  of  a  SETNAM
                               monitor  call  (for example, at the end of
                               loading).

             S:name version    The program is a program loaded  from  the
                               system  device  (actual  SYS:, not logical
                               device SYS:).

        The name is the name  of  the  program  and  the  version  is  in
        standard format.  When the version number is output, the standard
        format is:

        major-version minor-version(edit)-group who modified program

        The major version is octal; the minor version is alphabetic;  the
        edit  is octal and enclosed in parentheses and the group who last
        modified the program is octal and preceded by a hyphen (0 is  DEC
        development,  1 is all other DEC personnel, and 2-7 is customer).
        There are no spaces separating the items, and if an item is zero,
        it  does not appear in print.  The parentheses and hyphen also do
        not appear in print if  the  corresponding  item  is  zero.   The
        following  are  examples  of  version  numbers output in standard
        format.

             10B(335)-1     major  version  10,  minor  version  B,  edit
                            number  335, group that last modified program
                            1.

             7(5)           major version 7, minor version 0, edit number
                            5, group that last modified program 0.

             54A            major  version  54,  minor  version  A,  edit
                            number 0, group that last modified program 0.

   Format


                                   2-406
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              VERSION Command


        VERSION

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your job's core image.

   Examples

        1.  Run the TECO program.

            .R TECO<RET>

            Halt the program.

            *^C

            Find version number.

            .VERSION<RET>
            TECO 23B(162) +

            Continue the program and exit.

            .CONTINUE<RET>
            *EX<ESC><ESC>

            .

        2.  Type a file.

            .TYPE WONDER.ALG<RET>
            BEGIN   INTEGER S, C, B, A;
            !  THIS PROGRAM WILL ADD THREE NUMBERS AND;
            !  PRINT THE RESULT; ^C

            Find version number of PIP, which executes TYPE.

            .VERSION<RET>
            PIP 33B(260) +












                                   2-407
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                              VERSION Command


            Run and halt the SYSTAT program.

            .R SYSTAT<RET>

            STATUS OF     R5743A SYS #40/2 AT 14:45:44 ON 22-APR-75

            UPTIME 7:36:20+7:34:33, ^C
            ^C

            Find the version number of SYSTAT.

            .VERSION<RET>
            SYSTAT 472(156)

            .






































                                   2-408
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               WHERE Command


                               WHERE Command



   Function

        The WHERE command allows you to determine the system  or  network
        node  to  which  a specified device is physically connected.  The
        information given includes:

         o  node name

         o  node number (ANF-10 and DECnet)

         o  software-identification (ANF-10 only)

         o  creation-date of software (ANF-10 only)

         o  server location string (LAT terminal only)

   Format

        WHERE devn:

        Where:    devn:  is the physical device name.  OPR:   allows  you
                  to  find  the  location  of  the operator's controlling
                  terminal.   The  colon  (:)  in  the  device  name   is
                  optional.

   Associated Messages

        Output form depends on the type of node.  Formats are:

        Node type     Format

        Local          name   number system ID/creation date device line no.

        ANF-10    node name   number system ID/creation date device line no.

        DECnet         name   number device (NRT) or (CTERM)

        LAT            name   location-string device

        If the system does not recognize the  device  you  specified,  it
        prints the message:

        ?NO SUCH DEVICE






                                   2-409
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                               WHERE Command


   Characteristics

        Does not require LOGIN.

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Does not destroy your core image.

   Examples

        1.  To find the location of a specific device LPT262:,  type  the
            command:

            .WHERE LPT262:<RET>
            Local KL1026(26) R2364A KL # 1026 mm-dd-yy LPT262

            .

            This example shows  that  the  node  name  is  1026.   System
            identification  is  RZ364A  KL # 1026/1042.  Creation date of
            software is mm-dd-yy.  The specified device is LPT262.

        2.  To find the physical node of your job's  terminal,  type  the
            command:

            .WHERE TTY:<RET>
            Local NOVA(31) DN87S V##(##) mm-dd-yy TTY70 LINE #70

            .

            This example shows that the terminal  is  connected  to  node
            NOVA(31).   The version number is V##(##).  The creation date
            was mm-dd-yy.  Your terminal number and line number are 70.

        3.  To find the physical node and terminal line of the operator's
            terminal, type:

            .WHERE OPR:<RET>
            Local KL1026(26) RZ345A KL # 1026/1042 mm-dd-yy TTY4 LINE #4

            .

        4.  To display the location of the system  controlling  terminal,
            type:

            .WHERE CTY:<RET>
            Local KL1026(26) RZ345A KL # 1026/1042 mm-dd-yy CTY LINE #7

            .




                                   2-410
                              SYSTEM COMMANDS
                                ZERO Command


                               ZERO Command




   Function

        The ZERO command clears  the  directory  in  the  specified  file
        structure.    ZERO   deletes  all  the  files  in  the  specified
        directory.  The files cannot be recovered.

        This command  runs  the  COMPIL  program,  which  interprets  the
        command before running the PIP program.

   Format

        ZERO dev:[directory]

        Where:    dev: is a  DECtape  or  a  disk.   This   argument   is
                  required.

                  [directory] is a directory you have access to,  if  you
                  specify  a  disk  structure.   If  you do not specify a
                  directory, your directory is assumed.

   Characteristics

        Leaves your terminal at monitor level.

        Destroys your core image.

   Examples

        1.  Delete the files on DECtape 4.

            .ZERO DTA4:<RET>

            .

        2.  Delete all files in your search list.

            .ZERO DSK:<RET>

            .

        3.  Delete all files in your SFD named CBDDT.

            .ZERO DSKB:[27,4072,CBDDT]<RET>

            .



                                   2-411
























































                                    A-1











                                 APPENDIX A

                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS



   Table A-1 lists the operating system commands, divided into groups  by
   function.   The  commands  in  each group are arranged in alphabetical
   order.  Each command is accompanied by  a  short  description  of  its
   function.

   For an explanation of  each  functional  group,  read  Sections  2.1.1
   through 2.1.10.

                                    NOTE

           Table A-1 lists the commands  that  are  described  in
           Section  2.2.   Do  not  use the commands and programs
           listed in Table A-1 until you are familiar with them.


   Table A-1:  Functional Groups of Commands

   ______________________________________________________________________

     Command           Functional Description
   ______________________________________________________________________

   Job-Control Group   

     ATTACH            Connects your terminal to a previously  DETACHed
                       job.

     CONTEXT           Allows you to create, delete, and switch between
                       contexts.

     DETACH            Releases your terminal from the current job.

     DISABLE           Disables  the  privileges  that  you  previously
                       ENABLEd.

     ENABLE            Enables privileges that  are  assigned  to  your
                       job.


                                    A-1
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     KJOB              Terminates your job.

     LOGIN             Allows you to access the system.

     PASSWORD          Allows you to change your password.

     POP               Destroys an inferior context.

     PUSH              Creates an inferior context.

     REATTACH          Transfers your job from one terminal to another.

     SESSION           Changes the account string of your job.

   Information Group   

     ACCOUNT           Prints the account string for your job.

     CONTEXT           Displays the status of a context.

     CORE              Prints the amount of  core  memory  assigned  to
                       your job.

     CPUNCH            Prints a list of  the  jobs  in  the  card-punch
                       queue.

     DAYTIME           Prints the date and time.

     DIRECTORY         Prints  a  list  of  all  the  files   in   your
                       directory.

     DSK               Prints the disk-usage information for your job.

     HELP              Prints a message which shows the formats of  the
                       HELP command.

     INITIA            Prints information about the system,  your  job,
                       and your terminal.

     LOCATE            Prints  the  node  to  which  your  terminal  is
                       logically connected.

     NETWORK           Prints a list of the nodes  in  the  network  to
                       which your terminal is logically connected.

     NODE              Prints information about the node to which  your
                       terminal is connected.

     PJOB              Prints information about the specified job.

     PLOT              Prints a list of the jobs in the plotter queue.



                                    A-2
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     PRINT             Prints a list of the jobs  in  the  line-printer
                       queue.

     PUNCH             Prints a list of the jobs in the  default  punch
                       queue.

     QUEUE             Prints a list of all the jobs in all the queues.

     RESOURCES         Prints a list of all available devices and  file
                       structures.

     SCHEDULE          Prints the system  status  for  timesharing  and
                       operator coverage.

     SET WATCH         Sets   the   system   to   automatically   print
                       incremental job statistics.

     SHOW ALLOCATION   Prints the resources that are allocated to  your
                       job,  and  the  structures and tape volumes that
                       are mounted for your job.

     SHOW QUEUES       Prints queue requests in each queue.

     SYSTAT            Prints  all  available  information  about   the
                       system; in particular, every job on the system.

     TIME              Prints the runtime since you logged-in and since
                       the last TIME command.

     TPUNCH            Prints  a  list  of  all   the   jobs   in   the
                       paper-tape-punch queue.

     CTRL/T            Prints the status of your job.
     (USESTAT)         

     VERSION           Prints  the  version  number  of   the   program
                       currently in memory.

     WHERE             Prints the node to which the specified device is
                       connected.

   Terminal-Control Group

     SET TERMINAL      Sets the specified parameters for your terminal.
     TERMINAL          
     SET TTY           
     TTY
     INITIA






                                    A-3
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


   Terminal Communication Group

     MAIL              Sends, receives, and organizes messages  to  and
                       from other users.

     PLEASE            Allows communication with the computer operator.

     SEND              Sends a message to a specified terminal.

   File-Handling Group 

     CLOSE             Closes the open files on a device.

     COPY              Copies files on the same device or  from  device
                       to device.

     CPUNCH            Enters files in the card-punch queue.

     DELETE            Removes the specified file from your directory.

     DIRECTORY         Prints a list of the files in your directory.

     EOF               Writes an end-of-file mark on magnetic tape.

     FILE              Transfers files from disk to DECtape and DECtape
                       to disk.

     LIST              Prints a file on the line printer.

     MAKE              Creates a file with the text editor TECO.

     PLOT              Enters files in the plotter queue.

     PRESERVE          Changes the protection  code  of  the  specified
                       file.

     PRINT             Enters files in the line-printer queue.

     PROTECT           Changes the protection  code  of  the  specified
                       file.

     PUNCH             Enters files in the default punch queue.

     QUEUE             Enters files into the specified queue.

     RENAME            Changes the name of a file.

     SET DEFAULT       Changes your default protection code.
      PROTECTION       

     SUBMIT            Enters files in the batch input queue.



                                    A-4
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     TECO              Calls the TECO text editor to edit  an  existing
                       file.

     TPUNCH            Enters files in the paper tape punch queue.

     TYPE              Prints the contents of  the  specified  file  on
                       your terminal.

     ZERO              Eliminates  the  specified  directory  from  the
                       specified device.

   Device-Handling Group

     ALLOCATE          Allocates  resources  to  your  job  for  future
                       mounting.

     ASSIGN            Allocates an I/O device to your job and  assigns
                       logical names to the devices.

     BACKSPACE         Spaces a  magnetic  tape  backward  a  specified
                       number of files or records.

     CANCEL            Kills queue requests.

     CLOSE             Closes the open files on a device.

     CPUNCH            Enters files in the card-punch queue.

     DEALLOCATE        Removes resources  from  your  job's  allocation
                       list.

     DEASSIGN          Releases any devices from your  job  and  clears
                       logical names.

     DISMOUNT          Releases disks and  tapes  from  your  job,  and
                       removes file structures from your search list.

     EOF               Writes an end-of-file mark on magnetic tape.

     FINISH            Closes any open files and releases a device from
                       your job, clearing logical names.

     LABEL             Writes an identifier onto DECtape.

     LIST              Lists a file on the line-printer.

     MOUNT             Requests ownership of a device.

     PRINT             Enters files in the line-printer queue.

     PUNCH             Enters files in the default punch queue.



                                    A-5
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     QUEUE             Enters files in the specified queue.

     REASSIGN          Passes a device from one job to another.

     REWIND            Rewinds a magnetic tape or DECtape.

     SET BLOCKSIZE     Sets the default blocksize for a magnetic tape.

     SET CDR           Sets the file name of the next file to  be  read
                       by the card reader.

     SET DEFER         Defers queueing of output requests until you log
                       out.

     SET DENSITY       Sets the default density of the magnetic tape.

     SET RETRY         Controls error-reporting from magnetic tapes.

     SET SPOOL         Changes the list of devices that will be spooled
                       for your job.

     SKIP              Moves a  magnetic  tape  forward  the  specified
                       number of files or records.

     TPUNCH            Enters files in the paper tape punch queue.

     UNLOAD            Rewinds and unloads a magnetic tape, DECtape, or
                       disk.

   Program-Preparation Group

     CLOSE             Closes the open files on a device.

     COMPILE           Translates   a   source   program,   using   the
                       appropriate compiler.

     CREF              Generates a cross-reference listing and sends it
                       to the line printer.

     DCORE             Writes  a  core-image  file  of  your   program,
                       including accumulators and job tables.

     DDT               Loads  VMDDT,  if  necessary,   and   runs   the
                       debugger.

     DEBUG             Loads a program and a debugger, then starts  the
                       debugger.

     DEPOSIT           Puts data into your memory area.

     EOF               Writes an end-of-file mark on magnetic tape.



                                    A-6
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     EXAMINE           Displays the  contents  of  the  specified  core
                       address.

     FUDGE             Creates a library .REL  file  from  a  temporary
                       file.

     GLOB              Produces a cross-referenced  listing  of  global
                       symbols.

     LOAD              Compiles a source file,  and  loads  .REL  files
                       into memory.

     MAKE              Creates a file with the text editor TECO.

     MERGE             Loads a second program into memory,  to  be  run
                       with the first.

     SET BREAK         Establishes an interrupt point  at  a  specified
                       location in your program.

     TECO              Calls the TECO text editor to edit an old file.

   Program-Control Group

     CTRL/C            Stops execution  of  a program,    leaving  your
     (HALT)            terminal at monitor level.

     CCONTINUE         Continues  program   execution,   leaving   your
                       terminal at monitor level.

     CONTINUE          Continues  program   execution,   leaving   your
                       terminal at user level.

     CORE              Changes the amount of memory allocated  to  your
                       job.

     CSTART            Starts program execution, leaving your  terminal
                       at monitor level.

     EXECUTE           Compiles, loads, and runs a program.

     GET               Loads a program into memory.

     JCONTINUE         Continues execution of a program after a  device
                       error.

     LOAD              Runs the loader, and loads the  .REL  file  into
                       memory.

     MERGE             Loads a second program into memory,  to  be  run
                       with the first.



                                    A-7
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     R                 Runs a system program.

     REENTER           Restarts program execution at a predefined entry
                       point.

     RUN               Begins execution of a program.

     SAVE              Writes   a  file  of  your  core image   on  the
     SSAVE             specified device.

     SET CPU           Changes the processor on which your job runs.

     SET DDT           Enables the DDT breakpoint facility.
      BREAKPOINT       

     SET DEFAULT       Allows  you  to change   the  number  of  memory
      BUFFERS          buffers.

     SET DSKFUL        Halts your  job  without  destroying  your  core
                       image when disk quota is exceeded.

     SET DSKPRI        Allows you to set  the  priority  of  your  disk
                       transfers.

     SET FLOATING      Sets the system to simulate a floating point.
      POINT            

     SET HPQ           Sets the priority of your job in the run queue.

     SET PHYSICAL      Changes the amount of physical core you can use.

     SET TIME          Sets a time limit for your job.

     SET VIRTUAL       Sets the current virtual page limit.
      LIMIT            

     START             Begins execution of a loaded program.

   Network Group

     Command           Functional Description

     ASSIGN            Allows you to access a device on another  system
                       in the network.

     LOCATE            Changes the default device list of your job.

     NETWORK           Prints a list of the nodes in the network.

     NODE              Prints information about  the  configuration  of
                       the network.



                                    A-8
                       FUNCTIONAL GROUPS OF COMMANDS


     SET HOST          Connects your terminal  to  the  specified  host
                       system.

     WHERE             Prints the node to which the specified device is
                       connected.
   ______________________________________________________________________
















































                                    A-9
























































                                    B-1











                                 APPENDIX B

                              SWITCH.INI FILES



   You can create a SWITCH.INI file in your UFD into which  you  can  put
   switches  for  certain  programs.   Some  of  the  programs  that read
   SWITCH.INI are:

        BACKUP         CREDIR
        DIRECTORY      FORTRAN
        INITIA         LINK
        LOGIN          MAKLIB
        QUEUE          RUNOFF
        SORT

   The SWITCH.INI file allows you to automatically  override  the  system
   defaults  of  these programs.  The SWITCH.INI file must reside in your
   UFD.  A SWITCH.INI file can contain two types of command lines.

   The first type of line is written in the following format:

        program-name/switch/switch/.../switch

   Where:    program-name is a program name such as DIRECTORY or LOGIN or
             a  command  name  which  runs  one  of the programs, such as
             PRINT.  You must use the full program name or at  least  six
             characters of any program name that is longer.

             /switch is a valid switch for the named program.














                                    B-1
                              SWITCH.INI FILES


   Example

        DIRECTORY/DETAIL/NOSUMMARY

   When you run the program, the switches in SWITCH.INI will be  used  as
   the  defaults instead of any program-defined defaults.  When you run a
   program,  the  system  searches  your  directory  for  a  file  called
   SWITCH.INI.   If  the  file  is not found the program uses any program
   defaults.  If the system finds the file but does not find a  line  for
   the program, it uses any program defaults.  When the system finds your
   SWITCH.INI file and the line for the program,  the  program  uses  the
   switch  values that you have specified in your SWITCH.INI file instead
   of any program default values.

   You can override any switch in  your  SWITCH.INI  file  by  issuing  a
   command string to the specified program containing a complement of the
   switch in your SWITCH.INI file.

   For example, you could have  a  SWITCH.INI  file  in  your  area  that
   contains the following:

        DIRECTORY/FAST

   Then, when you issue the following command:

        .DIR<RET>   

   The system will print a fast (shortened) listing  of  your  directory.
   You  could override the SWITCH.INI file by typing other switches after
   the command.  For example:

        .DIR/NORMAL<RET>   

   The second type of line that can appear in  your  SWITCH.INI  file  is
   written in the following format:

        program-name:option-name/switch/switch.../switch

   Where:    program-name is a program  name  such  as  DIRECTORY,  LINK,
             LOGIN, INITIA, or QUEUE.

             option-name is the same as  used  for  the  /OPTION  switch.
             (Refer  to  the OPTION switch in the command descriptions in
             Chapter 2.)

   You use the second type of line to override both program defaults  and
   any   defaults  that  you  might  have  previously  specified  in  the
   SWITCH.INI file.  You refer to this type  of  line  in  SWITCH.INI  by
   including  the  /OPTION: switch  in a command string to a program.  If
   you specify an option name in the command string that does not  appear
   in your SWITCH.INI file, the program prints a warning message and uses
   the program defaults.


                                    B-2
                              SWITCH.INI FILES


   Assume that you create a SWITCH.INI file that contains:

        DIRECTORY/FAST/UNITS/SUMMARY
        DIRECTORY:THISRUN/WORDS/ACCESS:25

   If you then type the DIRECTORY command, the program will print a  fast
   listing  showing  both the actual unit names (instead of the structure
   names) and the summary line on  your  terminal.   When  you  want  the
   program  to  print a normal directory listing, you must type a command
   string to DIRECTORY that includes the /NORMAL switch.  Note that  disk
   unit  names,  not  structure names, and the summary line will still be
   printed.

   You can type the following command string to  automatically  list  the
   length  of  the  files  in words, instead of blocks, and to update the
   access date of files with 25 blocks or less:

        DIRECTORY/OPTION:THISRUN<RET>

   Examples

        1.  This example shows one way to use a SWITCH.INI  file  to  set
            your terminal type automatically when you log in.

            First, log in to the system:

            .LOG 27,10024<RET>
            Job 36  RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor  TTY410
            Password: <RET>
            [LGNLAS Last access to [27,10024] succeeded on  6-May-88:14:00:32]
            15:09    6-May-88   Friday

            .

            The   following   INITIA   command   shows   your    terminal
            characteristics.   Since  you  haven't  used the SET TTY TYPE
            command, and you do not have a SWITCH.INI  file  to  set  the
            terminal type, the system defaults to terminal type TTY.

            .I TTY<RET>

            RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor 15:05:42 TTY410 system 1026/1042/1322
            Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 410
            Job 35   User DOTY      [27,10024]

            TYPE:TTY        APC:HARDWIRED   ECHO            WIDTH:80
            LENGTH:0        NOSTOP          FILL:0          LC
            NOTABS          NOFORM          CRLF            GAG
            NOSBELL         NODISPLA        NOTAPE          BLANKS
            NOALTMOD        NORTCOMP        NOREMOTE        XONXOF
            NOUNPAUS        NOESCAPE        NOEIGHTB        NOQUOTE
            IDLEDI:0        NOSLAVE


                                    B-3
                              SWITCH.INI FILES


            Create a file named SWITCH.INI, with a command to LOGIN  that
            sets your terminal type.

            .SOS SWITCH.INI<RET>
            Input: SWITCH.INI

            00100 LOGIN/TERMINAL:TYPE:VT240<RET>
            00200 <ESC>
            *ES<RET>

            Log out:

            .KJOB<RET>
            Job 36  User DOTY  [27,10024]
            Logged-off TTY410  at 15:09:53  on  6-May-88
            Runtime: 0:00:00, KCS:12, Connect time: 0:00:51
            Disk Reads:11, Writes:23

            Then log in once more.

            .LOG 27,10024<RET>
            Job 36  RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor  TTY410
            Password:<RET>
            [LGNLAS Last access to [27,10024] succeeded on  6-May-88:15:00:42]
            15:09    6-May-88   Friday

            Type  the  command  INITIA   TTY   to   see   your   terminal
            characteristics.

            .I TTY<RET>

            RLT19L KL1026 AP Monitor 15:10:07 TTY410 system 1026/1042/1322
            Connected to Node KL1026(26) Line # 410
            Job 36   User DOTY      [27,10024]

            TYPE:VT240      APC:HARDWIRED  ECHO           WIDTH:80
            LENGTH:24       NOSTOP         FILL:0         LC
            TABS            NOFORM         CRLF           GAG
            SBELL           DISPLA         NOTAPE         BLANKS
            NOALTMOD        NORTCOMP       NOREMOTE       XONXOF
            NOUNPAUS        NOESCAPE       NOEIGHTB       NOQUOTE
            IDLEDI:0        NOSLAVE

            .










                                    B-4
                              SWITCH.INI FILES


        2.  This example shows a SWITCH.INI file which contains a variety
            of commands and switches.

            .TYPE SWITCH.INI<RET>

            LOGIN    /TERMINAL:(TYPE:VT240,NOGAG,DEFER,XONXOFF,NOSBELL,-
                     PAGE:0)/NOTICE:SOMETIMES/MAILCHECK-
                     /RUNOFFSET:1

            QUEUE    /NOTIFY/HEADER:NO-
                     /LIST:ALL/LOWERCASE/OUTPUT:ERROR/PRESERVE

            DIRECT   /NOTEMP

            INITIA   /SETTTY/TERMINAL:TYPE:VT100







































                                    B-5
























































                                    C-1











                                 APPENDIX C

                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS



   The six basic COMPILE-class commands are:

        COMPILE
        LOAD
        EXECUTE
        DEBUG
        MAKE
        TECO

   Each COMPILE-class command is described in detail in Chapter 2.

   These commands cause the monitor to  run  the  COMPIL  program,  which
   deciphers  the  command  and  constructs  new  command strings for the
   system program (such as, TECO, PIP, FORTRAN).  Each time you type  the
   MAKE  or TECO commands, the command with its arguments is written as a
   temporary file in memory or on the disk.  Therefore,  the  system  can
   recall the last file specification you typed.  This is an exception to
   the requirement that the file name  must  always  be  specified.   For
   example if you type:

        .MAKE PROGX.MAC<RET>

   You can then later type the following:

        .TECO<RET>

   instead of the command line:

        .TECO PROGX.MAC<RET>

   assuming that you have not issued a TECO  command  changing  the  file
   name in the interim.







                                    C-1
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


   The system also writes the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands,
   with their arguments, in two places:

        1.  In memory in temporary files written on device  TMP:.   These
            are deleted when you log out or when the system crashes.

        2.  On the disk in a temporary file.

   When you use a file specification as the  argument  to  one  of  these
   commands, you can use another of these commands with no argument.  The
   stored arguments will be used.



   C.1  INDIRECT COMMANDS (@ CONSTRUCTION)

   Most programs receive input in the form of commands from the terminal.
   However,  it is possible to write a program that accepts commands from
   a file.  That file is known as an indirect command file.

   For example, when you must type many program names and  switches,  you
   can  put  them  into a file that eliminates the need for you to retype
   the names and switches for each compilation.  You can use the  @  file
   construction, which you can type with any COMPILE-class command.

   You can specify an @ file at any point in a  command  line  after  the
   first  word  in the command.  In this construction, when you specify a
   file, you do so by typing its file name, followed by an optional  file
   name  extension  and  project-programmer  number.   If  you  omit  the
   extension, the program searches for a command file with  a  .CMD  file
   name  extension.  If that file is not found, the program then searches
   for a command file with a null  extension.   Then,  when  the  program
   finds the specified file, it places the information stored in the file
   in the command string, replacing @file  name.   If  the  file  is  not
   found, the program prints an error message.

   Example

   If you have a  file  called  FLIST.CMD  that  contains  the  following
   command string:

        FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED

   You could replace this command line:

        .COMPILE FILEA,FILEB,FILEC/LIST,FILED,FILEZ

   with the following command line:

        .COMPILE FILEA,@FLIST,FILEZ

   You can have command files that contain the @ file construction  to  a


                                    C-2
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


   depth  of  15 levels.  If this process of indirection results in files
   pointing in a loop, the maximum depth is  exceeded,  and  the  program
   prints an error message:

        ?NESTING TOO DEEP

   The following rules apply in handling format characters in  a  command
   file.

        1.  Spaces are used to delimit words, but are otherwise  ignored.
            Similarly,  TABs, vertical TABs, and form feed characters are
            treated as spaces.

        2.  To allow long command strings, command terminators  (such  as
            RETURN,  ESCAPE)  are ignored if the first nonblank character
            after  a  sequence  of  command  terminators  is   a   comma.
            Otherwise,  the  command terminators are treated as commas by
            the COMPILE-class commands.

        3.  Blank lines are completely ignored.

        4.  Comments can be included in command files  by  preceding  the
            comment  with a semicolon; text from the semicolon to the end
            of the line is ignored.

        5.  If command files are  sequenced,  the  sequence  numbers  are
            ignored.




   C.2  THE + CONSTRUCTION

   The + construction specifies that the files to the right of  the  plus
   sign  are  combined with the first file you specified.  Therefore, all
   files you specify become one file in the compilation and not  separate
   files.

   This construction is useful when the first file is a subroutine of the
   other files you specified.

   When you use the  +  construction,  the  compiler  produces  a  single
   relocatable  binary  file from a collection of input source files.  To
   construct a single program from several input files, you can name  one
   input  file  FIRST.MAC, another MIDDLE.MAC, and a third LAST.MAC.  You
   can then specify the following command line:

        .COMPILE FIRST+MIDDLE+LAST

   After this, the compiler produces one binary file named LAST from  the
   three source files, FIRST, MIDDLE, and LAST.  This construction allows
   you to use one input file as part of several  different  compilations.


                                    C-3
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


   For  example,  you  could later use the FIRST.MAC file with SECOND.MAC
   and THIRD.MAC to obtain a different binary file.  The  +  construction
   permits  you  to  maintain material in a single file that is common to
   more than one compilation.

   The compiler gives the name of the last input file in  the  string  to
   any  output  file  (for example, .REL, .CRF, .LST).  Therefore, in the
   previous examples, the output files would be called  LAST  and  THIRD,
   respectively.  Note that you can include device names, extensions, and
   project-programmer numbers in  any  +  construction.   Therefore,  the
   following is a valid command string:

        .COMPILE FIRST.MAC[27,4072]+SECOND.MAC+THIRD.MAC[35,234]



   C.3  THE = CONSTRUCTION

   Usually, the compiler makes the name of the  relocatable  binary  file
   the same as that of the source file, with the extension specifying the
   difference.  You can override this action by using the = construction.
   The  =  construction  allows  you  to  specify the names of the output
   files.  For example, if you need a binary file called BINARY.REL  from
   a source program called SOURCE.MAC, you can type the following command
   line:

        .COMPILE BINARY=SOURCE

   You can also use this construction to specify an  output  name  for  a
   file produced by using the + construction.  To give the name WHOLE.REL
   to  the  binary  file  the  compiler  assembles  with  PART1.MAC   and
   PART2.MAC, you can type the following command line:

        .COMPILE WHOLE=PART1 + PART2

   To change the file name of the output file is the most common  use  of
   the  = construction.  However, you can also use it to change any other
   default condition.  The  default  condition  for  compiler  output  is
   DSK:SOURCE.REL[dir].   If  you would like output on DTA3 with the file
   name FILEX instead of the  defaults,  you  could  type  the  following
   command line:

        .EXECUTE DTA3:FILEX=FILE1.F4



   C.4  THE < > CONSTRUCTION

   The < > (angle bracket) construction can be  used  in  COMPILE,  LOAD,
   EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands only.  You use it to cause programs listed
   within the angle brackets to be  assembled  with  the  same  parameter
   file.   If  you also use the + construction, it must appear before the


                                    C-4
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


   < > construction.  To assemble LPTSER.MAC, PTPSER.MAC, and  PTRSER.MAC
   with  the PAR.MAC parameter file, you could type the following command
   line:

        .COMPILE PAR+LPTSER,PAR+PTPSER,PAR+PTRSER

   However, using the < > construction you could type the following line:

        .COMPILE PAR+<LPTSER,PTPSER,PTRSER>

   The following command string construction is invalid:

        .COMPILE <LPTSER,PTRSER,PTPSER>+PAR



   C.5  DEFAULT COMPILER

   When you name a file with a standard file extension (.MAC, .CBL, .FOR,
   .ALG),  the  compiler implied by the extension will be used to compile
   the program.  Standard file extensions are listed in Appendix D.   You
   cannot  override  the  compiler that is implied by the file extension.
   The COBOL compiler will  compile  a  file  called  DATPRO.CBL.   Files
   without  a recognizable compiler extension are compiled by the default
   compiler, normally FORTRAN.

   If you have a file with a non-standard file extension, you can control
   the setting of the default compiler (FORTRAN) by including switches in
   the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command string.  The descriptions
   of the COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, and DEBUG commands in Chapter 2 include
   the switches you can use to change the default compiler.

   In the following examples, the installation has chosen FORTRAN as  the
   default compiler.  If you issue the following command:

        .COMPILE NOEXT

   the file named NOEXT will  be  compiled  by  FORTRAN.   The  following
   command:

        .COMPILE FILEZ.MIN

   causes the file named FILEZ.MIN to be compiled by FORTRAN because  MIN
   is not a recognizable compiler extension.  The following command:

        .COMPILE APART,DATA/COBOL,TEST

   causes the files APART and TEST to be compiled by FORTRAN and the file
   DATA to be compiled by COBOL.





                                    C-5
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


                                    NOTE

           By setting the appropriate assembly switches  you  can
           indicate  SNOBOL,  BLISS,  or  MACY11 as the compiler.
           However,  these  switches  and   compilers   are   not
           supported.

   The switches that change the default  compiler  can  be  temporary  or
   permanent.  (See Section 1.8.4.)



   C.6  COMPILER SWITCHES

   It is occasionally necessary for you to pass switches to the assembler
   or  compiler  in a COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command.  For each
   translation (assembly or compilation),  the  COMPIL  program  sends  a
   command string to the translator, containing three parts:

        1.  Binary output file specification.

        2.  Listing file specification.

        3.  Source file specification.

   To include switches with these files, you must do the following:

         o  Group the switches according to each related source file,  if
            you use the + construction.

         o  Group the switches according to the three types of files  for
            each source file.  The order of the groups of switches is

            a.  Binary

            b.  Listing

            c.  Source

         o  Separate the groups of switches by  commas  for  each  source
            file.

         o  Enclose all switches for each source file within one  set  of
            parentheses.

         o  Place each parenthetical string immediately after the  source
            file to which it refers.

   The COMPIL program interprets the  groups  of  switches  according  to
   these rules:




                                    C-6
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


         o  The switches immediately before a closing  right  parenthesis
            are source (SSSS).

         o  The switches before the first comma are binary (BBBB,,).

         o  The switches before the second comma are listing (,LLLL,).

         o  The order of the switches is BBBB, LLLL, SSSS.

         o  The individual switches are separated by spaces.

         o  The switches contain no more than 150 characters in all.

         o  The switches  contain  only  the  following  non-alphanumeric
            characters  within  the  parentheses:  colon (:), hyphen (-),
            slash (/), comma (,), and parentheses.

   Examples

        (SSSS)              Source switch
        (BBBB,,)            Binary switch
        (BBBB,LLLL,SSSS)    Binary, list, and source switches
        (,,SSSS)            Source switch(es)
        (,LLLL,)            Listing switch(es)
        (BBBB,,SSSS)        Binary and source switches
        (BBBB,LLLL,)        Binary and list switches
        (,LLLL,SSSS)        List and source switches


   The processor switches are listed in Table C-1,  with  their  meanings
   and the types of files to which they apply.



   Table C-1:  Processor Switches

   ______________________________________________________________________

     Processor   Binary  Listing  Source             Meaning
   ______________________________________________________________________

     ALGOL         D                      Set  dynamic  storage  region
                                          for  your own array (known as
                                          the heap).

                                   E      The  source  file  has   line
                                          numbers in columns 73 to 80.

                                   L      List the source program.

                           N              Suppress  output   of   error
                                          messages on the terminal.


                                    C-7
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


                                   Q      Delimit the words in quotes.

                                   S      Suppress the listing  of  the
                                          source program.

     COBOL         A       A       A      Allow  the  listing  of  code
                                          generated.

                           C              Produce  a   cross-referenced
                                          listing  of  all user-defined
                                          items in the source program.

                   E       E       E      Check the program for errors,
                                          but do not generate code.

                   I                      Suppress  generation  of  the
                                          starting  address  of  a main
                                          program.

                   J                      Force a starting  address  to
                                          be     generated     for    a
                                          subprogram.

                                   L      Use   the   preceding    file
                                          descriptor  as a library file
                                          whenever  the  COPY  verb  is
                                          encountered.

                   M       M       M      Print  a  map   showing   the
                                          parameters       of       the
                                          user-defined items.

                           N              Suppress  output  of   source
                                          errors on the terminal.

                   P                      Do not generate  trace  calls
                                          and symbols.

                   R                      Produce a two-segment  object
                                          program.   The  high  segment
                                          contains     the     resident
                                          sections   of  the  Procedure
                                          division;  the  low   segment
                                          contains   everything   else.
                                          When the  object  program  is
                                          loaded, LIBOL is added to the
                                          high segment.

                   S       S       S      The source file has  sequence
                                          numbers  in columns 1 through
                                          6 and  comments  starting  at
                                          column 73.


                                    C-8
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


                   W       W       W      Rewind the magnetic tape.

                   Z       Z       Z      Zero the DECtape directory.

     FORTRAN-10                    C      Generate a file that is to be
                                          input to the CREF program.

                           E              Include  the  octal-formatted
                                          version of the object file in
                                          the listing.

                                   I      Translate  the  letter  D  in
                                          column  1  as  a  space,  and
                                          treat the line  as  a  normal
                                          FORTRAN statement.

                           M              Add the mnemonic  translation
                                          of  the  object  code  to the
                                          listing file.

                           NOE     NOE    Suppress  output   of   error
                                          messages on the terminal.

                           NOW     NOW    Suppress  output  of  warning
                                          messages on the terminal.

                   O                      Perform    optimization    of
                                          global symbols when producing
                                          processor code.

                                   S      Perform compilation, checking
                                          for syntax errors only.

            MACRO  A       A       A      Advance  the  magnetic   tape
                                          reel by one file.

                   B       B       B      Backspace the  magnetic  tape
                                          reel by one file.

                           C              Produce a listing file  in  a
                                          format acceptable as input to
                                          CREF.

                           E              List the macro expansions.

                           F              Byte sizes match  the  format
                                          of the instruction.

                           G              Byte  sizes  are  two  18-bit
                                          fields.

                           L              Reinstate listing (used after


                                    C-9
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


                                          list    suppression    by   S
                                          switch).

                           M              Suppress ASCII test in  macro
                                          and   repeat   the  expansion
                                          (SALL).

                           N              Suppress  output   of   error
                                          messages on the terminal.

                   O       O       O      Allow literals to occupy only
                                          one file.

                   P                      Increase  the  size  of   the
                                          pushdown list.

                   Q       Q       Q      Suppress   questionable   (Q)
                                          error   indications   on  the
                                          listing.

                           S              Suppress the listing.

                   T       T       T      Skip to the  logical  end  of
                                          the magnetic tape.

                           X              Suppress      all       macro
                                          expansions.

                           Z       Z      Zero the DECtape directory.

   ______________________________________________________________________

   The following are examples of the use of switches:

   Examples

        .DEBUG TEST(,N,)                   Suppress error message  during
                                           assembly.

        .COMPILE OUTPUT=MTA0:(M,W)/L       Rewind   the   magtape    (W),
                                           compile  the  first  file, and
                                           include the  MACRO  coding  in
                                           the  output  listing file (M).
                                           Output  files  are  given  the
                                           names      OUTPUT.REL      and
                                           OUTPUT.LST.

        .COMPILE/MACRO A=MTA0:(,Q,W)/L     Rewind   the   magtape    (W),
                                           compile  the  first  file, and
                                           suppress   Q    (questionable)
                                           error   indications   in   the
                                           listing.  When a binary switch


                                    C-10
                           COMPILE-CLASS COMMANDS


                                           is not present, the delimiting
                                           comma must appear.

        .COMPILE/MACRO A=MTA0:(,Q,)/L      Compile  the   file   at   the
                                           current  position  of the tape
                                           and    suppress    Q     error
                                           indications  on  the  listing.
                                           When  the  source  and  binary
                                           switches  are not present, the
                                           delimiting commas must appear.

        .COMPILE FOO (NOWARN DEBUG)        Compile  the  file  named  FOO
                                           using  the F10 source switches
                                           NOWARN and DEBUG.



   C.7  LINK SWITCHES

   One linking loader is available to you on TOPS-10:  the LINK  program.
   (See  the  TOPS-10 LINK Reference Manual for complete information.) In
   complex loading procedures, it might be necessary to pass switches  to
   LINK  to direct its operation.  The percent (%) character accomplishes
   this passing of switches.

   The LINK switch specification, preceded and followed by  a  delimiter,
   follows the % character.  The delimiter can be any character; however,
   you must be careful that  the  character  you  use  does  not  have  a
   specific  meaning  to  COMPIL.   The @ character indicates an indirect
   command file, and the semicolon (;) causes the remainder of  the  line
   to   be  treated  as  a  comment  and,  therefore,  is  ignored.   The
   recommended delimiter is a  single  or  double  quotation  mark.   The
   beginning and ending delimiter must be the same character.

   A LINK specification consists of the switch name  and,  optionally,  a
   keyword  and  a  value.   See TOPS-10 LINK Reference Manual for switch
   formats.

















                                    C-11
























































                                    D-1











                                 APPENDIX D

                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES



   D.1  FILE NAME EXTENSIONS

   Table D-1 lists the file name extensions that have  specific  meanings
   to TOPS-10.


   Table D-1:  File Name Extensions

   ______________________________________________________________________

     File Name
     Extension    Type of File                  Meaning
   ______________________________________________________________________

       ABS        Object           Absolute (nonrelocatable) program.
       AID        Source           Source file in AID language.
       ALG        Source           Source file in ALGOL language.
       ALP        ASCII            Printer forms alignment.
       ATO        ASCII            OPSER automatic command file.
       AWT        Binary           Data for automatic wire tester.
       B10        Source           Source file in BLISS-10.
       B11        Source           Source file in BLISS-11.
       B16        ASCII            Source file in BLISS-16.
       B32        ASCII            Source file in BLISS-32.
       B36        ASCII            Source file in BLISS-36.
       BAC        Object           Reserved for output from  the  BASIC
                                   compiler.
       BAK        Source           Backup file from TECO or SOS.
       BAS        Source           Source file in BASIC language.
       BCM        ASCII            Listing  file  created   by   FILCOM
                                   (binary compare).
       BCP        Source           Source file in BCPL language.
       BIN        Binary           Binary file.
       BLB        ASCII            Blurb file.
       BLI        Source           Source file in BLISS language.
       BUG        Object           Saved to show a program error.
       BWR        ASCII            Beware file listing warnings about a


                                    D-1
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


                                   file or program.





















































                                    D-2
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


       CAL        Object           CAL data and program files.
       CBL        Source           Source file in COBOL language.
       CCL        ASCII            Alternate  convention  for   command
                                   file  (@  command  file construction
                                   for programs other than COMPIL).
       CCO        ASCII            Listing    of    modifications    to
                                   nonresident software.
       CDP        ASCII, Binary    Spooled output for card punch.
       CFC        ASCII            Compressed file compare.   Group  of
                                   .SCM files combined with PIP.
       CKP        Binary           Checkpoint core image  file  created
                                   by COBOL operating system.
       CHN        Object           CHAIN file.
       CMD        ASCII            Command file for  indirect  commands
                                   (@ construction for COMPIL).
       CMP        ASCII            Complaint file by GRIPE.
       COR        ASCII            Correction file for SOUP.
       CRF        ASCII            CREF (cross-reference) input file.
       CTL        ASCII            Batch control file.
       DAE        Binary           Default output for DAEMON-taken core
                                   dumps.
       DAT        ASCII, Binary    Data (FORTRAN) file.
       DBS        Binary           Data  Base  Management  System  data
                                   file.
       DDT        ASCII            Input file to FILDDT.
       DCT        ASCII            Dictionary of words.
       DIR        ASCII            Directory  from  FILE   command   or
                                   DIRECT program.
       DMP        ASCII            COBOL compiler dump file.
       DOC        ASCII            Listing of modifications to the most
                                   recent version of the software.
       DRW        Binary           Drawing for VB10C drawing system.
       DSE        ASCII            Directory sorted by extension.
       DSF        ASCII            Directory sorted by file name.
       ERR        ASCII            Error message file.
       EXE        Object           Executable program.
       F4         Source           Source file in Fortran-40  (FORTRAN)
                                   language.
       FAI        Source           Source file in FAIL language.
       FFS        ASCII            Fast FORTRAN stream.
       FLO        ASCII            English language flowchart.
       FOR        Source           Source file in FORTRAN-10 language.
       FRM        ASCII            Blank form for handwritten records.
       FTP        Source           FORTRAN test programs.
       FUD        ASCII            FUDGE2 listing output.
       GND        ASCII            List of ground  pins  for  automatic
                                   wirewrap.
       HGH        Object           Nonsharable  high   segment   of   a
                                   two-segment program (created by SAVE
                                   command).
       HLP        ASCII            Help   files    containing    switch
                                   explanations, etc.


                                    D-3
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


       IDA        ASCII, Binary    COBOL ISAM data file.
       IDX        ASCII, SIXBIT    Index file of a COBOL ISAM file.
       INI        ASCII, Binary    Initialization file.
       LAP        ASCII            Output from the LISP compiler.
       LIB        ASCII            COBOL source library.
       LOG        ASCII            MPB or LINK-10 log file.
       LOW        Object           Low segment of a two-segment program
                                   (created by SAVE command).
       LPT        ASCII            Spooled output for line printer.
       LSD        ASCII            Default output for DUMP program.
       LSQ        ASCII            Queue  listing  created   by   QUEUE
                                   program.
       LST        ASCII            Listing data created  by  assemblers
                                   and compilers.
       MAC        Source           Source file in MACRO language.
       MAN        ASCII            Manual (documentation) file.
       MAP        ASCII            Loader or LINK-10 map file.
       MEM        ASCII            Memorandum  file  typically   output
                                   from RUNOFF.
       MIC        ASCII            MIC command file.
       MID        Source           Source file in MIDAS (MIT Assembler)
                                   language.
       MIM        Binary           Snapshot of MIMIC simulator.
       MSB        Object           Music compiler binary output.
       MUS        Source           Music compiler input.
       NEW        All              New version of a program or file.
       OBJ        Object           PDP-11 relocatable binary file.
       OLD        Source, Object   Backup source program.
       OPR        ASCII            Installation      and       assembly
                                   instructions.
       OVR        Object           COBOL overlay file.
       P11        Source           Source program in MACY11 language.
       PAK        ASCII            Files compressed by PACK.TEC to save
                                   disk space.
       PAL        Source           Source   file   in   PAL10    (PDP-8
                                   assembler).
       PAS        Source           Source file in Pascal language.
       PL1        Source           Source file in PL1 language.
       PLM        ASCII            Program Logic Manual.
       PLO        Binary           Compressed plot output.
       PLT        ASCII            Spooled output for plotter.
       PPL        Source           Source file in PPL language.
       PTP        ASCII, Binary    Spooled output for paper-tape punch.
       Qxx        ASCII            Edit backup  file,  like  .BAK  (all
                                   xx).
       QUD        ASCII, Binary    Queued data file.
       QUE        Binary           Queue request file.
       QUF        Binary           Master queue and request file.
       REL        Object           Relocatable binary file.
       RIM        Object           RIM loader file.




                                    D-4
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


       RMT        Object           Read-in  mode  (RIM)   format   file
                                   (PIP).
       RNB        ASCII            RUNOFF input for producting  a  .BLB
                                   file.
       RNC        ASCII            RUNOFF input for  producing  a  .CCO
                                   file.
       RND        ASCII            RUNOFF input for  producing  a  .DOC
                                   file.
       RNE        ASCII            RUNOFF input for error message text.
       RNH        ASCII            RUNOFF input for  producing  a  .HLP
                                   file.
       RNL        ASCII            RUNOFF  input  for   program   logic
                                   manual.
       RNM        ASCII            RUNOFF input for  producing  a  .MAN
                                   file.
       RNO        ASCII            Programming specifications in RUNOFF
                                   input to produce .MEM file.
       RNP        ASCII            RUNOFF input for  producing  a  .OPR
                                   file.
       RNS        ASCII            RUNOFF  input  for  text   file   of
                                   standards.
       RSP        ASCII            Script response time log file.
       RSX        All              Files for RSX-11D.
       RTB        Object           Read-in mode  (RIM10B)  format  file
                                   (PIP).
       SAI        Source           Source file in SAIL language.
       SCD        ASCII            Differences in directory.
       SCM        ASCII            Listing  file  created   by   FILCOM
                                   (source compare).
       SCP        ASCII            SCRIPT control file.
       SEQ        ASCII, SIXBIT    Sequential COBOL data file, input to
                                   ISAM program.
       SFD        Binary           Subfile directory (reserved usage).
       SIM        Source           Source file in SIMULA language.
       SMP        Source           Source file in SIMPLE language.
       SNO        Source           Source file in SNOBOL language.
       SNP        ASCII            Snapshot of disk by DSKLST.
       SOS        ASCII            SOS command file.
       SPC        ASCII            Corrected file for SPELL program.
       SPD        ASCII            Dictionary for SPELL program.
       SPM        ASCII            File of misspelled words  for  SPELL
                                   program.
       SPU        ASCII            File of upper case words  for  SPELL
                                   program.
       SPX        ASCII            File of exception (error) lines  for
                                   SPELL program.
       SRC        ASCII            Source files.
       STD        ASCII            Standards.
       SVE        Object           .SAVed  file  from  a  single   user
                                   monitor.
       SYM        Binary           LINK-10 symbol file.
       SYS        Binary           Special system files.


                                    D-5
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


       TEC        ASCII            TECO macro.
       TEM        ASCII, Binary    Temporary files.
       TMP        ASCII, Binary    Temporary files.
       TPB        ASCII            Typeset input for producing  a  .BLB
                                   file.
       TPC        ASCII            Typeset input for producing  a  .CCO
                                   file.
       TPD        ASCII            Typeset input for producing  a  .DOC
                                   file.
       TPE        ASCII            Typeset input  for  producing  error
                                   message text.
       TPH        ASCII            Typeset input for producing  a  .HLP
                                   file.
       TPL        ASCII            Typeset input for producing a  logic
                                   manual.
       TPM        ASCII            Typeset for producing a .MAN file.
       TPO        ASCII            Typeset  input   for   producing   a
                                   programming specification.
       TPP        ASCII            Typeset input for producing an  .OPR
                                   file.
       TST        All              Test data.
       TXT        ASCII            Text file.
       UFD        Binary           User   file   directory    (reserved
                                   usage).
       UPD        ASCII            Updates flagged in margin (FILCOM).
       VMX        Object           Expanded save  file  starting  at  a
                                   location  greater than zero and used
                                   as a  special  support  program  for
                                   virtual memory.
       WCH        ASCII            SCRIPT monitor (WATCH) file.
       WRL        ASCII            Wirelist.
       XOR        Binary           Module data for XOR tester.
       XPN        Object           Expanded  save   file   (FILEX   and
                                   LINK-10).
       Zxx        ASCII            Edit original file (all xx).
   ______________________________________________________________________


















                                    D-6
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


   D.2  RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS

   Table D-2 is  a  list  of  the  project-programmer  numbers  that  are
   allocated for specific functions in TOPS-10.


   Table D-2:  Project-Programmer Numbers

   ______________________________________________________________________

      Number                       Use of Number
   ______________________________________________________________________

        1,1       Master File Directory (MFD).
        1,2       Operator functions.
        1,3       Old or superseded versions of system programs (device
                  OLD:).
        1,4       System library (device SYS:).
        1,5       New  or  experimental  versions  of  system  programs
                  (device NEW:).
        1,6       User maintained library (device PUB:).
        1,7       System Accounting PPN.
        2,*       Recommended for operator's use.
        2,5       Storage for help text files (*.HLP) (device HLP:).
        3,3       System and Multiprogram Batch (MPB) queues.
        4,*       Test and performance analysis systems.
        4,4       FAILSAFE testing.
        4,5       FAILSAFE testing.
        5,*       Libraries.
        5,1       BASIC source library (device BAS:).
        5,2       COBOL source library for COPY verb (device COB:).
        5,3       PDP-11 source library (device MXI:).
        5,4       ALGOL source library (device ALG:).
        5,5       BLISS source library (device BLI:).
        5,6       FORTRAN source library (device FOR:).
        5,7       MACRO source library (device MAC:).
        5,10      Text editor library (device TED:).
        5,11      Rel file library (device REL:).
        5,12      RUNOFF library (device RNO:).
        5,13      SNOBOL library (device SNO:).
        5,14      Doc file library (device DOC:).
        5,15      FAIL library (device FAI:).
        5,16      MUSIC library (device MUS:).
        5,17      MACRO universal files (device UNV:).
        5,20      NELIAC (device NEL:).
        5,21      DUMP (device DMP:).
        5,22      POP2 (device POP:).
        5,23      Test library (device TST:).
        5,24      DBS library (device DBS:).
        5,25      MIC library (device MIC:).
        5,27      CTL library (device CTL:).
        5,30      Games library (device GAM:).


                                    D-7
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


        5,32      DAS60 software (device D60:).
        5,33      Users Test Package (device UTP:).
        5,36      LNO1 font library (device FNT:).
        6,*       Field service and hardware diagnostics.
        7,7       Software acceptance.
        10,1      Special system programming storage region  containing
                  copies of SYS:CRASH.EXE (device XPN:).
        10,6      Software distribution.
        10,7      Software distribution (device DEC:).
   ______________________________________________________________________












































                                    D-8
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


   D.3  ERSATZ DEVICE NAMES

   Table D-3 lists ersatz device names that are predefined in TOPS-10.

   To avoid confusion, it is recommended that these names not be used for
   private file structures.


   Table D-3:  Ersatz Device Names

   ______________________________________________________________________

     Name  Use                   UFD               Search List
   ______________________________________________________________________

     ACT:  Accounting library    [1,7]             System
     ALG:  ALGOL library         [5,4]             System
     ALL:                        User's            All currently
                                                   mounted structures
     APL:  APL library           [5,3]             System
     BAS:  BASIC library         [5,1]             System
     BLI:  BLISS library         [5,5]             System
     COB:  COBOL library         [5,2]             System
     CTL:  CTL library           [5,27]            System
     D60:  DAS60 software        [5,32]            System
     DBS:  DBS library           [5,24]            System
     DMP:  DUMP library          [5,21]            System
     DEC:  DEC-supplied          [10,7]            System
             software
     DOC:  DOC file library      [5,14]            System
     DSK:                        User's            Job
     FAI:  FAIL library          [5,15]            System
     FFA:  Operator's area       [1,2]             System
     FOR:  FORTRAN library       [5,6]             System
     FNT:  Fonts for LNO1        [5,36]            System
     GAM:  Games library         [5,30]            System
     HLP:  HELP library          [2,5]             System
     LIB:  User defined library  Set by each user  System
     MAC:  MACRO library         [5,7]             System
     MIC:  MIC library           [5,25]            System
     MFD:  UFD library           [1,1]             System
     MUS:  Music library         [5,16]            System
     MXI:  PDP-11 library        [5,3]             System
     NEL:  NELIAC library        [5,20]            System
     NEW:  New system library    [1,5]             System
     OLD:  Old system library    [1,3]             System
     POP:  POP2 library          [5,22]            System
     PUB:  User maintained       [1,6]             System
             library
     REL:  REL file library      [5,11]            System
     RNO:  RUNOFF library        [5,12]            System
     SNO:  SNOBOL library        [5,13]            System


                                    D-9
                           STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES


     SSL:  System Search List    [*,*]             System
     STD:  Standard Software     [1,4]             System
     SYS:  System library        [1,4]             System
     TED:  Text editor library   [5,10]            System
     TST:  Test library          [5,23]            System
     UMD:  Field Service library [6,6]             System
     UNV:  MACRO universal       [5,17]            System
             library
     UTP:  User's Test Package   [5,33]            System
     XPN:  Crash file library    [10,1]            System
   ______________________________________________________________________











































                                    D-10











                                 APPENDIX E

                                 CARD CODES



   Table E-1:  ASCII Card Codes

   ______________________________________________________________________

     ASCII        Octal    Card           ASCII        Octal   Card
     Character    Code     Punches        Character    Code    Punches
   ______________________________________________________________________

     NULL         00       12-0-9-8-1     @            100     8-4
     CTRL/A       01       12-9-1         A            101     12-1
     CTRL/B       02       12-9-2         B            102     12-2
     CTRL/C       03       12-9-3         C            103     12-3
     CTRL/D       04       9-7            D            104     12-4
     CTRL/E       05       0-9-8-5        E            105     12-5
     CTRL/F       06       0-9-8-6        F            106     12-6
     CTRL/G       07       0-9-8-7        G            107     12-7
     CTRL/H       10       11-9-6         H            110     12-8
     TAB          11       12-9-5         I            111     12-9
     LF           12       0-9-5          J            112     11-1
     VT           13       12-9-8-3       K            113     11-2
     FF           14       12-9-8-4       L            114     11-3
     CR           15       12-9-8-5       M            115     11-4
     CTRL/N       16       12-9-8-6       N            116     11-5
     CTRL/O       17       12-9-8-7       O            117     11-6
     CTRL/P       20       12-11-9-8-1    P            120     11-7
     CTRL/Q       21       11-9-1         Q            121     11-8
     CTRL/R       22       11-9-2         R            122     11-9
     CTRL/S       23       11-9-3         S            123     0-2
     CTRL/T       24       9-8-4          T            124     0-3
     CTRL/U       25       9-8-5          U            125     0-4
   ______________________________________________________________________


                                    NOTE

           The ASCII character ESCAPE (octal 33) is  also  CTRL-[
           on a terminal.


                                    E-1
                                 CARD CODES


   Table E-1: ASCII Card Codes (Cont.)
   ______________________________________________________________________

     ASCII        Octal    Card           ASCII        Octal   Card
     Character    Code     Punches        Character    Code    Punches
   ______________________________________________________________________

     CTRL/V       26       9-2            V            126     0-5
     CTRL/W       27       0-9-6          W            127     0-6
     CTRL/X       30       11-9-8         X            130     0-7
     CTRL/Y       31       11-9-8-1       Y            131     0-8
     CTRL/Z       32       9-8-7          Z            132     0-9
     ESCAPE       33       0-9-7          [            133     12-8-2
     CTRL-_       34       11-9-8-4       _            134     0-8-2
     CTRL-]       35       11-9-8-5       ]            135     11-8-2
     CTRL-_       36       11-9-8-6       _            136     11-8-7
     CTRL/        37       11-9-8-7       __           137     0-8-5
     SPACE        40                      ,            140     8-1
     !            41       12-8-7         a            141     12-0-1
     '            42       8-7            b            142     12-0-2
     _            43       8-3            c            143     12-0-3
     $            44       11-8-3         d            144     12-0-4
     %            45       0-8-4          e            145     12-0-5
     _            46       12             f            146     12-0-6
     '            47       8-5            g            147     12-0-7
     (            50       12-8-5         h            150     12-0-8
     )            51       11-8-5         i            151     12-0-9
     _            52       11-8-4         j            152     12-11-1
     +            53       12-8-6         k            153     12-11-2
     ,            54       0-8-3          l            154     12-11-3
     -            55       11             m            155     12-11-4
     _.           56       12-8-3         n            156     12-11-5
     /            57       0-1            o            157     12-11-6
     0            60       0              p            160     12-11-7
     1            61       1              q            161     12-11-8
     2            62       2              r            162     12-11-9
     3            63       3              s            163     11-0-2
     4            64       4              t            164     11-0-3
     5            65       5              u            165     11-0-4
     6            66       6              v            166     11-0-5
     7            67       7              w            167     11-0-6
     8            70       8              x            170     11-0-7
     9            71       9              y            171     11-0-8
     :            72       8-2            z            172     11-0-9
     ;            73       1-8-6          {            173     12-0
     <            74       12-8-4         |            174     12-11
     =            75       8-6            }            175     11-0
     >            76       0-8-6          ~            176     11-0-1
     ?            77       0-8-7          DEL          177     12-9-7
   ______________________________________________________________________




                                    E-2
                                 CARD CODES


                                    NOTE

           The ASCII characters } and ~ (octal 175 and  176)  are
           treated  by  the  monitor  as  ALTmode  which is often
           considered to be the same as ESCAPE.

















































                                    E-3
                                 CARD CODES


   Table E-2:  DEC-026 Card Codes

   ______________________________________________________________________

                Octal     Card                        Octal   Card
     Character  Code      Punches        Character    Code    Punches
   ______________________________________________________________________

     SPACE        40                                    100     8-4
     !            41        12-8-7            A         101     12-1
     '            42        0-8-5             B         102     12-2
     #            43        0-8-6             C         103     12-3
     $            44        11-8-3            D         104     12-4
     %            45        0-8-7             E         105     12-5
     &            46        11-8-7            F         106     12-6
     '            47        8-6               G         107     12-7
     (            50        0-8-4             H         110     12-8
     )            51        12-8-4            I         111     12-9
     *            52        11-8-4            J         112     11-1
     +            53        12                K         113     11-2
     ,            54        0-8-3             L         114     11-3
     -            55        11                M         115     11-4
     .            56        12-8-3            N         116     11-5
     /            57        0-1               O         117     11-6
     0            60        0                 P         120     11-7
     1            61        1                 Q         121     11-8
     2            62        2                 R         122     11-9
     3            63        3                 S         123     0-2
     4            64        4                 T         124     0-3
     5            65        5                 U         125     0-4
     6            66        6                 V         126     0-5
     7            67        7                 W         127     0-6
     8            70        8                 X         130     0-7
     9            71        9                 Y         131     0-8
     :            72        11-8-2/11-0       Z         132     0-9
     ;            73        0-8-2             [         133     11-8-5
     <            74        12-8-6            \         134     8-7
     =            75        8-3               ]         135     12-8-5
     >            76        11-8-6            ^         136     8-5
     ?            77        12-8-2/12-0       _         137     8-2
   ______________________________________________________________________


                                    NOTE

           Octal codes and 140-177 are the same as in ASCII.








                                    E-4











                                 APPENDIX F

                              TEMPORARY FILES



   The temporary files in Table F-1 are used by various programs  in  the
   DECsystem-10 computing system.  These files are in the following form:

        nnnxxx.TMP

   where nnn is the user's job number in decimal with leading  zeroes  to
   make three digits and xxx specifies the use of the file.


   Table F-1:  Temporary Files

   ______________________________________________________________________

       Name                                Meaning
   ______________________________________________________________________

     nnnALG.TMP        Read by ALGOL and contains  one  line  for  each
                       program to be compiled.  It may also contain the
                       command NAME!  that  causes  ALGOL  to  transfer
                       control to the named program.

     nnnAS1.TMP        Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
     nnnAS2.TMP        input to the COBOL assembler.
     nnnAS3.TMP

     nnnBL1.TMP        Read by BLISS and contains  one  line  for  each
                       program to be compiled.

     nnnCOB.TMP        Read by COBOL and contains  one  line  for  each
                       program to be compiled.  It may also contain the
                       command NAME!  which causes  COBOL  to  transfer
                       control to the named program.

     nnnCPY.TMP        Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
                       copies  of  source  files  with library routines
                       inserted.



                                    F-1
                              TEMPORARY FILES


     nnnCRE.TMP        Read by CREF and contains commands for each file
                       that  has  produced  a CREF listing on the disk.
                       COMPIL also reads this file each time a new CREF
                       listing   is   generated   to  prevent  multiple
                       requests  for  the  same  file  and  to  prevent
                       discarding  other requests that may not yet have
                       been listed.

     nnnDAE.TMP        Written by DAEMON to be read by DUMP.

     nnnDMP.TMP        Read by DUMP as an input command file.

     nnnEDS.TMP        Used by COMPIL to store  the  arguments  of  the
                       most recent EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or MAKE command.

     nnnEDT.TMP        Written by COMPIL and read by TECO.  It contains
                       a  command  for each EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or MAKE
                       command.  For the MAKE or  CREATE  commands,  it
                       contains the command

                            S file.ext [p,p] <ESC>

                       For TECO  or  EDIT  commands,  it  contains  the
                       command

                            S file.ext [p,p]

     nnnERA.TMP        Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and  is  the
                       error file.

     nnnFA1.TMP        Read by FAIL and  contains  one  line  for  each
                       program to be compiled.

     nnnFOR.TMP        Read by FORTRAN and contains one line  for  each
                       program to be compiled.  It may also contain the
                       command NAME!  which causes FORTRAN to  transfer
                       control to the named program.

     nnnGEN.TMP        Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
                       the output of syntax processing.

     nnnKJO.TMP        Read by KJOB as an input command file.

     nnnLGO.TMP        Read by LOGOUT as an input command file.

     nnnLHC.TMP        Created and read by  LINK-10  and  contains  the
                       overflow  of  the user's high segment.  The file
                       is used to produce core images or saved files.

     nnnLIT.TMP        Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains
                       copy of the literal pool.



                                    F-2
                              TEMPORARY FILES


     nnnLLC.TMP        Created and read by  LINK-10  and  contains  the
                       overflow  of  the user's low segment.  This file
                       is used to produce core images or saved files.

     nnnLLS.TMP        Created and read by  LINK-10  and  contains  the
                       overflow  of  the user's symbol file.  This file
                       is used to produce core images or saved files.

     nnnLNK.TMP        Read by LINK-10 and contains commands  necessary
                       for loading.

     nnnMAC.TMP        Read by MACRO and contains  one  line  for  each
                       program  to  be  assembled.  It may also contain
                       the  command  NAME!   which  causes   MACRO   to
                       transfer control to the named program.

     nnnP11.TMP        Read by MACY11 (the  PDP-11  assembler  for  the
                       PDP-10)  and  contains one line for each program
                       to be assembled.

     nnnPLS.TMP        Read by PLEASE as an input command file.

     nnnPIP.TMP        Read by PIP and contains commands  to  implement
                       the COMPIL-class commands that run PIP.

     nnnQUE.TMP        Read by QUEUE as an input command file.

     nnnRNO.TMP        Read by RUNOFF and contains  commands  for  each
                       file  which has produced a RUNOFF listing on the
                       disk.

     nnnS01.TMP        Written, read and deleted by COBOL and  contains
                       the intermediate sort results of the data.

     nnnSVC.TMP        Used by COMPIL to store  the  arguments  of  the
                       most  recent  COMPIL,  LOAD,  EXECUTE,  or DEBUG
                       command.

     nnnSNO.TMP        Read by SNOBOL and contains one  line  for  each
                       program to be compiled.

     nnnTEC.TMP        Created by TECO and contains output  file  until
                       the rename process.

     nnnXFO.TMP        Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch  on
                       the output side.

     nnnXFR.TMP        Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch  on
                       the input side.
   ______________________________________________________________________




                                    F-3
























































                                    G-1











                                 APPENDIX G

                        SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES





                        ASCII                   ASCII             ASCII
     SIXBIT  Character  7-Bit SIXBIT  Character 7-Bit  Character  7-Bit



       00     Space     040  |  40               100  |   `        140
       01       !       041  |  41       A       101  |   a        141
       02       "       042  |  42       B       102  |   b        142
       03       #       043  |  43       C       103  |   c        143
       04       $       044  |  44       D       104  |   d        144
       05       %       045  |  45       E       105  |   e        145
       06       &       046  |  46       F       106  |   f        146
       07       '       047  |  47       G       107  |   g        147

       10       (       050  |  50       H       110  |   h        150
       11       )       051  |  51       I       111  |   i        151
       12       *       052  |  52       J       112  |   j        152
       13       +       053  |  53       K       113  |   k        153
       14       ,       054  |  54       L       114  |   l        154
       15       -       055  |  55       M       115  |   m        155
       16       .       056  |  56       N       116  |   n        156
       17       /       057  |  57       O       117  |   o        157

       20       0       060  |  60       P       120  |   p        160
       21       1       061  |  61       Q       121  |   q        161
       22       2       062  |  62       R       122  |   r        162
       23       3       063  |  63       S       123  |   s        163
       24       4       064  |  64       T       124  |   t        164
       25       5       065  |  65       U       125  |   u        165
       26       6       066  |  66       V       126  |   v        166
       27       7       067  |  67       W       127  |   w        167

       30       8       070  |  70       X       130  |   x        170
       31       9       071  |  71       Y       131  |   y        171
       32       :       072  |  72       Z       132  |   z        172


                                    G-1
                        SIXBIT/ASCII CHARACTER CODES


       33       ;       073  |  73       [       133  |   {        173
       34       <       074  |  74       \       134  |   |        174
       35       =       075  |  75       ]       135  |   }        175
       36       >       076  |  76       ^       136  |   ~        176
       37       ?       077  |  77       _       137  | Delete     177

















































                                    G-2
                                        
























































                                    G-3
                                        


                                   INDEX



               -A-                     CCONTINUE command, 2-26
                                       Changing
   Access dates, 2-95                    accounts, 2-304
   ACCESS.USER file, 1-31                buffer number, 2-317
   Accessing                             nodes, 2-172, 2-329
     DECtapes, 2-128                     processors, 2-312
     devices, 2-200                      protection codes, 2-251
     files, 1-28, 1-31                 Checksum, 2-96
     the system, 2-174                 Clearing directories, 2-411
   ACCOUNT command, 2-5                CLOSE command, 2-30
   Allocating                          Closing files, 2-134
     devices, 2-6                      Combining
     resources, 2-6                      files, 2-45
   Alternate contexts, 1-5             Command
   ANF-10, 2-211, 2-213                  functions, A-1
     nodes, 2-329                        language interpreter, 1-3
     switch, 2-210                       user-defined, 2-86
   Arguments                           Command line
     command, 1-12                       continuing, 1-12
     date-time, 1-13                     editing, 1-6
   ASCII card codes, E-1                 ending, 1-12
   ASCII code, G-1                     Commands
   ASSIGN command, 1-22, 2-14            arguments, 1-12
   Assigning                             COMPILE-class, C-1
     core memory, 2-47                   ending, 1-12
     devices, 2-14                       options, 1-16
     logical names, 2-14, 2-200          privileged, 2-332
   Attaching jobs, 2-16, 2-286           switches, 1-16
   Authorizing users, 1-1                syntax, 1-11
   Available devices, 2-292              terminating, 1-4
                                         user-definable, 1-37
               -B-                     Comments, 1-17
                                       COMPILE command, 2-32
   Backing up files, 2-94              COMPILE-class commands, C-1
   BACKSPACE command, 2-22             Compiling programs, 2-32
   Batch, 1-3                          Configuring the system, 2-217
     controller, 2-367                 CONTINUE program, 2-43
     requests, 2-367                   Continuing
   BATCON, 2-367                         jobs, 2-156
   Binary files, 2-32, 2-136             programs, 2-26, 2-43
   Break points, 2-307                   terminal output, 1-9
   Buffers, 2-317                      Control
                                         characters, 1-6
               -C-                       files, 2-367
                                         sequences, 1-38
   Calling files, 1-18                 Copying files, 2-45
   Canceling terminal output, 1-9      Core
   Cancelling queue requests, 2-23       argument, 2-47


                                  Index-1
                                        


   Core (Cont.)                        DELETE
     assigning, 2-47                     command, 2-89
     examining, 2-119                    key, 1-6
     image files, 2-297                Deleting
   CORE command, 2-47                    characters, 1-6
   Correcting typing errors, 1-6         files, 2-89, 2-411
   CPU time limits, 2-340                lines, 1-7
   Creating                              words, 1-7
     core image files, 2-297           DEPOSIT command, 2-91
     queue entries, 2-239, 2-256,      Depositing
         2-367, 2-387                    bits, 2-91
     queue requests, 2-49, 2-225         data, 2-91
   CREF command, 2-60                    information, 2-91
   Cross-referenced listings, 2-60,    Detaching
       2-78, 2-122, 2-167                jobs, 2-16, 2-93, 2-286
   CSTART command, 2-63                  terminals, 2-93
   CTRL/C, 1-6, 2-140                  Device
   CTRL/O, 1-9                           errors, 2-156
   CTRL/Q, 1-9                           ersatz names, 1-25
   CTRL/R, 1-8                           generic names, 1-21
   CTRL/S, 1-9                           logical names, 1-22
   CTRL/T, 1-10, 2-403                   physical names, 1-22
   CTRL/U, 1-7                           user-defined names, 1-22
   CTRL/W, 1-7                         Devices
   Current virtual page limit, 2-352     accessing, 2-200
                                         allocating, 2-6
               -D-                       assigning, 2-14
                                         deassigning, 2-75, 2-134
   D command, 2-91                       disk, 1-22
   Date-time arguments, 1-13             dismounting, 2-108
   DAYTIME command, 2-66                 locating, 2-409
   DDT command, 2-67                     output, 1-20, 2-256
   Deallocating resources, 2-71          peripheral, 1-20
   Deassigning devices, 2-75, 2-134      reassigning, 2-284
   Debugging                             relinquishing, 2-71
     COBOL programs, 2-77                restricted, 2-14
     programs, 2-67, 2-77, 2-307         spooling, 2-182, 2-337
   DEC-026 card codes, E-4             Directories
   DECLARE command, 2-86                 clearing, 2-411
   DECnet, 2-213                         default, 1-35
     nodes, 2-330                        expunging, 2-411
     switch, 2-210                       master-file, 1-26
   DECtape                               specifying, 1-32
     accessing, 2-128                    sub-file, 1-26, 1-35
     delimiters, 2-161                   user-file, 1-26, 1-35
     files, 1-18                       Directory
     identifiers, 2-161                  areas, 1-1
     labelling, 2-161                    paths, 1-35
   Default                             DIRECTORY command, 2-94
     directories, 1-35                 Disabling privileges, 2-106
     for system, 1-31                  Disk
   Deferring spooled requests, 2-321     devices, 1-22


                                  Index-2
                                        


   Disk (Cont.)                        Files, 1-18
     I/O, 2-326                          accessing, 1-28, 1-31, 2-251
     overflow, 2-325                     backup, 2-94
     priority setting, 2-326             binary, 2-136
     quota, 2-325                        combining, 2-45
     usage statistics, 2-114             copying, 2-45
   Disk usage statistics, 2-181          DECtape, 1-18
   Dismounting devices, 2-108            deleting, 2-89, 2-411
   Displaying                            editing, 2-384
     files, 2-400                        find, 2-98
     queues, 2-362                       library, 2-136
     resources, 2-358                    listing, 2-163, 2-239
   DSK command, 2-114                    option, B-1
   DSK:, 1-34                            organizing, 1-35
                                         printing, 2-163, 2-239
               -E-                       protecting, 1-28, 2-237, 2-251,
                                             2-318
   E command, 2-119                      .REL, 2-136
   Editing                               renaming, 2-290
     command lines, 1-6                  specifying, 1-18, 1-31, 1-33
     files, 2-384                        structure, 1-22
   Enabling                              temporary, F-1
     DDT breakpoint facility, 2-314      transferring, 2-45
     privileges, 2-116                 Filler characters, 2-346
   End-of-file marks, 2-118            FINISH command, 2-134
   Ending                              Font control, 1-40
     commands, 1-12                    FUDGE command, 2-136
     jobs, 2-157
   Entering user level, 2-44, 2-141                -G-
   EOF command, 2-118
   Errors                              Generic device names, 1-21
     device, 2-156                     GET command, 2-138
     reporting, 2-336                  Global
   Ersatz devices, 1-25, D-9             switches, 1-16
   ESCape sequences, 1-38
   EXAMINE command, 2-119                          -H-
   Examining
     core, 2-119                       Halting programs, 2-140
     memory, 2-119                     HELP command, 2-142
   Executing programs, 2-121           High-priority run queue, 2-332
   Expunging directories, 2-411        Holding
                                         terminal output, 1-9
               -F-                     Host nodes, 2-217
    
   FENCE, 1-34                                     -I-
   File
     extensions, 1-26                  Information
     names, 1-26                         depositing, 2-91
     standard extensions, D-1            job, 1-10, 2-221, 2-354, 2-403
     structure, 1-34                     network, 2-217
   FILE command, 2-128                   obtaining, 2-142
   File Daemon, 1-31                     system, 2-380


                                  Index-3
                                        


   INITIA command, 2-147               Loading programs, 2-138, 2-165
   Initiating jobs, 2-174              Local switches, 1-16
   Input queues, 2-256                 LOCATE command, 2-172
   Interactive mode, 1-3               Locating devices, 2-409
   Interpreters, 1-3                   Log files, 2-367
   Interrupting programs, 1-6, 2-140   Logging
                                         in, 2-174
               -J-                       out, 2-157
                                       Logical
   JCONTINUE command, 2-156              device names, 1-22
   Job                                   names, 2-200
     data area, 2-288
     information, 2-221, 2-354,
         2-403                                     -M-
     number, 2-221
     search list, 1-34                 Master-file directories (MFD),
     statistics, 2-354                     1-26
     status, 1-10                      MCR, 2-217
   Jobs                                Memory
     attaching, 2-16, 2-286              examining, 2-119
     continuing, 2-156                   pages, 2-181, 2-183, 2-352
     detaching, 2-16, 2-286            Messages, 2-222, 2-301
     ending, 2-157                     MIC commands, 2-197
     initiating, 2-174                 Monitor, 1-1
     killing, 2-157                    Monitor level, 1-4, 1-6
     reattaching, 2-286                Mounting devices, 2-200
     starting, 2-174                   Moving tapes, 2-22, 2-364
     temporary, 2-16, 2-286
    
               -K-                                 -N-
    
   Killing                             Names
     jobs, 2-157                         device, 1-20
   KJOB command, 2-157                   directory, 1-26
                                         file, 1-26
               -L-                     Network
                                         information, 2-209, 2-217
   Labelling                           Node-id argument, 2-217
     DECtape, 2-161                    Nodes
     tapes, 2-8, 2-203                   changing, 2-172, 2-329
   Library
     files, 2-136
     system, D-9                                   -O-
   Line printer output, 2-163, 2-239
   Line-editing, 1-6                   Operator coverage, 2-299
   Lines                               OPR:, 2-301
     continuing, 1-12                  Optimizing FORTRAN programs, 2-81
     deleting, 1-7                     Option files, B-1
     reprinting, 1-8                   Output
   Listing                               devices, 1-20, 2-256
     files, 2-163                        queues, 2-256
   LN01 laser printer, 1-38              terminal, 2-400


                                  Index-4
                                        


               -P-                                 -Q-
    
                                       Queue
                                         cancelling requests, 2-23
   Page limit                            creating entries, 2-239, 2-256,
     physical, 2-181                         2-367, 2-387
   Pages                                 creating requests, 2-49, 2-225
     memory, 2-181, 2-183, 2-334,        deleting requests, 2-23
         2-352                           input, 2-256
     physical limit, 2-334               requests, 2-321
   Paging guidelines, 2-334              submitting requests, 2-367
   Paper tape punch queue, 2-387         terminating requests, 2-23
   Passwords, 1-3                      QUEUE command, 2-256
   Paths                               Quotas on disk, 2-325
     directory, 1-35
     specifying, 2-175                             -R-
   Peripheral devices, 1-20
   Permanent switches, 1-16            R command, 2-282
   Physical                            Reassigning devices, 2-284
     device names, 1-22                Reattaching jobs, 2-286
     page limit, 2-334                 Recalling file names, C-1
   Physical page limit, 2-181          REENTER command, 2-288
   PJOB command, 2-221                 Reinitializing programs, 2-288
   PLEASE command, 2-222               .REL files, 2-136
   Plotter output, 2-225               Relinquishing devices, 2-71
   PPNs, 1-3                           Renaming files, 2-290
   PRESERVE command, 2-237             Reprinting lines, 1-8
   Printing files, 2-163, 2-239        Request-type argument, 2-23
   Privileged commands, 2-312, 2-326,  Reserved PPNs, 1-3, D-7
       2-332                           RESOURCES command, 2-292
   Processor                           Restarting programs, 2-288
     changing, 2-312                   Restricted devices, 1-23, 2-14
   Program level, 1-4                  Rewinding tape, 2-293
   Programs                            RUBOUT key, 1-6
     compiling, 2-32                   RUN command, 2-294
     continuing, 2-26                  Run time, 2-340, 2-385
     debugging, 2-67, 2-77             Running
     executing, 2-121                    programs, 1-4, 2-121, 2-294
     halting, 2-140                      system programs, 2-282
     interrupting, 1-6
     loading, 2-138, 2-165                         -S-
     reinitializing, 2-288
     restarting, 2-288                 SAVE command, 2-297
     running, 1-4, 2-121, 2-294        Schedule bits, 2-299
     starting, 2-26, 2-63, 2-294,      Search list
         2-365                           specifying, 2-182
     stopping, 2-140                   Sending messages, 2-222, 2-301
   Project-programmer numbers, 1-1     SESSION command, 2-304
   Prompts, 1-4                        SET BLOCKSIZE command, 2-306
   Protection codes, 1-28, 2-251       SET BREAK command, 2-307
   PUNCH command, 2-253                SET CDR command, 2-311
   Punching cards, 2-49                SET CPU command, 2-312


                                  Index-5
                                        


   SET DDT BREAKPOINT command, 2-314   Starting (Cont.)
   SET DEFAULT BIGBUF command, 2-316     jobs, 2-174
   SET DEFAULT BUFFERS command,          programs, 2-26, 2-63, 2-294,
       2-317                                 2-365
   SET DEFAULT PROTECTION command,     Statistics on jobs, 2-354
       2-318                           Stopping
   SET DEFER command, 2-321              execution, 2-140
   SET DENSITY command, 2-324            terminal output, 1-9
   SET DSKFUL command, 2-325           Sub-file directories (SFD), 1-26,
   SET DSKPRI command, 2-326               1-35
   SET FORMAT command, 2-328           SUBMIT command, 2-367
   SET HOST command, 2-329             Suppressing terminal output, 1-9
   SET HOST command restriction,       Switch format, 1-16
       2-330                           SWITCH.INI files, B-1
   SET HPQ command, 2-332              SYSTAT command, 2-380
   SET PHYSICAL command, 2-334         System
   SET RETRY command, 2-336              configuration, 2-217
   SET SPOOL command, 2-337              defaults, 1-31
   SET TERMINAL command, 2-339           information, 2-380
   SET TIME command, 2-340               libraries, 1-25, D-9
   SET TTY command, 2-342                programs, 2-282
   SET VIRTUAL LIMIT command, 2-352      schedule, 2-299
   SET WATCH command, 2-354              standard names, D-1
   Setting                               status, 2-380
     break points, 2-307                 storage, 1-18
     card reader, 2-311
     disk buffer size, 2-316                       -T-
     disk priority, 2-326
     tape blocksize, 2-306             Tape
     tape density, 2-324                 drive controller, 2-336
     tape mode, 2-328                    error reporting, 2-336
     terminal characteristics, 2-342     setting blocksize, 2-306
   SHOW ALLOCATION command, 2-358        setting density, 2-324
   SHOW QUEUES command, 2-362          Tapes
   SIXBIT code, 1-33, G-1                labelling, 2-8, 2-203
   SKIP command, 2-364                   moving, 2-22
   Spacing tapes, 2-22                   spacing, 2-22
   Specifying                            unloading, 2-402
     directories, 1-32                 TECO command, 2-384
     files, 1-18, 1-31, 1-33           Temporary
     paths, 2-175                        files, F-1
     search lists, 2-182                 jobs, 2-16, 2-286
   Spooling devices, 2-182               switches, 1-16
   SSAVE command, 2-297                Terminal
   Standard                              attributes, 2-147
     compilers, 2-32                     characteristics, 2-147
     file extensions, D-1                number, 2-221
     system names, D-1                   output, 1-9
   START command, 2-365                  setting characteristics, 2-342
   Starting                              types, 2-342
     batch jobs, 2-367                 Terminating
     execution, 2-294, 2-365             commands, 1-4


                                  Index-6
                                        


   Terminating (Cont.)                 User level, 1-4, 2-141
     I/O, 2-30, 2-134                  User-defined
     queue requests, 2-23                commands, 1-37, 2-86
   TIME command, 2-385                   device names, 1-22
   Topology                            User-file directories (UFD), 1-26,
     ANF-10 network, 2-214                 1-35
     DECnet-10 network, 2-214          USESTAT command, 2-403
   TOPS-10, 1-1
   TPUNCH command, 2-387                           -V-
   Transferring files, 2-45
   TRANSLATE command, 2-399            VERSION command, 2-405
   TYPE command, 2-400                 Virtual page limit, 2-183
   Type-ahead, 1-11
                                                   -W-
               -U-
                                       WHERE command, 2-409
   UFD, 1-35                           Wildcards, 1-31
   Unloading tapes, 2-402
   Usage statistics                                -Z-
     disk, 2-181
   Usage statistics on disk, 2-114     ZERO command, 2-411

































                                  Index-7